COMBINATION THERAPY FOR C3 INHIBITION
In some aspects, the present invention provides certain combination therapies comprising compstatin analogs.
Latest Apellis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Patents:
This application claims benefit under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/409,357 filed Oct. 17, 2016, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
BACKGROUNDComplement is a system consisting of more than 30 plasma and cell-bound proteins that plays a significant role in both innate and adaptive immunity. The proteins of the complement system act in a series of enzymatic cascades through a variety of protein interactions and cleavage events. Complement activation occurs via three main pathways: the antibody-dependent classical pathway, the alternative pathway, and the mannose-binding lectin (MBL) pathway. Inappropriate or excessive complement activation is an underlying cause or contributing factor to a number of serious diseases and conditions, and considerable effort has been devoted over the past several decades to exploring various complement inhibitors as therapeutic agents.
SUMMARYComplement component C3 (“C3”) occupies a central position in the three major complement activation pathways. There are a number of potential approaches to targeting C3 for therapeutic purposes. For example, compstatin analogs are a class of compounds that comprise cyclic peptides that bind to C3 and inhibit its cleavage, thereby preventing production of biologically active cleavage products C3a and C3b as well as preventing formation of C3 convertase and the downstream portions of the complement activation cascade. Another approach to inhibiting C3 is to inhibit its expression through the use of inhibitory nucleic acid agents (INAAs) such as short interfering RNA (siRNA) and antisense oligonucleotides (ASOs). The present disclosure provides the recognition that treatment of complement-mediated disorders using inhibitory nucleic acid agents designed to inhibit C3 expression has significant limitations. Even if high levels of transcript degradation or translational repression are achieved, sufficient C3 may still be produced to cause significant deleterious complement-mediated effects. In addition, therapeutic application of INAAs has focused chiefly on inhibiting expression of proteins produced by the liver, as systemic delivery of INAAs to organs other than the liver has proven challenging. While the liver is the source of most C3 in the body, C3 can also be produced outside the liver by a variety of cell types. Extrahepatic production of C3 may contribute to limiting the ability of a systemically administered INAA to inhibit C3 at the level that would be desirable for a variety of therapeutic purposes.
In some aspects, the invention provides and/or relates to inhibiting complement activation using certain long-acting compstatin analogs in combination with inhibitory nucleic acid agents (INAAs) that inhibit expression of C3. For example, the invention provides and/or relates to methods comprising administering such long-acting compstatin analogs and inhibitory nucleic acid agents (INAAs) that inhibit expression of C3 to subjects in need thereof, compositions comprising them, and methods of making, identifying, characterizing, and/or using such compositions. In some aspects, the invention provides and/or relates to physiologically acceptable compositions that comprise and/or deliver one or both of a long-acting compstatin analog and an INAA that inhibits expression of C3. In some aspects, the invention provides and/or relates to pharmaceutical grade compositions that comprise and/or deliver one or both of a long-acting compstatin analog and an INAA that inhibits expression of C3. In some aspects, the invention provides and/or relates to a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprising one or more doses of a long-acting compstatin analog and one or more doses of an INAA that inhibits expression of C3. Among other things, in some aspects, the present disclosure describes particularly useful long-acting compstatin analogs and INAAs that inhibit C3 expression, their use in combination, and, furthermore provides particular doses, dose formats, dosing regimens, unit dose compositions, and other technologies relating to combination therapy with long-acting compstatin analogs and INAAs that inhibit C3 expression, to human subjects, for example to particular human subjects e.g., suffering from and/or susceptible to one or more certain diseases, disorders or conditions.
In some aspects, the invention provides methods of treating a subject in need of treatment for a complement-mediated disorder, which methods may comprise administering a long-acting compstatin analog and an INAA that inhibits C3 expression to the subject using particular doses, dose formats (e.g., unit dose compositions and/or particular formulations) and/or dosing regimens (e.g., routes of administration, timing of doses, etc., in some embodiments as determined to be particularly desirable for treatment of certain diseases, disorders, or conditions).
In some embodiments, a complement-mediated disorder to be treated in accordance with the present disclosure is paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria (PNH), atypical hemolytic uremic syndrome (aHUS), or another disorder associated with complement-mediated hemolysis. In some embodiments the disorder is an inflammatory disorder affecting the central nervous system (CNS). For example, in some embodiments the disorder is neuromyelitis optica (NMO). In some embodiments the disorder is myasthenia gravis (MG), e.g., refractory MG (rMG). In some embodiments the disorder affects the kidney. For example, in some embodiments the disorder is membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis or lupus nephritis. In some embodiments the disorder is ischemia/reperfusion (I/R) injury (e.g., due to myocardial infarction, thromboembolic stroke, or surgery. In some embodiments, the disorder is trauma. In some embodiments, the disorder is transplant rejection. In some embodiments the disorder is a chronic respiratory disorder, e.g., asthma or COPD or idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis.
All articles, books, patent applications, patents, other publications, websites, and databases mentioned in this application are incorporated herein by reference. In the event of a conflict between the specification and any of the incorporated references the specification (including any amendments thereto) shall control. Unless otherwise indicated, art-accepted meanings of terms and abbreviations are used herein. The practice of certain aspects described herein may employ conventional techniques of molecular biology, cell culture, recombinant nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) technology, immunology, and/or nucleic acid and polypeptide synthesis, detection, manipulation, and quantification, etc., that are within the ordinary skill of the art. See, e.g., Ausubel, F., et al., (eds.), Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Current Protocols in Immunology, Current Protocols in Protein Science, and Current Protocols in Cell Biology, all John Wiley & Sons, N.Y., e.g., edition current as of January 2010 or later; Sambrook, Russell, and Sambrook, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 3rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, 2001 or 4th ed, 2012.
The terms “approximately” or “about” in reference to a number generally include numbers that fall within ±10%, in some embodiments ±5%, in some embodiments ±1%, in some embodiments ±0.5% of the number unless otherwise stated or otherwise evident from the context (except where such number would impermissibly exceed 100% of a possible value).
As used herein, the term “combination therapy” refers to those situations in which a subject is simultaneously exposed to two or more therapeutic regimens (e.g., two or more therapeutic agents). In some embodiments, the two or more regimens may be administered simultaneously; in some embodiments, such regimens may be administered sequentially (e.g., all “doses” of a first regimen are administered prior to administration of any doses of a second regimen); in some embodiments, such agents are administered in overlapping dosing regimens. In some embodiments, “administration” of combination therapy may involve administration of one or more agent(s) or modality(ies) to a subject receiving the other agent(s) or modality(ies) in the combination. For clarity, combination therapy does not require that individual agents be administered together in a single composition (or even necessarily at the same time), although in some embodiments, two or more agents, or active moieties thereof, may be administered together in a combination composition, or even in a combination compound (e.g., as part of a single chemical complex or covalent entity).
A “complement component” or “complement protein” is a protein that is involved in activation of the complement system or participates in one or more complement-mediated activities. Components of the classical complement pathway include, e.g., C1q, C1r, C1s, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, and the C5b-9 complex, also referred to as the membrane attack complex (MAC) and active fragments or enzymatic cleavage products of any of the foregoing (e.g., C3a, C3b, C4a, C4b, C5a, etc.). Components of the alternative pathway include, e.g., factors B, D, and properdin. Components of the lectin pathway include, e.g., MBL2, MASP-1, and MASP-2. Complement components also include cell-bound receptors for soluble complement components, wherein such receptor mediates one or more biological activities of such soluble complement component following binding of the soluble complement component. Such receptors include, e.g., C5a receptor (C5aR), C3a receptor (C3aR), Complement Receptor 1 (CR1), Complement Receptor 2 (CR2), Complement Receptor 3 (CR3, also known as CD45), etc. It will be appreciated that the term “complement component” is not intended to include those molecules and molecular structures that serve as “triggers” for complement activation, e.g., antigen-antibody complexes, foreign structures found on microbial or artificial surfaces, etc.
A “complement-mediated disorder” is any disorder in which complement activation is known or suspected of being a contributing and/or at least partially causative factor in at least some subjects suffering from the disorder, e.g., disorders in which complement activation results in tissue damage. Non-limiting examples of complement-mediated disorders include, but are not limited to, (i) various disorders characterized by hemolysis or hemolytic anemia such as atypical hemolytic uremic syndrome, cold agglutinin disease, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria, transfusion reactions; (ii) transplant rejection (e.g., hyperacute or acute transplant rejection) or transplant dysfunction; (iii) disorders involving ischemia/reperfusion injury such as trauma, surgery (e.g., aneurysm repair), myocardial infarction, ischemic stroke; (iv) disorders of the respiratory system such as asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD); (v) arthritis, e.g., rheumatoid arthritis; (vi) ocular disorders such as age-related macular degeneration (AMD), diabetic retinopathy, glaucoma, and uveitis. “Disorder” is used interchangeably herein with “disease”, “condition”, and similar words to refer to any impairment of health or state of abnormal functioning of an organism, e.g., any state in which medical and/or surgical management is indicated or for which a subject appropriately seeks medical and/or surgical attention. It should also be understood that the listing of a particular disorder within a particular category is for convenience and is not intended to limit the invention. It will be understood that certain disorders could appropriately be listed in multiple categories.
A “complement regulatory protein” is a protein involved in regulating complement activity. A complement regulatory protein may down-regulate complement activity by, e.g., inhibiting complement activation or by inactivating or accelerating decay of one or more activated complement proteins. Examples of complement regulatory proteins include C1 inhibitor, C4 binding protein, clusterin, vitronectin, CFH, factor I, and the cell-bound proteins CD46, CD55, CD59, CR1, CR2, and CR3.
“Complementary” is used herein in accordance with its art-accepted meaning to refer to the capacity for precise pairing between particular bases, nucleosides, nucleotides or nucleic acids. For example, adenine (A) and uridine (U) are complementary; adenine (A) and thymidine (T) are complementary; and guanine (G) and cytosine (C), are complementary and are referred to in the art as Watson-Crick base pairings. If a nucleotide at a certain position of a first nucleic acid sequence is complementary to a nucleotide located opposite in a second nucleic acid sequence when the strands are aligned in anti-parallel orientation, the nucleotides form a complementary base pair, and the nucleic acids are complementary at that position. The percent complementarity of a first nucleic acid to a second nucleic acid may be evaluated by aligning them in antiparallel orientation for maximum complementarity over a window of evaluation, determining the total number of nt in both strands that form complementary base pairs within the window, dividing by the total number of nt within the window, and multiplying by 100. For example, AAAAAAAA and TTTGTTAT are 75% complementary since there are 12 nt in complementary base pairs out of a total of 16 nt. When computing the number of complementary nt needed to achieve a particular % complementarity, fractions are rounded to the nearest whole number. A position occupied by non-complementary nucleotides constitutes a mismatch, i.e., the position is occupied by a non-complementary base pair. In certain embodiments a window of evaluation has the length described herein for duplex portions or target portions. Complementary sequences include base-pairing of a polynucleotide comprising a first nucleotide sequence to a polynucleotide comprising a second nucleotide sequence over the entire length of both nucleotide sequences (if the same length) or over the entire length of the shorter sequence (if different lengths). Such sequences can be referred to as “perfectly complementary” (100% complementarity) with respect to each other herein. Nucleic acids that are at least 70% complementary over a window of evaluation are considered “substantially complementary” over that window. In certain embodiments complementary nucleic acids are at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, or at least 95% complementary over the window of evaluation. Where a first sequence is referred to as “substantially complementary” with respect to a second sequence herein, the two sequences may be perfectly complementary or they may comprise one or more unmatched bases upon hybridization, e.g., up to about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, or 25% unmatched bases upon hybridization, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 mismatched base pairs upon hybridization for a duplex up to 30 base pairs, while retaining the ability to hybridize under the conditions most relevant to their intended use. It should be understood that where two oligonucleotides are designed to form, upon hybridization, one or more single stranded overhangs, such overhangs are not regarded as mismatches or unpaired nucleotides with regard to the determination of percent complementarity. For example, the two strands of a dsRNA comprising one oligonucleotide 21 nucleotides in length and another oligonucleotide 23 nucleotides in length, wherein the longer oligonucleotide comprises a sequence of 21 nucleotides that is perfectly complementary to the shorter oligonucleotide and a 2 nucleotide overhang, may be referred to as “perfectly complementary” herein. “Complementary” sequences, as used herein may include one or more non-Watson-Crick base pairs and/or base pairs formed from non-natural and other modified nucleotides, in so far as the requirements with respect to their ability to hybridize are fulfilled. Such non-Watson-Crick base pairs include, but are not limited to, G:U Wobble or Hoogsteen base pairing. Those of ordinary skill in the art are aware that guanine, cytosine, adenine, and uracil can be replaced by other bases without substantially altering the base pairing properties of a polynucleotide comprising a nucleotide bearing such bases, according to the so-called “wobble” rules (see, e.g., Murphy, F V IV & V Ramakrishnan, V., Nature Structural and Molecular Biology 11: 1251-1252 (2004)). For example, a nucleotide comprising inosine as its base can base pair with nucleotides containing adenine, cytosine, or uracil. Thus, nucleotides containing uracil, guanine, or adenine can be replaced in the nucleotide sequences of an INAA described herein by a nucleotide containing, for example, inosine. It will be understood that the terms “complementary”, “perfectly complementary”, and “substantially complementary” can be used with respect to the base matching between any two nucleic acids, e.g., the base matching between the sense strand and the antisense strand of a dsRNA, or between the antisense strand of a ds INAA (e.g., a ds RNAi agent) and a target sequence, or between an antisense oligonucleotide and a target sequence, as will be evident from the context. “Hybridize”, as used herein, refers to the interaction between two nucleic acid sequences comprising or consisting of complementary portions such that a duplex structure is formed that is stable under the particular conditions of interest, as will be understood by the ordinary skilled artisan.
“Inhibitory nucleic acid agent” (INAA) refers to an agent comprising a nucleic acid that inhibits expression of a target gene. To “inhibit expression of a target gene” means to reduce the level at which a functional gene product is produced using information from the gene. Expression includes the step of transcription and, as relevant, RNA splicing, translation, and post-translational modification. An INAA may inhibit any one or more of these steps. In embodiments of particular interest herein, an INAA inhibits expression of a target gene by promoting degradation of RNA transcribed from the gene or repressing translation of RNA transcribed from the gene. As used herein, “RNA transcribed from a gene” refers to primary RNA transcripts (pre-mRNA) as well as RNAs generated by post-transcriptional processing, e.g., messenger RNA (mRNA).
“Isolated”, as used herein, means 1) separated from at least some of the components with which it is usually associated in nature; 2) prepared or purified by a process that involves the hand of man; and/or 3) not occurring in nature, e.g., present in an artificial environment. In general, unless otherwise indicated or clearly evident, any entity, product, agent, composition, etc., may be deemed “isolated”, if desired.
“Linked”, as used herein with respect to two or more moieties, means that the moieties are physically associated or connected with one another to form a molecular structure that is sufficiently stable so that the moieties remain associated under the conditions in which the linkage is formed and, preferably, under the conditions in which the new molecular structure is used, e.g., physiological conditions. In certain preferred embodiments of the invention the linkage is a covalent linkage. In other embodiments the linkage is noncovalent. Moieties may be linked either directly or indirectly. When two moieties are directly linked, they are either covalently bonded to one another or are in sufficiently close proximity such that intermolecular forces between the two moieties maintain their association. When two moieties are indirectly linked, they are each linked either covalently or noncovalently to a third moiety, which maintains the association between the two moieties. In general, when two moieties are referred to as being linked by a “linking moiety” or “linking portion”, the linkage between the two linked moieties is indirect, and typically each of the linked moieties is covalently bonded to the linking moiety. Two moieties may be linked using a “linker”. A linker can be any suitable moiety that reacts with the entities to be linked within a reasonable period of time, under conditions consistent with stability of the entities (portions of which may be protected as appropriate, depending upon the conditions), and in sufficient amount, to produce a reasonable yield. Typically the linker will contain at least two functional groups, one of which reacts with a first entity and the other of which reacts with a second entity. It will be appreciated that after the linker has reacted with the entities to be linked, the term “linker” may refer to the part of the resulting structure that originated from the linker, or at least the portion that does not include the reacted functional groups. A linking moiety may comprise a portion that does not participate in a bond with the entities being linked, and whose main purpose may be to spatially separate the entities from each other. Such portion may be referred to as a “spacer”.
“Nucleic acid” is used interchangeably with “polynucleotide” and encompasses polymers of nucleotides. “Oligonucleotide” refers to a relatively short nucleic acid, e.g., typically between about 4 and about 100 nucleotides (nt) long, e.g., between 8-60 nt or between 10-40 nt long. Nucleotides include ribonucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides, and modified nucleotides. A “modified nucleotide” refers to a molecule having, independently, a modified sugar moiety, a modified internucleoside linkage (or portion thereof), and/or a modified nucleobase, where “modified” in this context means that the sugar, linkage, or nucleobase differs from the standard sugar, linkage, or nucleobases found in naturally occurring mammalian mRNA. Modified nucleotides as used herein encompass molecules in which one or more of the components of a nucleotide, namely sugars, bases, and phosphate moieties, are different from that which occur in nature. Thus, the term modified nucleotide encompasses substitutions, additions, or removal of, e.g., a functional group or atom, to internucleoside linkages, sugar moieties, or nucleobases. In some embodiments a nucleic acid comprises or consists of DNA or RNA. In some embodiments a nucleic acid comprises only standard nucleobases (often referred to simply as “bases”) (as opposed to including both standard and non-standard nucleobases). The standard bases are cytosine, guanine, adenine (which are found in DNA and RNA), thymine (which is found in DNA) and uracil (which is found in RNA), abbreviated as C, G, A, T, and U, respectively (which abbreviations may also be used to refer to nucleosides or nucleotides incorporating the respective base). In some embodiments a nucleic acid may comprise one or more non-standard nucleobases, which may be naturally occurring or not naturally occurring (i.e., artificial; not found in nature). In some embodiments a nucleic acid may comprise modified bases (e.g., alkylated (e.g., methylated) bases), modified sugars (e.g., 2′-O-alkyribose (e.g., 2′-O-methylribose), 2′-fluororibose, arabinose, or hexose), modified phosphate groups (e.g., phosphorothioates or 5′-N-phosphoramidite linkages). Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as deoxythymine (dT), 5-methylcytosine (5-me-C), 5-hydroxymethyl cytosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine and 2-thiocytosine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-thioalkyl, 8-hydroxyl anal other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-halo, particularly 5-bromo, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine and 7-methyladenine, 8-azaguanine and 8-azaadenine, 7-deazaguanine and 7-daazaadenine and 3-deazaguanine and 3-deazaadenine, 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and O-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil, 5-propynylcytosine, and 5-methylcytosine. Further nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, those disclosed in Modified Nucleosides in Biochemistry, Biotechnology and Medicine, Herdewijn, P. ed. Wiley-VCH, 2008; those disclosed in The Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science And Engineering, pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, J. L, ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990, these disclosed by Englisch et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613, and those disclosed by Sanghvi, Y S., Chapter 15, dsRNA Research and Applications, pages 289-302, Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., Ed., CRC Press, 1993. In some embodiments a nucleic acid comprises subunits (residues) that are linked by phosphodiester bonds. In some embodiments, at least some subunits of a nucleic acid are linked by a non-phosphodiester bond or other non-phosphodiester backbone structure between consecutive nucleosides, e.g., between the 3′ carbon atom of one sugar molecule and the 5′ carbon atom of another), such as phosphorothioates, 5′-N-phosphoramidites, phosphonates, alkylphosphonates, phosphorodithioates, phosphate esters, alkylphosphonothioates, phosphoramidates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, boranophosphates. carbamates, carbonates, phosphate triesters, acetamidates, carboxymethyl esters, and peptide bonds. In some embodiments a non-phosphorus containing linkage may be used. Such backbones may comprise alkyl or cycloalkyl inter-sugar linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl inter-sugar linkages, or one or more heteroatomic or heterocyclic inter-sugar linkages, morpholino linkages (formed in part from the sugar portion of a nucleoside); poly(ether-thioether), poly(ether-sulfoxide) or poly(ether-sulfone) siloxane backbones; sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones; formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones. Exemplary phosphorus containing non-phosphodiester linkages and non-phosphorus containing linkages and methods of making and use thereof are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,348,583 and 8,163,477 and U.S. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20090318676 and references in any of the foregoing. In some embodiments a modified nucleotide has a moiety (e.g., a targeting moiety) covalently attached thereto. In some embodiments the moiety or a functional group to which a label can be attached is incorporated or attached to a base. In some embodiments the attachment is at a position that is not involved in Watson-Crick base pairing, such that a modification at that position will not significantly interfere with hybridization. For example the C-5 position of UTP and dUTP is not involved in Watson-Crick base-pairing and is a useful site for modification or attachment of a moiety. A nucleic acid subunit comprising a modified sugar, modified base, or non-phosphodiester backbone linkage may be referred to as a “modified nucleotide” for purposes of the present disclosure, and it should be understood that any nucleotide of a nucleic acid may be a modified nucleotide. A “modified nucleic acid” is a nucleic acid characterized in that (1) at least two of its nucleosides are covalently linked via a non-standard internucleoside linkage (i.e., a linkage other than a phosphodiester linkage between the 5′ end of one nucleotide and the 3′ end of another nucleotide); (2) it incorporates one or more modified nucleotides (which may comprise a modified base, sugar, or phosphate); and/or (3) a chemical group not normally associated with nucleic acids in nature has been covalently attached to the nucleic acid. A nucleic acid may be linear or circular in various embodiments. A nucleic acid may be single-stranded, double-stranded, or partially double-stranded in various embodiments. An at least partially double-stranded nucleic acid may be blunt-ended or may have one or more overhangs, e.g., 5′ and/or 3′ overhang(s). One or more nucleic acid modifications (e.g., base, sugar, and/or backbone modifications), non-standard nucleotides or nucleosides, etc., may be present in a nucleic acid. Such modifications may, for example, increase stability (e.g., by reducing sensitivity to cleavage by nucleases), decrease clearance in vivo, increase cell uptake, or confer other properties that improve the potency, efficacy, specificity, or otherwise render the nucleic acid more suitable for an intended use. Various non-limiting examples of nucleic acid modifications and methods of synthesizing and modifying nucleic acids or nucleotides (including modified nucleotides) are described in Crooke, S T (ed.) Antisense drug technology: principles, strategies, and applications, Boca Raton: CRC Press, 2008; Kurreck, J. (ed.) Therapeutic oligonucleotides, RSC biomolecular sciences. Cambridge: Royal Society of Chemistry, 2008; Egli, M., et al. (eds.), Current protocols in nucleic acid chemistry, Wiley (1999-2016) (e.g., Deleavey G F, et al., Chemical modification of siRNA. Current protocols in nucleic acid chemistry 39:16.3.1-16.3.22 (2009)); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,469,863; 5,536,821; 5,541,306; 5,637,683; 5,637,684; 5,700,922; 5,717,083; 5,719,262; 5,739,308; 5,773,601; 5,886,165; 5,929,226; 5,977,296; 6,140,482; 6,455,308, 6,403,779; 6,399,754; 6,225,460; 6,127,533; 6,031,086; 6,005,087; 5,977,089, US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20090203135, and/or in PCT application publications WO 00/56746 and WO 01/14398 and other references cited herein or cited in references cited herein. A nucleic acid may be modified uniformly or on only a portion thereof and/or may contain multiple different modifications. Different modifications may be used in the two strands of a double-stranded nucleic acid. It will further be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that nucleic acid agents for use in accordance with the present disclosure may comprise one or more moieties that is/are not nucleotides or nucleotide analogs. It will be appreciated that the terms “nucleic acid sequence” and “target sequence” as used herein can refer to the nucleic acid material itself and not just the sequence information (e.g., the succession of letters chosen among the five letters A, G, C, T, or U that stand for nucleotides that contains the bases adenine, guanine, cytosine, thymine, and uracil, respectively) that biochemically characterizes a specific nucleic acid molecule.
As used herein, “physiological conditions” refers to a set of conditions such as temperature, salt concentration, pH that at least in part mimic those conditions as typically found in a living subject, e.g., a mammalian subject. In some aspects, physiological conditions refer to conditions in an aqueous medium, e.g., a medium comprising at least 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 97%, 99%, or about 100% water on a volume/volume basis. In some embodiments other liquids, if present, do not substantially affect protein secondary or tertiary structure. In some embodiments physiological conditions at least in part mimic those found in a body fluid such as blood or extracellular fluid, e.g., interstitial fluid, e.g., of a mammalian subject. A variety of physiological conditions useful for, e.g., in vitro assays, are known in the art. Generally, a medium under physiological conditions contains a physiological concentration of salt, e.g., sodium chloride. In some embodiments a physiological concentration of salt refers to a concentration ranging from about 250 mOsm/L to about 350 mOsm/L, e.g., about 275 mOsm/L to about 325 mOsm/L, e.g., about 300 mOsm/L. In some embodiments physiological conditions are approximately isotonic to a body fluid, e.g., blood or extracellular fluid, e.g., interstitial fluid. In some embodiments physiological conditions include a pH ranging from about 6.5 to about 7.8, e.g., about 7.0 to about 7.5. In some embodiments a physiological medium comprises a buffer substance that helps maintain the pH of the medium within a physiological range. In some embodiments physiological conditions comprise conditions such that a typical mammalian protein, e.g., a protein typically found in a body fluid, such as blood or extracellular fluid, substantially retains the secondary and, if applicable, tertiary structure that such protein has in the body fluid in which it is normally found. In some embodiments components of a physiological medium are typically substantially non-toxic to mammalian cells at the concentration at which they are present in the physiological medium. A variety of physiological media (sometimes termed “buffers”) are listed in various standard references, such as those cited above (e.g., Sambrook, et al., Protocols series). In some embodiments a physiological temperature ranges from about 25 degrees C. to about 38 degrees C., e.g., from about 30 degrees C. to about 37 degrees C., e.g., 35 degrees C. to 37 degrees C.
“Polypeptide”, as used herein, refers to a polymer of amino acids, optionally including one or more amino acid analogs. A protein is a molecule composed of one or more polypeptides. A peptide is a relatively short polypeptide, typically between about 2 and 60 amino acids in length, e.g., between 8 and 40 amino acids in length. The terms “protein”, “polypeptide”, and “peptide” may be used interchangeably. Polypeptides used herein may contain amino acids such as those that are naturally found in proteins, amino acids that are not naturally found in proteins, and/or amino acid analogs that are not amino acids. As used herein, an “analog” of an amino acid may be a different amino acid that structurally resembles the amino acid or a compound other than an amino acid that structurally resembles the amino acid. A large number of art-recognized analogs of the 20 amino acids commonly found in proteins (the “standard” amino acids) are known. One or more of the amino acids in a polypeptide may be modified, for example, by the addition of a chemical entity such as a carbohydrate group, a phosphate group, a farnesyl group, an isofamesyl group, a fatty acid group, a linker for conjugation, functionalization, or other modification, etc. Certain non-limiting suitable analogs and modifications are described in WO2004026328 and/or below. The polypeptide may be acetylated, e.g., at the N-terminus and/or amidated, e.g., at the C-terminus.
The term “purified”, as used herein, refers to substances that have been separated from at least some or most of the components with which they are associated in nature or when originally generated or with which they were associated prior to purification. In general, such purification involves action of the hand of man. Purified agents may be partially purified, substantially purified, or pure. Such agents may be, for example, at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more than 99% pure. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid, polypeptide, or small molecule is purified such that it constitutes at least 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, of the total nucleic acid, polypeptide, or small molecule material, respectively, present in a preparation. In some embodiments, an organic substance, e.g., a nucleic acid, polypeptide, or small molecule, is purified such that it constitutes at least 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, of the total organic material present in a preparation. Purity may be based on, e.g., dry weight, size of peaks on a chromatography tracing (GC, HPLC, etc.), molecular abundance, electrophoretic methods, intensity of bands on a gel, spectroscopic data (e.g., NMR), elemental analysis, high throughput sequencing, mass spectrometry, or any art-accepted quantification method. In some embodiments, water, buffer substances, ions, and/or small molecules (e.g., synthetic precursors such as nucleotides or amino acids), can optionally be present in a purified preparation. A purified agent may be prepared by separating it from other substances (e.g., other cellular materials), or by producing it in such a manner to achieve a desired degree of purity. In some embodiments “partially purified” with respect to a molecule produced by a cell means that a molecule produced by a cell is no longer present within the cell, e.g., the cell has been lysed and, optionally, at least some of the cellular material (e.g., cell wall, cell membrane(s), cell organelle(s)) has been removed and/or the molecule has been separated or segregated from at least some molecules of the same type (protein, RNA, DNA, etc.) that were present in the lysate.
“Recombinant host cells”, “host cells”, and other such terms, denote prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells or cell lines that contain an exogenous nucleic acid (typically DNA) such as an expression vector comprising a nucleic acid that encodes a polypeptide of interest. It will be understood that such terms include the descendants of the original cell(s) into which the vector or other nucleic acid has been introduced. Appropriate host cells include any of those routinely used in the art for expressing polynucleotides (e.g., for purposes of producing polypeptide(s) encoded by such polynucleotides) including, for example, prokaryotes, such as E. coli or other bacteria such as species of Escherichia; Lactobacillus, Bacillus (e.g., B subtilis), Salmonella Pseudomonas, Streptomyces, Staphylococcus, etc.; and eukaryotes, including for example, fungi, such as yeast (e.g., Pichia (e.g., Pichia pastoris), Kluyveromyces, such as K. lactis, Hansenula, e.g. H. polymorpha). Examples of other fungal cells are cells of filamentous fungi, e.g. Aspergillus spp., Neurospora spp., Fusarium spp. or Trichoderma spp., e.g., strains of A. oryzae, A. nidulans or A. niger; insect cells (e.g., Sf9), plant cells, and animal cells, e.g., mammalian cells such as CHO, R1.1, B-W, L-M, African Green Monkey Kidney cells (e.g. COS-1, COS-7, BSC-1, BSC-40 and BMT-10), and cultured human cells. Also encompassed are genetically modified cells in genetically modified (e.g., transgenic) plants or animals, wherein a recombinant polypeptide is produced by at least some such cells. A polypeptide may be secreted in milk, harvested from plant material, etc. The exogenous nucleic acid may be stably maintained as an episome such as a plasmid or may at least in part be integrated into the host cell's genome, optionally after being copied or reverse transcribed. Terms such as “host cells”, etc., are also used to refer to cells or cell lines that can be used as recipients for an exogenous nucleic acid, prior to introduction of the nucleic acid. A “recombinant polynucleotide” generally is a polynucleotide that contains nucleic acid sequences that are not found joined directly to one another in nature. For example, the nucleic acid sequences may occur in different genes or different species or one or more of the sequence(s) may be a variant of a naturally occurring sequence or may at least in part be an artificial sequence that is not homologous to a naturally occurring sequence. A “recombinant polypeptide” generally is a polypeptide that is at least in part produced by transcription and translation of an exogenous nucleic acid by a recombinant host cell or by a cell-free in vitro expression system and/or that contains amino acid sequences that are not found joined directly to one another in nature. In the latter case, the recombinant polypeptide may be referred to as a “chimeric polypeptide”. The amino acid sequences in a chimeric polypeptide may, for example, occur in different genes or in different species or one or more of the sequence(s) may be a variant of a naturally occurring sequence or may at least in part be an artificial sequence that is not identical or in some embodiments is not homologous to a naturally occurring sequence over a substantial portion of the length. It will be understood that a chimeric polypeptide may comprise two or more polypeptides. For example, first and second polypeptides A and B of a chimeric polypeptide may be directly linked (A-B or B-A) or may be separated by a third polypeptide portion C (A-C-B or B-C-A). In some embodiments, portion C represents a polypeptide linker which may, for example, comprise multiple glycine and/or serine residues or any of a variety of other amino acids. In some embodiments, two or more polypeptides may be linked by non-polypeptide linker(s). “Recombinant” as used herein encompasses in certain embodiments polypeptides produced by joining (e.g., chemically conjugating, enzymatically conjugating), shorter recombinant polypeptides that may be produced in recombinant host cells. In some embodiments a recombinant polypeptide may comprise a signal sequence that directs secretion of the polypeptide or a sequence that directs the expressed polypeptide to a specific compartment or organelle. Suitable sequences are known in the art. Appropriate sequences for a host cell type of interest (e.g., bacterial, fungal, mammalian, plant, etc.) may be selected. A signal sequence may be located at or near (e.g., within up to 10-50 amino acids of) the N-terminus or C-terminus in some embodiments. In some embodiments a polypeptide comprises a tag. A tag may be useful to facilitate detection and/or purification of a protein that contains it. Examples of tags include polyhistidine-tag (e.g., 6×-His tag), glutathione-S-transferase, maltose binding protein, NUS tag, SNUT tag, Strep tag, epitope tags such as V5, HA, Myc, or FLAG. In some embodiments a protease cleavage site is located in the region between the tag and the polypeptide, allowing the polypeptide to be separated from the tag by exposure to the protease. In some embodiments a polynucleotide that encodes a recombinant polypeptide is at least in part codon optimized for expression in a host cell of interest (e.g., bacterial, fungal, mammalian, plant, etc.). A tag may be located at or near (e.g., within up to 10-50 amino acids of) the N- or C-terminus of a polypeptide in various embodiments. A recombinant polypeptide may be isolated, purified, etc., using any of a variety of methods. See, e.g., Sambrook, Protocols series, or other standard references. Methods of use may include, e.g., dialysis (e.g., using membranes having defined pore size), chromatography, precipitation, gel purification, or affinity-based methods that may, in some embodiments, utilize a tag or a specific binding reagent such as an antibody.
“Reactive functional groups” as used herein refers to groups including, but not limited to, olefins, acetylenes, alcohols, phenols, ethers, oxides, halides, aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids, esters, amides, cyanates, isocyanates, thiocyanates, isothiocyanates, amines, hydrazines, hydrazones, hydrazides, diazo, diazonium, nitro, nitriles, mercaptans, sulfides, disulfides, sulfoxides, sulfones, sulfonic acids, sulfinic acids, acetals, ketals, anhydrides, sulfates, sulfenic acids isonitriles, amidines, imides, imidates, nitrones, hydroxylamines, oximes, hydroxamic acids thiohydroxamic acids, allenes, ortho esters, sulfites, enamines, ynamines, ureas, pseudoureas, semicarbazides, carbodiimides, carbamates, imines, azides, azo compounds, azoxy compounds, and nitroso compounds, N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, maleimides, sulfhydryls, and the like. Methods to prepare each of these functional groups are well known in the art and their application to or modification for a particular purpose is within the ability of one of skill in the art (see, for example, Sandler and Karo, eds. ORGANIC FUNCTIONAL GROUP PREPARATIONS, Academic Press, San Diego, 1989, and Hermanson, G., Bioconjugate Techniques, 2nd ed., Academic Press, San Diego, 2008).
“RNA interference” (RNAi) refers to processes in which a complex known as “RNA-induced silencing complex” (RISC) inhibits gene expression in a sequence-specific manner in eukaryotic cells, e.g., vertebrate cells, e.g., mammalian cells, or in an appropriate in vitro system. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, it is believed that, in nature, the RNAi pathway is initiated by a Type III endonuclease known as Dicer, which cleaves long double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) into shorter double-stranded fragments of 21-23 base pairs with 2-base 3′ overhangs, referred to as short interfering RNAs (siRNAs). Such siRNAs comprise two single-stranded RNAs (ssRNAs), often referred to as the “passenger strand” or “sense strand” and the “guide strand” or “antisense strand”. The term “antisense strand” or “guide strand” thus refers to the strand of an INAA, e.g., a dsRNAi agent, that includes a region that is substantially complementary to a target sequence. The term “sense strand” or “passenger strand” as used herein, refers to the strand of an iRNA that includes a region that is substantially complementary to a region of the antisense strand. The guide strand is incorporated into RISC, where it pairs with a complementary sequence in a mRNA molecule, which leads to cleavage of the mRNA by Argonaute2 (an enzyme that is the catalytic component of the RISC complex). The passenger strand is degraded. RISC may alternately or additionally mediate translational repression of a target RNA complementary to the guide strand. Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that a guide strand may be perfectly complementary to a target region of a target RNA or may have less than perfect complementarity to a target region of a target RNA. The complementarity of the structure formed by hybridization of a target RNA and the guide strand may be such that the guide strand can (i) guide cleavage of the target RNA in the RNA-induced silencing complex (RISC) and/or (ii) cause RISC-mediated translational repression of the target RNA. Without limiting the invention in any way, it is believed that strands with perfect or near perfect complementarity to a target mRNA mainly induce mRNA degradation through cleavage whereas those with less extensive complementarity (especially in the region more 3′ than position 7 of the guide strand) generally promote translational repression. In some embodiments, a strand may imperfectly base pair with the 3′-untranslated region (3′UTR) of a target mRNA and cause RISC-dependent translational repression or mRNA destabilization via deadenylation, leading to decapping and degradation.
The term “RNAi agent” as used herein, refers to an agent that comprises a nucleic acid that directs the sequence-specific degradation or translational repression of RNA (e.g., mRNA) in a cell through RNA interference (RNAi). An RNAi agent thus inhibits the expression of the target gene in a cell, e.g., a cell within a subject, such as a mammalian subject, e.g., a human subject. RNAi agents include short interfering RNAs (siRNAs) and short hairpin RNAs (shRNAs). siRNA may be double-stranded (ds siRNA) or single-stranded (ss siRNA). The term “siRNA” as used herein, encompasses siRNAs produced by cleavage of longer dsRNA by Dicer as well as compounds having similar or identical structure that are produced by chemical synthesis or other methods known in the art, including compounds having the structures described herein for siRNA.
“Specific binding” generally refers to a physical association between a target polypeptide (or, more generally, a target molecule) and a binding molecule such as an antibody or ligand. The association is typically dependent upon the presence of a particular structural feature of the target such as an antigenic determinant, epitope, binding pocket or cleft, recognized by the binding molecule. For example, if an antibody is specific for epitope A, the presence of a polypeptide containing epitope A or the presence of free unlabeled A in a reaction containing both free labeled A and the binding molecule that binds thereto, will reduce the amount of labeled A that binds to the binding molecule. It is to be understood that specificity need not be absolute but generally refers to the context in which the binding occurs. For example, it is well known in the art that numerous antibodies cross-react with other epitopes in addition to those present in the target molecule. Such cross-reactivity may be acceptable depending upon the application for which the antibody is to be used. One of ordinary skill in the art will be able to select antibodies or ligands having a sufficient degree of specificity to perform appropriately in any given application (e.g., for detection of a target molecule, for therapeutic purposes, etc.). It is also to be understood that specificity may be evaluated in the context of additional factors such as the affinity of the binding molecule for the target versus the affinity of the binding molecule for other targets, e.g., competitors. If a binding molecule exhibits a high affinity for a target molecule that it is desired to detect and low affinity for nontarget molecules, the antibody will likely be an acceptable reagent. Once the specificity of a binding molecule is established in one or more contexts, it may be employed in other, preferably similar, contexts without necessarily re-evaluating its specificity. In some embodiments, the affinity (as measured by the equilibrium dissociation constant, Kd) of two molecules that exhibit specific binding is 10−3 M or less, e.g., 10−4 M or less, e.g., 10−5 M or less, e.g., 10−6M or less, 10−7M or less, 10−8M or less, or 10−9 M or less under the conditions tested, e.g., under physiological conditions.
A “subject” treated according to the instant invention is typically a human, a non-human primate, or a lower animal (e.g., a mouse or rat), which expresses or contains at least some primate (e.g., human) complement component C3 and, optionally, one or more additional primate complement component(s). In some embodiments the subject is male. In some embodiments the subject is female. In some embodiments the subject is an adult, e.g., a human at least 18 years of age, e.g., between 18 and 100 years of age. In some embodiments, a human subject is at least 12 years of age. In some embodiments a subject is an adult, e.g., a human at least 18 years of age, e.g., between 18 and 100 years of age. In some embodiments a subject is at least 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, or 80 years of age. In some embodiments the subject is a child, e.g., a human between 0 and 4 years of age, or between 5 and 11 years of age.
“Target gene” refers to a gene whose expression is to be modulated, e.g., inhibited. As used herein, the term “target RNA” refers to an RNA to be degraded or translationally repressed or otherwise inhibited using an INAA. A target RNA may also be referred to as a target sequence or target transcript. The RNA may be a primary RNA transcript transcribed from the target gene (e.g., a pre-mRNA) or a processed transcript, e.g., mRNA encoding a polypeptide. As used herein, the term “target portion” or “target region” refers to a contiguous portion of the nucleotide sequence of a target RNA. In some embodiments, a target portion an mRNA is at least long enough to serve as a substrate for RNAi-mediated cleavage within that portion in the presence of a suitable RNAi agent. In some embodiments, a target portion of an RNA is at least long enough to serve as a substrate for RNase H-mediated cleavage within that portion in the presence of a suitable antisense oligonucleotide. A target portion may be from about 8-36 nucleotides in length, e.g., about 10-20 or about 15-30 nucleotides in length. A target portion length may have specific value or subrange within the afore-mentioned ranges. For example, in certain embodiments a target portion may be between about 15-29, 15-28, 15-27, 15-26, 15-25, 15-24, 15-23, 15-22, 15-21, 15-20, 15-19, 15-18, 15-17, 18-30, 18-29, 18-28, 18-27, 18-26, 18-25, 18-24, 18-23, 18-22, 18-21, 18-20, 19-30, 19-29, 19-28, 19-27, 19-26, 19-25, 19-24, 19-23, 19-22, 19-21, 19-20, 20-30, 20-29, 20-28, 20-27, 20-26, 20-25, 20-24, 20-23, 20-22, 20-21, 21-30, 21-29, 21-28, 21-27, 21-26, 21-25, 21-24, 21-23, or 21-22 nucleotides in length.
“Treating”, as used herein in regard to treating a subject, refers to providing treatment, i.e., providing any type of medical or surgical management of a subject. The treatment can be provided in order to reverse, alleviate, inhibit the progression of, prevent or reduce the likelihood of a disease, or in order to reverse, alleviate, inhibit or prevent the progression of, prevent or reduce the likelihood of one or more symptoms or manifestations of a disease. “Prevent” refers to causing a disease or symptom or manifestation of a disease not to occur for at least a period of time in at least some individuals. Treating can include administering a compound or composition to the subject following the development of one or more symptoms or manifestations indicative of a disease, e.g., in order to reverse, alleviate, reduce the severity of, and/or inhibit or prevent the progression of the disease and/or to reverse, alleviate, reduce the severity of, and/or inhibit or one or more symptoms or manifestations of the disease. A compound or composition can be administered to a subject who has developed a disease, or is at increased risk of developing the disease relative to a member of the general population. A compound or composition can be administered to a subject who has developed a disease and is at increased risk of developing one or more particular symptoms or manifestations of the disease or an exacerbation of the disease relative to other individuals diagnosed with the disease, or relative to the subject's typical or average risk for such symptom or manifestation or exacerbation. For example, the subject may have been exposed to a “trigger” that places the subject at increased risk (e.g., temporarily increased risk) of experiencing an exacerbation. A compound or composition can be administered prophylactically, i.e., before development of any symptom or manifestation of the disease. Typically in this case the subject will be at risk of developing the disease, e.g., relative to a member of the general population, optionally matched in terms of age, sex, and/or other demographic variable(s).
A “vector” may be any of a variety of nucleic acid molecules, viruses, or portions thereof that are capable of mediating entry of, e.g., transferring, transporting, etc., a nucleic acid of interest between different genetic environments or into a cell. The nucleic acid of interest may be linked to, e.g., inserted into, the vector using, e.g., restriction and ligation. Vectors include, for example, DNA or RNA plasmids, cosmids, naturally occurring or modified viral genomes or portions thereof, nucleic acids that can be packaged into viral capsids, mini-chromosomes, artificial chromosomes, etc. Plasmid vectors typically include an origin of replication (e.g., for replication in prokaryotic cells). A plasmid may include part or all of a viral genome (e.g., a viral promoter, enhancer, processing or packaging signals, and/or sequences sufficient to give rise to a nucleic acid that can be integrated into the host cell genome and/or to give rise to infectious virus). Viruses or portions thereof that can be used to introduce nucleic acids into cells may be referred to as viral vectors. Viral vectors include, e.g., adenoviruses, adeno-associated viruses, retroviruses (e.g., lentiviruses, vaccinia virus and other poxviruses, herpesviruses (e.g., herpes simplex virus), and others. Baculovirus are of use, e.g., in insect cells. A wide range of plant viral vectors are known and include, e.g., those based on or comprising Cauliflower Mosaic Virus, Tobacco Mosaic Virus, or one or more genetic elements thereof (e.g., Cauliflower Mosaic Virus 35S promoter). Viral vectors may or may not contain sufficient viral genetic information for production of infectious virus when introduced into host cells, i.e., viral vectors may be replication-competent or replication-defective. In some embodiments, e.g., where sufficient information for production of infectious virus is lacking, it may be supplied by a host cell or by another vector introduced into the cell, e.g., if production of virus is desired. In some embodiments such information is not supplied, e.g., if production of virus is not desired. A nucleic acid to be transferred may be incorporated into a naturally occurring or modified viral genome or a portion thereof or may be present within a viral capsid as a separate nucleic acid molecule. A vector may contain one or more nucleic acids encoding a marker suitable for identifying and/or selecting cells that have taken up the vector. Markers include, for example, various proteins that increase or decrease either resistance or sensitivity to antibiotics or other agents (e.g., a protein that confers resistance to an antibiotic such as puromycin, hygromycin or blasticidin), enzymes whose activities are detectable by assays known in the art (e.g., β-galactosidase or alkaline phosphatase), and proteins or RNAs that detectably affect the phenotype of cells that express them (e.g., fluorescent proteins). Vectors often include one or more appropriately positioned sites for restriction enzymes, which may be used to facilitate insertion into the vector of a nucleic acid, e.g., a nucleic acid to be expressed. An expression vector is a vector into which a desired nucleic acid has been inserted or may be inserted such that it is operably linked to regulatory elements (also termed “regulatory sequences”, “expression control elements”, or “expression control sequences”) and may be expressed as an RNA transcript (e.g., an mRNA that can be translated into protein or a noncoding RNA). Expression vectors include regulatory sequence(s), e.g., expression control sequences, sufficient to direct transcription of an operably linked nucleic acid under at least some conditions; other elements required or helpful for expression may be supplied by, e.g., the host cell or by an in vitro expression system. Such regulatory sequences typically include a promoter and may include enhancer sequences or upstream activator sequences. In some embodiments a vector may include sequences that encode a 5′ untranslated region and/or a 3′ untranslated region, which may comprise a cleavage and/or polyadenylation signal. In general, regulatory elements may be contained in a vector prior to insertion of a nucleic acid whose expression is desired or may be contained in an inserted nucleic acid or may be inserted into a vector following insertion of a nucleic acid whose expression is desired. As used herein, a nucleic acid and regulatory element(s) are said to be “operably linked” when they are covalently linked so as to place the expression or transcription of the nucleic acid under the influence or control of the regulatory element(s). For example, a promoter region would be operably linked to a nucleic acid if the promoter region were capable of effecting transcription of that nucleic acid. One of ordinary skill in the art will be aware that the precise nature of the regulatory sequences useful for gene expression may vary between species or cell types, but may in general include, as appropriate, sequences involved with the initiation of transcription, RNA processing, or initiation of translation. The choice and design of an appropriate vector and regulatory element(s) is within the ability and discretion of one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, one of skill in the art will select an appropriate promoter (or other expression control sequences) for expression in a desired species (e.g., a prokaryotic (bacterial) or eukaryotic (e.g., fungal, plant, mammalian species) or cell type. A vector may contain a promoter capable of directing expression in mammalian cells, such as a suitable viral promoter, e.g., from a cytomegalovirus (CMV), retrovirus, simian virus (e.g., SV40), papilloma virus, herpes virus or other virus that infects mammalian cells, or a mammalian promoter from, e.g., a gene such as EF1alpha, ubiquitin (e.g., ubiquitin B or C), globin, actin, phosphoglycerate kinase (PGK), etc., or a composite promoter such as a CAG promoter (combination of the CMV early enhancer element and chicken beta-actin promoter). In some embodiments a human promoter may be used. In some embodiments, a promoter that ordinarily directs transcription by a eukaryotic RNA polymerase I (a “pol I promoter”), e.g., (a U6, H1, 7SK or tRNA promoter or a functional variant thereof) may be used. In some embodiments, a promoter that ordinarily directs transcription by a eukaryotic RNA polymerase II (a “pol II promoter”) or a functional variant thereof is used. In some embodiments, a promoter that ordinarily directs transcription by a eukaryotic RNA polymerase III (a “pol III promoter”), e.g., a promoter for transcription of ribosomal RNA (other than 5S rRNA) or a functional variant thereof is used. One of ordinary skill in the art will select an appropriate promoter for directing transcription of a sequence of interest. Examples of expression vectors that may be used in mammalian cells include, e.g., the pcDNA vector series, pSV2 vector series, pCMV vector series, pRSV vector series, pEF1 vector series, Gateway® vectors, etc. In some embodiments, regulatable (e.g., inducible or repressible) expression control element(s), e.g., a regulatable promoter, is/are used so that expression can be regulated, e.g., turned on or increased or turned off or decreased. In some embodiments a vector may comprise a polynucleotide sequence that encodes a polypeptide, wherein the polynucleotide sequence is positioned in frame with a nucleic acid inserted into the vector so that an N- or C-terminal fusion is created. In some embodiments a polypeptide encoded by the polynucleotide sequence may comprise a signal sequence (which directs secretion of a protein) or a sequence that directs the expressed protein to a specific organelle or location in the cell such as the nucleus or mitochondria. In some embodiments a polypeptide comprises a tag. A tag may be useful to facilitate detection and/or purification of a protein that contains it. Examples of tags include polyhistidine-tag (e.g., 6×-His tag), glutathione-S-transferase, maltose binding protein, NUS tag, SNUT tag, Strep tag, epitope tags such as V5, HA, Myc, or FLAG. In some embodiments a protease cleavage site is located in the region between the protein encoded by the inserted nucleic acid and the polypeptide, allowing the polypeptide to be removed by exposure to the protease. Vectors may be introduced into host cells using methods known in the art. One of ordinary skill will select an appropriate method based, e.g., on the vector, cell type, etc. Examples of suitable methods include, e.g., calcium phosphate-mediated transfection, transfection with any of a variety of commercially available reagents, e.g., lipid-based or non-lipid based, such as FuGENE, Lipofectamine, TurboFect; electroporation; microparticle bombardment, etc. Such methods are explained in detail in standard references such as Sambrook, Protocols series, and others.
As used herein the term “aliphatic” denotes a hydrocarbon moiety that may be straight-chain (i.e., unbranched), branched, or cyclic (including fused, bridging, and spiro-fused polycyclic) and may be completely saturated or may contain one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-30 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-10 carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-8 carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-6 carbon atoms, and in yet other embodiments aliphatic groups contain 1-4 carbon atoms. Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl groups, and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
As used herein, “alkyl” refers to a saturated straight, branched, or cyclic hydrocarbon having from about 1 to about 22 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein), with from about 1 to about 12, or about 1 to about 7 carbon atoms being preferred in certain embodiments of the invention. Alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, cyclopentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, n-hexyl, isohexyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, 3-methylpentyl, 2,2-dimethylbutyl, and 2,3-dimethylbutyl.
As used herein, “halo” refers to F, Cl, Br or I.
As used herein, “alkanoyl” refers to an optionally substituted straight or branched aliphatic acyclic residue having about 1 to 10 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific number of carbon atoms) therein, e.g., from about 1 to 7 carbon atoms which, as will be appreciated, is attached to a terminal C═O group with a single bond (and may also be referred to as an “acyl group”). Alkanoyl groups include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, pentanoyl, isopentanoyl, 2-methyl-butyryl, 2,2-dimethoxypropionyl, hexanoyl, heptanoyl, octanoyl, and the like, and for purposes of the present invention a formyl group is considered an alkanoyl group. “Lower alkanoyl” refers to an optionally substituted straight or branched aliphatic acyclic residue having about 1 to about 5 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific number of carbon atoms). Such groups include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, pentanoyl, isopentanoyl, etc.
As used herein, “aryl” refers to an optionally substituted, mono- or bicyclic aromatic ring system having from about 5 to about 14 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein), with from about 6 to about 10 carbons being preferred. Non-limiting examples include, for example, phenyl and naphthyl.
As used herein, “aralkyl” refers to alkyl radicals bearing an aryl substituent and having from about 6 to about 22 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein), with from about 6 to about 12 carbon atoms being preferred in certain embodiments. Aralkyl groups can be optionally substituted. Non-limiting examples include, for example, benzyl, naphthylmethyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, phenylethyl, and diphenylethyl.
As used herein, the terms “alkoxy” and “alkoxyl” refer to an optionally substituted alkyl-O-group wherein alkyl is as previously defined. Exemplary alkoxy and alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, i-propoxy, n-butoxy, and heptoxy.
As used herein, “carboxy” refers to a —C(═O)OH group.
As used herein, “alkoxycarbonyl” refers to a —C(═O)O-alkyl group, where alkyl is as previously defined.
As used herein, “aroyl” refers to a —C(═O)-aryl group, wherein aryl is as previously defined. Exemplary aroyl groups include benzoyl and naphthoyl.
The term “cyclic ring system” refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic, partially unsaturated or fully saturated, 3- to 10-membered ring system, which includes single rings of 3 to 8 atoms in size and bi- and tri-cyclic ring systems which may include aromatic 5- or 6-membered aryl or aromatic heterocyclic groups fused to a non-aromatic ring. These heterocyclic rings include those having from 1 to 3 heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen. In certain embodiments, the term heterocyclic refers to a non-aromatic 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring or a polycyclic group wherein at least one ring atom is a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of 0, S, and N, including, but not limited to, a bi- or tri-cyclic group, comprising fused six-membered rings having between one and three heteroatoms independently selected from the group consisting of the oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen. In some embodiments, “cyclic ring system” refers to a cycloalkyl group which, as used herein, refers to groups having 3 to 10, e.g., 4 to 7 carbon atoms. Cycloalkyls include, but are not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and the like, which, is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, “cyclic ring system” refers to a cycloalkenyl or cycloalkynyl moiety, which is optionally substituted.
Typically, substituted chemical moieties include one or more substituents that replace hydrogen. Exemplary substituents include, for example, halo, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, aryl, sulfhydryl, hydroxyl (—OH), alkoxyl, cyano (—CN), carboxyl (—COOH), —C(═O)O-alkyl, aminocarbonyl (—C(═O)NH2), —N-substituted aminocarbonyl (—C(═O)NHR″), CF3, CF2CF3, and the like. In relation to the aforementioned substituents, each moiety R″ can be, independently, any of H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or aralkyl, for example.
As used herein, “L-amino acid” refers to any of the naturally occurring levorotatory alpha-amino acids normally present in proteins or the alkyl esters of those alpha-amino acids. The term “D-amino acid” refers to dextrorotatory alpha-amino acids. Unless specified otherwise, all amino acids referred to herein are L-amino acids.
As used herein, an “aromatic amino acid” is an amino acid that comprises at least one aromatic ring, e.g., it comprises an aryl group.
As used herein, an “aromatic amino acid analog” is an amino acid analog that comprises at least one aromatic ring, e.g., it comprises an aryl group.
II. Complement SystemIn order to facilitate understanding of the invention, and without intending to limit the invention in any way, this section provides an overview of complement and its pathways of activation. Further details are found, e.g., in Kuby Immunology, 6th ed., 2006; Paul, W. E., Fundamental Immunology, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 6th ed., 2008; and Walport M J., Complement. First of two parts. N Engl J Med., 344(14):1058-66, 2001.
Complement is an arm of the innate immune system that plays an important role in defending the body against infectious agents. The complement system comprises more than 30 serum and cellular proteins that are involved in three major pathways, known as the classical, alternative, and lectin pathways. The classical pathway is usually triggered by binding of a complex of antigen and IgM or IgG antibody to C1 (though certain other activators can also initiate the pathway). Activated C1 cleaves C4 and C2 to produce C4a and C4b, in addition to C2a and C2b. C4b and C2a combine to form C3 convertase, which cleaves C3 to form C3a and C3b. Binding of C3b to C3 convertase produces C5 convertase, which cleaves C5 into C5a and C5b. C3a, C4a, and C5a are anaphylotoxins and mediate multiple reactions in the acute inflammatory response. C3a and C5a are also chemotactic factors that attract immune system cells such as neutrophils.
The alternative pathway is initiated by and amplified at, e.g., microbial surfaces and various complex polysaccharides. In this pathway, hydrolysis of C3 to C3(H2O), which occurs spontaneously at a low level, leads to binding of factor B, which is cleaved by factor D, generating a fluid phase C3 convertase that activates complement by cleaving C3 into C3a and C3b. C3b binds to targets such as cell surfaces and forms a complex with factor B, which is later cleaved by factor D, resulting in a C3 convertase. Surface-bound C3 convertases cleave and activate additional C3 molecules, resulting in rapid C3b deposition in close proximity to the site of activation and leading to formation of additional C3 convertase, which in turn generates additional C3b. This process results in a cycle of C3 cleavage and C3 convertase formation that significantly amplifies the response. Cleavage of C3 and binding of another molecule of C3b to the C3 convertase gives rise to a C5 convertase. C3 and C5 convertases of this pathway are regulated by host cell molecules CR1, DAF, MCP, CD59, and fH. The mode of action of these proteins involves either decay accelerating activity (i.e., ability to dissociate convertases), ability to serve as cofactors in the degradation of C3b or C4b by factor I, or both. Normally the presence of complement regulatory proteins on host cell surfaces prevents significant complement activation from occurring thereon.
The C5 convertases produced in both pathways cleave C5 to produce C5a and C5b. C5b then binds to C6, C7, and C8 to form C5b-8, which catalyzes polymerization of C9 to form the C5b-9 membrane attack complex (MAC). The MAC inserts itself into target cell membranes and causes cell lysis. Small amounts of MAC on the membrane of cells may have a variety of consequences other than cell death.
The lectin complement pathway is initiated by binding of mannose-binding lectin (MBL) and MBL-associated serine protease (MASP) to carbohydrates. The MB1-1 gene (known as LMAN-1 in humans) encodes a type I integral membrane protein localized in the intermediate region between the endoplasmic reticulum and the Golgi. The MBL-2 gene encodes the soluble mannose-binding protein found in serum. In the human lectin pathway, MASP-1 and MASP-2 are involved in the proteolysis of C4 and C2, leading to a C3 convertase described above.
Complement activity is regulated by various mammalian proteins referred to as complement control proteins (CCPs) or regulators of complement activation (RCA) proteins (U.S. Pat. No. 6,897,290). These proteins differ with respect to ligand specificity and mechanism(s) of complement inhibition. They may accelerate the normal decay of convertases and/or function as cofactors for factor I, to enzymatically cleave C3b and/or C4b into smaller fragments. CCPs are characterized by the presence of multiple (typically 4-56) homologous motifs known as short consensus repeats (SCR), complement control protein (CCP) modules, or SUSHI domains, about 50-70 amino acids in length that contain a conserved motif including four disulfide-bonded cysteines (two disulfide bonds), proline, tryptophan, and many hydrophobic residues. The CCP family includes complement receptor type 1 (CR1; C3b:C4b receptor), complement receptor type 2 (CR2), membrane cofactor protein (MCP; CD46), decay-accelerating factor (DAF), complement factor H (fH), and C4b-binding protein (C4 bp). CD59 is a membrane-bound complement regulatory protein unrelated structurally to the CCPs. Complement regulatory proteins normally serve to limit complement activation that might otherwise occur on cells and tissues of the mammalian, e.g., human host. Thus, “self” cells are normally protected from the deleterious effects that would otherwise ensue were complement activation to proceed on these cells. Deficiencies or defects in complement regulatory protein(s) are involved in the pathogenesis of a variety of complement-mediated disorders, e.g., as discussed herein.
III. Compstatin AnalogsCompstatin is a cyclic peptide that binds to C3 and inhibits complement activation. U.S. Pat. No. 6,319,897 describes a peptide having the sequence Ile-[Cys-Val-Val-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-His-His-Arg-Cys]-Thr (SEQ ID NO: 1), with the disulfide bond between the two cysteines denoted by brackets. It will be understood that the name “compstatin” was not used in U.S. Pat. No. 6,319,897 but was subsequently adopted in the scientific and patent literature (see, e.g., Morikis, et al., Protein Sci., 7(3):619-27, 1998) to refer to a peptide having the same sequence as SEQ ID NO: 2 disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,319,897, but amidated at the C terminus as shown in Table 1 (SEQ ID NO: 8). The term “compstatin” is used herein consistently with such usage (i.e., to refer to SEQ ID NO: 8). Compstatin analogs that have higher complement inhibiting activity than compstatin have been developed. See, e.g., WO2004/026328 (PCT/US2003/029653), Morikis, D., et al., Biochem Soc Trans. 32(Pt 1):28-32, 2004, Mallik, B., et al., J. Med. Chem., 274-286, 2005; Katragadda, M., et al. J. Med. Chem., 49: 4616-4622, 2006; WO2007062249 (PCT/US2006/045539); WO2007044668 (PCT/US2006/039397), WO/2009/046198 (PCT/US2008/078593); WO/2010/127336 (PCT/US2010/033345) and discussion below.
Compstatin analogs may be acetylated or amidated, e.g., at the N-terminus and/or C-terminus. For example, compstatin analogs may be acetylated at the N-terminus and amidated at the C-terminus. Consistent with usage in the art, “compstatin” as used herein, and the activities of compstatin analogs described herein relative to that of compstatin, refer to compstatin amidated at the C-terminus (Mallik, 2005, supra).
Concatamers or multimers of compstatin or a complement inhibiting analog thereof are also of use in the present invention.
As used herein, the term “compstatin analog” includes compstatin and any complement inhibiting analog thereof. The term “compstatin analog” encompasses compstatin and other compounds designed or identified based on compstatin and whose complement inhibiting activity is at least 50% as great as that of compstatin as measured, e.g., using any complement activation assay accepted in the art or substantially similar or equivalent assays. Certain suitable assays are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,319,897, WO2004/026328, Morikis, supra, Mallik, supra, Katragadda 2006, supra, WO2007062249 (PCT/US2006/045539); WO2007044668 (PCT/US2006/039397), WO/2009/046198 (PCT/US2008/078593); and/or WO/2010/127336 (PCT/US2010/033345). The assay may, for example, measure alternative or classical pathway-mediated erythrocyte lysis or be an ELISA assay. In some embodiments, an assay described in WO/2010/135717 (PCT/US2010/035871) is used.
The activity of a compstatin analog may be expressed in terms of its IC50 (the concentration of the compound that inhibits complement activation by 50%), with a lower IC50 indicating a higher activity as recognized in the art. The activity of a preferred compstatin analog for use in the present invention is at least as great as that of compstatin. It is noted that certain modifications known to reduce or eliminate complement inhibiting activity and may be explicitly excluded from any embodiment of the invention. The IC50 of compstatin has been measured as 12 μM using an alternative pathway-mediated erythrocyte lysis assay (WO2004/026328). It will be appreciated that the precise IC50 value measured for a given compstatin analog will vary with experimental conditions (e.g., the serum concentration used in the assay). Comparative values, e.g., obtained from experiments in which IC50 is determined for multiple different compounds under substantially identical conditions, are of use. In one embodiment, the IC50 of the compstatin analog is no more than the IC50 of compstatin. In certain embodiments of the invention the activity of the compstatin analog is between 2 and 99 times that of compstatin (i.e., the analog has an IC50 that is less than the IC50 of compstatin by a factor of between 2 and 99). For example, the activity may be between 10 and 50 times as great as that of compstatin, or between 50 and 99 times as great as that of compstatin. In certain embodiments of the invention the activity of the compstatin analog is between 99 and 264 times that of compstatin. For example, the activity may be 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, or 264 times as great as that of compstatin. In certain embodiments the activity is between 250 and 300, 300 and 350, 350 and 400, or 400 and 500 times as great as that of compstatin. The invention further contemplates compstatin analogs having activities between 500 and 1000 times that of compstatin, or more. In certain embodiments the IC50 of the compstatin analog is between about 0.2 μM and about 0.5 μM. In certain embodiments the IC50 of the compstatin analog is between about 0.1 μM and about 0.2 μM. In certain embodiments the IC50 of the compstatin analog is between about 0.05 μM and about 0.1 μM. In certain embodiments the IC50 of the compstatin analog is between about 0.001 μM and about 0.05 μM.
The Kd of compstatin binding to C3 can be measured using isothermal titration calorimetry (Katragadda, et al., J. Biol. Chem., 279(53), 54987-54995, 2004). Binding affinity of a variety of compstatin analogs for C3 has been correlated with their activity, with a lower Kd indicating a higher binding affinity, as recognized in the art. A linear correlation between binding affinity and activity was shown for certain analogs tested (Katragadda, 2004, supra; Katragadda 2006, supra). In certain embodiments of the invention the compstatin analog binds to C3 with a IQ of between 0.1 μM and 1.0 μM, between 0.05 μM and 0.1 μM, between 0.025 μM and 0.05 μM, between 0.015 μM and 0.025 μM, between 0.01 μM and 0.015 μM, or between 0.001 μM and 0.01 μM.
Compounds “designed or identified based on compstatin” include, but are not limited to, compounds that comprise an amino acid chain whose sequence is obtained by (i) modifying the sequence of compstatin (e.g., replacing one or more amino acids of the sequence of compstatin with a different amino acid or amino acid analog, inserting one or more amino acids or amino acid analogs into the sequence of compstatin, or deleting one or more amino acids from the sequence of compstatin); (ii) selection from a phage display peptide library in which one or more amino acids of compstatin is randomized, and optionally further modified according to method (i); or (iii) identified by screening for compounds that compete with compstatin or any analog thereof obtained by methods (i) or (ii) for binding to C3 or a fragment thereof. Many useful compstatin analogs comprise a hydrophobic cluster, a β-turn, and a disulfide bridge.
In certain embodiments of the invention the sequence of the compstatin analog comprises or consists essentially of a sequence that is obtained by making 1, 2, 3, or 4 substitutions in the sequence of compstatin, i.e., 1, 2, 3, or 4 amino acids in the sequence of compstatin is replaced by a different standard amino acid or by a non-standard amino acid. In certain embodiments of the invention the amino acid at position 4 is altered. In certain embodiments of the invention the amino acid at position 9 is altered. In certain embodiments of the invention the amino acids at positions 4 and 9 are altered. In certain embodiments of the invention only the amino acids at positions 4 and 9 are altered. In certain embodiments of the invention the amino acid at position 4 or 9 is altered, or in certain embodiments both amino acids 4 and 9 are altered, and in addition up to 2 amino acids located at positions selected from 1, 7, 10, 11, and 13 are altered. In certain embodiments of the invention the amino acids at positions 4, 7, and 9 are altered. In certain embodiments of the invention amino acids at position 2, 12, or both are altered, provided that the alteration preserves the ability of the compound to be cyclized. Such alteration(s) at positions 2 and/or 12 may be in addition to the alteration(s) at position 1, 4, 7, 9, 10, 11, and/or 13. Optionally the sequence of any of the compstatin analogs whose sequence is obtained by replacing one or more amino acids of compstatin sequence further includes up to 1, 2, or 3 additional amino acids at the C-terminus. In one embodiment, the additional amino acid is Gly. Optionally the sequence of any of the compstatin analogs whose sequence is obtained by replacing one or more amino acids of compstatin sequence further includes up to 5, or up to 10 additional amino acids at the C-terminus. It should be understood that compstatin analogs may have any one or more of the characteristics or features of the various embodiments described herein, and characteristics or features of any embodiment may additionally characterize any other embodiment described herein, unless otherwise stated or evident from the context. In certain embodiments of the invention the sequence of the compstatin analog comprises or consists essentially of a sequence identical to that of compstatin except at positions corresponding to positions 4 and 9 in the sequence of compstatin.
Compstatin and certain compstatin analogs having somewhat greater activity than compstatin contain only standard amino acids (“standard amino acids” are glycine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, alanine, phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, aspartic acid, asparagine, glutamic acid, glutamine, cysteine, methionine, arginine, lysine, proline, serine, threonine and histidine). Certain compstatin analogs having improved activity incorporate one or more non-standard amino acids. Useful non-standard amino acids include singly and multiply halogenated (e.g., fluorinated) amino acids, D-amino acids, homo-amino acids, N-alkyl amino acids, dehydroamino acids, aromatic amino acids (other than phenylalanine, tyrosine and tryptophan), ortho-, meta- or para-aminobenzoic acid, phospho-amino acids, methoxylated amino acids, and α,α-disubstituted amino acids. In certain embodiments of the invention, a compstatin analog is designed by replacing one or more L-amino acids in a compstatin analog described elsewhere herein with the corresponding D-amino acid. Such compounds and methods of use thereof are an aspect of the invention. Exemplary non-standard amino acids of use include 2-naphthylalanine (2-NaI), 1-naphthylalanine (1-NaI), 2-indanylglycine carboxylic acid (2Ig1), dihydrotrpytophan (Dht), 4-benzoyl-L-phenylalanine (Bpa), 2-α-aminobutyric acid (2-Abu), 3-α-aminobutyric acid (3-Abu), 4-α-aminobutyric acid (4-Abu), cyclohexylalanine (Cha), homocyclohexylalanine (hCha), 4-fluoro-L-tryptophan (4fW), 5-fluoro-L-tryptophan (MW), 6-fluoro-L-tryptophan (6fW), 4-hydroxy-L-tryptophan (40H-W), 5-hydroxy-L-tryptophan (50H-W), 6-hydroxy-L-tryptophan (60H-W), 1-methyl-L-tryptophan (1MeW), 4-methyl-L-tryptophan (4MeW), 5-methyl-L-tryptophan (5MeW), 7-aza-L-tryptophan (7aW), α-methyl-L-tryptophan (αMeW), β-methyl-L-tryptophan (βMeW), N-methyl-L-tryptophan (NMeW), ornithine (orn), citrulline, norleucine, γ-glutamic acid, etc.
In certain embodiments of the invention the compstatin analog comprises one or more Trp analogs (e.g., at position 4 and/or 7 relative to the sequence of compstatin). Exemplary Trp analogs are mentioned above. See also Beene, et. al. Biochemistry 41: 10262-10269, 2002 (describing, inter alia, singly- and multiply-halogenated Trp analogs); Babitzke & Yanofsky, J. Biol. Chem. 270: 12452-12456, 1995 (describing, inter alia, methylated and halogenated Trp and other Trp and indole analogs); and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,214,790, 6,169,057, 5,776,970, 4,870,097, 4,576,750 and 4,299,838. Other Trp analogs include variants that are substituted (e.g., by a methyl group) at the α or β carbon and, optionally, also at one or more positions of the indole ring. Amino acids comprising two or more aromatic rings, including substituted, unsubstituted, or alternatively substituted variants thereof, are of interest as Trp analogs. In certain embodiments of the invention the Trp analog, e.g., at position 4, is 5-methoxy, 5-methyl-, 1-methyl-, or 1-formyl-tryptophan. In certain embodiments of the invention a Trp analog (e.g., at position 4) comprising a 1-alkyl substituent, e.g., a lower alkyl (e.g., C1-C5) substituent is used. In certain embodiments, N(α) methyl tryptophan or 5-methyltryptophan is used. In some embodiments, an analog comprising a 1-alkanyol substituent, e.g., a lower alkanoyl (e.g., C1-C5) is used. Examples include 1-acetyl-L-tryptophan and L-β-tryptophan.
In certain embodiments the Trp analog has increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. For example, the indole ring may be substituted by one or more alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups. In certain embodiments the Trp analog participates in a hydrophobic interaction with C3. Such a Trp analog may be located, e.g., at position 4 relative to the sequence of compstatin. In certain embodiments the Trp analog comprises a substituted or unsubstituted bicyclic aromatic ring component or two or more substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic aromatic ring components.
In certain embodiments the Trp analog has increased propensity to form hydrogen bonds with C3 relative to Trp but does not have increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. The Trp analog may have increased polarity relative to Trp and/or an increased ability to participate in an electrostatic interaction with a hydrogen bond donor on C3. Certain exemplary Trp analogs with an increased hydrogen bond forming character comprise an electronegative substituent on the indole ring. Such a Trp analog may be located, e.g., at position 7 relative to the sequence of compstatin.
In certain embodiments of the invention the compstatin analog comprises one or more Ala analogs (e.g., at position 9 relative to the sequence of compstatin), e.g., Ala analogs that are identical to Ala except that they include one or more CH2 groups in the side chain. In certain embodiments the Ala analog is an unbranched single methyl amino acid such as 2-Abu. In certain embodiments of the invention the compstatin analog comprises one or more Trp analogs (e.g., at position 4 and/or 7 relative to the sequence of compstatin) and an Ala analog (e.g., at position 9 relative to the sequence of compstatin).
In certain embodiments of the invention the compstatin analog is a compound that comprises a peptide that has a sequence of (X′aa)n-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly-(X″aa)m, (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein each X′aa and each X″aa is an independently selected amino acid or amino acid analog, wherein Xaa is Trp or an analog of Trp, and wherein n>1 and m>1 and n+m is between 5 and 21. The peptide has a core sequence of Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly, where Xaa is Trp or an analog of Trp, e.g., an analog of Trp having increased propensity to form hydrogen bonds with an H-bond donor relative to Trp but, in certain embodiments, not having increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. For example, the analog may be one in which the indole ring of Trp is substituted with an electronegative moiety, e.g., a halogen such as fluorine. In one embodiment Xaa is 5-fluorotryptophan. Absent evidence to the contrary, one of skill in the art would recognize that any non-naturally occurring peptide whose sequence comprises this core sequence and that inhibits complement activation and/or binds to C3 will have been designed based on the sequence of compstatin. In an alternative embodiment Xaa is an amino acid or amino acid analog other than a Trp analog that allows the Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly peptide to form a β-turn.
In certain embodiments of the invention the peptide has a core sequence of X′aa-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly (SEQ ID NO: 3), where X′aa and Xaa are selected from Trp and analogs of Trp. In certain embodiments of the invention the peptide has a core sequence of X′aa-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly (SEQ ID NO: 3), where X′aa and Xaa are selected from Trp, analogs of Trp, and other amino acids or amino acid analogs comprising at least one aromatic ring. In certain embodiments of the invention the core sequence forms a β-turn in the context of the peptide. The β-turn may be flexible, allowing the peptide to assume two or more conformations as assessed for example, using nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). In certain embodiments X′aa is an analog of Trp that comprises a substituted or unsubstituted bicyclic aromatic ring component or two or more substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic aromatic ring components. In certain embodiments of the invention X′aa is selected from the group consisting of 2-napthylalanine, 1-napthylalanine, 2-indanylglycine carboxylic acid, dihydrotryptophan, and benzoylphenylalanine. In certain embodiments of the invention X′aa is an analog of Trp that has increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. For example, X′aa may be 1-methyltryptophan. In certain embodiments of the invention Xaa is an analog of Trp that has increased propensity to form hydrogen bonds relative to Trp but, in certain embodiments, not having increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. In certain embodiments of the invention the analog of Trp that has increased propensity to form hydrogen bonds relative to Trp comprises a modification on the indole ring of Trp, e.g., at position 5, such as a substitution of a halogen atom for an H atom at position 5. For example, Xaa may be 5-fluorotryptophan.
In certain embodiments of the invention the peptide has a core sequence of X′aa-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly-X″aa (SEQ ID NO: 4), where X′aa and Xaa are each independently selected from Trp and analogs of Trp and X″aa is selected from His, Ala, analogs of Ala, Phe, and Trp. In certain embodiments of the invention X′aa is an analog of Trp that has increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp, such as 1-methyltryptophan or another Trp analog having an alkyl substituent on the indole ring (e.g., at position 1, 4, 5, or 6). In certain embodiments X′aa is an analog of Trp that comprises a substituted or unsubstituted bicyclic aromatic ring component or two or more substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic aromatic ring components. In certain embodiments of the invention X′aa is selected from the group consisting of 2-napthylalanine, 1-napthylalanine, 2-indanylglycine carboxylic acid, dihydrotryptophan, and benzoylphenylalanine. In certain embodiments of the invention Xaa is an analog of Trp that has increased propensity to form hydrogen bonds with C3 relative to Trp but, in certain embodiments, not having increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. In certain embodiments of the invention the analog of Trp that has increased propensity to form hydrogen bonds relative to Trp comprises a modification on the indole ring of Trp, e.g., at position 5, such as a substitution of a halogen atom for an H atom at position 5. For example, Xaa may be 5-fluorotryptophan. In certain embodiments X″aa is Ala or an analog of Ala such as Abu or another unbranched single methyl amino acid. In certain embodiments of the invention the peptide has a core sequence of X′aa-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly-X″aa (SEQ ID NO: 4), where X′aa and Xaa are each independently selected from Trp, analogs of Trp, and amino acids or amino acid analogs comprising at least one aromatic side chain, and X″aa is selected from His, Ala, analogs of Ala, Phe, and Trp. In certain embodiments X″aa is selected from analogs of Trp, aromatic amino acids, and aromatic amino acid analogs.
In certain preferred embodiments of the invention the peptide is cyclic. The peptide may be cyclized via a bond between any two amino acids, one of which is (X′aa)n and the other of which is located within (X″aa)m. In certain embodiments the cyclic portion of the peptide is between 9 and 15 amino acids in length, e.g., 10-12 amino acids in length. In certain embodiments the cyclic portion of the peptide is 11 amino acids in length, with a bond (e.g., a disulfide bond) between amino acids at positions 2 and 12. For example, the peptide may be 13 amino acids long, with a bond between amino acids at positions 2 and 12 resulting in a cyclic portion 11 amino acids in length.
In certain embodiments the peptide comprises or consists of the sequence X′aa1-X′aa2-X′aa3-X′aa4-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly-X″aa1-X″aa2-X″aa3-X″aa4-X″aa5 (SEQ ID NO: 5). In certain embodiments X′aa4 and Xaa are selected from Trp and analogs of Trp, and X′aa1, X′aa2, X′aa3, X″aa1, X″aa2, X″aa3, X″aa4, and X″aa5 are independently selected from among amino acids and amino acid analogs. In certain embodiments X′aa4 and Xaa are selected from aromatic amino acids and aromatic amino acid analogs. Any one or more of X′aa1, X′aa2, X′aa3, X″aa1, X″aa2, X″aa3, X″aa4, and X″aa5 may be identical to the amino acid at the corresponding position in compstatin. In one embodiment, X″aa1 is Ala or a single methyl unbranched amino acid. The peptide may be cyclized via a covalent bond between (i) X′aa1, X′aa2, or X′aa3; and (ii) X″aa2, X″aa3, X″aa4 or X″aa5. In one embodiment the peptide is cyclized via a covalent bond between X′aa2 and X″aa4. In one embodiment the covalently bound amino acid are each Cys and the covalent bond is a disulfide (S—S) bond. In other embodiments the covalent bond is a C—C, C—O, C—S, or C—N bond. In certain embodiments one of the covalently bound residues is an amino acid or amino acid analog having a side chain that comprises a primary or secondary amine, the other covalently bound residue is an amino acid or amino acid analog having a side chain that comprises a carboxylic acid group, and the covalent bond is an amide bond. Amino acids or amino acid analogs having a side chain that comprises a primary or secondary amine include lysine and diaminocarboxylic acids of general structure NH2(CH2)nCH(NH2)COOH such as 2,3-diaminopropionic acid (dapa), 2,4-diaminobutyric acid (daba), and ornithine (orn), wherein n=1 (dapa), 2 (daba), and 3 (orn), respectively. Examples of amino acids having a side chain that comprises a carboxylic acid group include dicarboxylic amino acids such as glutamic acid and aspartic acid. Analogs such as beta-hydroxy-L-glutamic acid may also be used. In some embodiments a peptide is cyclized with a thioether bond, e.g., as described in PCT/US2011/052442 (WO/2012/040259). For example, in some embodiments a disulfide bond in any of the peptides is replaced with a thioether bond. In some embodiments, a cystathionine is formed. In some embodiments the cystathionine is a delta-cystathionine or a gamma-cystathionine. In some embodiments a modification comprises replacement of a Cys-Cys disulfide bond between cysteines at X′aa2 and X″aa4 in SEQ ID NO: 5 (or corresponding positions in other sequences) with addition of a CH2, to form a homocysteine at X′aa2 or X″aa4, and introduction of a thioether bond, to form a cystathionine. In one embodiment, the cystathionine is a gamma-cystathionine. In another embodiment, the cystathionine is a delta-cystathionine. Another modification in accordance with the present invention comprises replacement of the disulfide bond with a thioether bond without the addition of a CH2, thereby forming a lantithionine. In some embodiments a compstatin analog having a thioether in place of a disulfide bond has increased stability, at least under some conditions, as compared with the compstatin analog having the disulfide bond.
In certain embodiments, the compstatin analog is a compound that comprises a peptide having a sequence:
Xaa1-Cys-Val-Xaa2-Gln-Asp-Xaa2*-Gly-Xaa3-His-Arg-Cys-Xaa4 (SEQ ID NO: 6); wherein:
Xaa1 is Ile, Val, Leu, B1-Ile, B1-Val, B1-Leu or a dipeptide comprising Gly-Ile or B1-Gly-Ile, and B1 represents a first blocking moiety;
Xaa2 and Xaa2* are independently selected from Trp and analogs of Trp;
Xaa3 is His, Ala or an analog of Ala, Phe, Trp, or an analog of Trp;
Xaa4 is L-Thr, D-Thr, Ile, Val, Gly, a dipeptide selected from Thr-Ala and Thr-Asn, or a tripeptide comprising Thr-Ala-Asn, wherein a carboxy terminal —OH of any of the L-Thr, D-Thr, Ile, Val, Gly, Ala, or Asn optionally is replaced by a second blocking moiety B2; and the two Cys residues are joined by a disulfide bond. In some embodiments, Xaa4 is Leu, Nle, His, or Phe or a dipeptide selected from Xaa5-Ala and Xaa5-Asn, or a tripeptide Xaa5-Ala-Asn, wherein Xaa5 is selected from Leu, Nle, His or Phe, and wherein a carboxy terminal —OH of any of the L-Thr, D-Thr, Ile, Val, Gly, Leu, Nle, His, Phe, Ala, or Asn optionally is replaced by a second blocking moiety B2; and the two Cys residues are joined by a disulfide bond.
In other embodiments Xaa1 is absent or is any amino acid or amino acid analog, and Xaa2, Xaa2*, Xaa3, and Xaa4 are as defined above. If Xaa1 is absent, the N-terminal Cys residue may have a blocking moiety B1 attached thereto.
In another embodiment, Xaa4 is any amino acid or amino acid analog and Xaa1, Xaa2, Xaa2*, and Xaa3 are as defined above. In another embodiment Xaa4 is a dipeptide selected from the group consisting of: Thr-Ala and Thr-Asn, wherein the carboxy terminal —OH or the Ala or Asn is optionally replaced by a second blocking moiety B2.
In any of the embodiments of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 6, Xaa2 may be Trp.
In any of the embodiments of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 6, Xaa2 may be an analog of Trp comprising a substituted or unsubstituted bicyclic aromatic ring component or two or more substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic aromatic ring components. For example, the analog of Trp may be selected from 2-naphthylalanine (2-NaI), 1-naphthylalanine (1-NaI), 2-indanylglycine carboxylic acid (Ig1), dihydrotrpytophan (Dht), and 4-benzoyl-L-phenylalanine.
In any of the embodiments of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 6, Xaa2 may be an analog of Trp having increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. For example, the analog of Trp may be selected from 1-methyltryptophan, 4-methyltryptophan, 5-methyltryptophan, and 6-methyltryptophan. In one embodiment, the analog of Trp is 1-methyltryptophan. In one embodiment, Xaa2 is 1-methyltryptophan, Xaa2* is Trp, Xaa3 is Ala, and the other amino acids are identical to those of compstatin.
In any of the embodiments of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 6, Xaa2* may be an analog of Trp such as an analog of Trp having increased hydrogen bond forming propensity with C3 relative to Trp, which, in certain embodiments, does not have increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. In certain embodiments the analog of Trp comprises an electronegative substituent on the indole ring. For example, the analog of Trp may be selected from 5-fluorotryptophan and 6-fluorotryptophan.
In certain embodiments of the invention Xaa2 is Trp and Xaa2* is an analog of Trp having increased hydrogen bond forming propensity with C3 relative to Trp which, in certain embodiments, does not have increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. In certain embodiments of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 6, Xaa2 is analog of Trp having increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp such as an analog of Trp selected from 1-methyltryptophan, 4-methyltryptophan, 5-methyltryptophan, and 6-methyltryptophan, and Xaa2* is an analog of Trp having increased hydrogen bond forming propensity with C3 relative to Trp which, in certain embodiments, does not have increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp. For example, in one embodiment Xaa2 is methyltryptophan and Xaa2* is 5-fluorotryptophan.
In certain of the afore-mentioned embodiments, Xaa3 is Ala. In certain of the afore-mentioned embodiments Xaa3 is a single methyl unbranched amino acid, e.g., Abu.
The invention further provides compstatin analogs of SEQ ID NO: 6, as described above, wherein Xaa2 and Xaa2* are independently selected from Trp, analogs of Trp, and other amino acids or amino acid analogs that comprise at least one aromatic ring, and Xaa3 is His, Ala or an analog of Ala, Phe, Trp, an analog of Trp, or another aromatic amino acid or aromatic amino acid analog.
In certain embodiments of the invention the blocking moiety present at the N- or C-terminus of any of the compstatin analogs described herein is any moiety that stabilizes a peptide against degradation that would otherwise occur in mammalian (e.g., human or non-human primate) blood or interstitial fluid. For example, blocking moiety B1 could be any moiety that alters the structure of the N-terminus of a peptide so as to inhibit cleavage of a peptide bond between the N-terminal amino acid of the peptide and the adjacent amino acid. Blocking moiety B2 could be any moiety that alters the structure of the C-terminus of a peptide so as to inhibit cleavage of a peptide bond between the C-terminal amino acid of the peptide and the adjacent amino acid. Any suitable blocking moieties known in the art could be used. In certain embodiments of the invention blocking moiety B1 comprises an acyl group (i.e., the portion of a carboxylic acid that remains following removal of the —OH group). The acyl group typically comprises between 1 and 12 carbons, e.g., between 1 and 6 carbons. For example, in certain embodiments of the invention blocking moiety B1 is selected from the group consisting of: formyl, acetyl, proprionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, isovaleryl, etc. In one embodiment, the blocking moiety B1 is an acetyl group, i.e., Xaa1 is Ac-Ile, Ac-Val, Ac-Leu, or Ac-Gly-Ile.
In certain embodiments of the invention blocking moiety B2 is a primary or secondary amine (—NH2 or —NHR1, wherein R is an organic moiety such as an alkyl group).
In certain embodiments of the invention blocking moiety B1 is any moiety that neutralizes or reduces the positive charge that may otherwise be present at the N-terminus at physiological pH. In certain embodiments of the invention blocking moiety B2 is any moiety that neutralizes or reduces the negative charge that may otherwise be present at the C-terminus at physiological pH.
In certain embodiments of the invention, the compstatin analog is acetylated or amidated at the N-terminus and/or C-terminus, respectively. A compstatin analog may be acetylated at the N-terminus, amidated at the C-terminus, and or both acetylated at the N-terminus and amidated at the C-terminus. In certain embodiments of the invention a compstatin analog comprises an alkyl or aryl group at the N-terminus rather than an acetyl group.
In certain embodiments, the compstatin analog is a compound that comprises a peptide having a sequence:
Xaa1-Cys-Val-Xaa2-Gln-Asp-Xaa2*-Gly-Xaa3-His-Arg-Cys-Xaa4 (SEQ ID NO: 7); wherein:
Xaa1 is Ile, Val, Leu, Ac-Ile, Ac-Val, Ac-Leu or a dipeptide comprising Gly-Ile or Ac-Gly-Ile;
Xaa2 and Xaa2* are independently selected from Trp and analogs of Trp;
Xaa3 is His, Ala or an analog of Ala, Phe, Trp, or an analog of Trp;
Xaa4 is L-Thr, D-Thr, Ile, Val, Gly, a dipeptide selected from Thr-Ala and Thr-Asn, or a tripeptide comprising Thr-Ala-Asn, wherein a carboxy terminal —OH of any of L-Thr, D-Thr, Ile, Val, Gly, Ala, or Asn optionally is replaced by —NH2; and the two Cys residues are joined by a disulfide bond. In some embodiments, Xaa4 is Leu, Nle, His, or Phe or a dipeptide selected from Xaa5-Ala and Xaa5-Asn, or a tripeptide Xaa5-Ala-Asn, wherein Xaa5 is selected from Leu, Nle, His or Phe, and wherein a carboxy terminal —OH of any of the L-Thr, D-Thr, Ile, Val, Gly, Leu, Nle, His, Phe, Ala, or Asn optionally is replaced by a second blocking moiety B2; and the two Cys residues are joined by a disulfide bond.
In some embodiments, Xaa1, Xaa2, Xaa2*, Xaa3, and Xaa4 are as described above for the various embodiments of SEQ ID NO: 6. For example, in certain embodiments Xaa2* is Trp. In certain embodiments Xaa2 is an analog of Trp having increased hydrophobic character relative to Trp, e.g., 1-methyltryptophan. In certain embodiments Xaa3 is Ala. In certain embodiments Xaa3 is a single methyl unbranched amino acid.
In certain embodiments of the invention Xaa1 is Ile and Xaa4 is L-Thr.
In certain embodiments of the invention Xaa1 is Ile, Xaa2* is Trp, and Xaa4 is L-Thr.
The invention further provides compstatin analogs of SEQ ID NO: 7, as described above, wherein Xaa2 and Xaa2* are independently selected from Trp, analogs of Trp, other amino acids or aromatic amino acid analogs, and Xaa3 is His, Ala or an analog of Ala, Phe, Trp, an analog of Trp, or another aromatic amino acid or aromatic amino acid analog.
In certain embodiments of any of the compstatin analogs described herein, an analog of Phe is used rather than Phe.
Table 1 provides a non-limiting list of compstatin analogs useful in the present invention. The analogs are referred to in abbreviated form in the left column by indicating specific modifications at designated positions (1-13) as compared to the parent peptide, compstatin. Consistent with usage in the art, “compstatin” as used herein, and the activities of compstatin analogs described herein relative to that of compstatin, refer to the compstatin peptide amidated at the C-terminus. Unless otherwise indicated, peptides in Table 1 are amidated at the C-terminus. Bold text is used to indicate certain modifications. Activity relative to compstatin is based on published data and assays described therein (WO2004/026328, WO2007044668, Mallik, 2005; Katragadda, 2006). Where multiple publications reporting an activity were consulted, the more recently published value is used, and it will be recognized that values may be adjusted in the case of differences between assays. It will also be appreciated that in certain embodiments of the invention the peptides listed in Table 1 are cyclized via a disulfide bond between the two Cys residues when used in the therapeutic compositions and methods of the invention. Alternate means for cyclizing the peptides are also within the scope of the invention. As noted above, in various embodiments of the invention one or more amino acid(s) of a compstatin analog (e.g., any of the compstatin analogs disclosed herein) can be an N-alkyl amino acid (e.g., an N-methyl amino acid). For example, and without limitation, at least one amino acid within the cyclic portion of the peptide, at least one amino acid N-terminal to the cyclic portion, and/or at least one amino acid C-terminal to the cyclic portion may be an N-alkyl amino acid, e.g., an N-methyl amino acid. In some embodiments of the invention, for example, a compstatin analog comprises an N-methyl glycine, e.g., at the position corresponding to position 8 of compstatin and/or at the position corresponding to position 13 of compstatin. In some embodiments, one or more of the compstatin analogs in Table 1 contains at least one N-methyl glycine, e.g., at the position corresponding to position 8 of compstatin and/or at the position corresponding to position 13 of compstatin. In some embodiments, one or more of the compstatin analogs in Table 1 contains at least one N-methyl isoleucine, e.g., at the position corresponding to position 13 of compstatin. For example, a Thr at or near the C-terminal end of a peptide whose sequence is listed in Table 1 or any other compstatin analog sequence may be replaced by N-methyl Ile. As will be appreciated, in some embodiments the N-methylated amino acids comprise N-methyl Gly at position 8 and N-methyl Ile at position 13. In some embodiments the N-methylated amino acids comprise N-methyl Gly in a core sequence such as SEQ ID NO: 3 or SEQ ID NO: 4. In some embodiments the N-methylated amino acids comprise N-methyl Gly in a core sequence such as SEQ ID NO: 5, SEQ ID NO: 6, or SEQ ID NO: 7.
In certain embodiments of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence selected from sequences 9-36. In certain embodiments of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence selected from SEQ ID NOs: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, and 36. In certain embodiments of the compositions and/or methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence selected from SEQ ID NOs: 30 and 31. In one embodiment of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence of SEQ ID NO: 28. In one embodiment of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence of SEQ ID NO: 32. In one embodiment of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence of SEQ ID NO: 34. In one embodiment of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence of SEQ ID NO: 36.
In some embodiments a blocking moiety B1 comprises an amino acid, which may be represented as Xaa0. In some embodiments blocking moiety B2 comprises an amino acid, which may be represented as XaaN. In some embodiments blocking moiety B1 and/or B2 comprises a non-standard amino acid, such as a D-amino acid, N-alkyl amino acid (e.g., N-methyl amino acid). In some embodiments a blocking moiety B1 and/or B2 comprises a non-standard amino acid that is an analog of a standard amino acid. In some embodiments an amino acid analog comprises a lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, or halogen substituent, as compared with a standard amino acid of which it is an analog. In some embodiments a substituent is on a side chain. In some embodiments a substituent is on an alpha carbon atom. In some embodiments, a blocking moiety B1 comprising an amino acid, e.g., a non-standard amino acid, further comprises a moiety B1a. For example, blocking moiety B1 may be represented as B1a-Xaa0. In some embodiments B1a neutralizes or reduces a positive charge that may otherwise be present at the N-terminus at physiological pH. In some embodiments B1a comprises or consists of, e.g., an acyl group that, e.g., comprises between 1 and 12 carbons, e.g., between 1 and 6 carbons. In certain embodiments blocking moiety B1a is selected from the group consisting of: formyl, acetyl, proprionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, isovaleryl, etc. In some embodiments, a blocking moiety B2 comprising an amino acid, e.g., a non-standard amino acid, may further comprise a moiety B2a For example, blocking moiety B2 may be represented as XaaN-B2a, where N represents the appropriate number for the amino acid (which will depend on the numbering used in the rest of the peptide). In some embodiments B2a neutralizes or reduces a negative charge that may otherwise be present at the C-terminus at physiological pH. In some embodiments B2a comprises or consists of a primary or secondary amine (e.g., NH2). It will be understood that a blocking activity of moiety B1a-Xaa0 and/or XaaN-B2a may be provided by either or both components of the moiety in various embodiments. In some embodiments a blocking moiety or portion thereof, e.g., an amino acid residue, may contribute to increasing affinity of the compound for C3 or C3b and/or improve the activity of the compound. In some embodiments a contribution to affinity or activity of an amino acid residue may be at least as important as a contribution to blocking activity. For example, in some embodiments Xaa0 and/or XaaN in B1a-Xaa0 and/or XaaN-B2a may function mainly to increase affinity or activity of the compound, while B1a and/or B2a may inhibit digestion of and/or neutralize a charge of the peptide. In some embodiments a compstatin analog comprises the amino acid sequence of any of SEQ ID NOs: 5-36, wherein SEQ ID NOs: 5-36 is further extended at the N- and/or C-terminus. In some embodiments, the sequence may be represented as B1a-Xaa0-SEQUENCE-XaaN-B2a, where SEQUENCE represents any of SEQ ID NOs: 5-36, wherein B1a and B2a may independently be present or absent. For example, in some embodiments a compstatin analog comprises B1a-Xaa0-X′aa1-X′aa2-X′aa3-X′aa4-Gln-Asp-Xaa-Gly-X″aa1-X″aa2-X″aa3-X″aa4-X″aa5-XaaN-B2a (SEQ ID NO: 69), where X′aa1-X′aa2-X′aa3-X′aa4, Xaa, X″aa1, X″aa2, X″aa3, X″aa4, and X″aa5 are as set forth above for SEQ ID NO: 5.
In some embodiments a compstatin analog comprises B1a-Xaa0-Xaa1-Cys-Val-Xaa2-Gln-Asp-Xaa2*-Gly-Xaa3-His-Arg-Cys-Xaa4-XaaN-B2a (SEQ ID NO: 70), where Xaa1, Xaa2, Xaa2*, Xaa3, and Xaa4 are as set forth above for SEQ ID NO: 6 or wherein Xaa1, Xaa2, Xaa2*, Xaa3, and Xaa4 are as set forth for SEQ ID NO: 6 or SEQ ID NO: 7.
In some embodiments a compstatin analog comprises B1a-Xaa0-Xaa1-Xaa2-Xaa3-Xaa4-Xaa5-Xaa6-Xaa7-Xaa8-Xaa9-Xaa10-Xaa11-Xaa12-Xaa13-XaaN-B2a (SEQ ID NO: 71) wherein Xaa1, Xaa2, Xaa3, Xaa4, Xaa5, Xaa6, Xaa7, Xaa8, Xaa9, Xaa10, Xaa11, Xaa12, and Xaa13 are identical to amino acids at positions 1-13 of any of SEQ ID NOs: 9-36.
In some embodiments Xaa0 and/or XaaN in any compstatin analog sequence comprises an amino acid that comprises an aromatic ring having an alkyl substituent at one or more positions. In some embodiments an alkyl substituent is a lower alkyl substituent. For example, in some embodiments an alkyl substituent is a methyl or ethyl group. In some embodiments a substituent is located at any position that does not destroy the aromatic character of the compound. In some embodiments a substituent is located at any position that does not destroy the aromatic character of a ring to which the substituent is attached. In some embodiments a substituent is located at position 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. In some embodiments Xaa0 comprises an O-methyl analog of tyrosine, 2-hydroxyphenylalanine or 3-hydroxyphenylalanine. For purposes of the present disclosure, a lower case “m” followed by a three letter amino acid abbreviation may be used to specifically indicate that the amino acid is an N-methyl amino acid. For example, where the abbreviation “mGly” appears herein, it denotes N-methyl glycine (also sometimes referred to as sarcosine or Sar). In some embodiments Xaa0 is or comprises mGly, Tyr, Phe, Arg, Trp, Thr, Tyr(Me), Cha, mPhe, mVal, mile, mAla, DTyr, DPhe, DArg, DTrp, DThr, DTyr(Me), mPhe, mVal, mile, DAla, or DCha. For example, in some embodiments a compstatin analog comprises a peptide having a sequence B1-Ile-[Cys-Val-Trp(Me)-Gln-Asp-Trp-mGly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys]-mIle-B2 (SEQ ID NO: 72) or B1-Ile-[Cys-Val-Trp(Me)-Gln-Asp-Trp-mGly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys]-mIle-B2 (SEQ ID NO: 73). The two Cys residues are joined by a disulfide bond in the active compounds. In some embodiments the peptide is acetylated at the N-terminus and/or amidated at the C-terminus. In some embodiments B1 comprises B1a-Xaa0 and/or B2 comprises XaaN-B2a, as described above. For example, in some embodiments B1 comprises or consists of Gly, mGly, Tyr, Phe, Arg, Trp, Thr, Tyr(Me), mPhe, mVal, mIle, mAla, DTyr, DPhe, DTrp, DCha, DAla and B2 comprises NH2, e.g., a carboxy terminal —OH of mIle is replaced by NH2. In some embodiments B1 comprises or consists of mGly, Tyr, DTyr, or Tyr(Me) and B2 comprises NH2, e.g., a carboxy terminal —OH of mIle is replaced by NH2. In some embodiments an Ile at position Xaa1 is replaced by Gly. Complement inhibition potency and/or C3b binding parameters of selected compstatin analogs are described in WO/2010/127336 (PCT/US2010/033345) and/or in Qu, et al., Immunobiology (2012), doi:10.1016/j.imbio.2012.06.003.
In some embodiments a blocking moiety or portion thereof, e.g., an amino acid residue, may contribute to increasing affinity of the compound for C3 or C3b and/or improve the activity of the compound. In some embodiments a contribution to affinity or activity of an amino acid or amino acid analog may be more significant than a blocking activity.
In certain embodiments of the compositions and methods of the invention the compstatin analog has a sequence as set forth in Table 1, but where the Ac— group is replaced by an alternate blocking moiety B1, as described herein. In some embodiments the —NH2 group is replaced by an alternate blocking moiety B2, as described herein.
In one embodiment, the compstatin analog binds to substantially the same region of the β chain of human C3 as does compstatin. In one embodiment the compstatin analog is a compound that binds to a fragment of the C-terminal portion of the β chain of human C3 having a molecular weight of about 40 kDa to which compstatin binds (Soulika, A. M., et al., Mol. Immunol., 35:160, 1998; Soulika, A. M., et al., Mol. Immunol. 43(12):2023-9, 2006). In certain embodiments the compstatin analog is a compound that binds to the binding site of compstatin as determined in a compstatin-C3 structure, e.g., a crystal structure or NMR-derived 3D structure. In certain embodiments the compstatin analog is a compound that could substitute for compstatin in a compstatin-C3 structure and would form substantially the same intermolecular contacts with C3 as compstatin. In certain embodiments the compstatin analog is a compound that binds to the binding site of a peptide having a sequence set forth in Table 1, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A or another compstatin analog sequence disclosed herein in a peptide-C3 structure, e.g., a crystal structure. In certain embodiments the compstatin analog is a compound that binds to the binding site of a peptide having SEQ ID NO: 30 or 31 in a peptide-C3 structure, e.g., a crystal structure. In certain embodiments the compstatin analog is a compound that could substitute for the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 9-36, e.g., a compound that could substitute for the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A or another compstatin analog sequence disclosed herein in a peptide-C3 structure and would form substantially the same intermolecular contacts with C3 as the peptide. In certain embodiments the compstatin analog is a compound that could substitute for the peptide of SEQ ID NO: 30 or 31 in a peptide-C3 structure and would form substantially the same intermolecular contacts with C3 as the peptide.
One of ordinary skill in the art will readily be able to determine whether a compstatin analog binds to a fragment of the C-terminal portion of the β chain of C3 using routine experimental methods. For example, one of skill in the art could synthesize a photocrosslinkable version of the compstatin analog by including a photo-crosslinking amino acid such as p-benzoyl-L-phenylalanine (Bpa) in the compound, e.g., at the C-terminus of the sequence (Soulika, A. M., et al, supra). Optionally additional amino acids, e.g., an epitope tag such as a FLAG tag or an HA tag could be included to facilitate detection of the compound, e.g., by Western blotting. The compstatin analog is incubated with the fragment and crosslinking is initiated. Colocalization of the compstatin analog and the C3 fragment indicates binding. Surface plasmon resonance may also be used to determine whether a compstatin analog binds to the compstatin binding site on C3 or a fragment thereof. One of skill in the art would be able to use molecular modeling software programs to predict whether a compound would form substantially the same intermolecular contacts with C3 as would compstatin or a peptide having the sequence of any of the peptides in Table 1, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36, or in some embodiments SEQ ID NO: 30 or 31, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A or another compstatin analog sequence disclosed herein.
Compstatin analogs may be prepared by various synthetic methods of peptide synthesis known in the art via condensation of amino acid residues, e.g., in accordance with conventional peptide synthesis methods, may be prepared by expression in vitro or in living cells from appropriate nucleic acid sequences encoding them using methods known in the art. For example, peptides may be synthesized using standard solid-phase methodologies as described in Malik, supra, Katragadda, supra, WO2004026328, and/or WO2007062249. Potentially reactive moieties such as amino and carboxyl groups, reactive functional groups, etc., may be protected and subsequently deprotected using various protecting groups and methodologies known in the art. See, e.g., “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis”, 3rd ed. Greene, T. W. and Wuts, P. G., Eds., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 1999. Peptides may be purified using standard approaches such as reversed-phase HPLC. Separation of diasteriomeric peptides, if desired, may be performed using known methods such as reversed-phase HPLC. Preparations may be lyophilized, if desired, and subsequently dissolved in a suitable solvent, e.g., water. The pH of the resulting solution may be adjusted, e.g. to physiological pH, using a base such as NaOH. Peptide preparations may be characterized by mass spectrometry if desired, e.g., to confirm mass and/or disulfide bond formation. See, e.g., Mallik, 2005, and Katragadda, 2006.
In certain embodiments, a compstatin analog may be or comprise a cell-reactive compstatin analog. Cell-reactive compstatin analogs are compounds that comprise a compstatin analog moiety and a cell-reactive functional group that is capable of reacting with a functional group exposed at the surface of a cell, e.g., under physiological conditions, to form a covalent bond. The cell-reactive compstatin analog thus becomes covalently attached to the cell. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, a cell-tethered compstatin analog protects the cell from complement-mediated damage by, for example, binding to C3 (which may be in the form of C3(H2O)) at the cell surface and/or in the vicinity of the cell and inhibiting C3 cleavage and activation, and/or by binding to C3b and inhibiting its deposition on the cell or participation in the complement activation cascade. In some aspects of the invention, isolated cells are contacted with a cell-reactive compstatin analog ex vivo (outside the body). In some aspects of the invention, the cells are present in an isolated tissue or organ, e.g., a tissue or organ to be transplanted into a subject. In some aspects of the invention, cells are contacted with a cell-reactive compstatin analog in vivo, by administering the cell-reactive compstatin analog to a subject. The cell-reactive compstatin analog becomes covalently attached to cells in vivo. In some aspects, the inventive approach protects cells, tissues, and/or organs from the deleterious effects of complement activation for at least two weeks, without need for retreatment during that time.
In some embodiments, the invention provides and/or utilizes compstatin analogs comprising a targeting moiety that binds non-covalently to a target molecule present at the surface of cells or tissues or to an extracellular substance not attached to cells or tissues. Such compstatin analogs are referred to herein as “targeted compstatin analogs”). Often the target molecule is a protein or carbohydrate attached to the cell membrane and exposed at the cell surface. The targeting moiety targets the compstatin analog to a cell, tissue, or location susceptible to complement activation. In some aspects of the invention, isolated cells are contacted with a targeted compstatin analog ex vivo (outside the body). In some aspects of the invention, the cells are present in an isolated tissue or organ, e.g., a tissue or organ to be transplanted into a subject. In some aspects of the invention, a targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject and becomes non-covalently attached to a cell, tissue, or extracellular substance in vivo. In some aspects, the inventive approach protects cells, tissues, and/or organs from the deleterious effects of complement activation for at least two weeks, without need for retreatment during that time. In some embodiments, a targeted compstatin analog comprises both a targeting moiety and a cell-reactive moiety. The targeting moiety targets the compstatin analog, e.g., to a particular cell type, by binding non-covalently to a molecule on such cells. The cell-reactive moiety then binds covalently to the cell or extracellular substance. In other embodiments, a targeted compstatin analog does not comprise a cell-reactive moiety.
In some aspects, a compstatin analog may be or comprise a long-acting compstatin analog, wherein the long-acting compstatin analogs comprise a moiety such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) that prolongs the lifetime of the compound in the body (e.g., by reducing its clearance from the blood). In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog does not comprise a targeting moiety or a cell-reactive moiety. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog comprises a targeting moiety and/or a cell-reactive moiety.
A compstatin analog, optionally linked to a cell-reactive moiety or targeting moiety, can be modified by addition of a molecule such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) or similar molecules to stabilize the compound, reduce its immunogenicity, increase its lifetime in the body, increase or decrease its solubility, and/or increase its resistance to degradation. Methods for pegylation are well known in the art (Veronese, F. M. & Harris, Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 54, 453-456, 2002; Davis, F. F., Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 54, 457-458, 2002); Hinds, K. D. & Kim, S. W. Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 54, 505-530 (2002; Roberts, M. J., Bentley, M. D. & Harris, J. M. Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 54, 459-476; 2002); Wang, Y. S. et al. Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 54, 547-570, 2002). A wide variety of polymers such as PEGs and modified PEGs, including derivatized PEGs to which polypeptides can conveniently be attached are described in Nektar Advanced Pegylation 2005-2006 Product Catalog, Nektar Therapeutics, San Carlos, Calif., which also provides details of appropriate conjugation procedures. In another embodiment a compstatin analog is fused to the Fc domain of an immunoglobulin or a portion thereof. In some other embodiments a compstatin analog is conjugated to an albumin moiety or to an albumin binding peptide. Thus in some embodiments a compstatin analog is modified with one or more polypeptide or non-polypeptide components, e.g., the compstatin analog is pegylated or conjugated to another moiety. In some embodiments the component is not the Fc domain of an immunoglobulin or a portion thereof. A compstatin analog can be provided as a multimer or as part of a supramolecular complex, which can include either a single molecular species or multiple different species (e.g., multiple different analogs).
In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is a multivalent compound comprising a plurality of compstatin analog moieties covalently or noncovalently linked to a polymeric backbone or scaffold. The compstatin analog moieties can be identical or different. In certain embodiments of the invention the multivalent compound comprises multiple instances, or copies, of a single compstatin analog moiety. In other embodiments of the invention the multivalent compound comprises one or more instances of each of two of more non-identical compstatin analog moieties, e.g., 3, 4, 5, or more different compstatin analog moieties. In certain embodiments of the invention the number of compstatin analog moieties (“n”) is between 2 and 6. In other embodiments of the invention n is between 7 and 20. In other embodiments of the invention n is between 20 and 100. In other embodiments n is between 100 and 1,000. In other embodiments of the invention n is between 1,000 and 10,000. In other embodiments n is between 10,000 and 50,000. In other embodiments n is between 50,000 and 100,000. In other embodiments n is between 100,000 and 1,000,000.
The compstatin analog moieties may be attached directly to the polymeric scaffold or may be attached via a linking moiety that connects the compstatin analog moiety to the polymeric scaffold. The linking moiety may be attached to a single compstatin analog moiety and to the polymeric scaffold. Alternately, a linking moiety may have multiple compstatin analog moieties joined thereto so that the linking moiety attaches multiple compstatin analog moieties to the polymeric scaffold.
In some embodiments, the compstatin analog comprises an amino acid having a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine, e.g., a Lys residue. For example, a Lys residue, or a sequence comprising a Lys residue, is added at the N-terminus and/or C-terminus of the compstatin analog. In some embodiments, the Lys residue is separated from the cyclic portion of the compstatin analog by a rigid or flexible spacer. The spacer may, for example, comprise a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated alkyl chain, oligo(ethylene glycol) chain, and/or other moieties, e.g., as described in Section VI with regard to linkers. The length of the chain may be, e.g., between 2 and 20 carbon atoms. In other embodiments the spacer is a peptide. The peptide spacer may be, e.g., between 1 and 20 amino acids in length, e.g., between 4 and 20 amino acids in length. Suitable spacers can comprise or consist of multiple Gly residues, Ser residues, or both, for example. Optionally, the amino acid having a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine and/or at least one amino acid in a spacer is a D-amino acid. Any of a variety of polymeric backbones or scaffolds could be used. For example, the polymeric backbone or scaffold may be a polyamide, polysaccharide, polyanhydride, polyacrylamide, polymethacrylate, polypeptide, polyethylene oxide, or dendrimer. Suitable methods and polymeric backbones are described, e.g., in WO98/46270 (PCT/US98/07171) or WO98/47002 (PCT/US98/06963). In one embodiment, the polymeric backbone or scaffold comprises multiple reactive functional groups, such as carboxylic acids, anhydride, or succinimide groups. The polymeric backbone or scaffold is reacted with the compstatin analogs. In one embodiment, the compstatin analog comprises any of a number of different reactive functional groups, such as carboxylic acids, anhydride, or succinimide groups, which are reacted with appropriate groups on the polymeric backbone. Alternately, monomeric units that could be joined to one another to form a polymeric backbone or scaffold are first reacted with the compstatin analogs and the resulting monomers are polymerized. In another embodiment, short chains are prepolymerized, functionalized, and then a mixture of short chains of different composition are assembled into longer polymers.
IV. Compstatin MimeticsThe structure of compstatin is known in the art, and NMR structures for a number of compstatin analogs having higher activity than compstatin are also known (Malik, supra). Structural information may be used to design compstatin mimetics.
In one embodiment, the compstatin mimetic is any compound that competes with compstatin or any compstatin analog (e.g., a compstatin analog whose sequence is set forth in Table 1) for binding to C3 or a fragment thereof (such as a 40 kD fragment of the β chain to which compstatin binds). In some embodiments, the compstatin mimetic has an activity equal to or greater than that of compstatin. In some embodiments, the compstatin mimetic is more stable, orally available, or has a better bioavailability than compstatin. The compstatin mimetic may be a peptide, nucleic acid, or small molecule. In certain embodiments the compstatin mimetic is a compound that binds to the binding site of compstatin as determined in a compstatin-C3 structure, e.g., a crystal structure or a 3-D structure derived from NMR experiments. In certain embodiments the compstatin mimetic is a compound that could substitute for compstatin in a compstatin-C3 structure and would form substantially the same intermolecular contacts with C3 as compstatin. In certain embodiments the compstatin mimetic is a compound that binds to the binding site of a peptide having a sequence set forth in Table 1, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36 or in certain embodiments SEQ ID NO: 30 or 31 or other compstatin analog sequence, in a peptide-C3 structure. In certain embodiments the compstatin mimetic is a compound that could substitute for a peptide having a sequence set forth in Table 1, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36 or in certain embodiments SEQ ID NO: 30 or 31 or other compstatin analog sequence, in a peptide-C3 structure and would form substantially the same intermolecular contacts with C3 as the peptide. In certain embodiments the compstatin mimetic has a non-peptide backbone but has side chains arranged in a sequence designed based on the sequence of compstatin.
One of skill in the art will appreciate that once a particular desired conformation of a short peptide has been ascertained, methods for designing a peptide or peptidomimetic to fit that conformation are well known. See, e.g., G. R. Marshall (1993), Tetrahedron, 49: 3547-3558; Hruby and Nikiforovich (1991), in Molecular Conformation and Biological Interactions, P. Balaram & S. Ramasehan, eds., Indian Acad. of Sci., Bangalore, PP. 429-455), Eguchi M, Kahn M., Mini Rev Med Chem., 2(5):447-62, 2002. Of particular relevance to the present invention, the design of peptide analogs may be further refined by considering the contribution of various side chains of amino acid residues, e.g., for the effect of functional groups or for steric considerations as described in the art for compstatin and analogs thereof, among others.
It will be appreciated by those of skill in the art that a peptide mimic may serve equally well as a peptide for the purpose of providing the specific backbone conformation and side chain functionalities required for binding to C3 and inhibiting complement activation. Accordingly, it is contemplated as being within the scope of the present invention to produce and utilize C3-binding, complement-inhibiting compounds through the use of either naturally-occurring amino acids, amino acid derivatives, analogs or non-amino acid molecules capable of being joined to form the appropriate backbone conformation. A non-peptide analog, or an analog comprising peptide and non-peptide components, is sometimes referred to herein as a “peptidomimetic” or “isosteric mimetic,” to designate substitutions or derivations of a peptide that possesses much the same backbone conformational features and/or other functionalities, so as to be sufficiently similar to the exemplified peptides to inhibit complement activation. More generally, a compstatin mimetic is any compound that would position pharmacophores similarly to their positioning in compstatin, even if the backbone differs.
The use of peptidomimetics for the development of high-affinity peptide analogs is well known in the art. Assuming rotational constraints similar to those of amino acid residues within a peptide, analogs comprising non-amino acid moieties may be analyzed, and their conformational motifs verified, by means of the Ramachandran plot (Hruby & Nikiforovich 1991), among other known techniques.
One of skill in the art will readily be able to establish suitable screening assays to identify additional compstatin mimetics and to select those having desired inhibitory activities. For example, compstatin or an analog thereof could be labeled (e.g., with a radioactive or fluorescent label) and contacted with C3 in the presence of different concentrations of a test compound. The ability of the test compound to diminish binding of the compstatin analog to C3 is evaluated. A test compound that significantly diminishes binding of the compstatin analog to C3 is a candidate compstatin mimetic. For example, a test compound that diminishes steady-state concentration of a compstatin analog-C3 complex, or that diminishes the rate of formation of a compstatin analog-C3 complex by at least 25%, or by at least 50%, is a candidate compstatin mimetic. One of skill in the art will recognize that a number of variations of this screening assay may be employed. Compounds to be screened include natural products, libraries of aptamers, phage display libraries, compound libraries synthesized using combinatorial chemistry, etc. The invention encompasses synthesizing a combinatorial library of compounds based upon the core sequence described above and screening the library to identify compstatin mimetics. Any of these methods could also be used to identify new compstatin analogs having higher inhibitory activity than compstatin analogs tested thus far. It will be appreciated that compstatin mimetics could be used in the cell-reactive compounds of the invention, and the invention provides such cell-reactive compstatin mimetics.
V. Cell-Reactive or Long-Acting Compstatin AnalogsAs noted above, in certain embodiments, the invention provides and/or utilizes a variety of cell-reactive compstatin analogs. In some aspects, a cell-reactive compstatin analog comprises a compound of formula A-L-M, wherein A is a moiety that comprises a cell-reactive functional group J, L is an optionally present linking portion, and M comprises a compstatin analog moiety. The compstatin analog moiety can comprise any compstatin analog, e.g., any compstatin analog described above, in various embodiments. Formula A-L-M encompasses embodiments in which A-L is present at the N-terminus of the compstatin analog moiety, embodiments in which A-L is present at the C-terminus of the compstatin analog moiety, embodiments in which A-L is attached to a side chain of an amino acid of the compstatin analog moiety, and embodiments where the same or different A-Ls are present at both ends of M. It will be appreciated that when certain compstatin analog(s) are present as a compstatin analog moiety in a compound of formula A-L-M, a functional group of the compstatin analog will have reacted with a functional group of L to form a covalent bond to A or L. For example, a cell-reactive compstatin analog in which the compstatin analog moiety comprises a compstatin analog that contains an amino acid with a side chain containing a primary amine (NH2) group (which compstatin analog can be represented by formula R′—(NH2)), can have a formula R1—NH-L-A in which a new covalent bond to L (e.g., N—C) has been formed and a hydrogen lost. Thus the term “compstatin analog moiety” includes molecular structures in which at least one atom of a compstatin analog participates in a covalent bond with a second moiety, which may, e.g., modification of a side chain. Similar considerations apply to compstatin analog moieties present in multivalent compound described above. In some embodiments, a blocking moiety at the N-terminus or C-terminus of a compstatin analog, e.g., a compstatin analog described in Section IV above, is replaced by A-L in the structure of a cell-reactive compstatin analog. In some embodiments, A or L comprises a blocking moiety. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive compstatin analog has a molar activity of at least about 10%, 20%, or 30%, e.g., between 30% and 40%, between 30% and 50%, between 30% and 60%, between 30% and 70%, between 30% and 80%, between 30% and 90%, or more, of the activity of a corresponding compstatin analog having the same amino acid sequence (and, if applicable, one or more blocking moiet(ies)) but not comprising a cell-reactive moiety. In some embodiments in which a cell-reactive compstatin analog comprises multiple compstatin analog moieties, the molar activity of the cell-reactive compstatin analog is at least about 10%, 20%, or 30%, e.g., between 30% and 40%, between 30% and 50%, between 30% and 60%, between 30% and 70%, between 30% and 80%, between 30% and 90%, or more, of the sum of the activities of said compstatin analog moieties.
Cell-reactive moiety A can comprise any of a variety of different cell-reactive functional groups J, in various embodiments. In general, a cell-reactive functional group may be selected based at least in part on factors such as (a) the particular functional group to be targeted; (b) the ability of the reactive functional group to react with the target functional group under physiologically acceptable ex vivo conditions (e.g., physiologically acceptable pH and osmolarity) and/or in vivo conditions (e.g., in blood); (c) the specificity of the reaction between the reactive functional group and the target functional group under physiologically acceptable ex vivo conditions and/or in vivo; (d) the stability (e.g., under in vivo conditions) of the covalent bond that would result from reaction of the reactive functional group with its target functional group; (e) the ease of synthesizing a cell-reactive compstatin analog comprising the reactive functional group, etc. In some embodiments, a reactive functional group that reacts with its target chemical group without releasing a leaving group is selected. In some embodiments, a reactive functional group that results in release of a leaving group upon reaction with a target is selected. Compounds containing such groups may be useful, e.g., to monitor progress and/or extent of a reaction. In some embodiments, a leaving group is physiologically acceptable to cells, tissues, or organs in the amount generated (e.g., based on concentration and/or absolute amount generated) and/or is medically acceptable to a subject in the amount generated in vivo (e.g., based on concentration in a relevant body fluid such as blood and/or based on the absolute amount generated). In some embodiments, a leaving group generated ex vivo is at least in part removed, e.g., by washing cells or by washing or perfusing a tissue or organ, e.g., with saline.
In many embodiments, a cell-reactive functional group of use in the invention reacts with a side chain of an amino acid residue and/or with an N-terminal amino group or C-terminal carboxyl group of a protein. In some embodiments, the cell-reactive functional group is reactive with sulfhydryl (—SH) groups, which are found in the side chains of cysteine residues. In some embodiments, a maleimide group is used. Maleimide groups react with sulfhydryl groups of cysteine residues of proteins at physiologic pH and form a stable thioether linkage. In some embodiments, a haloacetyl group, such as an iodoacetyl or a bromoacetyl group, is used. Haloacetyls react with sulfhydryl groups at physiologic pH. The reaction of the iodoacetyl group proceeds by nucleophilic substitution of iodine with a sulfur atom from a sulfhydryl group resulting in a stable thioether linkage. In other embodiments, an iodoacetamide group is used. In some embodiments, the cell-reactive functional group reacts with amino (—NH2) groups, which are present at the N-termini of proteins and in the side chain of lysine residues (ε-amino group). In some embodiments an activated ester, e.g., a succinimidyl ester (i.e., NHS ester) is used. For example, N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) or its water-soluble analog (sulfo-NHS) can be used in the synthesis, whereby the resulting cell-reactive compstatin analog comprises an NHS ester. In some embodiments, the cell-reactive functional group reacts with carboxyl (—COOH) groups, which are present at the C-termini of proteins and in the side chains of various amino acid residues. In some embodiments, the cell-reactive compstatin analog is reactive with hydroxyl (—OH) groups, which are present in the side chains of various amino acids and in carbohydrate moieties of glycosylated proteins.
In general, linking portion L can comprise any one or more aliphatic and/or aromatic moieties consistent with the formation of a stable compound joining the linked moieties. The term “stable”, as used herein, preferably refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintain the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time, e.g., to be useful for one or more purposes described herein. In some embodiments, L comprises a saturated or unsaturated, substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, aliphatic chain having a length of between 1 and 30, between 1 and 20, between 1 and 10, between 1 and 6, or 5 or less carbon atoms, where length refers to the number of C atoms in the main (longest) chain. In some embodiments, the aliphatic chain comprises one or more heteroatoms (O, N, S), which may be independently selected. In some embodiments, at least 50% of the atoms in the main chain of L are carbon atoms. In some embodiments, L comprises a saturated alkyl moiety (CH2)n, wherein n is between 1 and 30.
In some embodiments, L comprises one or more heteroatoms and has a length of between 1 and 1000, between 1 and 800, between 1 and 600, between 1 and 400, between 1 and 300, between 1 and 200, between 1 and 100, between 1 and 50, between 1 and 30, or between 1 and 10 total carbon atoms in a chain. In some embodiments, L comprises an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety (—(O—CH2—CH2-)n) wherein n is between 1 and 500, between 1 and 400, between 1 and 300, between 1 and 200, between 1 and 100, between 10 and 200, between 200 and 300, between 100 and 200, between 40 and 500, between 30 and 500, between 20 and 500, between 10 and 500, between 1 and 40, between 1 and 30, between 1 and 20, or between 1 and 10.
In some embodiments, L comprises an unsaturated moiety such as —CH═CH— or —CH2—CH═CH—; a moiety comprising a non-aromatic cyclic ring system (e.g., a cyclohexyl moiety), an aromatic moiety (e.g., an aromatic cyclic ring system such as a phenyl moiety); an ether moiety (—C—O—C—); an amide moiety (—C(═O)—N—); an ester moiety (—CO—O—); a carbonyl moiety (—C(═O)—); an imine moiety (—C═N—); a thioether moiety (—C—S—C—); an amino acid residue; and/or any moiety that can be formed by the reaction of two compatible reactive functional groups. In certain embodiments, one or more moieties of a linking portion or cell-reactive moiety is/are substituted by independent replacement of one or more of the hydrogen (or other) atoms thereon with one or more moieties including, but not limited to aliphatic; aromatic, aryl; alkyl, aralkyl, alkanoyl, aroyl, alkoxy; thio; F; Cl; Br; I; —NO2; —CN; —CF3; —CH2CF3; —CHCl2; —CH2OH; —CH2CH2OH; —CH2NH2; —CH2SO2CH3; - or -GRG1 wherein G is —O—, —S—, —NRG2-, —C(═O)—, —S(═O)—, —SO2-, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O)NRG2-, —OC(═O)—, —NRG2C(═O)—, —OC(═O)O—, —OC(═O)NRG2-, —NRG2C(═O)O—, —NRG2C(═O)NRG2-, —C(═S)—, —C(═S)S—, —SC(═S)—, —SC(═S)S—, —C(═NRG2)-, —C(═NRG2)O—, —C(═NRG2)NRG3-, —OC(═NRG2)-, —NRG2C(═NRG3)-, —NRG2SO2-, —NRG2SO2NRG3-, or —SO2NRG2-, wherein each occurrence of RG1, RG2 and RG3 independently includes, but is not limited to, hydrogen, halogen, or an optionally substituted aliphatic, aromatic, or aryl moiety. It will be appreciated that cyclic ring systems when present as substituents may optionally be attached via a linear moiety. Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable compounds useful in any one or more of the methods described herein, e.g., useful for the treatment of one or more disorders and/or for contacting a cell, tissue, or organ, as described herein, and/or useful as intermediates in the manufacture of one or more such compounds.
L can comprise one or more of any of the moieties described in the preceding paragraph, in various embodiments. In some embodiments, L comprises two or more different moieties linked to one another to form a structure typically having a length of between 1 to about 60 atoms, between 1 to about 50 atoms, e.g., between 1 and 40, between 1 and 30, between 1 and 20, between 1 and 10, or between 1 and 6 atoms, where length refers to the number of atoms in the main (longest) chain. In some embodiments, L comprises two or more different moieties linked to one another to form a structure typically having between 1 to about 40, e.g., between 1 and 30, e.g., between 1 and 20, between 1 and 10, or between 1 and 6 carbon atoms in the main (longest) chain. In general, the structure of such a cell-reactive compstatin analog can be represented by formula A-(LPj)j-M, wherein j is typically between 1 and 10, and each LPj is independently selected from among the moieties described in the preceding paragraph. In many embodiments, L comprises one or more carbon-containing chains such as —(CH2)n- and/or —(O—CH2—CH2-)n, which are joined covalently to each other and/or to a cell-reactive functional group or compstatin analog, e.g., by moieties (e.g., amide, ester, or ether moieties) that result from the reaction of two compatible reactive functional groups. In some embodiments, L comprises an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety and/or a saturated alkyl chain. In some embodiments, L comprises —(CH2)m—C(═O)—NH—(CH2CH2O)n(CH2)pC(═O)— or —(CH2)m—C(═O)—NH—(CH2)p(OCH2CH2)nC(═O)—. In some embodiments, m, n, and p are selected so that the number of carbons in the chain is between 1 and 500, e.g., between 2 and 400, between 2 and 300, between 2 and 200, between 2 and 100, between 2 and 50, between 4 and 40, between 6 and 30, or between 8 and 20. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 500, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 400, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 300, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 200, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 100, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 50, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 25, and/or p is between 2 and 10. In some embodiments, m is between 2 and 10, n is between 1 and 8, and/or p is between 2 and 10. Optionally, at least one —CH2— is replaced by CH—R, wherein R can be any substituent. Optionally, at least one —CH2— is replaced by a heteroatom, cyclic ring system, amide, ester, or ether moiety. In some embodiments, L does not comprise an alkyl group having more than 3 carbon atoms in the longest chain. In some embodiments, L does not comprise an alkyl group having more than 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 carbon atoms in the longest chain.
In some embodiments of the invention, A comprises a cell-reactive functional group J and a linker L1 comprising a linking portion LP1 and a reactive functional group that reacts with the compstatin analog to generate A-M In some embodiments, a bifunctional linker L2 comprising two reactive functional groups and a linking portion LP2 is used. The reactive functional groups of L react with appropriate reactive functional groups of A and M to produce a cell-reactive compstatin analog A-L-M. In some embodiments, the compstatin analog comprises a linker L3 comprising a linking portion LP3. For example, as discussed below, a linker comprising a reactive functional group may be present at the N- or C-terminus or a moiety comprising a reactive functional group may be attached to the N- or C-terminus via a linker. Thus L may contain multiple linking portions LP contributed, e.g., by A, by linker(s) used to join A and M, and/or by the compstatin analog. It will be understood that, when present in the structure A-L-M, certain reactive functional group(s) present prior to reaction in L1, L2, L3, etc., will have undergone reaction, so that only a portion of said reactive functional group(s) will be present in the final structure A-L-M, and the compound will contain moieties formed by reaction of said functional groups. In general, if a compound contains two or more linking portions, the linking portions can be the same or different, and can be independently selected in various embodiments. Multiple linking portions LP can be attached to one another to form a larger linking portion L, and at least some of such linking portions can have one or more compstatin analog(s) and/or cell-reactive functional group(s) attached thereto. In molecules comprising multiple compstatin analogs, the compstatin analogs can be the same or different and, if different, can be independently selected. The same applies to the linking portions and reactive functional groups. The invention encompasses the use of multivalent compstatin analogs comprising one or more cell-reactive functional group(s) and use of concatamers of compstatin analogs comprising one or more cell-reactive functional group(s). In some embodiments, at least one linkage is a stable noncovalent linkage such as a biotin/(strept)avidin linkage or other noncovalent linkage of approximately equivalent strength.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive compstatin analog comprises a compstatin analog in which any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A is extended by one or more amino acids at the N-terminus, C-terminus, or both, wherein at least one of the amino acids has a side chain that comprises a reactive functional group such as a primary or secondary amine, a sulfhydryl group, a carboxyl group (which may be present as a carboxylate group), a guanidino group, a phenol group, an indole ring, a thioether, or an imidazole ring. In some embodiments, the amino acid(s) is/are L-amino acids. In some embodiments, any one or more of the amino acid(s) is a D-amino acid. If multiple amino acids are added, the amino acids can be independently selected. In some embodiments, the reactive functional group (e.g., a primary or secondary amine) is used as a target for addition of a moiety comprising a cell-reactive functional group. Amino acids having a side chain that comprises a primary or secondary amine include lysine (Lys) and diaminocarboxylic acids of general structure NH2(CH2)nCH(NH2)COOH such as 2,3-diaminopropionic acid (dapa), 2,4-diaminobutyric acid (daba), and ornithine (orn), wherein n=1 (dapa), 2 (daba), and 3 (orn), respectively. In some embodiments at least one amino acid is cysteine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, arginine, tyrosine, tryptophan, methionine, or histidine. Cysteine has a side chain comprising a sulfhydryl group. Aspartic acid and glutamic acid have a side chain comprising a carboxyl group (ionizable to a carboxylate group). Arginine has a side chain comprising a guanidino group. Tyrosine has a side chain comprising a phenol group (ionizable to a phenolate group). Tryptophan has a side chain comprising an indole ring include, e.g., tryptophan. Methionine has a side chain comprising a thioether group include, e.g., methionine. Histidine has a side chain comprising an imidazole ring. A wide variety of non-standard amino acids having side chains that comprise one or more such reactive functional group(s) are available, including naturally occurring amino acids and amino acids not found in nature. See, e.g., Hughes, B. (ed.), Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins in Organic Chemistry, Volumes 1-4, Wiley-VCH (2009-2011); Blaskovich, M., Handbook on Syntheses of Amino Acids General Routes to Amino Acids, Oxford University Press, 2010. The invention encompasses embodiments in which one or more non-standard amino acid(s) is/are used to provide a target for addition of a moiety comprising a cell-reactive functional group. Any one or more of the amino acid(s) may be protected as appropriate during synthesis of the compound. For example, one or more amino acid(s) may be protected during reaction(s) involving the target amino acid side chain. In some embodiments, wherein a sulfhydryl-containing amino acid is used as a target for addition of a moiety comprising a cell-reactive functional group, the sulfhydryl is protected while the compound is being cyclized by formation of an intramolecular disulfide bond between other amino acids such as cysteines.
In the discussion in this paragraph, an amino acid having a side chain containing an amine group is used as an example. The invention encompasses analogous embodiments in which an amino acid having a side chain containing a different reactive functional group is used. In some embodiments, an amino acid having a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine is attached directly to the N-terminus or C-terminus of any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A or via a peptide bond. In some embodiments, an amino acid having a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine is attached to the N- or C-terminus of any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A or via a linking portion, which may contain any one or more of the linking moieties described above. In some embodiments, at least two amino acids are appended to either or both termini. The two or more appended amino acids may be joined to each other by peptide bonds or at least some of the appended amino acids may be joined to each other by a linking portion, which may contain any one or more of the linking moieties described herein. Thus in some embodiments, a cell-reactive compstatin analog comprises a compstatin analog moiety M of formula B1-R1-M1-R2-B2, wherein M1 represents any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A, either R1 or R2 may be absent, at least one of R1 and R2 comprises an amino acid having a side chain that contains a primary or secondary amine, and B1 and B2 are optionally present blocking moieties. R1 and/or R2 may be joined to M1 by a peptide bond or a non-peptide bond. R1 and/or R2 may comprise a linking portion LP3. For example, R1 can have formula M2-LP3 and/or R2 can have formula LP3-M2 wherein LP3 is a linking portion, and M2 comprises at least one amino acid having a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine. For example, M2 can be Lys or an amino acid chain comprising Lys. In some embodiments, LP3 comprises of consists of one or more amino acids. For example, LP3 can be between 1 and about 20 amino acids in length, e.g., between 4 and 20 amino acids in length. In some embodiments, LP3 comprises or consist of multiple Gly, Ser, and/or Ala residues. In some embodiments, LP3 does not comprise an amino acid that comprises a reactive SH group, such as Cys. In some embodiments, LP3 comprises an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety and/or a saturated alkyl chain. In some embodiments, LP3 is attached to the N-terminal amino acid of M1 via an amide bond. In some embodiments, LP3 is attached to the C-terminal amino acid of M1 via an amide bond. The compound may be further extended at either or both termini by addition of further linking portion(s) and/or amino acid(s). The amino acids can the same or different and, if different, can be independently selected. In some embodiments, two or more amino acids having side chains comprising reactive functional groups are used, wherein the reactive functional groups can be the same or different. The two or more reactive functional groups can be used as targets for addition of two or more moieties. In some embodiments, two or more cell-reactive moieties are added. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive moiety and a targeting moiety are added. In some embodiments, a linker and/or cell-reactive moiety is attached to an amino acid side chain after incorporation of the amino acid into a peptide chain. In some embodiments, a linker and/or cell-reactive moiety is already attached to the amino acid side chain prior to use of the amino acid in the synthesis of a cell-reactive compstatin analog. For example, a Lys derivative having a linker attached to its side chain can be used. The linker may comprise a cell-reactive functional group or may subsequently be modified to comprise a cell-reactive functional group.
Certain cell-reactive compstatin analogs are described in further detail below. In the following discussion, a peptide having the amino acid sequence Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr (SEQ ID NO: 37) (corresponding to the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 28, wherein asterisks in SEQ ID NO: 37 represent cysteines joined by a disulfide bond in the active compound, and (1Me)Trp represents 1-methyl-tryptophan)), is used as an exemplary compstatin analog moiety; maleimide (abbreviated Mal) is used as an example of a cell-reactive functional group; (CH2)n and (O—CH2—CH2)n are used as examples of linking portions; lysine is used as an example of an amino acid comprising a reactive functional group (in some compounds), and acetylation and amidation of the N- and C-termini, respectively, are used as optionally present exemplary blocking moieties in some compounds and are represented in italics, i.e., as Ac and NH2 respectively. It will be appreciated that the compounds can be prepared using a variety of synthetic approaches and using a variety of precursors. The discussion of various synthetic approaches and precursors below is not intended to limit the invention. In general, any of the features of any of the compounds described below or herein can be freely combined with feature(s) of other compounds described below or elsewhere herein, and the invention encompasses such embodiments.
In some embodiments, the cell-reactive moiety is provided by a cell-reactive compound comprising a maleimide group (as a cell-reactive functional group) and an alkanoic acid (RCOOH), where R is an alkyl group. For example, 6-malemeidocaproic acid (Mal-(CH2)5—COOH), depicted below, can be used.
In some embodiments, the cell-reactive moiety is provided by a derivative of an alkanoic acid in which the carboxylic acid moiety has been activated, e.g., the OH moiety has been converted to a better leaving group. For example, the carboxyl group of compound I may be reacted with EDC, followed by reaction with NHS (which can optionally be provided as water-soluble sulfo-NHS), resulting in an N-hydroxysuccinimide ester derivative of 6-malemeidocaproic acid, i.e., 6-maleimidohexanoic acid N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) ester (depicted below).
The compound of SEQ ID NO: 37 can be modified at the N- and/or C-terminus to generate a cell-reactive compstatin analog. For example, compound II can be used to generate the following cell-reactive compstatin analog by reaction with the N-terminal amino group of Ile.
Maleimide-(CH2)5—C(═O)-Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 38). It will be appreciated that in SEQ ID NO: 38 the —C(═O) moiety is attached to the immediately C-terminal amino acid (Ile), via a C—N bond, wherein the N is part of the amino acid and is not shown.
In other embodiments, a maleimide group is linked to Thr at the C-terminus, resulting in the following cell-reactive compstatin analog:
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive compstatin analog can be synthesized using bifunctional linker (e.g., a heterobifunctional linker). An exemplary heterobifunctional linker comprising (CH2—CH2—O)n and (CH2)m (where m=2) moieties is shown below:
Compound III comprises a maleimide group as a cell-reactive functional group and an NHS ester moiety that reacts readily with an amino group (e.g., an N-terminal amino group or an amino group of an amino acid side chain).
An embodiment of compound III in which n=2 can be used to generate the following cell-reactive compstatin analog using the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 37:
It will be appreciated that in the compound of SEQ ID NO: 40 a —C(═O) moiety is attached to the N-terminal amino acid (Ile residue via a C—N bond, wherein the N is part of the amino acid and is not shown. In some embodiments a linker has the formula of Compound III wherein n≥1. Exemplary values for n in a (CH2—CH2—O)n moiety are provided herein.
In some embodiments, the alkyl chain that links the maleimide moiety to the rest of the molecule contains more or fewer methylene units, the oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety contains more or fewer ethylene glycol units, and/or there are more or fewer methylene units flanking either or both sides of the oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety, as compared with the compound of SEQ ID NO: 39 or SEQ ID NO: 40. Exemplary cell-reactive compstatin analogs illustrative of a few such variations are presented below (SEQ ID NOs: 41-46):
In some embodiments, SEQ ID NO: 37 is extended to comprise a Lys residue at the N- or C-terminus of the peptide, e.g., as exemplified below for a C-terminal linkage:
In some embodiments, a Lys residue is attached to the N- or C-terminus of SEQ ID NO: 37 via a peptide linker, e.g., as exemplified below for a C-terminal linkage:
In some embodiments, a linker comprising a primary or secondary amine is added to the N- or C-terminus of a compstatin analog. In some embodiments, the linker comprises an alkyl chain and/or an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety. For example, NH2(CH2CH2O)nCH2C(═O)OH (e.g., 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid (AEEAc) or 11-amino-3,6,9-trioxaundecanoic acid) or an NHS ester thereof (e.g., an NHS ester of 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid or 11-amino-3,6,9-trioxaundecanoic acid), can be used. In some embodiments, the resulting compound is as follows (wherein the portion contributed by the linker is shown in bold):
In some embodiments, a Lys residue is attached to the N- or C-terminus of SEQ ID NO: 37 via a linker comprising a non-peptide portion. For example, the linker can comprise an alkyl chain, oligo(ethylene glycol) chain, and/or cyclic ring system. In some embodiments, 8-AEEAc or an NHS ester thereof is used, resulting (in the case of attachment of Lys at the C-terminus) in the following compound (wherein the portion contributed by 8-AEEAc is shown in bold):
It will be appreciated that in SEQ ID NOs: 49 and 50, a —C(═O) moiety is attached to the adjacent Ile residue via a C—N bond, wherein the N is part of the amino acid and is not shown. Similarly, in SEQ ID NO: 51, a —C(═O) moiety is attached to the adjacent Lys residue via a C—N bond, wherein the N is part of the amino acid and is not shown. It will also be appreciated that that in SEQ ID NO: 51 the NH moiety is attached to the immediately N-terminal amino acid (Thr), via a C—N bond, wherein the C is the carbonyl carbon of the amino acid and is not shown.
The compounds of SEQ ID NOs: 47-51 can readily be modified at the primary amine group to produce a cell-reactive compstatin analog. For example, the compounds of SEQ ID NOs: 47-51 (or other compounds comprising a primary or secondary amine and a compstatin analog moiety) can be reacted with 6-maleimidocaproic acid N-succinimidyl ester to produce the following cell-reactive compstatin analogs:
In another embodiment, a cell-reactive compstatin analog is represented as: Ac-Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-Lys-C(═O)—CH2(OCH2CH2)2NH(C(═O)—(CH2)5-Mal)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 57).
The invention provides variants of SEQ ID NOs: 38-57 in which -Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr- is replaced by an amino acid sequence comprising the amino acid sequence of any other compstatin analog, e.g., of any of SEQ ID NOs 3-27 or 29-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A with the proviso that blocking moiet(ies) present at the N- and/or C-termini of a compstatin analog may be absent, replaced by a linker (which may comprise a blocking moiety), or attached to a different N- or C-terminal amino acid present in the corresponding variant(s).
Other bifunctional cross-linkers comprising a maleimide as a cell-reactive moiety and an NHS ester as an amine-reactive moiety of use in various embodiments of the invention include, e.g., succinimidyl 4-(p-maleimidophenyl)butyrate (SMPB); succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (SMCC); N-γ-maleimidobutyryl-oxysuccinimide ester (GMBS). Addition of a sulfonate to the NHS ring results in water-soluble analogs such as sulfo-succinimidyl(4-iodoacetyl)-aminobenzoate (sulfo-SIAB), sulfo-succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (sulfo-SMCC), sulfo-succinimidyl 4-(p-maleimidophenyl)butyrate (sulfo-SMPB), sulfo-N-γ-maleimidobutyryl-oxysuccinimide ester (sulfo-GMBS) etc., which can avoid the need for an organic solvent. In some embodiments, a long chain version of any of the foregoing, comprising a spacer arm between the NHS ester moiety and the remainder of the molecule, is used. The spacer can comprise, e.g., an alkyl chain. An example is succinimidyl-4-[N-Maleimidomethyl]cyclohexane-1-carboxy-[6-amidocaproate].
In some embodiments, a bifunctional linker comprising an NHS ester (as an amine-reactive moiety) and an iodoacetyl group (reactive with sulfhydryl groups) is used. Such linkers include, e.g., N-succinimidyl(4-iodoacetyl)-aminobenzoate (SIAB); succinimidyl 6-[(iodoacetyl)-amino]hexanoate (SIAX); succinimidyl 6-[6-(((iodoacetyl)amino)-hexanoyl) amino]hexanoate (SIAXX); succinimidyl 4-((iodoacetyl)amino)methyl)-cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (SIAC); succinimidyl (iodoacetyl)amino)methyl-cyclohexane-1-carbonyl)amino)hexanoate (SIACX);
In some embodiments, a bifunctional linker comprising an NHS ester (as an amine-reactive moiety) and a pyridy disulfide group (as a cell-reactive moiety reactive with sulfhydryl groups) is used. Examples include N-succinimidyl 3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionate (SPDP); succinimidyloxycarbonyl-α-methyl-α-(2-pyridyldithio)toluene (SMPT) and versions comprising a sulfonate on the NHS ring and/or a spacer comprising an alkyl chain between the NHS ester moiety and the rest of the molecule (e.g., succinimidyl 6-(3-[2-pyridyldithio]-propionamido)hexanoate) (LC-SPDP). Variations of such linkers that include additional or different moieties could be used. For example, a longer or shorter alkyl chain could be used in a spacer, or an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety instead of an alkyl chain.
In general, a cell-reactive compstatin analog can be synthesized using a variety of approaches. Cell-reactive compounds that comprise a cell-reactive functional group and a linker can often be purchased as preformed building blocks. For example, 6-malemeidocaproic acid and 6-maleimidocaproic acid N-hydroxysuccinimide ester can be purchased from various suppliers. Alternately, such compounds can be synthesized using methods known in the art. See, e.g., Keller O, Rudinger J. Helv Chim Acta. 58(2):531-41, 1975 and Hashida S, et al., J Appl Biochem., 6(1-2):56-63, 1984. See also, Hermanson, G. supra, and references therein, for discussion of methods and reagents of use for synthesizing conjugates. In general, the invention encompasses any method of producing a compound comprising a compstatin analog moiety and a cell-reactive functional group, and the resulting compounds.
In some embodiments, an amino acid having a linker attached to a side chain is used in the synthesis of a linear peptide. The linear peptide can be synthesized using standard methods for peptide synthesis known in the art, e.g., standard solid-phase peptide synthesis. The linear peptide is then cyclized (e.g., by oxidation of the Cys residues to form an intramolecular disulfide). The cyclic compound may then be reacted with a linker comprising a cell-reactive functional group. In other embodiments, a moiety comprising a cell-reactive functional group is reacted with a linear compound prior to cyclization thereof. In general, reactive functional groups can be appropriately protected to avoid undesired reaction with each other during synthesis of a cell-reactive compstatin analog. The cell-reactive functional group, any of the amino acid side chains, and/or either or both termini of the peptide may be protected during the reaction and subsequently deprotected. For example, SH groups of Cys residues and/or SH-reactive moieties such as maleimides can be protected until after cyclization to avoid reaction between them. The reaction conditions are selected based at least in part on the requirements of the particular reactive functional group(s) to achieve reasonable yield in a reasonable time period. Temperature, pH, and the concentration of the reagents can be adjusted to achieve the desired extent or rate of reaction. See, e.g., Hermanson, supra. The desired product can be purified, e.g., to remove unreacted compound comprising the cell-reactive functional group, unreacted compstatin analog, linker(s), products other than the desired cell-reactive compstatin analog that may have been generated in the reaction, other substances present in the reaction mixture, etc. Compositions and methods for making the cell-reactive compstatin analogs, and intermediates in the synthesis, are aspects of the invention.
In some aspects of the invention, linker(s) described above are used in the production of compstatin analogs comprising a moiety such as a polyethylene glycol (PEG) chain or other polymer(s) that, e.g., stabilize the compound, increase its lifetime in the body, increase its solubility, decrease its immunogenicity, and/or increase its resistance to degradation. Without limiting the invention in any way, such a moiety may be referred to herein as a “clearance reducing moiety” (CRM), and a compstatin analog comprising such a moiety may be referred to as a “long-acting compstatin analog” (LACA). In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog has an average plasma half-life of at least 1 day, e.g., 1-3 days, 3-7 days, 7-14 days, or 14-28 days, when administered IV at a dose of 10 mg/kg to humans or to non-human primates, or a dose of about 1-3 mg/kg, 3-5 mg/kg, 5-10 mg/kg, e.g., 7 mg/kg. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog has an average plasma half-life of at least 1 day, e.g., 1-3 days, 3-7 days, 7-14 days, or 14-28 days, when administered subcutaneously at, e.g., a dose of about 1-3 mg/kg, 3-5 mg/kg, 5-10 mg/kg, e.g., 7 mg/kg to humans or to non-human primates. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog has an average plasma half-life (e.g., a terminal half-life) of between about 4-10, 5-9, 5-8, 6-9, 7-9, or 8-9 days, e.g., about 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5 or 10 days when administered intravenously at, e.g., a dose of about 1-3 mg/kg, 3-5 mg/kg, or 5-10 mg/kg, e.g., 7 mg/kg to humans or to non-human primates. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog has an average plasma half-life (e.g., a terminal half-life) of between about 4-10, 5-9, 5-8, 6-9, 7-9, or 8-9 days, e.g., about 4, 4.5, 5, 5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 9.5 or 10 days, when administered subcutaneously at, e.g., a dose of about 1-3 mg/kg, 3-5 mg/kg, 5-10 mg/kg, e.g., 7 mg/kg to humans or to non-human primates. In certain embodiments a long-acting compstatin analog is characterized in that it is extensively absorbed from the site of administration during the time period following subcutaneous injection and provides, e.g., at or after about 1-2 days following administration, a blood level comparable to that which would be achieved had the same amount of compound been administered intravenously instead. In some embodiments, the blood level at or after about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or more days following administration of a subcutaneous dose is within about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, or 25% of the blood level which would be achieved had the same amount of compound been administered intravenously instead. See, e.g.,
As noted above, in some embodiments a compstatin analog of any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A. 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A is extended by one or more amino acids at the N-terminus, C-terminus, or both, wherein at least one of the amino acids has a side chain that comprises a reactive functional group such as a primary or secondary amine, a sulfhydryl group, a carboxyl group (which may be present as a carboxylate group), a guanidino group, a phenol group, an indole ring, a thioether, or an imidazole ring, which facilitate conjugation with a reactive functional group to attach a CRM to the compstatin analog. It will be understood that a corresponding compstatin analog not comprising the CRM may also lack one or more such amino acids which are present in the long-acting compstatin analog to which it corresponds. Thus, a corresponding compstatin analog comprising any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A. 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A and lacking a CRM will be understood to “have the same amino acid sequence” as SEQ ID NO: 3-36, 37, 37A. 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A, respectively. For example, a corresponding compstatin analog comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36 and lacking a CRM will be understood to “have the same amino acid sequence” as SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36, respectively.
In some embodiments, a plasma half-life is a terminal half-life after administration of a single IV dose. In some embodiments, a plasma half-life is a terminal half-life after steady state has been reached following administration of multiple IV doses. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog achieves a Cmax in plasma at least 5-fold as great as that of a corresponding compstatin analog not comprising the CRM, e.g., between 5- and 50-fold as great, following administration of a single IV dose to a primate, or following administration of multiple IV doses. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog achieves a Cmax in plasma between 10- and 20-fold as great as that of a corresponding compstatin analog not comprising the CRM following administration of a single IV dose to a primate, or following administration of multiple IV doses.
In some embodiments a primate is human. In some embodiments a primate is a non-human primate, e.g., a monkey, such as a Cynomolgus monkey or Rhesus monkey.
In some embodiments, renal clearance of a long-acting compstatin analog during the first 24 hours following administration IV at a dose of 10 mg/kg or 20 mg/kg to humans or to non-human primates is reduced by at least a factor of 2, e.g., by a factor of 2-5, 5-10, 10-50, or 50-100-fold or 100-150-fold or 150-200 fold as compared with renal clearance of a corresponding compstatin analog. It will be understood that in various embodiments such a reduction in renal clearance may be observed following administration via other routes such as subcutaneous administration and/or using other doses, e.g., other doses described herein, e.g., 20 mg/kg.
The concentration of compstatin analog can be measured in blood and/or urine samples using, e.g., UV, HPLC, mass spectrometry (MS) or antibody to the CRM, or combinations of such methods, such as LC/MS or LC/MS/MS. Pharmacokinetic parameters such as half-life and clearance can be determined using methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Pharmacokinetic analysis can be performed, e.g., with WinNonlin software v 5.2 (Pharsight Corporation, St. Louis, Mo.) or other suitable programs.
In certain embodiments a CRM is stable in physiological conditions for at least 24 hours or more. In certain embodiments a CRM is stable in mammalian, e.g., primate, e.g., human or non-human primate (e.g., monkey) blood, plasma, or serum for at least 24 hours. In various embodiments at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, of the CRM molecules remains intact upon incubation in physiological conditions for 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 120 hours, 144 hours, 168 hours, or more. In various embodiments at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, or more, of the CRM molecules remains intact upon incubation in blood, plasma, or serum at 37 degrees C. for 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, 120 hours, 144 hours, 168 hours, or more. Incubation may be performed using a CRM at a concentration of between 1 microgram/ml to about 100 mg/ml in various embodiments. Samples may be analyzed at various time points. Size or intactness may be assessed using, e.g., chromatography (e.g., HPLC), mass spectrometry, Western blot, or any other suitable method. Such stability characteristics may be conferred on a moiety conjugated to the CRM. In various embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a CRM may have any of the afore-mentioned stability characteristics. In some aspects intact with regard to a long-acting compstatin analog means that the compstatin analog moiety remains conjugated to the CRM and the CRM size remains about the same as at the start of incubation or administration.
In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog has a molar activity of at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, e.g., between 30% and 40%, between 30% and 50%, between 30% and 60%, between 30% and 70%, between 30% and 80%, between 30% and 90%, or more, of the activity of a corresponding compstatin analog having the same amino acid sequence (and, if applicable, one or more blocking moiet(ies)) but not comprising a CRM. In some embodiments wherein a long-acting compstatin analog comprises multiple compstatin analog moieties, the molar activity of the long-acting compstatin analog is at least about 10%, 20%, or 30%, e.g., between 30% and 40%, between 30% and 50%, between 30% and 60%, between 30% and 70%, between 30% and 80%, between 30% and 90%, or more, of the sum of the activities of said compstatin analog moieties.
In some embodiments, a polyethylene glycol (PEG) comprises a (CH2CH2O)n moiety having a molecular weight of at least 500 daltons.
In some embodiments, a linker described above comprises an (CH2CH2O)n moiety having an average molecular weight of between about 500; 1,000; 1,500; 2,000; 5,000; 10,000; 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 50,000; 60,000; 70,000; 80,000; 90,000; and 100,000 daltons.
In some embodiments the average molecular weight of a PEG is at least 20,000 daltons, up to about 100,000; 120,000; 140,000; 160,000; 180,000; or 200,000 daltons. “Average molecular weight” refers to the number average molecular weight. In some embodiments, the polydispersity D of a (CH2CH2O)n moiety is between 1.0005 and 1.50, e.g., between 1.005 and 1.10, 1.15, 1.20, 1.25, 1.30, 1.40, or 1.50, or any value between 1.0005 and 1.50.
In some embodiments, a (CH2CH2O)n moiety is monodisperse and the polydispersity of a (CH2CH2O)n moiety is 1.0. Such monodisperse (CH2CH2O)n moieties are known in the art and are commercially available from Quanta BioDesign (Powell, Ohio), and include, by way of nonlimiting example, monodisperse moieties where n is 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 24.
In some embodiments, a compound comprises multiple (CH2CH2O)n moieties wherein the total molecular weight of said (CH2CH2O)n moieties is between about 1,000; 5,000; 10,000; 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 50,000; 60,000; 70,000; 80,000; 90,000; and 100,000 daltons. In some embodiments the average total molecular weight of the compound or (CH2CH2O)n moieties is at least 20,000 daltons, up to about 100,000; 120,000; 140,000; 160,000; 180,000; or 200,000 daltons. In some embodiments, the compound comprises multiple (CH2CH2O)n moieties having defined lengths, e.g., n=4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, or 30 or more. In some embodiments, the compound comprises a sufficient number of (CH2CH2O)n moieties having defined lengths to result in a total molecular weight of said (CH2CH2O)n moieties of between about 1,000; 5,000; 10,000; 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 50,000; 60,000; 70,000; 80,000; 90,000; and 100,000 daltons. In some embodiments the average total molecular weight of the compound or (CH2CH2O)n moieties is at least 20,000 daltons, up to about 100,000; 120,000; 140,000; 160,000; 180,000; or 200,000 daltons. In some embodiments n is between about 30 and about 3000.
In some embodiments a compstatin analog moiety is attached at each end of a linear PEG. A bifunctional PEG having a reactive functional group at each end of the chain may be used, e.g., as described above. In some embodiments the reactive functional groups are identical while in some embodiments different reactive functional groups are present at each end.
In some embodiments, multiple (CH2CH2O)n moieties are provided as a branched structure. The branches may be attached to a linear polymer backbone (e.g., as a comb-shaped structure) or may emanate from one or more central core groups, e.g., as a star structure. In some embodiments, a branched molecule has 3 to 10 (CH2CH2O)n chains. In some embodiments, a branched molecule has 4 to 8 (CH2CH2O)n chains. In some embodiments, a branched molecule has 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, or 3 (CH2CH2O)n chains. In some embodiments, a star-shaped molecule has 10-100, 10-50, 10-30, or 10-20 (CH2CH2O)n chains emanating from a central core group. In some embodiments a long-acting compstatin analog thus may comprise, e.g., 3-10 compstatin analog moieties, e.g., 4-8 compstatin analog moieties, each attached to a (CH2CH2O)n chain via a functional group at the end of the chain. In some embodiments a long-acting compstatin analog may comprise, e.g., 10-100 compstatin analog moieties, each attached to a (CH2CH2O)n chain via a functional group at the end of the chain. In some embodiments, branches (sometimes referred to as “arms”) of a branched or star-shaped PEG contain about the same number of (CH2CH2O) moieties. In some embodiments, at least some of the branch lengths may differ. It will be understood that in some embodiments one or more (CH2CH2O)n chains does not have a compstatin analog moiety attached thereto. In some embodiments at least about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 100% of the chains has a compstatin analog moiety attached thereto.
In general and compounds depicted herein, a polyethylene glycol moiety is drawn with the oxygen atom on the right side of the repeating unit or the left side of the repeating unit. In cases where only one orientation is drawn, the present invention encompasses both orientations (i.e., (CH2CH2O)n and (OCH2CH2)n) of polyethylene glycol moieties for a given compound or genus, or in cases where a compound or genus contains multiple polyethylene glycol moieties, all combinations of orientations are encompasses by the present disclosure.
Formulas of some exemplary monofunctional PEGs comprising a reactive functional group are illustrated below. For illustrative purposes, formulas in which the reactive functional group(s) comprise an NHS ester are depicted, but other reactive functional groups could be used, e.g., as described above. In some embodiments, the (CH2CH2O)n are depicted as terminating at the left end with a methoxy group (OCH3) but it will be understood that the chains depicted below and elsewhere herein may terminate with a different OR moiety (e.g., an aliphatic group, an alkyl group, a lower alkyl group, or any other suitable PEG end group) or an OH group. It will also be appreciated that moieties other than those depicted may connect the (CH2CH2O)n moieties with the NHS group in various embodiments.
In some embodiments, a monofunctional PEG is of formula A:
wherein “Reactive functional group” and n are as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein;
- R1 is hydrogen, aliphatic, or any suitable end group; and
- T is a covalent bond or a C1-12 straight or branched, hydrocarbon chain wherein one or more carbon units of T are optionally and independently replaced by —O—, —S—, —N(Rx)—, —C(O)—, —C(O)O—, —OC(O)—, —N(Rx)C(O)—, —C(O)N(Rx)—, —S(O)—, —S(O)2—, —N(Rx)SO2—, or —SO2N(Rx)—; and
- each Rx is independently hydrogen or C1-6 aliphatic.
Exemplary monofunctional PEGs of formula A include:
In Formula I, the moiety comprising the reactive functional group has the general structure —CO—(CH2)m—COO—NHS, where m=2. In some embodiments, a monofunctional PEGs has the structure of Formula I, where m is between 1 and 10, e.g., between 1 and 5. For example, in some embodiments m is 3, as shown below:
In Formula II, the moiety comprising the reactive functional group has the general structure —(CH2)m—COO—NHS, where m=1. In some embodiments a monofunctional PEG has the structure of Formula II, where m is between 1 and 10 (e.g., wherein m is 5 as shown in Formula III below), or wherein m is 0 (as shown below in Formula
In some embodiments a bifunctional linear PEG comprises a moiety comprising a reactive functional group at each of its ends. The reactive functional groups may be the same (homobifunctional) or different (heterobifunctional). In some embodiments the structure of a bifunctional PEG may be symmetric, wherein the same moiety is used to connect the reactive functional group to oxygen atoms at each end of the —(CH2CH2O)n chain. In some embodiments different moieties are used to connect the two reactive functional groups to the PEG portion of the molecule. The structures of exemplary bifunctional PEGs are depicted below. For illustrative purposes, formulas in which the reactive functional group(s) comprise an NHS ester are depicted, but other reactive functional groups could be used.
In some embodiments, a bifunctional linear PEG is of formula B:
wherein each T and “Reactive functional group” is independently as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein, and n is as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein.
Exemplary bifunctional PEGs of formula B include:
In Formula IV, the moiety comprising the reactive functional group has the general structure —(CH2)m—COO—NHS, where m=1. In some embodiments, a bifunctional PEG has the structure of Formula IV, where m is between 1 and 10, e.g., between 1 and 5. In certain embodiments m is 0, e.g., embodiments the moiety comprising the reactive functional group has the general structure —COO—NHS. For example, in some embodiments a bifunctional PEG has the structure of Formula IVa, as shown below:
In Formula V, the moiety comprising the reactive functional group has the general structure —CO—(CH2)m—COO—NHS, where m=2. In some embodiments, a bifunctional PEGs has the structure of Formula V, where m is between 1 and 10, e.g., between 1 and 5. In certain embodiments, for example, m is 2, as shown below:
In some embodiments, the present invention provides a compstatin analog conjugated to a polymer. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compstatin analog conjugates of PEG-containing compounds and genera depicted herein. In some embodiments, a functional group (for example, an amine, hydroxyl, or thiol group) on a compstatin analog is reacted with a PEG-containing compound having a “reactive functional group” as described herein, to generate such conjugates. By way of example, Formulae III and IV, respectively, can form compstatin analog conjugates having the structure:
wherein,
represents the attachment point of an amine group on a compstatin analog. In certain embodiments, an amine group is a lysine side chain group.
It will be appreciated that corresponding conjugates can be formed with any of the PEG-containing compounds and genera depicted herein, depending on the choice of reactive functional group and/or compstatin functional group. For example, Formulae IVa and Va, respectively, can form compstatin analog conjugates having the following structures
In certain embodiments, the PEG component of such conjugates has an average molecular weight of between about 20 kD-100 kD, about 20 kD-90 kD, about 20 kD-80 kD, about 20 kD-70 kD, about 20 kD-60 kD, about 20 kD-50 kD, about 30 kD-80 kD, about 30 kD-70 kD, about 30 kD-60 kD, about 30 kD-50 kD, about 30 kD-45 kD, about 35 kD-50 kD, about 35 kD-45 kD, about 36 kD-44 kD, about 37 kD-43 kD, about 38 kD-42 kD, or about 39 kD-41 kD. In certain embodiments, the PEG component of such conjugates has an average molecular weight of about 40 kD.
The term “bifunctional” or “bifunctionalized” is sometimes used herein to refer to a compound comprising two compstatin analog moieties linked to a CRM. Such compounds may be designated with the letter “BF”. In some embodiments a bifunctionalized compound is symmetrical. In some embodiments the linkages between the CRM and each of the compstatin analog moieties of a bifunctionalized compound are the same. In some embodiments, each linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog of a bifunctionalized compound comprises a carbamate. In some embodiments, each linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog of a bifunctionalized compound comprises a carbamate and does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, each compstatin analog of a bifunctionalized compound is directly linked to a CRM via a carbamate. In some embodiments, each compstatin analog of a bifunctionalized compound is directly linked to a CRM via a carbamate, and the bifunctionalized compound has the structure:
In some embodiments of formulae and embodiments described herein,
represents point of attachment of a lysine side chain group in a compstatin analog having the structure:
wherein the symbol “” denotes the point of attachment of a chemical moiety to the remainder of a molecule or chemical formula.
In some embodiments, a branched, comb, or star-shaped PEG comprises a moiety comprising a reactive functional group at the end of each of multiple —(CH2CH2O)n chains. The reactive functional groups may be the same or there may be at least two different groups. In some embodiments, a branched, comb, or star-shaped PEG is of the following formulae:
wherein each R2 is independently a “Reactive functional group” or R1, and each T, n, and “Reactive functional group” is independently as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. The structure of exemplary branched PEGs (having 8 arms, or branches) comprising NHS moieties as reactive functional groups is depicted below:
The structure of exemplary branched PEGs (having 4 arms, or branches) comprising NHS moieties as reactive functional groups is depicted below:
The number of branches emanating from the backbone may be varied. For example, the number 4 in the above formulae VI and VII may be changed to any other integer between 0 and 10 in various embodiments. In certain embodiments, one or more branches does not contain a reactive function group and the branch terminates with a —CH2CH2OH or —CH2CH2OR group, as described above.
In some embodiments a branched PEG has the structure of Formula VII, VIII, or IX (or variants thereof having different numbers of branches) with the proviso that x is
In some embodiments a branched PEG has the structure of Formula VII, VIII, or IX (or variants thereof having different numbers of branches) with the proviso that x is
Of course the methylene (CH2) group in the above x moiety may instead comprise a longer alkyl chain (CH2)m, where m is up to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, or 30, or may comprise one or more other moieties described herein.
In some embodiments, exemplary branched PEGs having NHS or maleimide reactive groups are depicted below:
In some embodiments, a variant of Formula X or XI are used, wherein 3 or each of the 4 branches comprise a reactive functional group.
Still other examples of PEGS may be represented as follows:
As noted above, it will be appreciated that, as described herein, in various embodiments any of a variety of moieties may be incorporated between the peptide component and (CH2CH2O)n—R moiety of a long-acting compstatin analog, such as an linear alkyl, ester, amide, aromatic ring (e.g., a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl), a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl structure, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments such moiet(ies) may render the compound more susceptible to hydrolysis, which may release the peptide portion of the compound from the CRM. In some embodiments, such release may enhance the in vivo tissue penetration and/or activity of the compound. In some embodiments hydrolysis is general (e.g., acid-base) hydrolysis. In some embodiments hydrolysis is enzyme-catalyzed, e.g., esterase-catalyzed. Of course both types of hydrolysis may occur. Examples of PEGs comprising one or more such moieties and an NHS ester as a reactive functional group are as follows:
In some embodiments a branched (multi-arm) PEG or star-shaped PEG comprises a pentaerythritol core, hexaglycerin core, or tripentaerythritol core. It will be understood that the branches may not all emanate from a single point in certain embodiments.
Monofunctional, bifunctional, branched, and other PEGs comprising one or more reactive functional groups may, in some embodiments, be obtained from, e.g., NOF America Corp. White Plains, N.Y. or BOC Sciences 45-16 Ramsey Road Shirley, N.Y. 11967, USA, among others, or may be prepared using methods known in the art.
In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog comprises a carbamate. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is directly linked to a CRM via a carbamate. In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog comprises a carbamate and does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog comprises a carbamate and does not comprise a bond that is more susceptible to hydrolysis in aqueous medium than a carbamate. In some embodiments the CRM comprises or consists of a PEG moiety.
In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog comprises an amide. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is directly linked to a CRM via an amide. In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog comprises an amide and does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, a linkage between a CRM and a compstatin analog comprises an amide and does not comprise a bond that is more susceptible to hydrolysis in aqueous medium than an amide. In some embodiments the CRM comprises or consists of a PEG moiety.
In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage comprising a carbamate. In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage that does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage that comprises a carbamate and does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage that comprises a carbamate and does not comprise a bond that is more susceptible to hydrolysis in aqueous medium than a carbamate. In some embodiments, each compstatin analog of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is directly linked to a CRM via a carbamate.
In some embodiments the CRM comprises or consists of a PEG moiety. In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage comprising an amide. In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage that comprises an amide and does not comprise an ester. In some embodiments, one or more compstatin analogs of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is linked to a CRM by a linkage that comprises an amide and does not comprise a bond that is more susceptible to hydrolysis in aqueous medium than an amide. In some embodiments, each compstatin analog of a multifunctionalized compound (e.g., a bifunctionalized, trifunctionalized, or more extensively functionalized compound) is directly linked to a CRM via an amide. In some embodiments the CRM comprises or consists of a PEG moiety.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides a compstatin analog conjugated with a polymer, wherein the polymer is other than PEG. In some embodiments, a polymer is a polyoxazoline (POZ). Exemplary mono- and poly-functionalized polyoxazoline derivatives for direct conjugation, or for conjugation via a linker, are depicted below:
Z-T-[N(CORx)CH2CH2]n-T-R1;
R1—{[N(CO-T-Z)CH2CH2]m—[N(CORx)CH2CH2]n}a-T-R1;
R1—{[N(CO-T-Z1)CH2CH2]p—[N(CORx)CH2CH2]n—[N(CO-T-Z2)CH2CH2]m}a-T-R1;
R1—{[N(CO-T-Z1)CH2CH2]p—[N(CORx)CH2CH2]n—[N(CO-T-Z2)CH2CH2]m}a-T-Z;
R1—[N(CORx)CH2CH2]n-T-B(—R1)(-T-Z)-T-[N(CORx)CH2CH2]m—R1;
wherein:
-
- each of Z, Z1 and Z2 is independently a reactive functional group as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein;
- each of T, Rx, and R1 is independently as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein;
- each of m, n, and p is independently an integer 0-1000, with the limitation that the sum of m, n, and p for each formula is not 0;
- a is “ran,” which indicates a random copolymer, or “block,” which indicates a block copolymer;
- B is a branching moiety that is linked with or without a linker to the other parts of the polymer.
Other examples of functionalized polyoxazoline derivatives for conjugation are extensively described in the art, including but not limited to those described in PCT Patent Application Publication Nos. WO/2010/006282, WO/2009/089542, WO/2009/043027 and WO/2008/106186, the entirety of each of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Exemplary compstatin analog conjugates with polyoxazoline polymers are depicted below:
wherein each variable is independently as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides a compstatin analog conjugated with a polymer, wherein the compstatin analog is connected to the polymer via one or more linkers. In some embodiments, a polymer is selected from PEG-containing compounds and genera described above and in classes and subclasses herein. In some embodiments, the present invention provides compstatin analog conjugates of PEG-containing compounds and genera depicted herein, wherein the compstatin analog is connected to the PEG-containing moieties via one or more linkers. Mono- and poly-functional PEGs that comprise one or more reactive functional groups for conjugation are defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein, including but not limited to those of formula A, I, Ia, II, III, IIIa, B, IV, IVa, V, Va, C, D, E, F, G, H, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X, XI, XII, XIII, XIV, XV, or XVI.
Suitable linkers for connecting a compstatin analog and a polymer moiety such as PEG or polyoxazoline are extensively described above and in classes and subclasses herein. In some embodiments, a linker has multiple functional groups, wherein one functional group is connected to a compstatin analog and another is connected to a polymer moiety. In some embodiments, a linker is a bifunctional compound. In some embodiments, a linker has the structure of NH2(CH2CH2O)nCH2C(═O)OH, wherein n is 1 to 1000. In some embodiments, a linker is 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid (AEEAc). In some embodiments, a linker is activated for conjugation with a polymer moiety or a functional group of a compstatin analog. For example, in some embodiments, the carboxyl group of AEEAc is activated before conjugation with the amine group of the side chain of a lysine group.
In some embodiments, a suitable functional group (for example, an amine, hydroxyl, thiol, or carboxylic acid group) on a compstatin analog is used for conjugation with a polymer moiety, either directly or via a linker. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is conjugated through an amine group to a PEG moiety via a linker. In some embodiments, an amine group is the α-amino group of an amino acid residue. In some embodiments, an amine group is the amine group of the lysine side chain. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is conjugated to a PEG moiety through the amino group of a lysine side chain (ε-amino group) via a linker having the structure of NH2(CH2CH2O)nCH2C(═O)OH, wherein n is 1 to 1000. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is conjugated to the PEG moiety through the amino group of a lysine side chain via an AEEAc linker. In some embodiments, the NH2(CH2CH2O)nCH2C(═O)OH linker introduces a —NH(CH2CH2O)nCH2C(═O)— moiety on a compstatin lysine side chain after conjugation. In some embodiments, the AEEAc linker introduces a —NH(CH2CH2O)2CH2C(═O)— moiety on a compstatin lysine side chain after conjugation.
In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is conjugated to a polymer moiety via a linker, wherein the linker comprises an AEEAc moiety and an amino acid residue. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog is conjugated to a polymer moiety via a linker, wherein the linker comprises an AEEAc moiety and a lysine residue. In some embodiments, a polymer is PEG. In some embodiments, the C-terminus of a compstatin analog is connected to the amino group of AEEAc, and the C-terminus of AEEAc is connected to a lysine residue. In some embodiments, the C-terminus of a compstatin analog is connected to the amino group of AEEAc, and the C-terminus of AEEAc is connected to the α-amino group of a lysine residue. In some embodiments, the C-terminus of a compstatin analog is connected to the amino group of AEEAc, the C-terminus of AEEAc is connected to the α-amino group of the lysine residue, and a polymer moiety, such as a PEG moiety, is conjugated through the ε-amino group of said lysine residue. In some embodiments, the C-terminus of the lysine residue is modified. In some embodiments, the C-terminus of the lysine residue is modified by amidation. In some embodiments, the N-terminus of a compstatin analog is modified. In some embodiments, the N-terminus of a compstatin analog is acetylated.
Exemplary conjugates comprising an AEEAc linker and a polymer are depicted below, wherein
represents the attachment point of an amine group on a compstatin analog,
represents a compstatin analog attaching through its C-terminus, and wherein each of the other variables is independently as defined above and described in classes and subclasses herewith. In some embodiments, an amine group is the amino group of a lysine side chain.
In certain embodiments a compstatin analog may be represented as M-AEEAc-Lys-B2, wherein B2 is a blocking moiety, e.g., NH2, M represents any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A, with the proviso that the C-terminal amino acid of any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A is linked via a peptide bond to AEEAc-Lys-B2. The NHS moiety of a monofunctional or multifunctional (e.g., bifunctional) PEG reacts with the free amine of the lysine side chain to generate a monofunctionalized (one compstatin analog moiety) or multifunctionalized (multiple compstatin analog moieties) long-acting compstatin analog. In various embodiments any amino acid comprising a side chain that comprises a reactive functional group may be used instead of Lys (or in addition to Lys). A monofunctional or multifunctional PEG comprising a suitable reactive functional group may be reacted with such side chain in a manner analogous to the reaction of NHS-ester activated PEGs with Lys.
With regard to any of the above formulae and structures, it is to be understood that embodiments in which the compstatin analog component comprises any compstatin analog described herein, e.g., any compstatin analog of SEQ ID NOs; 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, 41A, are expressly disclosed. For example, and without limitation, a compstatin analog may comprise the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 28. An exemplary long-acting compstatin analog in which the compstatin analog component comprises the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 28 is depicted in
In some aspects, the present invention relates to use of click chemistry in connection with compstatin analogs. “Click chemistry” is well known in the art and is useful in some aspects of the present invention. Click chemistry embodies, in certain embodiments, versatile cycloaddition reactions between azides and alkynes that enable a number of useful applications. Methods of carrying out click chemistry are known in the art, and are described by Kolb, H. C.; Sharpless, K. B., Drug Disc. Today, 2003, 1128-1137; Moses, J. E.; Moorhouse, A. D.; Chem. Soc. Rev., 2007, 1249-1262; the entire contents of each are hereby incorporated by reference. Click chemistry is a popular method of bioconjugation due to its high reactivity and selectivity, even in biological media. See Kolb, H. C.; Finn, M. G.; Sharpless, K. B. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2001, 40, 2004-2021; and Wang, Q.; Chan, T. R.; Hilgraf, R.; Fokin, V. V.; Sharpless, K. B.; Finn, M. G. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2003, 125, 3192-3193. In addition, currently available recombinant techniques and synthetic methods permit the introduction of azides and alkyne-bearing non-canonical amino acids into peptides, proteins, cells, viruses, bacteria, and other biological entities that consist of or display proteins. See Link, A. J.; Vink, M. K. S.; Tirrell, D. A. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2004, 126, 10598-10602; Deiters, A.; Cropp, T. A.; Mukherji, M.; Chin, J. W.; Anderson, C.; Schultz, P. G. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2003, 125, 11782-11783.
As used herein, the term “click chemistry group” is sometimes used to refer\ to a reactive functional group capable of participating in a click chemistry reaction with an appropriate second reactive functional group, which second reactive functional group is also a click chemistry group. The first and second click chemistry groups, or entities (e.g., molecules) comprising such groups, may be referred to as complementary. First and second entities, e.g., molecules, that comprise complementary click chemistry groups may be referred to as click chemistry partners. An entity or molecule comprising a click chemistry group may be referred to as “click-functionalized”. A bond formed by reaction of complementary click chemistry partners may be referred to as a “click chemistry bond”.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides click-functionalized compstatin analogs for, e.g., conjugation to a complementary moiety on a partner molecule or biomolecule. In some embodiments, a complementary partner molecule or biomolecule is a polymer, peptide, protein, or a molecule that functions as a clearance-reducing moiety. In some embodiments, the “click-functionalized” moiety is an alkyne or an alkyne derivative which is capable of undergoing [3+2] cycloaddition reactions with complementary azide-bearing molecules and biomolecules. In another embodiment, the “click-functionalized” functionality is an azide or an azide derivative which is capable of undergoing [3+2] cycloaddition reactions with complementary alkyne-bearing molecules and biomolecules (i.e. click chemistry).
In some embodiments, a click-functionalized compstatin analog bears an azide group on any side chain group of the compstatin analog. In some embodiments, a click-functionalized compstatin analog bears an azide group on a lysine side chain group.
In some embodiments, a click-functionalized compstatin analog bears an alkyne group on any side chain group of the compstatin compstatin analog. In some embodiments, a click-functionalized compstatin analog bears an alkyne group on a lysine side chain group.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides compstatin conjugates comprising a compstatin analog, a molecule that functions as a clearance-reducing moiety, and a triazole linker. In some embodiments, a triazole linker is the result of click conjugation chemistry between a compstatin conjugate and a molecule that functions as a clearance-reducing moiety. In some embodiments the CRM may be any CRM disclosed herein. For example, the CRM may be a PEG, a polypeptide, or a POZ.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides compstatin conjugates comprising a compstatin analog, a PEG moiety, and a triazole linker. In some embodiments, a triazole linker is the result of click conjugation chemistry between a compstatin conjugate and a PEG moiety.
In some embodiments, the present invention provides compstatin conjugates comprising a compstatin analog, a polyoxazoline moiety, and a triazole linker. In some embodiments, a triazole linker is the result of click conjugation chemistry between a compstatin conjugate and a polyoxazoline moiety.
In some embodiments, click chemistry between a compstatin analog and another moiety is transition metal catalyzed. Copper-containing molecules which catalyze the “click” reaction include, but are not limited to, copper wire, copper bromide (CuBr), copper chloride (CuCl), copper sulfate (CuSO4), copper sulfate pentahydrate (CuSO4.5H2O), copper acetate (Cu2(AcO4), copper iodide (CuI), [Cu(MeCN)4](OTO, [Cu(MeCN)4](PF6), colloidal copper sources, and immobilized copper sources. In some embodiments other metals, such as ruthenium. Reducing agents as well as organic and inorganic metal-binding ligands can be used in conjunction with metal catalysts and include, but are not limited to, sodium ascorbate, tris(triazolyl)amine ligands, tris(carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP), sulfonated bathophenanthroline ligands, and benzimidazole-based ligands.
In some embodiments, compstatin analogs are conjugated to other moieties using metal free click chemistry (also known as copper free click chemistry) to give a metal free composition or conjugates. In contrast to standard click chemistry, also known as copper assisted click chemistry (CuACC), metal free click chemistry occurs between either a strained, cyclic alkyne or an alkyne precursor such as an oxanorbornadiene, and an azide group. As the name implies, no metal catalyst is necessary for the reaction to occur. Examples of such chemistries include reactions involving cyclooctyne derivatives (Codelli, et. al. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2008, 130, 11486-11493; Jewett, et. al. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2010, 132, 3688-3690; Ning, et. al. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed., 2008, 47, 2253-2255), difluoro-oxanorbornene derivatives (van Berkel, et. al. ChemBioChem, 2007, 8, 1504-1508), or nitrile oxide derivatives (Lutz, et. al. Macromolecules, 2009, 42, 5411-5413). In certain embodiments a metal-free click chemistry reaction is a metal-free [3+2] cycloaddition reaction, Diels-Alder reaction, or thiol-alkene radical addition reaction. Exemplary click chemistry reactions and click chemistry groups are described in, e.g., Joerg Lahann, Click Chemistry for Biotechnology and Materials Science, 2009, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, ISBN 978-0-470-69970-6; Becer, Hoogenboom, and Schubert, Click Chemistry beyond Metal-Catalyzed Cycloaddition, Angewandte Chemie International Edition (2009) 48: 4900-4908. In certain embodiments a click chemistry group comprises a diarylcyclooctyne.
Certain examples of metal free click chemistry are shown in the scheme below.
Certain metal-free click moieties are known in the literature. Examples include 4-dibenzocyclooctynol (DIBO)
(from Ning et. al; Angew Chem Int Ed, 2008, 47, 2253); difluorinated cyclooctynes (DIFO or DFO)
(from Codelli, et. al.; J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2008, 130, 11486-11493.); biarylazacyclooctynone (BARAC)
(from Jewett et. al.; J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2010, 132, 3688); or bicyclononyne (BCN)
(From Dommerholt, et. al.; Angew Chem Int Ed, 2010, 49, 9422-9425) or dibenzylcyclooctyne (DBCO)
A reaction scheme involving reaction of DBCO and an azide is shown below:
In the above scheme, in various embodiments, A may comprise or consist of a compstatin analog moiety and B may comprise or consist of a CRM, e.g., a polymer, such as a PEG or a POZ or a polypeptide, or B may comprise or consist of a compstatin analog moiety and A may comprise or consist of a CRM, e.g., a polymer, such as a PEG or a POZ or a polypeptide.
In some embodiments, the “metal free click-functionalized” moiety is an acetylene or an acetylene derivative which is capable of undergoing [3+2] cycloaddition reactions with complementary azide-bearing molecules and biomolecules without the use of a metal catalyst.
In some embodiments, the R and R′ groups of the metal-free click chemistry reagents are a compstatin analog or any molecule described herein to which a compstatin analog may be conjugated. In some embodiments, such compstatin analogs bear a click-functionalized moiety on a lysine side chain. In some embodiments, such compstatin analogs are connected to a click-functionalized moiety via a linker. In some embodiments, such compstatin analogs are connected to a click-functionalized moiety via AEEAc.
In some embodiments, a click chemistry reagent comprises DBCO. Exemplary reagents and exemplars uses thereof are set forth below:
DBCO-Acid. In some embodiments a DBCO-Acid may be used to react with an amine-containing moiety.
DBCO-NHS ester (above) or DBCO-sulfo-NHS ester (below) may be used to incorporate a DBCO functionality into an amine-containing molecule, such as a compstatin analog or a polypeptide comprising a lysine residue,
DBCO-PEGG4-NHS ester. In some embodiments such reagent is useful for introducing a DBCO moiety by reaction with an available amine functionality. In some aspects, the presence of a PEG chain as a hydrophilic spacer may be useful to, e.g., increase solubility or provide flexibility.
DBCO-Amine. In some embodiments a click chemistry reagent comprises a carbonyl/carboxyl reactive dibenzylcyclooctyne, which may react with acids, active esters and/or aldehydes.
In certain embodiments a click chemistry reaction involves a cyclooctyne depicted below:
In certain embodiments click chemistry reactions comprise reactions between nitrones and cyclooctynes (see, e.g., Ning, Xinghai; Temming, Rinske P.; Dommerholt, Jan; Guo, Jun; Ania, Daniel B.; Debets, Marjoke F.; Wolfert, Margreet A.; Boons, Geert-Jan et al. (2010). “Protein Modification by Strain-Promoted Alkyne-Nitrone Cycloaddition”. Angewandte Chemie International Edition 49 (17): 3065), oxime/hydrazone formation from aldehydes and ketones, tetrazine ligations (see, e.g., Blackman, Melissa L.; Royzen, Maksim; Fox, Joseph M. (2008). “The Tetrazine Ligation: Fast Bioconjugation based on Inverse-electron-demand Diels-Alder Reactivity”. Journal of the American Chemical Society 130 (41): 13518-9), tetrazole ligations, the isonitrile-based click reaction (see, e.g., Stackmann, Henning; Neves, André A.; Stairs, Shaun; Brindle, Kevin M.; Leeper, Finian J. (2011). “Exploring isonitrile-based click chemistry for ligation with biomolecules”. Organic & Biomolecular Chemistry 9 (21): 7303), and the quadricyclane ligation (see, e.g., Sletten, Ellen M.; Bertozzi, Carolyn R. (2011). “A Bioorthogonal Quadricyclane Ligation”. Journal of the American Chemical Society 133 (44): 17570-3). In certain embodiments a click chemistry reaction is a Staudinger ligation (phosphine-azide).
Any compstatin analog may be modified to incorporate a click chemistry group in various embodiments. For example, a compstatin analog comprising the sequence of any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A may be so modified. In some embodiments any such sequence further comprises a lysine residue or an AEEAc-Lys moiety, e.g., at the C-terminus. In some embodiments a click chemistry group is incorporated after peptide synthesis. For example, a Lys side chain may be reacted with azido acetic acid in order to introduce an azide moiety as a click chemistry group. In some embodiments a click chemistry group is incorporated after cyclization and, in some embodiments, after addition of a blocking moiety at the N- and/or C-terminus. In some embodiments a click chemistry group is incorporated during peptide synthesis. For example, an amino acid comprising a side chain that comprises a click chemistry group may be used in the synthesis of a compstatin analog. A variety of such amino acids are commercially available from a number of sources, e.g., AAPPTec (Louisville, Ky.), Jena Bioscience GmBH (Jena, Germany). In some aspects, methods of making a click chemistry functionalized compstatin analog are provided herein.
In some embodiments compositions comprising a compstatin analog and a click chemistry reagent are provided. The click chemistry reagent may be any molecule capable of reacting with an amino acid side chain or terminus of a compound comprising a compstatin analog so as to install a click chemistry group, e.g., any click chemistry group known in the art. In some aspects, the composition may be incubated under suitable conditions (which may include providing a suitable catalyst, light (e.g., UV)) to functionalize the compstatin analog with a click chemistry functionality. In some embodiments, the invention provides compstatin analogs that comprise any click chemistry group including, but not limited to, those described herein. In some embodiments methods of making a long-acting compstatin analog are provided. In some embodiments the methods comprise mixing a compstatin analog comprising a first click chemistry group with a CRM comprising a complementary click chemistry group under conditions suitable for a click chemistry reaction to occur. Additional steps may comprise purifying the resulting conjugate. In some embodiments purifying comprises removing at least some unreacted components, e.g., with an appropriate scavenger.
In some embodiments a click chemistry reaction is used to join two or more CRMs, at least two of which have a compstatin analog moiety attached thereto. The compstatin analog moieties may be the same or different in various embodiments. The compstatin analog moieties may or may not be attached to the CRM via a click chemistry reaction. For example, in some embodiments a first heterobifunctional PEG comprising a first click chemistry group at a first terminus and an NHS ester at a second terminus is coupled to a compstatin analog moiety via the NHS ester. In a separate reaction, a second heterobifunctional PEG comprising a second click chemistry group at a first terminus and an NHS ester at a second terminus is coupled to a compstatin analog moiety via the NHS ester. The resulting two compounds are then reacted via a click chemistry reaction to form a larger molecule comprising two compstatin analog moieties. PEG is mentioned as an example of a CRM but it should be understood that this approach may be used with any CRM. For example, in some embodiments it may be used with a CRM comprising a polypeptide, e.g., HSA or a portion thereof, or an albumin or albumin-binding peptide, or an antibody or portion thereof. In some embodiments this approach may be used with a POZ.
Compstatin analogs comprising a click chemistry group have a variety of uses. In some embodiments a compstatin analog comprising a first click chemistry group is reacted with any entity that comprises a complementary click chemistry group. The entity comprising the complementary click chemistry group may comprise, for example, a label (e.g., a flurophore, fluorescent protein, radioisotope, etc.), an affinity reagent, an antibody, a targeting moiety, a metal, a particle, etc. In some embodiments a click chemistry group is used to attach a compstatin analog moiety to a surface, wherein the surface comprises or is functionalized to comprise a complementary click chemistry group. In some embodiments a surface is for a sensor, e.g., a surface or sensor for capture/detection of C3. In some embodiments a surface forms part of a medical device, tubing, membrane, reservoir, implant, or other material that may come in contact with blood (e.g., extracorporeally) or be temporarily or indefinitely implanted into the body of a subject (e.g., a prosthetic device or drug delivery device). In some embodiments a surface is functionalized with compstatin analog to reduce complement activation thereon. In some embodiments a device or tubing is used for circulating blood, e.g., for dialysis, during surgery, etc. In some embodiments a device is a hemodialyzer or an extracorporeal circulatory support unit. Such compstatin analog functionalized devices and methods of making thereof are provided herein.
In some embodiments of the invention, a compstatin analog comprises both a cell-reactive functional group and a CRM. In some aspects, the invention provides variants of the molecules of any of the afore-mentioned cell-reactive compstatin analogs wherein a cell-reactive functional group or moiety is replaced by a (CH2CH2O)n moiety (e.g., any of the PEGs described herein) or other polymer (e.g., a POZ, a polypeptide) having a molecular weight of at least 500 daltons, e.g., at least 1,500 daltons up to about 100,000 daltons (e.g., an average molecular weight of about 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 50,000; 60,000; 70,000; 80,000; 90,000; or 100,000 daltons). In some embodiments the average molecular weight of the compound or (CH2CH2O)n moieties (or other polymer, e.g., a POZ or polypeptide) is at least 20,000 daltons, up to about 100,000; 120,000; 140,000; 160,000; 180,000; or 200,000 daltons. It will thus be understood that the teachings herein regarding cell-reactive compstatin analogs, e.g., the compstatin analog moieties used and the linkages by which a compstatin analog moiety is attached to a cell-reactive moiety, can apply to long-acting compstatin analogs, and long-acting compstatin analog can have any of the structures denoted by A-L-M, as described above, wherein A comprises a clearance reducing moiety (e.g., any of the clearance reducing moieties described herein), and furthermore wherein there may be one, two, or more (e.g., 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) compstatin analog moieties M attached to A via linking portions denoted as L (or LP1, LP2, or LP3) herein). Compstatin analog moieties may comprise a peptide whose sequence comprises any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A, or variants thereof (e.g., any variant described herein), optionally extended by one or more amino acids at the N-terminus, C-terminus, or both wherein at least one of the amino acids has a side chain that comprises a reactive functional group such as a primary or secondary amine (e.g., a Lys), a sulfhydryl group, a carboxyl group (which may be present as a carboxylate group), a guanidino group, a phenol group, an indole ring, a thioether, or an imidazole ring, which facilitates conjugation of a moiety comprising a CRM to the compstatin analog (it being understood that after conjugation, such reactive functional group will have reacted to form a bond). It will further be understood that where a compstatin analog moiety comprising any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A, or variants thereof, is extended by one or more amino acids at the N-terminus, C-terminus, or both wherein at least one of the amino acids has a side chain that comprises a reactive functional group, such one or more amino acid extension may be separated from the cyclic portion of the compstatin analog moiety by a rigid or flexible spacer moiety comprising, for example, a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated alkyl chain, oligo(ethylene glycol) chain, and/or any of the other moieties denoted by L (or LP1, LP2, or LP3) herein.
Exemplary long-acting compstatin analogs are set forth below, wherein n is sufficient to provide an average molecular weight of between about 500; 1,000; 1,500; 2,000; 5,000; 10,000; 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 50,000; 60,000; 70,000; 80,000; 90,000; and 100,000 daltons. In some embodiments n is sufficient to provide an average molecular weight of between about 20,000 daltons, up to about 100,000; 120,000; 140,000; 160,000; 180,000; or 200,000 daltons.
In SEQ ID NO: 58, the (CH2CH2O)n is coupled via an amide bond to the N-terminal amino acid. In SEQ ID NOs: 59-63, the (CH2CH2O)n moiety is coupled via an amide bond to a Lys side chain; thus it will be understood that the NH2 at the C-terminus in SEQ ID NOs: 59, 60, and 61, represents amidation of the C-terminus of the peptide, and it will be understood that in SEQ ID NOs: 62 and 63, the Ac at the N-terminus represents acetylation of the N-terminus of the peptide, as described above. It will also be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that a free end of a (CH2CH2O)n moiety typically terminates with an (OR) where the underlined O represents the O atom in the terminal (CH2CH2O) group. (OR) is often a moiety such as a hydroxyl (OH) or methoxy (—OCH3) group though other groups (e.g., other alkoxy groups) could be used. Thus SEQ ID NO: 59, for example, may be represented as Ac-Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-NH—CH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2—C(═O)-Lys-(C(═O)—(CH2CH2O)n—R)—NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 64) wherein R is, e.g., either H or CH3 in the case of a linear PEG. In the case of a bifunctional, branched or star-shaped PEG, R represents the remainder of the molecule. Further, it will be understood that the moiety comprising the reactive functional group may vary, as described herein (e.g., according to any of the formulas described herein). For example, long-acting compstatin analogs comprising the same peptide sequence as SEQ ID NO: 64, in which the moiety comprising the reactive functional group comprises an ester and/or alkyl chain may be represented as follows
In SEQ ID NOs: 65-67 m may range from 1 up to about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 15, 20, or 30 in various embodiments, In SEQ ID NOs: 67 j may range from 1 up to about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 15, 20, or 30 in various embodiments.
It will also be appreciated that, as described herein, in various embodiments other moieties may be incorporated between the Lys-(C(═O)— and (CH2CH2O)n—R, such as an amide, aromatic ring (e.g., a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl), or a substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl structure.
The invention provides variants of SEQ ID NOs: 58-67 in which -Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr- is replaced by an amino acid sequence comprising the amino acid sequence of any other compstatin analog, e.g., of any of SEQ ID NOs 3-27 or 29-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A with the proviso that blocking moiet(ies) present at the N- and/or C-termini of a compstatin analog may be absent, replaced by a linker (which may comprise a blocking moiety), or attached to a different N- or C-terminal amino acid present in the corresponding variant(s).
Any compstatin analog, e.g., any compound comprising any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A may, in various embodiments, can be attached via or near its N-terminal or C-terminal end (e.g., via a side chain of an amino acid at or near its N-terminal or C-terminal amino acid) directly or indirectly to any moiety comprising a reactive functional group, e.g., any compound of Formulae I-XVI or Formulae A-H.
In some embodiments the CRM comprises a polypeptide that occurs in human serum, or a fragment thereof or a substantially similar variant of the polypeptide or fragment thereof. In some embodiments the polypeptide, fragment, or variant has a molecular weight of between 5 kD and 150 kD, e.g., at least 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 kd, or more, e.g., between 100 and 120, or 120 and 150 kD. In some embodiments, producing a long-acting compstatin analog comprises reacting a compstatin analog comprising a reactive functional group with one or more amino acid side chains of the polypeptide, wherein the side chain comprises a compatible functional group. In some embodiments, producing a long-acting compstatin analog comprises reacting a compstatin analog comprising a reactive functional group with the N-terminal amine and/or C-terminal carboxyl group of the polypeptide. In some embodiments, producing a long-acting compstatin analog comprises reacting a compstatin analog comprising an amine-reactive functional group with amino acids having a side chain comprising a primary amine (e.g., lysine) and/or with the N-terminal amine of the polypeptide. In some embodiments, producing a long-acting compstatin analog comprises reacting a compstatin analog comprising a carboxyl-reactive functional group with the C-terminal carboxyl group of the polypeptide. In some embodiments a compstatin analog moiety is attached at each terminus of the polypeptide and, optionally, to the side chain of one or more internal amino acids. In some embodiments, producing a long-acting compstatin analog comprises reacting a compstatin analog comprising a sulfhydryl-reactive functional group with one or more sulfhydryl groups of the polypeptide.
In some embodiments, at least one reactive functional group is introduced into the polypeptide. For example, in some embodiments at least one side chain of the polypeptide is modified to convert a first reactive functional group to a different reactive functional group prior to reaction with the compstatin analog. In some embodiments a thiol is introduced. Several methods are available for introducing thiols into biomolecules, including the reduction of intrinsic disulfides, as well as the conversion of amine, aldehyde or carboxylic acid groups to thiol groups. Disulfide crosslinks of cystines in proteins can be reduced to cysteine residues by dithiothreitol (DTT), tris-(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP), or tris-(2-cyanoethyl)phosphine. Amines can be indirectly thiolated by reaction with succinimidyl 3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionate (SPDP) followed by reduction of the 3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionyl conjugate with DTT or TCEP. Amines can be indirectly thiolated by reaction with succinimidyl acetylthioacetate followed by removal of the acetyl group with 50 mM hydroxylamine or hydrazine at near-neutral pH. Amines can be directly thiolated by reaction with 2-iminothiolane, which preserve the overall charge of the molecule and introduces a free thiol. Tryptophan residues in thiol-free proteins can be oxidized to mercaptotryptophan residues, which can then be modified by iodoacetamides or maleimides. A polypeptide comprising one or more thiols may be reacted with a compstatin analog comprising a maleimide group, such as Ac-Ile-Cys*-Val-Trp(1-Me)-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-AEEAc-Lys-(C(═O)—(CH2)5-Mal)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 68) to generate a long-acting compstatin analog.
In some embodiments the polypeptide is recombinantly produced. In some embodiments the polypeptide is at least in part recombinantly produced (e.g., in bacteria or in eukaryotic host cells such as fungal, insect, plant, or vertebrate) and/or at least in part produced using chemical synthesis. In some embodiments the polypeptide is purified. For example, in some embodiments the polypeptide is purified from a host cell lysate or from culture medium into which it has been secreted by host cells. In some embodiments the polypeptide is glycosylated. In some embodiments the polypeptide is non-glycosylated. In some embodiments the polypeptide is human serum albumin (HSA). In some embodiments a substantially similar variant of the polypeptide is sufficiently similar to the polypeptide of which it is a variant so as to not be recognized as foreign by a normal immune system of a subject, e.g., a human subject. In some embodiments alterations in the sequence of substantially similar variant as compared with the polypeptide of which it is a variant are selected so as to avoid generating MHC Class I epitopes. Various methods known in the art can be used to predict whether a sequence comprises an MHC Class I epitope.
In some embodiments, one or more amino acids in a polypeptide or linker or composition may be selected to be hydrophobic or hydrophilic or selected to confer increased hydrophilicity or, in some embodiments, increased hydrophobicity, on a compound that contains it. As known in the art, the terms “hydrophilic” and “hydrophobic” are used to refer to the degree of affinity that a substance has with water. In some aspects a hydrophilic substance has a strong affinity for water, tending to dissolve in, mix with, or be wetted by water, while a hydrophobic substance substantially lacks affinity for water, tending to repel and not absorb water and tending not to dissolve in or mix with or be wetted by water. Amino acids can be classified based on their hydrophobicity as well known in the art. Examples of “hydrophilic amino acids” are arginine, lysine, threonine, alanine, asparagine, glutamine, aspartate, glutamate, serine, and glycine. Examples of “hydrophobic amino acids” are tryptophan, tyrosine, phenylalanine, methionine, leucine, isoleucine, and valine. In certain embodiments an analog of a standard amino acid is used, wherein the analog has increased or decreased hydrophilic or hydrophobic character as compared with the amino acid of which it is an analog.
The invention further provides multimers, e.g., concatamers, comprising two or more (e.g., between 2 and 10) compstatin analogs comprising a CRM, wherein the average molecular weight of the resulting molecule (or the CRM components thereof) is between 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 50,000; 60,000; 70,000; 80,000; 90,000; and 100,000 daltons. In some embodiments the average molecular weight of the resulting molecule (or the CRM components thereof) is at least 20,000 daltons, up to about 100,000; 120,000; 140,000; 160,000; 180,000; or 200,000 daltons. In some embodiments, the compstatin analogs comprising a CRM can be linked using any of the linking moieties described above. Compositions and methods for making long-acting compstatin analogs, and intermediates in the synthesis, are aspects of the invention.
In some embodiments the total molecular weight of a long-acting compstatin analog, including the compstatin analog moieties, is no greater than 50 kD. For example, in the case of a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG, in some embodiments the molecular weight contributed by the remainder of the compound, including the compstatin analog moie(ties), may be no greater than 10 kD, e.g., 1.5 kD-5.0 kD or 5.0 kD-10 kD. In some embodiments the total molecular weight of a LACA, including the compstatin analog moieties, is between 45 kD and 50 kD. In some embodiments the total molecular weight of a LACA, including the compstatin analog moieties, is between 40 kD and 45 kD, between 15 kD and 40 kD, e.g., between 15 kD and 25 kD, between 25 kD and 35 kD, between 35 kD and 40 kD. Thus, wherever the present disclosure refers to a compstatin analog comprising a polymer or CRM having a particular molecular weight, or having a molecular weight within a particular range, in some embodiments the total molecular weight of the compstatin analog may be, e.g., between 1.5 kD and 5 kD greater than the molecular weight of the polymer or CRM, or in some embodiments between 5 kD and 10 kD greater than the molecular weight of the polymer. It will be understood that molecular weight of a compound, e.g., a compound comprising a polymer, can refer to the average molecular weight of molecules of such compound in a composition.
A wide variety of methods and assays useful for detection of polymers, e.g., PEGs, POZs, and/or polypeptides and/or useful for measurement of physical and/or structural properties of polymers, e.g., PEGs, POZs, and/or polypeptides are known in the art and may, if desired, be used to detect a compstatin analog, e.g., a cell-reactive, long-acting, targeted compstatin analog or a compstatin analog moiety. For example, methods and assays useful for determining properties such as aggregation, solubility, size, structure, melting properties, purity, presence of degradation products or contaminants, water content, hydrodynamic radius, etc., are available. Such methods include, e.g., analytical centrifugation, various types of chromatography such as liquid chromatography (e.g., HPLC-ion exchange, HPLC-size exclusion, HPLC-reverse phase), light scattering, capillary electrophoresis, circular dichroism, isothermal calorimetry, differential scanning calorimetry, fluorescence, infrared (IR), nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR), Raman spectroscopy, refractometry, UV/Visible spectroscopy, mass spectrometry, immunological methods, etc. It will be understood that methods may be combined. In some aspects, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog (or composition comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog) has one or more properties described herein, as assessed using any of the foregoing methods. In some aspects, methods useful to detect and/or quantify a long-acting compstatin analog are described herein.
VI. Targeted Compstatin AnalogsThe invention provides and/or utilizes targeted compstatin analogs that comprise a targeting moiety and a compstatin analog moiety, wherein the targeting moiety binds non-covalently to a target molecule. In some aspects, the invention provides targeted compstatin analogs analogous to the cell-reactive compstatin analogs described in Section VI, wherein the compounds comprise a targeting moiety in addition to, or instead of, a cell-reactive moiety. The targeting moiety can comprise, e.g., an antibody, polypeptide, peptide, nucleic acid (e.g., an aptamer), carbohydrate, small molecule, or supramolecular complex, that specifically binds to the target molecule. In some embodiments, the affinity (as measured by the equilibrium dissociation constant, Kd) of targeting moiety for the target molecule (as measured by the equilibrium dissociation constant, Kd) is 10−3 M or less, e.g., 10−4 M or less, e.g., 10−5M or less, e.g., 10−6M or less, 10−7M or less, 10−8M or less, or 10−9 M or less under the conditions tested, e.g., under physiological conditions.
In those embodiments of the invention in which the targeting moiety is an antibody, the antibody may be any immunoglobulin or a derivative thereof, which maintains binding ability, or any protein having a binding domain which is homologous or largely homologous to an immunoglobulin binding domain. Such proteins may be derived from natural sources, or partly or wholly synthetically produced (e.g., using recombinant DNA techniques, chemical synthesis, etc.). The antibody can be of any species, e.g., human, rodent, rabbit, goat, chicken, etc. The antibody may be a member of any immunoglobulin class, including any of the human classes: IgG, IgM, IgA, IgD, and IgE. In various embodiments of the invention the antibody may be a fragment of an antibody such as an Fab′, F(ab′)2, scFv (single-chain variable) or other fragment that retains an antigen binding site, or a recombinantly produced scFv fragment, including recombinantly produced fragments. See, e.g., Allen, T., Nature Reviews Cancer, Vol. 2, 750-765, 2002, and references therein. Monovalent, bivalent or multivalent antibodies can be used. The antibody may be a chimeric antibody in which, for example, a variable domain of rodent origin is fused to a constant domain of human origin, thus retaining the specificity of the rodent antibody. In some embodiments, a human antibody or portion thereof is generated, for example, in rodents whose genome incorporates human immunoglobulin genes, using a display technology such as phage display, etc. In some embodiments, a humanized antibody is generated by grafting one or more complementarity determining region(s) from a non-human species (e.g., mouse) into a human antibody sequence. The antibody may be partially or completely humanized. See, e.g., Almagro J C, Fransson J. Humanization of antibodies. Front Biosci. 13:1619-33 (2008) for review of various methods of obtaining humanized antibodies that may be used to obtain a targeting moiety of use in the invention. An antibody may be polyclonal or monoclonal, though for purposes of the present invention monoclonal antibodies are generally preferred. In certain embodiments of the invention a F(ab′)2 or F(ab′) fragment is use while in other embodiments antibodies comprising an Fc domain are used. Methods for producing antibodies that specifically bind to virtually any molecule of interest are known in the art. For example, monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies can be purified from natural sources, e.g., from blood or ascites fluid of an animal that produces the antibody (e.g., following immunization with the molecule or an antigenic fragment thereof) or can be produced recombinantly, in cell culture. Methods of generating antibody fragments, e.g., by digestion, disulfide reduction, or synthesis are known in the art.
In various embodiments of the invention a targeting moiety can be any molecule that specifically binds to a target molecule through a mechanism other than an antigen-antibody interaction. Such a targeting moiety is referred to as a “ligand”. For example, in various embodiments of the invention a ligand can be a polypeptide, peptide, nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA), carbohydrate, lipid or phospholipid, or small molecule. In some embodiments a small molecule is an organic compound, whether naturally-occurring or artificially created, that has relatively low molecular weight and is not a protein, polypeptide, nucleic acid, or lipid, typically with a molecular weight of less than about 1500 g/mol and typically having multiple carbon-carbon bonds. In general, an aptamer is an oligonucleotide (e.g., RNA or DNA, optionally comprising one or more modified nucleosides (e.g., bases or sugars other than the 5 standard bases (A, G, C, T, U) or sugars (ribose and deoxyribose) found most commonly in RNA and DNA), or modified internucleoside linkages (e.g., non-phosphodiester bonds) that, e.g., stabilize the molecule, e.g., by rendering it more resistant to degradation by nucleases) that binds to a particular protein. In some embodiments an oligonucleotide is up to about 100 nucleosides long, e.g., between 12 and 100 nucleosides long. Aptamers can be derived using an in vitro evolution process called SELEX, and methods for obtaining aptamers specific for a protein of interest are known in the art. See, e.g., Brody E N, Gold L. J Biotechnol. 2000 March; 74(1):5-13. In some embodiments, a peptide nucleic acid or locked nucleic acid is used.
In certain embodiments of the invention a targeting moiety comprises a peptide. In some embodiments a peptide that binds to a target molecule of interest is identified using a display technology such as phage display, ribosome display, yeast display, etc.
Small molecules can be used as ligands. Methods for identifying such ligands are known in the art. For example in vitro screening of small molecule libraries, including combinatorial libraries, and computer-based screening, e.g., to identify small organic compounds that bind to concave surfaces (pockets) of proteins, can identify small molecule ligands for numerous proteins of interest (Huang, Z., Pharm. & Ther. 86: 201-215, 2000).
In certain embodiments of the invention targeting moieties are not proteins or molecules that are typically used as carriers and conjugated to antigens for the purpose of raising antibodies. Examples are carrier proteins or molecules such as bovine serum albumin, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, bovine gamma globulin, and diphtheria toxin. In certain embodiments of the invention the targeting moiety is not an Fc portion of an immunoglobulin molecule. In some embodiments, a targeting moiety is part of a complex comprising one or more additional moieties to which it is covalently or noncovalently attached.
In various embodiments of the invention a target molecule can be any molecule produced by a cell (including any forms expressed on the cell surface or modified forms thereof resulting at least in part from extracellular modification). In some embodiments a target molecule is an extracellular substance present in or on a tissue. In some embodiments, a target molecule is characteristic of a particular diseased or physiological state or characteristic of one or more cell type(s) or tissue type(s). A target molecule is often a molecule at least partly present at the cell surface (e.g., a transmembrane or otherwise membrane-attached protein) so that at least a portion of the molecule is accessible to binding by an extracellular binding agent such as an antibody. A target molecule may, but need not be, cell type specific. For example, a cell type specific target molecule is often a protein, peptide, mRNA, lipid, or carbohydrate that is present at a higher level on or in a particular cell type or cell type(s) than on or in many other cell types. In some instances a cell type specific target molecule is present at detectable levels only on or in a particular cell type of interest. However, it will be appreciated that a useful cell type specific target molecule need not be absolutely specific for the cell type of interest in order to be considered cell type specific. In some embodiments, a cell type specific target molecule for a particular cell type is expressed at levels at least 3 fold greater in that cell type than in a reference population of cells which may consist, for example, of a mixture containing cells from a plurality (e.g., 5-10 or more) of different tissues or organs in approximately equal amounts. In some embodiments, the cell type specific target molecule is present at levels at least 4-5 fold, between 5-10 fold, or more than 10-fold greater than its average expression in a reference population. In some embodiments, detection or measurement of a cell type specific target molecule allows one of ordinary skill in the art to distinguish a cell type or types of interest from cells of many, most, or all other types. In general, the presence and/or abundance of most target molecules may be determined using one or more standard techniques such as Northern blotting, in situ hybridization, RT-PCR, sequencing, immunological methods such as immunoblotting, immunodetection (e.g., by immunohistochemistry), or fluorescence detection following staining with fluorescently labeled antibodies (e.g., using FACS), oligonucleotide or cDNA microarray or membrane array, protein microarray analysis, mass spectrometry, etc.
In some embodiments, a target molecule is a channel, transporter, receptor, or other molecule at least in part exposed at the cell surface. In some embodiments a target molecule is an anion transporter or water channel (e.g., an aquaporin protein).
In some embodiments, the target molecule is a protein at least in part exposed at the surface of red blood cells, such as a glycophorin (e.g., glycophorin A, B, C, or D) or band 3.
In some embodiments, the target molecule is a protein at least in part exposed at the surface of endothelial cells. In some embodiments, the target molecule is present at the surface of normal, healthy vasculature. In some embodiments, the target molecule is present at the surface of activated endothelial cells. In some embodiments, the target molecule is present at the surface of activated endothelial cells but not at the surface of non-activated endothelial cells. In some embodiments a target molecule is a molecule whose expression or exposure is induced by a stimulus such as injury or inflammation. In some embodiments, a target molecule would be recognized as “non-self” by a recipient receiving a transplant containing cells that express the target molecule. In some embodiments, the target molecule is a carbohydrate xenoantigen to which antibodies are commonly found in human beings. In some embodiments the carbohydrate comprises a blood group antigen. In some embodiments the carbohydrate comprises a xenoantigen, e.g., an alpha-gal epitope (Galalpha1-3Galbeta1-(3)4GlcNAc-R) (see, e.g., Macher B A and Galili U. The Galalpha1, 3Galbeta1, 4GlcNAc-R (alpha-Gal) epitope: a carbohydrate of unique evolution and clinical relevance. Biochim Biophys Acta. 1780(2):75-88 (2008).
In some embodiments of the invention, a compstatin analog comprises both a targeting moiety and a CRM.
In some embodiments, a targeted compstatin analog comprises multiple targeting moieties, which can be the same or different. Different targeting moieties may bind to the same target molecule or to different target molecules. The invention provides a targeted compstatin analog that is multivalent with respect to the targeting moiety, the compstatin analog, or both.
In general, the invention encompasses any method of producing a compound comprising a compstatin analog moiety and a targeting moiety, and the resulting compounds. In some embodiments, a targeted compstatin analog may be produced using methods generally similar to those described in Section VI, wherein a targeting moiety is used instead of, or in addition to, a cell-reactive moiety. In some embodiments, a targeted compstatin analog comprising a peptide as a targeting moiety is synthesized as a polypeptide chain comprising a compstatin analog moiety and a peptide targeting moiety. Optionally, the polypeptide chain comprises one or more spacer peptides between the compstatin analog moiety and the targeting moiety.
In some embodiments, a targeted compstatin analog has a molar activity of at least about 10%, 20%, or 30%, e.g., between 30% and 40%, between 30% and 50%, between 30% and 60%, between 30% and 70%, between 30% and 80%, between 30% and 90%, or more, of the activity of a corresponding compstatin analog having the same amino acid sequence (and, if applicable, one or more blocking moiet(ies)) but not comprising a targeting moiety. In some embodiments wherein a targeted compstatin analog comprises multiple compstatin analog moieties, the molar activity of the targeted compstatin analog is at least about 10%, 20%, or 30%, e.g., between 30% and 40%, between 30% and 50%, between 30% and 60%, between 30% and 70%, between 30% and 80%, between 30% and 90%, or more, of the sum of the activities of said compstatin analog moieties. Compositions and methods for making targeted compstatin analogs, and intermediates in the synthesis, are aspects of the invention.
VII. UsesCell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analogs have a wide variety of uses. Without limiting the invention in any way, certain uses of cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analogs, and related aspects of the invention, are described herein. In some aspects, any such use may comprise administration of an INAA that inhibits C3 expression to a subject in addition to administration of a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog.
For example, in some embodiments, provided are methods of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject one or both of: (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, so that the subject is exposed to both, wherein each of the INAA and the compstatin analog is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 days.
In some embodiments, provided are methods of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the INAA is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 95%, optionally between 50% and 95%, as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both.
In some embodiments, provided are methods of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the compstatin analog is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 95%, optionally between 50% and 95%, as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both.
In some embodiments, provided are methods of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the compstatin analog is administered in an amount of less than about 300 mg/day on average.
In some embodiments, provided are methods of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) having at least two compstatin analog moieties attached thereto, optionally wherein: (i) the compstatin analog is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 90% as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both; (ii) the INAA is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 90% as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both; (iii) the INAA and the compstatin analog are both administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 days; or (iv) any combination of (i), (ii), and (iii).
In some embodiments, the alternative pathway assay is based on hemolysis.
In some embodiments, the alternative pathway assay is based on an ELISA (enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay).
In some embodiments, provided are methods of treating a subject in need of treatment of a complement-mediated disorder comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog.
In some embodiments, the step of administering comprises administering the INAA to a subject who is receiving the compstatin analog.
In some embodiments, the step of administering comprises administering the compstatin analog to a subject who is receiving the INAA.
In some embodiments, the step of administering comprises administering both the compstatin analog and the INAA.
In some embodiments, the step of administering comprises administering a composition containing both the compstatin analog and the INAA.
In some embodiments, provided are methods of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject: (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the INAA and the compstatin analog are both administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 days.
In some embodiments, the compstatin analog is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 7 days.
In some embodiments, the INAA and the compstatin analog are both administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 7 days.
In some embodiments, the INAA and the compstatin analog are both administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of between 7 and 31 days.
In some embodiments, the compstatin analog and the INAA are administered separately, optionally according to different dosing schedules.
In some embodiments, the compstatin analog and the INAA are administered separately according to the same dosing schedule.
In some embodiments, the compstatin analog and the INAA are administered in the same composition.
In some embodiments, the compstatin analog has a half-life of between 24 hours and 10 days when administered intravenously or subcutaneously to a human subject.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject suffering from or at risk of complement-mediated damage to an organ, tissue, or cells. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive compstatin analog is contacted with an organ, tissue, or cells ex vivo and become covalently attached thereto. The organ, tissue, or cells are introduced into a subject and are protected from damage that would otherwise be caused by the recipient's complement system.
Compstatin analogs that do not bind covalently to cells can be used for purposes described herein. For example, a compstatin analog modified with a moiety that increases the lifetime of the compound in the body and/or a compstatin analog comprising a moiety that targets the compstatin analog to a cell type or location susceptible to complement activation can be used, and the invention encompasses such uses. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog is used. In some embodiments a compstatin analog comprising a targeting moiety is used. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog comprising both a moiety that extends the lifetime of the compound in the body and a targeting moiety is used. Where the discussion below refers to a cell-reactive compstatin analog, the invention provides analogous compositions and methods relating to targeted compstatin analogs and (at least in those aspects pertaining to administration of a compstatin analog to a subject) embodiments in which a compstatin analog that does not comprise a targeting moiety or a cell-reactive moiety, optionally a long-acting compstatin analog, is used instead of, or in addition to, a cell-reactive compstatin analog.
Certain uses of interest include: (1) protecting red blood cells (RBCs) from complement-mediated damage in individuals with disorders such as paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria or atypical hemolytic uremic syndrome or other disorders characterized by complement-mediated RBC lysis; (2) protecting transplanted organs, tissues, and cells from complement-mediated damage; (3) reducing ischemia/reperfusion (I/R) injury (e.g., in individuals suffering from trauma, vascular obstruction, myocardial infarction, or other situations in which I/R injury may occur); and (4) protecting various body structures (e.g., the retina) or membranes (e.g., synovial membrane) that may be exposed to complement components from complement mediated damage in any of a variety of different complement-mediated disorders. The beneficial effects of inhibiting complement activation at the surface of cells or other body structures are not limited to those resulting directly from protection of the cells or structures themselves against direct complement-mediated damage (e.g., preventing cell lysis). For example, inhibiting complement activation using a cell-reactive compstatin analog may reduce the generation of anaphylotoxins and resulting influx/activation of neutrophils and other pro-inflammatory events and/or reduce potentially damaging release of intracellular contents, thereby potentially having beneficial effects on remote organ systems or throughout the body.
A. Blood Cell Protection
In some embodiments of the invention, a cell-reactive compstatin analog, cell-targeted compstatin analog, and/or non-targeted compstatin analog (e.g., a long-acting non-targeted compstatin analog) is used to protect blood cells against complement-mediated damage. The blood cells may be any cellular component of the blood, e.g., red blood cells (RBCs), white blood cells (WBCs), and/or platelets. In some embodiments, a cell-targeted compstatin analog is targeted to a target molecule exposed at the cell surface of RBCs such as a glycophorin or band 3. A variety of disorders are associated with complement-mediated damage to blood cells. Such disorders can result, for example, from deficiencies or defects in one or more of an individual's cellular or soluble CRPs, e.g., due to (a) mutation(s) in the gene(s) encoding such proteins; (b) mutation(s) in genes required for production or proper function of one or more CRPs, and/or (c) presence of autoantibodies to one or more CRPs. Complement-mediated RBC lysis can result from the presence of autoantibodies against RBC antigens which may arise due to a diverse set of causes (often being idiopathic). Individuals having such mutation(s) in genes encoding CRPs and/or having antibodies against CRPs or against their own RBCs are at increased risk of disorders involving complement-mediated RBC damage. Individuals who have had one or more episodes characteristic of a disorder are at increased risk of a recurrence.
Paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria (PNH) is a relatively rare disorder comprising an acquired hemolytic anemia characterized by complement-mediated intravascular hemolysis, hemoglobinuria, bone marrow failure, and thrombophilia (propensity to develop blood clots). It affects an estimated 16 individuals per million worldwide, occurs in both sexes, and can arise at any age, frequently striking young adults (Bessler, M. & Hiken, J., Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program, 104-110 (2008); Hillmen, P. Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program, 116-123 (2008)). PNH is a chronic and debilitating disease punctuated by acute hemolytic episodes and results in significant morbidities and reduced life expectancy. In addition to anemia, many patients experience abdominal pain, dysphagia, erectile dysfunction, and pulmonary hypertension, and are at increased risk of renal failure and thromboembolic events.
PNH was first described as a distinct entity in the 1800s, but it was only in the 1950s, with discovery of the alternative pathway of complement activation, that the cause of hemolysis in PNH was firmly established (Parker C J. Paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria: an historical overview. Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program. 93-103 (2008)). CD55 and CD59 are normally attached to the cell membrane via glycosyl phosphatidylinositol (GPI) anchors (glycolipid structures that anchor certain proteins to the plasma membrane). PNH arises as a consequence of nonmalignant clonal expansion of hematopoietic stem cell(s) that have acquired a somatic mutation in the PIGA gene, which encodes a protein involved in synthesis of GPI anchors (Takeda J, et al. Deficiency of the GPI anchor caused by a somatic mutation of the PIG-A gene in paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria. Cell. 73:703-711 (1993)). Progeny of such stem cells are deficient in GPI-anchored proteins, including CD55 and CD59. This defect renders these cells susceptible to complement-mediated RBC lysis. Flow cytometric analysis using antibodies to GPI-anchored proteins is often used for diagnosis. It detects deficiency of GPI-anchored proteins at the cell surface and allows determination of the degree of deficiency and the proportion of affected cells (Brodsky R A. Advances in the diagnosis and therapy of paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria. Blood Rev. 22(2):65-74 (2008). PNH type III RBCs are completely deficient in GPI-linked proteins and are highly sensitive to complement whereas PNH type II RBCs have a partial deficiency and are less sensitive. FLAER is a fluorescently labeled inactive variant of proaerolysin (a bacterial toxin that binds GPI anchors) and is increasingly used together with flow cytometry for diagnosis of PNH. Lack of binding of FLAER to granulocytes is sufficient for diagnosis of PNH. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive compstatin analog protects PNH RBCs from deposition of C3b.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject suffering from atypical hemolytic syndrome (aHUS). aHUS is a chronic disorder characterized by microangiopathic hemolytic anemia, thrombocytopenia, and acute renal failure and is caused by inappropriate complement activation, often due to mutations in genes encoding complement regulatory proteins (Warwicker, P., et al. Kidney Int 53, 836-844 (1998); Kavanagh, D. & Goodship, T. Pediatr Nephrol 25, 2431-2442 (2010). Mutations in the complement factor H (CFH) gene are the most common genetic abnormality in patients with aHUS, and 60-70% of these patients die or reach end stage renal failure within one year after disease onset (Kavanagh & Goodship, supra.) Mutations in factor I, factor B, C3, factor H-related proteins 1-5, and thrombomodulin have also been described. Other causes of aHUS include autoantibodies against complement regulatory proteins such as CFH. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject that has been identified as having a mutation in factor I, factor B, C3, factor H-related proteins 1-5, or thrombomodulin or has been identified as having antibodies against a complement regulatory protein, e.g., CFH.
Complement-mediated hemolysis occurs in a diverse group of other conditions including autoimmune hemolytic anemias that involve antibodies that bind to RBCs and lead to complement-mediated hemolysis. For example, such hemolysis can occur in primary chronic cold agglutinin disease and certain reactions to drugs and other foreign substances (Berentsen, S., et al., Hematology 12, 361-370 (2007); Rosse, W. F., Hillmen, P. & Schreiber, A. D. Hematology Am Soc Hematol Educ Program, 48-62 (2004)). In some embodiments of the invention a cell-reactive compstatin analog is administered to a subject suffering from or at risk of chronic cold agglutinin disease. In another embodiment, a cell-reactive compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of the HELLP syndrome, which is defined by the existence of hemolysis, elevated liver enzymes, and low platelet count and is associated with mutations in complement regulatory protein(s) in at least some subjects (Fakhouri, F., et al., 112: 4542-4545 (2008)).
In other embodiments, cell-reactive compstatin analogs are used to protect RBCs or other cellular components of blood to be transfused into a subject. Certain examples of such uses are discussed further in below. As noted above, targeted and/or long-acting compstatin analogs can be used in the above methods for inhibiting complement-mediated hemolysis and/or RBC damage. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a (CH2CH2O) moiety is used to treat PNH or aHUS.
B. Transplantation
Transplantation is a therapeutic approach of increasing importance, providing a means to replace organs and tissues that have been damaged through trauma, disease, or other conditions. Kidneys, liver, lungs, pancreas, and heart are among the organs that can be successfully transplanted. Tissues that are frequently transplanted include bones, cartilage, tendons, cornea, skin, heart valves, and blood vessels. Pancreatic islet or islet cell transplantation is a promising approach for treatment of diabetes, e.g., type I diabetes. For purposes of the invention, an organ, tissue, or cell (or population of cells) that is be transplanted, is being transplanted, or has been transplanted may be referred to as a “graft”. For purposes hereof, a blood transfusion is considered a “graft”.
Transplantation subjects the graft to a variety of damaging events and stimuli that can contribute to graft dysfunction and, potentially, failure. For example, ischemia-reperfusion (I/R) injury is a common and significant cause of morbidity and mortality in the case of many grafts (particularly solid organs) and can be a major determinant of likelihood of graft survival. Transplant rejection is one of the major risks associated with transplants between genetically different individuals and can lead to graft failure and a need to remove the graft from the recipient.
In some embodiments of the invention, a cell-reactive compstatin analog, cell-targeted compstatin analog, and/or a long-acting compstatin analog is used to protect a graft from complement-mediated damage. A cell-reactive compstatin analog reacts with cells of the graft, becomes covalently attached thereto, and inhibits complement activation. A cell-targeted compstatin analog binds to a target molecule in the graft (e.g., expressed by endothelial cells or other cells in the graft) and inhibits complement activation. A target molecule may be, e.g., is a molecule whose expression is induced or stimulated by a stimulus such as injury or inflammation, molecule that would be recognized as “non-self” by the recipient, a carbohydrate xenoantigen to which antibodies are commonly found in human beings such as a blood group antigen or a xenoantigen, e.g., a molecule comprising an alpha-gal epitope. In some embodiments, a reduction in complement activation can be demonstrated by a reduction in average C4d deposition in blood vessels of grafts that have been contacted with a compstatin analog, e.g., a cell-reactive compstatin analog, as compared with the average level of C4d deposition in grafts that have not been contacted with a compstatin analog (e.g., in subjects who are matched with respect to the grafts and other therapy that they receive).
A graft can be contacted with a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog and/or an INAA that inhibits C3 expression prior to, during, and/or after being transplanted, in various embodiments of the invention. For example, prior to transplantation a graft removed from a donor can be contacted with a liquid comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog. For example, the graft can be bathed in and/or perfused with the solution. In another embodiment, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a donor prior to removal of the graft. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a recipient during and/or after the introduction of the graft. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive compstatin, long-acting, or targeted analog is delivered locally to the transplanted graft. In some embodiments a cell-reactive compstatin analog is administered systemically, e.g., intravenously.
The invention provides a composition comprising: (a) an isolated graft; (b) a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog and (c) an INAA that inhibits C3 expression. In some embodiments the composition further comprises a liquid solution suitable for contacting (e.g., suitable for rinsing, washing, bathing, perfusing, maintaining, or storing) a graft (e.g., an organ) such as an isolated graft that has been removed from a donor and is awaiting transplantation to a recipient. In some embodiments the invention provides a composition comprising: (a) a liquid solution suitable for contacting a graft (e.g., an organ); and (b) a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog. The liquid solution can be any liquid solution that is physiologically acceptable to the graft (e.g., appropriate osmotic composition, non-cytotoxic) and medically acceptable in view of the subsequent introduction of the graft into the recipient (e.g., preferably sterile or at least reasonably free from microorganisms or other contaminants) and compatible with the cell-reactive compstatin analog (i.e., will not destroy the reactivity of the compstatin analog) or compatible with the long-acting or targeted compstatin analog. In some embodiments, a solution is any solution own in the art for any such purposes. In some embodiments, a liquid solution is Marshall's or Hyperosmolar Citrate (Soltran®, Baxter Healthcare), University of Wisconsin (UW) solution (ViaSpan™, Bristol Myers Squibb), Histidine Tryptophan Ketoglutarate (HTK) solution (Custodial®, Kohler Medical Limited), EuroCollins (Fresenius), and Celsior® (Sangstat Medical), Polysol, IGL-1, or AQIX® RS-1. Of course other solutions, e.g., containing equivalent or similar ingredients in the same or different concentrations could be used within the scope of physiologically acceptable compositions. In some embodiments a solution does not contain ingredient(s) with which the cell-reactive compstatin analog would be expected to significantly react, and any solution may be modified or designed to lack such ingredients. In some embodiments, the cell-reactive compstatin analog is present in the graft-compatible solution at a concentration of, e.g., between 0.01 mg/ml and 100 mg/ml or may be added to the solution to achieve such concentration.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a kit comprising: (a) a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog; and (b) a graft-compatible solution or solid (e.g., powder) components thereof. The cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog may be provided in solid form (e.g., powder) or at least in part dissolved in a solution. In some embodiments the cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog and/or graft-compatible solution are provided in predetermined amounts, so that when combined, a solution of appropriate concentration for contacting a graft with the cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is produced. In many embodiments the cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog and graft-compatible solution or solid (e.g., powder) components thereof are in separate containers within the kit. In some embodiments the cell-reactive compstatin analog and components of a graft-compatible solution are both provided in solid (e.g., powder) form, either in separate containers or mixed. In some embodiments the kit comprises instructions for use, e.g., instructions for adding a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog to a graft-compatible solution and/or instructions for contacting a graft with a cell-reactive compstatin analog. Optionally the kit contains a label approved by a government agency responsible for regulating products used in transplantation, cell therapy, and/or blood transfusion.
The invention further provides a method of covalently attaching a compstatin analog to an isolated graft comprising contacting the isolated graft with a cell-reactive compstatin analog. The invention further provides an isolated graft having a compstatin analog covalently attached thereto. Typically the isolated graft has many molecules of compstatin analog attached thereto. In some embodiments, a graft is or comprises a solid organ such as a kidney, liver, lung, pancreas, or heart. In some embodiments, a graft is or comprises bone, cartilage, fascia, tendon, ligament, cornea, sclera, pericardium, skin, heart valve, blood vessel, amniotic membrane, or dura mater. In some embodiments, a graft comprises multiple organs such as a heart-lung or pancreas-kidney graft. In some embodiments, a graft comprises less than a complete organ or tissue. For example, a graft may contain a portion of an organ or tissue, e.g., a liver lobe, section of blood vessel, skin flap, or heart valve. In some embodiments, a graft comprises a preparation comprising isolated cells or tissue fragments that have been isolated from their tissue of origin but retain at least some tissue architecture, e.g., pancreatic islets. In some embodiments, a preparation comprises isolated cells that are not attached to each other via connective tissue, e.g., hematopoietic stem cells or progenitor cells derived from peripheral and/or cord blood, or whole blood or any cell-containing blood product such as red blood cells (RBCs) or platelets. In some embodiments a graft is obtained from a deceased donor (e.g., a “donation after brain death” (DBD) donor or “donation after cardiac death” donor). In some embodiments, depending on the particular type of graft, a graft is obtained from a living donor. For example, kidneys, liver sections, blood cells, are among the types of grafts that can often be obtained from a living donor without undue risk to the donor and consistent with sound medical practice.
In some embodiments, a graft is a xenograft (i.e., the donor and recipient are of different species). In some embodiments a graft is an autograft (i.e., a graft from one part of the body to another part of the body in the same individual). In some embodiments, a graft is an isograft (i.e., the donor and recipient are genetically identical). In most embodiments, the graft is an allograft (i.e., the donor and recipient are genetically non-identical members of the same species). In the case of an allograft, the donor and recipient may or may not be genetically related (e.g., family members). Typically, the donor and recipient have compatible blood groups (at least ABO compatibility and optionally Rh, Kell and/or other blood cell antigen compatibility). The recipient's blood may have been screened for alloantibodies to the graft and/or the recipient and donor since the presence of such antibodies can lead to hyperacute rejection (i.e., rejection beginning almost immediately, e.g., within several minutes after the graft comes into contact with the recipient's blood). A complement-dependent cytotoxicity (CDC) assay can be used to screen a subject's serum for anti-HLA antibodies. The serum is incubated with a panel of lymphocytes of known HLA phenotype. If the serum contains antibodies against HLA molecules on the target cells, cell death due to complement-mediated lysis occurs. Using a selected panel of target cells allows one to assign specificity to the detected antibody. Other techniques useful for determining the presence or absence anti-HLA antibodies and, optionally, determining their HLA specificity, include ELISA assays, flow cytometry assays, microbead array technology (e.g., Luminex technology). The methodology for performing these assays is well known, and a variety of kits for performing them are commercially available.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog inhibits complement-mediated rejection. For example, in some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog inhibits hyperacute rejection. Hyperacute rejection is caused at least in part by antibody-mediated activation of the recipient's complement system via the classical pathway and resulting MAC deposition on the graft. It typically results from the presence in the recipient of pre-existing antibodies that react with the graft. While it is desirable to attempt to avoid hyperacute rejection by appropriate matching prior to transplantation, it may not always possible to do so due, e.g., to time and/or resource constraints. Furthermore, some recipients (e.g., multiply transfused individuals, individuals who have previously received transplants, women who have had multiple pregnancies) may already have so many pre-formed antibodies, potentially including antibodies to antigens that are not typically tested for, that it can be difficult or perhaps almost impossible to obtain with confidence a compatible graft in a timely manner. Such individuals are at increased risk of hyperacute rejection.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog inhibits acute rejection or graft failure. As used herein, “acute rejection” refers to rejection occurring between at least 24 hours, typically at least several days to a week, after a transplant, up to 6 months after the transplant. Acute antibody-mediated rejection (AMR) often involves an acute rise in donor-specific alloantibody (DSA) in the first few weeks after transplantation. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, it is possible that pre-existing plasma cells and/or the conversion of memory B cells to new plasma cells play a role in the increased DSA production. Such antibodies can result in complement-mediated damage to the graft, which can be inhibited by contacting the graft with a cell-reactive compstatin analog. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, inhibiting complement activation at the graft may reduce leukocyte (e.g., neutrophil) infiltration, another contributor to acute graft failure.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog inhibits complement-mediated I/R injury to a graft. As discussed further below, I/R injury can occur upon reperfusion of tissue whose blood supply has been temporarily disrupted, as occurs in transplanted organs. Reducing I/R injury would reduce the likelihood of acute graft dysfunction or reduce its severity, and reduce the likelihood of acute graft failure.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog inhibits chronic rejection and/or chronic graft failure. As used herein, “chronic rejection or graft failure” refers to rejection or failure occurring at least 6 months post-transplant, e.g., between 6 months and 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 years, or more post-transplant, often after months to years of good graft function. It is caused by a chronic inflammatory and immune response against the graft. For purposes hereof, chronic rejection can include chronic allograft vasculopathy, a term used to refer to fibrosis of the internal blood vessels of the transplanted tissue. As immunosuppressive regimens have reduced the incidence of acute rejection, chronic rejection is becoming more prominent as a cause of graft dysfunction and failure. There is increasing evidence that B-cell production of alloantibody is an important element in the genesis of chronic rejection and graft failure (Kwun J. and Knechtle S J, Transplantation, 88(8):955-61 (2009). Earlier damage to the graft may be a contributing factor leading to chronic processes such as fibrosis that can ultimately lead to chronic rejection. Thus, inhibiting such earlier damage using a cell-reactive compstatin analog may delay and/or reduce the likelihood or severity of chronic graft rejection.
In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog is administered to a graft recipient to inhibit graft rejection and/or graft failure.
C. Ischemia/Reperfusion Injury
Ischemia-reperfusion (I/R) injury is an important cause of tissue damage following trauma and in other conditions associated with temporary disruption of blood flow such as myocardial infarction, stroke, severe infection, vascular disease, aneurysm repair, cardiopulmonary bypass, and transplantation.
In the setting of trauma, systemic hypoxemia, hypotension, and local interruption of the blood supply resulting from contusions, compartment syndrome, and vascular injuries cause ischemia that damages metabolically active tissues. Restoration of the blood supply triggers an intense systemic inflammatory reaction that is often more harmful than the ischemia itself. Once the ischemic region is reperfused, factors that are produced and released locally enter the circulatory system and reach remote locations, sometimes causing significant damage to organs not affected by the original ischemic insult, such as the lungs and intestine, leading to single and multiple organ dysfunction. Complement activation occurs soon after reperfusion and is a key mediator of post-ischemic damage, both directly and through its chemoattractive and stimulatory effects on neutrophils. All three major complement pathways are activated and, acting cooperatively or independently, are involved in I/R related adverse events affecting numerous organ systems. In some embodiments of the invention, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject who has recently (e.g., within the preceding 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, or 48 hours) experienced trauma, e.g., trauma that puts the subject at risk of I/R injury, e.g., due to systemic hypoxemia, hypotension, and/or local interruption of the blood supply. In some embodiments the cell-reactive compstatin analog may be administered intravascularly, optionally into a blood vessel that supplies an injured body part or directly to the body part. In some embodiments, the subject suffers from spinal cord injury, traumatic brain injury, burn, and/or hemorrhagic shock.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject prior to, during, or after a surgical procedure, e.g., a surgical procedure that is expected to temporarily disrupt blood flow to a tissue, organ, or portion of the body. Examples of such procedures include cardiopulmonary bypass, angioplasty, heart valve repair/replacement, aneurysm repair, or other vascular surgeries. The cell-reactive compstatin analog may be administered prior to, after, and/or during an overlapping time period with the surgical procedure.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject who has suffered an MI, thromboembolic stroke, deep vein thrombosis, or pulmonary embolism. The cell-reactive compstatin analog may be administered in combination with a thrombolytic agent such as tissue plasminogen activator (tPA) (e.g., alteplase (Activase), reteplase (Retavase), tenecteplase (TNKase)), anistreplase (Eminase), streptokinase (Kabikinase, Streptase), or urokinase (Abbokinase). The cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog may be administered prior to, after, and/or during an overlapping time period with the thrombolytic agent.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered to a subject to treat I/R injury.
D. Other Complement-Mediated Disorders
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is introduced into the eye for treatment of an eye disorder such as age-related macular degeneration (AMD), diabetic retinopathy, glaucoma, or uveitis. For example, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog may be introduced into the vitreous cavity (e.g., by intravitreal injection), for treatment of a subject suffering from or at risk of AMD. In some embodiments the AMD is neovascular (wet) AMD. In some embodiments the AMD is dry AMD. As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art, dry AMD encompasses geographic atrophy (GA), intermediate AMD, and early AMD. In some embodiments, a subject with GA is treated in order to slow or halt progression of the disease. For example, in some embodiments, treatment of a subject with GA reduces the rate of retinal cell death. A reduction in the rate of retinal cell death may be evidenced by a reduction in the rate of GA lesion growth in patients treated with a LACA as compared with control (e.g., patients given a sham injection). In some embodiments, a subject has intermediate AMD. In some embodiments, a subject has early AMD. In some embodiments, a subject with intermediate or early AMD is treated in order to slow or halt progression of the disease. For example, in some embodiments, treatment of a subject with intermediate AMD may slow or prevent progression to an advanced form of AMD (neovascular AMD or GA). In some embodiments, treatment of a subject with early AMD may slow or prevent progression to intermediate AMD. In some embodiments an eye has both GA and neovascular AMD. In some embodiments an eye has GA but not wet AMD. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered by intravitreal injection to treat glaucoma, uveitis (e.g., posterior uveitis), or diabetic retinopathy. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is introduced into the anterior chamber, e.g., to treat anterior uveitis.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of an autoimmune disease, e.g., an autoimmune disease mediated at least in part by antibodies against one or more self antigens.
Cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analogs may be introduced into the synovial cavity, e.g., in a subject suffering from arthritis (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis). Of course they may be administered systemically in addition or
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of an intracerebral hemorrhage.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of myasthenia gravis.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of neuromyelitis optica (NMO),
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN), e.g., MPGN type I, MPGN type II, or MPGH type III.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of a neurodegenerative disease. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from neuropathic pain or at risk of developing neuropathic pain. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of rhinosinusitis or nasal polyposis. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of cancer. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of sepsis. In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of adult respiratory distress syndrome.
In some embodiments a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a subject suffering from or at risk of anaphylaxis or infusion reaction. For example, in some embodiments a subject may be pretreated prior to, during, or after receiving a drug or a vehicle that may cause anaphylaxis or infusion reaction. In some embodiments a subject at risk of or suffering from anaphylaxis from a food (e.g., peanut, shellfish, or other food allergens), insect sting (e.g., bee, wasp), is treated with a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog.
The cell-reactive long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog may be administered locally or systemically, in various embodiments of the invention.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat a respiratory disease, e.g., asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) or idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis. The cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog may, for example, be administered to the respiratory tract by inhalation, e.g., as a dry powder or via nebulization, or may be administered by injection, e.g., intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously, in various embodiments. In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is used to treat severe asthma, e.g., asthma that is not sufficiently controlled by bronchodilators and/or inhaled corticosteroids.
In some aspects, methods of treating a complement-mediated disorder, e.g., a chronic complement-mediated disorder, are provided, the methods comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder. The long-acting compstatin analog may be any long-acting compstatin analog described herein, in various embodiments. In some aspects, methods of treating a Th17-associated disorder are provided, the methods comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some aspects, a “chronic disorder” is a disorder that persists for at least 3 months and/or is accepted in the art as being a chronic disorder. In many embodiments, a chronic disorder persists for at least 6 months, e.g., at least 1 year, or more, e.g., indefinitely. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that at least some manifestations of various chronic disorders may be intermittent and/or may wax and wane in severity over time. A chronic disorder may be progressive, e.g., having a tendency to become more severe or affect larger areas over time. A number of chronic complement-mediated disorders are discussed herein. A chronic complement-mediated disorder may be any chronic disorder in which complement activation (e.g., excessive or inappropriate complement activation) is involved, e.g., as a contributing and/or at least partially causative factor. For convenience, disorders are sometimes grouped by reference to an organ or system that is often particularly affected in subjects suffering from the disorder. It will be appreciated that a number of disorders can affect multiple organs or systems, and such classification(s) are in no way limiting. Furthermore, a number of manifestations (e.g., symptoms) may occur in subjects suffering from any of a number of different disorders. Non-limiting information regarding disorders of interest herein may be found, e.g., in standard textbooks of internal medicine such as Cecil Textbook of Medicine (e.g., 23rd edition), Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine (e.g., 17th edition), and/or standard textbooks focusing on particular areas of medicine, particular body systems or organs, and/or particular disorders.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a Th2-associated disorder. As used herein, a Th2-associated disorder is a disorder characterized by an excessive number and/or excessive or inappropriate activity of CD4+ helper T cells of the Th2 subtype (“Th2 cells”) in the body or a portion thereof, e.g., in at least one tissue, organ, or structure. For example, there may be a predominance of Th2 cells relative to CD4+ helper T cells of the Th1 subtype (“Th1 cells”) e.g., in at least one tissue, organ, or structure affected by a disorder. As known in the art, Th2 cells typically secrete characteristic cytokines such as interleukin-4 (IL-4), interleukin-5 (IL-5), and interleukin-13 (IL-13), while Th1 cells typically secrete interferon-γ (IFN-γ) and tumor necrosis factor β (TNF β). In some embodiments, a Th2-associated disorder is characterized by excessive production and/or amount of IL-4, IL-5, and/or IL-13, e.g., relative to IFN-γ and/or TNF β e.g., in at least some at least one tissue, organ, or structure
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a Th17-associated disorder. In some aspects, as described in further detail in PCT/US2012/043845, filed Jun. 22, 2012, entitled “Methods of Treating Chronic Disorders with Complement Inhibitors”, complement activation and Th17 cells participate in a cycle that involves dendritic cells and antibodies and that contributes to maintenance of a pathologic immunologic microenvironment underlying a range of disorders. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, the pathologic immunologic microenvironment, once established, is self-sustaining and contributes to cell and tissue injury. In some aspects, long-acting compstatin analogs are of use to treat Th17-associated disorders.
As used herein, a Th17-associated disorder is a disorder characterized by an excessive number and/or excessive or inappropriate activity of CD4+ helper T cells of the Th17 subtype (“Th17 cells”) in the body or a portion thereof, e.g., in at least one tissue, organ, or structure. For example, there may be a predominance of Th17 cells relative to Th1 and/or Th2 cells, e.g., in at least one tissue, organ, or structure affected by a disorder. In some embodiments a predominance of Th17 cells is a relative predominance, e.g., the ratio of Th17 cells to Th1 cells and/or the ratio of Th17 cells to Th2 cells, is increased relative to normal values. In some embodiments the ratio of Th17 cells to T regulatory cells (CD4+CD25+ regulatory T cells, also termed “Treg cells”), is increased relative to normal values. Formation of Th17 cells and/or activation of Th 17 cells is promoted by various cytokines, e.g., interleukin 6 (IL-6), interleukin 21 (IL-21), interleukin 23 (IL-23), and/or interleukin 1β (IL-1β). Formation of Th17 cells encompasses differentiation of precursor T cells, e.g., naïve CD4+ T cells, towards a Th17 phenotype and their maturation into functional Th17 cells. In some embodiments, formation of Th17 cells encompasses any aspect of development, proliferation (expansion), survival, and/or maturation of Th17 cells. In some embodiments, a Th17-associated disorder is characterized by excessive production and/or amount of IL-6, IL-21, IL-23, and/or IL-1β. Th17 cells typically secrete characteristic cytokines such as interleukin-17A (IL-17A), interleukin-17F (IL-17F), interleukin-21 (IL-21), and interleukin-22 (IL-22). In some embodiments, a Th17-associated disorder is characterized by excessive production and/or amount of a Th17 effector cytokine, e.g., IL-17A, IL-17F, IL-21, and/or IL-22. In some embodiments excessive production or amount of a cytokine is detectable in the blood. In some embodiments excessive production or amount of a cytokine is detectable locally, e.g., in at least one tissue, organ or structure. In some embodiments a Th17-associated disorder is associated with a decreased number of Tregs and/or decreased amount of a Treg-associated cytokine. In some embodiments a Th17 disorder is any chronic inflammatory disease, which term encompasses a range of ailments characterized by self-perpetuating immune insults to a variety of tissues and that seem to be dissociated from the initial insult that caused the ailment (which may be unknown). In some embodiments a Th17-associated disorder is any autoimmune disease. Many if not most “chronic inflammatory diseases” may in fact be auto-immune diseases. Examples of Th17-associated disorders include inflammatory skin diseases such as psoriasis and atopic dermatitis; systemic scleroderma and sclerosis; inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) (such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis); Behcet's Disease; dermatomyositis; polymyositis; multiple sclerosis (MS); dermatitis; meningitis; encephalitis; uveitis; osteoarthritis; lupus nephritis; rheumatoid arthritis (RA), Sjogren's syndrome, multiple sclerosis, vasculitis; central nervous system (CNS) inflammatory disorders, chronic hepatitis; chronic pancreatitis, glomerulonephritis; sarcoidosis; thyroiditis, pathologic immune responses to tissue/organ transplantation (e.g., transplant rejection); COPD, asthma, bronchiolitis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF), periodontitis, and gingivitis. In some embodiments a Th17 disease is a classically known auto-immune disease such as Type I diabetes or psoriasis. In some embodiments a Th17-associated disorder is age-related macular degeneration.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is an IgE-associated disorder. As used herein, an “IgE-associated disorder” is a disorder characterized by excessive and/or inappropriate production and/or amount of IgE, excessive or inappropriate activity of IgE producing cells (e.g., IgE producing B cells or plasma cells), and/or excessive and/or inappropriate activity of IgE responsive cells such as eosinophils or mast cells. In some embodiments, an IgE-associated disorder is characterized by elevated levels of total IgE and/or in some embodiments, allergen-specific IgE, in the plasma of a subject and/or locally.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is characterized by the presence of autoantibodies and/or immune complexes in the body, which may activate complement via, e.g., the classical pathway. Autoantibodies may, for example, bind to self antigens, e.g., on cells or tissues in the body. In some embodiments, autoantibodies bind to antigens in blood vessels, skin, nerves, muscle, connective tissue, heart, kidney, thyroid, etc. In some embodiments, a subject has neuromyelitis optica and produces an autoantibody (e.g., an IgG autoantibody) to aquaporin 4. In some embodiments, a subject has pemphigoid and produces an autoantibody (e.g., an IgG or IgE autoantibody) to a structural component of the hemidesmosome (e.g., transmembrane collagen XVII (BP180 or BPAG2) and/or plakin family protein BP230 (BPAG1). In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is not characterized by autoantibodies and/or immune complexes.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a respiratory disorder. In some embodiments, a chronic respiratory disorder is asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD). In some embodiments, a chronic respiratory disorder is pulmonary fibrosis (e.g., idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis), radiation-induced lung injury, allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis (also known as allergic alveolitis), eosinophilic pneumonia, interstitial pneumonia, sarcoid, Wegener's granulomatosis, or bronchiolitis obliterans. In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a subject in need of treatment for a chronic respiratory disorder, e.g., asthma, COPD, pulmonary fibrosis, radiation-induced lung injury, allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis (also known as allergic alveolitis), eosinophilic pneumonia, interstitial pneumonia, sarcoid, Wegener's granulomatosis, or bronchiolitis obliterans, the method comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is allergic rhinitis, rhinosinusitis, or nasal polyposis. In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a subject in need of treatment for allergic rhinitis, rhinosinusitis, or nasal polyposis, the method comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a disorder that affects the musculoskeletal system. Examples of such disorders include inflammatory joint conditions (e.g., arthritis such as rheumatoid arthritis or psoriatic arthritis, juvenile chronic arthritis, spondyloarthropathies Reiter's syndrome, gout). In some embodiments, a musculoskeletal system disorder results in symptoms such as pain, stiffness and/or limitation of motion of the affected body part(s). Inflammatory myopathies include dermatomyositis, polymyositis, and various others are disorders of chronic muscle inflammation of unknown etiology that result in muscle weakness. In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is myasthenia gravis. In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating any of the foregoing disorders affecting the musculoskeletal system, the method comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a disorder that affects the integumentary system. Examples of such disorders include, e.g., atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, pemphigoid, pemphigus, systemic lupus erythematosus, dermatomyositis, scleroderma, sclerodermatomyositis, Sjögren syndrome, and chronic urticaria. In some aspects, the invention provides a method of treating any of the foregoing disorders affecting the integumentary system, the method comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder affects the nervous system, e.g., the central nervous system (CNS) and/or peripheral nervous system (PNS). Examples of such disorders include, e.g., multiple sclerosis, other chronic demyelinating diseases (e.g., neuromyelits optica), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, chronic pain, stroke, allergic neuritis, Huntington's disease, Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease. In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating any of the foregoing disorders affecting the nervous system, the method comprising administering a complement inhibitor, e.g., a long-acting, targeted or cell-reactive compstatin analog, to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder affects the circulatory system. For example, in some embodiments the disorder is a vasculitis or other disorder associated with vessel inflammation, e.g., blood vessel and/or lymph vessel inflammation. In some embodiments, a vasculitis is polyarteritis nodosa, Wegener's granulomatosis, giant cell arteritis, Churg-Strauss syndrome, microscopic polyangiitis, Henoch-Schonlein purpura, Takayasu's arteritis, Kawasaki disease, or Behcet's disease. In some embodiments, a subject, e.g., a subject in need of treatment for vasculitis, is positive for antineutrophil cytoplasmic antibody (ANCA).
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder affects the gastrointestinal system. For example, the disorder may be inflammatory bowel disease, e.g., Crohn's disease or ulcerative colitis. In some embodiments, the invention provides a method of treating a chronic complement-mediated disorder that affects the gastrointestinal system, the method comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need of treatment for the disorder.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a thyroiditis (e.g., Hashimoto's thyroiditis, Graves' disease, post-partum thyroiditis), myocarditis, hepatitis (e.g., hepatitis C), pancreatitis, glomerulonephritis (e.g., membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis or membranous glomerulonephritis), or panniculitis.
In some embodiments, the invention provides methods of treating a subject suffering from chronic pain, the methods comprising administering a long-acting complement inhibitor to a subject in need thereof. In some embodiments, a subject suffers from neuropathic pain. Neuropathic pain has been defined as pain initiated or caused by a primary lesion or dysfunction in the nervous system, in particular, pain arising as a direct consequence of a lesion or disease affecting the somatosensory system. For example, neuropathic pain may arise from lesions that involve the somatosensory pathways with damage to small fibres in peripheral nerves and/or to the spino-thalamocortical system in the CNS. In some embodiments, neuropathic pain arises from autoimmune disease (e.g., multiple sclerosis), metabolic disease (e.g., diabetes), infection (e.g., viral disease such as shingles or HIV), vascular disease (e.g., stroke), trauma (e.g., injury, surgery), or cancer. For example, neuropathic pain can be pain that persists after healing of an injury or after cessation of a stimulus of peripheral nerve endings or pain that arises due to damage to nerves. Exemplary conditions of or associated with neuropathic pain include painful diabetic neuropathy, post-herpetic neuralgia (e.g., pain persisting or recurring at the site of acute herpes zoster 3 or more months after the acute episode), trigeminal neuralgia, cancer related neuropathic pain, chemotherapy-associated neuropathic pain, HIV-related neuropathic pain (e.g., from HIV neuropathy), central/post-stroke neuropathic pain, neuropathy associated with back pain, e.g., low back pain (e.g., from radiculopathy such as spinal root compression, e.g., lumbar root compression, which compression may arise due to disc herniation), spinal stenosis, peripheral nerve injury pain, phantom limb pain, polyneuropathy, spinal cord injury related pain, myelopathy, and multiple sclerosis. In certain embodiments of the invention a complement inhibitor is administered according to an inventive dosing schedule to treat neuropathic pain in a subject with one or more of the afore-mentioned conditions.
In some embodiments, a chronic complement-mediated disorder is a chronic eye disorder. In some embodiments, the chronic eye disorder is characterized by macular degeneration, choroidal neovascularization (CNV), retinal neovascularization (RNV), ocular inflammation, or any combination of the foregoing. Macular degeneration, CNV, RNV, and/or ocular inflammation may be a defining and/or diagnostic feature of the disorder. Exemplary disorders that are characterized by one or more of these features include, but are not limited to, macular degeneration related conditions, diabetic retinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, proliferative vitreoretinopathy, uveitis, keratitis, conjunctivitis, and scleritis. Macular degeneration related conditions include, e.g., age-related macular degeneration (AMD). In some embodiments, a subject is in need of treatment for wet AMD. In some embodiments, a subject is in need of treatment for dry AMD. In some embodiments, a subject is in need of treatment for geographic atrophy (GA). In some embodiments, a subject is in need of treatment for ocular inflammation. Ocular inflammation can affect a large number of eye structures such as the conjunctiva (conjunctivitis), cornea (keratitis), episclera, sclera (scleritis), uveal tract, retina, vasculature, and/or optic nerve. Evidence of ocular inflammation can include the presence of inflammation-associated cells such as white blood cells (e.g., neutrophils, macrophages) in the eye, the presence of endogenous inflammatory mediator(s), one or more symptoms such as eye pain, redness, light sensitivity, blurred vision and floaters, etc. Uveitis is a general term that refers to inflammation in the uvea of the eye, e.g., in any of the structures of the uvea, including the iris, ciliary body or choroid. Specific types of uveitis include iritis, iridocyclitis, cyclitis, pars planitis and choroiditis. In some embodiments, a subject is in need of treatment for geographic atrophy (GA). In some embodiments, the chronic eye disorder is an eye disorder characterized by optic nerve damage (e.g., optic nerve degeneration), such as glaucoma.
As noted above, in some embodiments the chronic respiratory disease is asthma. Information regarding risk factors, epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, current management of asthma, etc., may be found, e.g., in “Expert Panel Report 3: Guidelines for the Diagnosis and Management of Asthma”. National Heart Lung and Blood Institute. 2007. http://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/guidelines/asthma/asthgdln.pdf. (“NHLBI Guidelines”; www.nhlbi.nih.gov/guidelines/asthma/asthgdln.htm), Global Initiative for Asthma, Global Strategy for Asthma Management and Prevention 2010 “GINA Report”) and/or standard textbooks of internal medicine such as Cecil Textbook of Medicine (20th edition), Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine (17th edition), and/or standard textbooks focusing on pulmonary medicine. Asthma is a chronic inflammatory disorder of the airways in which many cells and cellular elements play a role, such as, mast cells, eosinophils, T lymphocytes, macrophages, neutrophils, and epithelial cells Asthmatic individuals experience recurrent episodes associated with symptoms such as wheezing, breathlessness (also termed dyspnea or shortness of breath), chest tightness, and coughing. These episodes are usually associated with widespread but variable airflow obstruction that is often reversible, either spontaneously or with treatment. The inflammation also causes an associated increase in the existing bronchial hyperresponsiveness to a variety of stimuli. Airway hyperresponsiveness (an exaggerated bronchoconstrictor response to stimuli) is a typical feature of asthma. In general, airflow limitation results from bronchoconstriction and airway edema. Reversibility of airflow limitation may be incomplete in some patients with asthma. For example, airway remodeling can lead to fixed airway narrowing. Structural changes can include thickening of the sub-basement membrane, subepithelial fibrosis, airway smooth muscle hypertrophy and hyperplasia, blood vessel proliferation and dilation, and mucous gland hyperplasia, and hypersecretion.
Individuals with asthma may experience exacerbations, which are identified as events characterized by a change from the individual's previous status. Severe asthma exacerbations can be defined as events that require urgent action on the part of the individual and his/her physician to prevent a serious outcome, such as hospitalization or death from asthma. For example, a severe asthma exacerbation may require use of systemic corticosteroids (e.g., oral corticosteroids) in a subject whose asthma is usually well controlled without OCS or may require an increase in a stable maintenance dose. Moderate asthma exacerbations can be defined as events that are troublesome to the subject, and that prompt a need for a change in treatment, but that are not severe. These events are clinically identified by being outside the subject's usual range of day-to-day asthma variation.
Current medications for asthma are typically categorized into two general classes: long-term control medications (“controller medications”) such as inhaled corticosteroids (ICS), oral corticosteroids (OCS), long-acting bronchodilators (LABAs), leukotriene modifiers (e.g., leukotriene receptor antagonists or leukotriene synthesis inhibitors, anti-IgE antibodies (omalizumab (Xolair®)), cromolyn and nedocromil, which are used to achieve and maintain control of persistent asthma and quick-relief medications such as short-acting bronchodilators (SABAs), which are used to treat acute symptoms and exacerbations. For purposes of the present invention, these treatments may be referred to as “conventional therapy”. Treatment of exacerbations may also include increasing the dose and/or intensity of controller medication therapy. For example, a course of OCS can be used to regain asthma control. Current guidelines mandate daily administration of controller medication or, in many cases, administration of multiple doses of controller medication each day for subjects with persistent asthma (with the exception of Xolair, which is administered every 2 or 4 weeks).
A subject is generally considered to have persistent asthma if the subject suffers from symptoms on average more than twice a week and/or typically uses a quick relief medication (e.g., SABA) more than twice a week for symptom control. “Asthma severity” can be classified based on the intensity of treatment required to control the subject's asthma once relevant comorbidities have been treated and inhaler technique and adherence have been optimized (see, e.g., GINA Report; Taylor, DR, Eur Respir J 2008; 32:545-554). The description of treatment intensity can be based on the medications and doses recommended in the stepwise treatment algorithm found in guidelines such as NHLBI Guidelines 2007, GINA Report, and their predecessors and/or in standard medical textbooks. For example, asthma can be classified as intermittent, mild, moderate, or severe as indicated in Table X, where “treatment” refers to treatment sufficient to achieve subject's best level of asthma control. (It will be understood that the categories of mild, moderate, and severe asthma in general imply persistent rather than intermittent asthma). One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that Table X is exemplary, and that not all of these medications will be available in all healthcare systems, which may affect the assessment of asthma severity in some environments. It will also be appreciated that other emerging or new approaches may affect the classification of mild/moderate asthma. However, the same principle, of mild asthma being defined by the ability to achieve good control using very low-intensity treatment and severe asthma being defined by the requirement for high-intensity treatment, can still be applied. Asthma severity can also or alternately be classified based on intrinsic intensity of the disease in the absence of treatment (see, e.g., NHBLI Guidelines 2007). Assessment can be made on the basis of current spirometry and the patient's recall of symptoms over the previous 2-4 weeks. Parameters of current impairment and future risk may be assessed and included in a determination of the level of asthma severity. In some embodiments, asthma severity is defined as shown in Figure 3.4(a), 3.4(b), 3.4(c) of the NHBLI Guidelines, for individuals 0-4, 5-11, or ≥12 years of age, respectively.
“Asthma control” refers to the extent to which the manifestations of asthma have been reduced or removed by treatment (whether pharmacological or non-pharmacological). Asthma control can be assessed based on factors such as symptom frequency, nighttime symptoms, objective measures of lung function such as spirometry parameters (e.g., % FEV1 of predicted, FEV1 variability, requirement for use of SABA for symptom control. Parameters of current impairment and future risk may be assessed and included in a determination of the level of asthma control. In some embodiments, asthma control is defined as shown in Figure 4.3(a), 4.3(b), or 4.3(c) of NHBLI Guidelines, for individuals 0-4, 5-11, or ≥12 years of age, respectively.
In general, one of ordinary skill in the art can select an appropriate means of determining asthma severity level and/or degree of control, and any classification scheme considered reasonable by those of ordinary skill in the art can be used.
In some embodiments of the invention, a subject suffering from persistent asthma is treated with a complement inhibitor using an inventive dosing regimen. In some embodiments, the subject suffers from mild or moderate asthma. In some embodiments, the subject suffers from severe asthma. In some embodiments, a subject has asthma that is not well controlled using conventional therapy. In some embodiments, a subject has asthma that, when treated using conventional therapy, requires use of ICS in order to be well controlled. In some embodiments, a subject has asthma that fails to be well controlled despite use of ICS. In some embodiments, a subject has asthma that, if treated using conventional therapy, would require use of OCS in order to be well controlled. In some embodiments, a subject has asthma that fails to be well controlled despite use of high intensity conventional therapy that includes OCS. In some embodiments of the invention a long-acting complement inhibitor is administered as a controller medication or allow the subject to avoid using or reduce their dose of a conventional controller medication.
In some embodiments, the subject suffers from allergic asthma, which is the case for most asthmatic individuals. In some embodiments, an asthmatic subject is considered to have allergic asthma if a non-allergic trigger for the asthma (e.g., cold, exercise) is not known and/or is not identified in a standard diagnostic evaluation. In some embodiments, an asthmatic subject is considered to have allergic asthma if the subject (i) reproducibly develops asthma symptoms (or worsening of asthma symptoms) following exposure to an allergen or allergen(s) to which the subject is sensitive; (ii) exhibits IgE specific for an allergen or allergen(s) to which the subject is sensitive; (iii) exhibits a positive skin-prick test to an allergen or allergen(s) to which the subject is sensitive; and/or (iv) exhibits other symptom(s) of characteristic(s) consistent with atopy such as allergic rhinitis, eczema, or elevated total serum IgE. It will be appreciated that a specific allergic trigger may not be identified but may be suspected or inferred if the subject experiences worsening symptoms in particular environments, for example.
Allergen challenge by inhalation is a technique that is widely used in evaluating allergic airway disease. Inhalation of allergen leads to cross-linking of allergen-specific IgE bound to IgE receptors on, e.g., mast cells and basophils. Activation of secretory pathways ensues, resulting in release of mediators of bronchoconstriction and vascular permeability. Individuals with allergic asthma may develop various manifestations following allergen challenge, e.g., early asthmatic response (EAR), late asthmatic response (LAR), airway hyperreactivity (AHR), and airway eosinophilia, each of which can be detected and quantified as known in the art. For example, airway eosiphophilia may be detected as an increase in eosinophils in sputum and/or BAL fluid. The EAR, sometimes referred to as the immediate asthmatic response (IAR), is a response to allergen challenge by inhalation that becomes detectable shortly after the inhalation, typically within 10 minutes (min) of the inhalation, e.g., as a decrease in FEV1. The EAR typically reaches a maximum within 30 min and resolves within 2-3 hours (h) post-challenge. For example, a subject may be considered to exhibit a “positive” EAR if his/her FEV1 decreases by at least 15%, e.g., at least 20%, within this time window relative to baseline FEV1 (where “baseline” in this context refers to conditions before the challenge, e.g., conditions equivalent to the subject's usual condition when not experiencing an asthma exacerbation and not exposed to allergic stimuli to which the subject is sensitive). The late asthmatic response (LAR) typically starts between 3 h and 8 h post-challenge and is characterized by cellular inflammation of the airway, increased bronchiovascular permeability, and mucus secretion. It is typically detected as a decrease in FEV1, which may be greater in magnitude than that associated with the EAR and potentially more clinically important. For example, a subject may be considered to exhibit a “positive” LAR if his/her FEV1 decreases by at least 15%, e.g., at least 20%, relative to baseline FEV1 within the relevant time period as compared with baseline FEV1. A delayed airway response (DAR) may occur beginning between about 26 and 32 h, reaching a maximum between about 32 and 48 h and resolving within about 56 h after the challenge (Pelikan, Z. Ann Allergy Asthma Immunol. 2010, 104(5):394-404).
In some embodiments, the chronic respiratory disorder is chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD). COPD encompasses a spectrum of conditions characterized by airflow limitation that is not fully reversible even with therapy and is usually progressive. Symptoms of COPD include dyspnea (breathlessness), decreased exercise tolerance, cough, sputum production, wheezing, and chest tightness. Persons with COPD can experience episodes of acute (e.g., developing over course of less than a week and often over the course of 24 hours or less) worsening of symptoms (termed COPD exacerbations) that can vary in frequency and duration and are associated with significant morbidity. They may be triggered by events such as respiratory infection, exposure to noxious particles, or may have an unknown etiology. Smoking is the most commonly encountered risk factor for COPD, and other inhalational exposures can also contribute to development and progression of the disease. The role of genetic factors in COPD is an area of active research. A small percentage of COPD patients have a hereditary deficiency of alpha-1 antitrypsin, a major circulating inhibitor of serine proteases, and this deficiency can lead to a rapidly progressive form of the disease.
Characteristic pathophysiologic features of COPD include narrowing of and structural changes in the small airways and destruction of lung parenchyma (in particular around alveoli), most commonly due to chronic inflammation. The chronic airflow limitation observed in COPD typically involves a mixture of these factors, and their relative importance in contributing to airflow limitation and symptoms varies from person to person. The term “emphysema” refers to enlargement of the air spaces (alveoli) distal to the terminal bronchioles, with destruction of their walls. It should be noted that the term “emphysema” is often used clinically to refer to the medical condition associated with such pathological changes. Some individuals with COPD have chronic bronchitis, which is defined in clinical terms as a cough with sputum production on most days for 3 months of a year, for 2 consecutive years. Further information regarding risk factors, epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, and current management of COPD may be found, e.g., in “Global Strategy for the Diagnosis, Management, and Prevention of Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease” (updated 2009) available on the Global Initiative on Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease, Inc. (GOLD) website (www.goldcopd.org), also referred to herein as the “GOLD Report”, the American Thoracic Society/European Respiratory Society Guidelines (2004) available on the ATS website at www.thoracic.org/clinical/copd-guidelines/resources/copddoc.pdf, referred to herein as “ATC/ERS COPD Guidelines” and standard textbooks of internal medicine such as Cecil Textbook of Medicine (20th edition), Harrison's Principles of Internal Medicine (17th edition), and/or standard textbooks focusing on pulmonary medicine.
In some embodiments methods disclosed herein inhibit (interfere with, disrupt) the DC-Th17-B-Ab-C-DC cycle discussed above. For example, administration of a complement inhibitor may break the cycle by which complement stimulates DC cells to promote the Th17 phenotype. As a result, the number and/or activity of Th17 cells diminishes, which in turn reduces the amount of Th17-mediated stimulation of B cells and polyclonal antibody production. In some embodiments, these effects result in “resetting” the immunological microenvironment to a more normal, less pathological state. As described in Example 1 of PCT/US2012/043845 (WO/2012/178083) and USSN 20140371133 (summarized briefly hereinbelow in Example 27) evidence supporting the capacity of complement inhibition to have a prolonged inhibitory effect on Th17-associated cytokine production has been obtained in an animal model of asthma.
In some embodiments, inhibiting the DC-Th17-B-Ab-C-DC cycle has a disease-modifying effect. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, rather than merely treating symptoms of a disorder, inhibiting the DC-Th17-B-Ab-C-DC cycle may interfere with fundamental pathologic mechanisms that may contribute to ongoing tissue damage even when symptoms are well controlled and/or that may contribute to exacerbations of the disease. In some embodiments, inhibiting the DC-Th17-B-Ab-C-DC cycle causes a chronic disorder to go into remission. In some embodiments, remission refers to a state of absence or substantial absence of disease activity in a subject with a chronic disorder, with the possibility of return of disease. In some embodiments remission may be sustained for a prolonged period of time (e.g., at least 6 months, e.g., 6-12 months, 12-24 months, or more) in the absence of continued therapy or with a reduced dose or increased dosing interval. In some aspects, inhibition of complement may change the immunological micro-environment of a tissue that is rich in Th17 cells and modify it into a micro-environment that is rich in regulatory T cells (Tregs). Doing so could allow the immune system to “reset” itself and go into a state of remission. In some embodiments, for example, remission may be sustained until occurrence of a triggering event. A triggering event may be, for example, an infection (which may result in production of polyclonal antibodies that react both with an infectious agent and a self protein), exposure to particular environmental conditions (e.g., high levels of air pollutants such as ozone or particulate matter or components of smoke such as cigarette smoke, allergens), etc. Genetic factors may play a role. For example, individuals having particular alleles of genes encoding complement components may have a higher baseline level of complement activity, a more reactive complement system and/or a lower baseline level of endogenous complement regulatory protein activity. In some embodiments an individual has a genotype associated with increased risk of AMD. For example, the subject may have a polymorphism in a gene encoding a complement protein or complement regulatory protein, e.g., CFH, C3, factor B, wherein the polymorphism is associated with an increased risk of AMD.
In some embodiments an immunologic microenvironment may become progressively more polarized towards a pathological state over time, e.g., in a subject who has not yet developed symptoms of a chronic disorder or in a subject who has developed the disorder and has been treated as described herein. Such a transition may occur stochastically (e.g., due at least in part to apparently random fluctuations in antibody levels and/or affinity) and/or as a result of accumulated “sub-threshold” trigger events that are not of sufficient intensity to trigger a symptomatic outbreak of a disorder.
In some embodiments it is contemplated that a relatively short course of a long-acting compstatin analog, e.g., between 1 week and 6 weeks, e.g., about 2-4 week, may provide a long-lasting benefit. In some embodiments a remission is achieved for a prolonged period of time, e.g., 1-3 months, 3-6 months, 6-12 months, 12-24 months, or more. In some embodiments a subject may be monitored and/or treated prophylactically before recurrence of symptoms. For example, a subject may be treated prior to or upon exposure to a triggering event. In some embodiments a subject may be monitored, e.g., for an increase in a biomarker, e.g., a biomarker comprising an indicator of Th17 cells or Th17 cell activity, or complement activation, and may be treated upon increase in the level of such biomarker. See, e.g., PCT/US2012/043845 for further discussion.
VIII. Compositions and AdministrationThe invention provides and/or utilizes a variety of compositions comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog. In various embodiments, a composition can have any feature or combination of features discussed herein so long as they are not mutually exclusive. The invention provides embodiments of such compositions, and methods of use thereof, in which the compstatin analog is any compstatin analog. In some aspects, any such compstatin analog or composition may be utilized together with an INAA that inhibits C3, as described further herein. The INAA can have any feature or combination of features discussed herein with regard to INAAs, so long as they are not mutually exclusive
In some embodiments, a composition comprises a purified cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog. Purification can be achieved using a variety of approaches that can be selected by one of ordinary skill in the art based to achieve a desired degree of purity with respect to various components present in the composition prior to purification. For example, filtration, high performance liquid chromatography, affinity chromatography, and/or other approaches and combinations thereof can be used. In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog as a percentage of the total compstatin analog by weight. In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog as a percentage of the total compstatin analog on a molar basis. In some embodiments, a composition consists or consists essentially of a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog.
In some embodiments, a composition comprising a cell-reactive compstatin analog and a compound comprising a cell-reactive functional group is characterized in that the ratio of the cell-reactive compstatin analog to the compound comprising the cell-reactive functional group on a molar basis is at least 10:1, 20:1, 50:1, 100:1, 500:1, 1,000:1, or more. In some embodiments the composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more cell-reactive compstatin analog as a percentage of the total compstatin analog by weight. In some embodiments the composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more cell-reactive compstatin analog as a percentage of the total compstatin analog on a molar basis. In some embodiments a composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more cell-reactive compstatin analog by weight. In some embodiments a composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more long-acting compstatin analog by weight. In some embodiments a composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more targeted compstatin analog by weight. In some embodiments a composition comprises at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, 99%, or more targeted compstatin analog by weight. In some embodiments weight is dry weight.
In some aspects, the invention provides a pharmaceutical grade composition comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog. The pharmaceutical grade composition can have any of the above-mentioned characteristics in terms of purity in various embodiments. The pharmaceutical grade composition is sufficiently free of endotoxin, heavy metals, and unidentified and/or uncharacterized substances so as to be acceptable, without further purification, as a pharmaceutical composition suitable for administration to a human subject or for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition to be administered to a human subject. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical grade composition is sterile.
Suitable preparations, e.g., substantially pure preparations of a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog or other active agent, may be combined with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or vehicles, etc., to produce an appropriate pharmaceutical composition. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle” refers to a non-toxic carrier or vehicle that does not destroy the pharmacological activity of the compound with which it is formulated. One of skill in the art will understand that a carrier or vehicle is “non-toxic” if it is compatible with administration to a subject in an amount appropriate to deliver the compound without causing undue toxicity. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or vehicles that may be used in the compositions of this invention include, but are not limited to, water, physiological saline, Ringer's solution, sodium acetate or potassium acetate solution, 5% dextrose, and the like. The composition may include other components as appropriate for the formulation desired, e.g., as discussed herein. Supplementary active compounds, e.g., compounds independently useful for treating a subject suffering from a complement-mediated disorder, can also be incorporated into the compositions. The invention provides such pharmaceutical compositions comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog and, optionally, a second active agent useful for treating a subject suffering from a complement-mediated disorder.
In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutically acceptable composition suitable for administration to humans, packaged together with a label approved by a government agency responsible for regulating pharmaceutical agents, e.g., the U.S. Food & Drug Administration. In some embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical kit or pack comprising: (a) a pharmaceutically acceptable cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog in solid form; (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle. In some embodiments the solid form is a lyophilized form. In some embodiments the solid form is a powder form, e.g., a lyophilized powder. Optionally the kit or pack contains instructions for dissolving the cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog in the carrier. In some embodiments a pharmaceutical kit or pack is provided. In some embodiments the pack or kit comprises sufficient amount of pharmaceutical composition for at least 1 dose, e.g., between 1 and 200 doses or any intervening number or subrange. In some embodiments a kit or pack comprises (i) a first container containing sufficient cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog for one or more doses; (ii) a second container comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier to be combined with the contents of the first vessel to produce a composition suitable for administration to a subject by, e.g., subcutaneous (abbreviated as SQ or SC) or intravitreal (IVT) injection. In some embodiments a pharmaceutical pack or kit comprises one or more needles and, optionally, one or more syringes. In some embodiments at least one prefilled syringe is provided (e.g., between 1 and 200 or any intervening number of subrange). In some embodiments one or more unit dosage forms or premeasured aliquots are provided. In some embodiments one or more pens or pen cartridges are provided. In some embodiments instructions for administration, which in some embodiments comprise instructions for self-administration, e.g., via subcutaneous injection, are provided.
A pharmaceutical composition can be administered to a subject by any suitable route of administration including, but not limited to, intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneously, by inhalation, by nasal delivery, intrathecally, intracranially, intraarterially, orally, rectally, transdermally, intradermally, subdermally, etc. In some embodiments, a composition comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered intravenously. In some embodiments, a composition comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered intra-arterially. The composition can be administered locally, either into the vascular system supplying an organ or tissue, or extra-vascularly in the vicinity of an organ or tissue. It will be understood that “administration” encompasses directly administering a compound or composition to a subject, instructing a third party to administer a compound or composition to a subject, prescribing or suggesting a compound or composition to a subject (e.g., for self-administration), self-administration, and, as appropriate, other means of making a compound or composition available to a subject.
Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use (e.g., intravenous administration) or by pump or catheter typically include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. Sterile solutions can be prepared by incorporating the compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent, optionally with one or a combination of ingredients such as buffers such as acetates, citrates, lactates or phosphates; agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, glutathione, or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; and other suitable ingredients etc., as desired, followed by filter-based sterilization. One of skill in the art will be aware of numerous physiologically acceptable compounds that may be included in a pharmaceutical composition. Other useful compounds include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose, lactose; dextrans; amino acids such as glycine; polyols such as mannitol. These compounds may, for example, serve as bulking agents and/or stabilizers, e.g., in a powder and/or when part of the manufacture or storage process involves lyophilization. Surfactant(s) such as Tween-80, Pluronic-F108/F68, deoxycholic acid, phosphatidylcholine, etc., may be included in a composition, e.g., to increase solubility or to provide microemulsion to deliver hydrophobic drugs. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide, if desired. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or infusion bags or single or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic. Preferably solutions for injection are sterile and acceptably free of endotoxin.
Among other things, the present disclosure provides the particular insight that subcutaneous and/or intramuscular injection may be particularly desirable for administration of a compstatin analog as described herein (e.g., a LACA) in certain contexts. For example, in some embodiments, subcutaneous and/or intramuscular injection may be preferred (relative, for example to intravenous delivery) in particular for treatment of chronic disorders. Alternatively or additionally, subcutaneous and/or intramuscular injection may be particularly useful when, for example, it will be desirable and/or expected that patients self-administer a compstatin analog composition (for example, rather than requiring or relying on administration by a health care provider, particularly where such administration by a health care provider might require travel to an infusion center).
In some particular aspects, the present disclosure encompasses the insight that, in those embodiments in which drug is administered daily, it may be feasible to maintain a more constant blood level than with a longer dosing interval such as weekly or every 2 weeks. A more constant blood level may be desirable, particularly in certain embodiments (e.g., treatment of chronic disorder as described herein). The present disclosure appreciates that daily IV infusion on a long-term basis could be very inconvenient, particularly for a non-hospitalized patient.
The present disclosure particularly appreciates that, in certain embodiments, subcutaneous administration may be even more effective and/or desirable than intramuscular injection, particularly where self-administration is expected or desired.
In some embodiments a composition as described herein, and particularly a composition comprising a LACA, may be administered using a device that delivers a dose of a pharmaceutical composition by injection, in some embodiments in an at least partly automated fashion upon activation. Such a device is referred to in the art as a “pen” or autoinjector”, and these terms are used interchangeably herein. In general, a pen or autoinjector allows for injecting a dose of pharmaceutical composition contained in a cartridge, reservoir, or syringe through an automatically or manually inserted hypodermic needle(s) or through a high velocity jet. It may be designed for administration of a single dose or multiple doses.
In some particular embodiments such a pen or autoinjector is utilized for intramuscular and/or subcutaneous injection. In accordance with the present disclosure, a pen or other autoinjector may be particularly useful for embodiments that utilize subcutaneous injection. Pens are typically devices that contain (or can be loaded with) a medication in a self-contained cartridge or reservoir and to which a needle can be attached.
In some embodiments, as noted herein, the present disclosure provides the insight that SC and/or IM injection might be a particularly desirable mode of delivery for one or more LACA as described herein. For example, the present disclosure documents certain particularly desirable and/or effective dosing regimens involving administration of a LACA by injection (e.g., by SC injection); in some embodiments, such injection is achieved by use of a pen (e.g., that may have been pre-loaded with an appropriate dose or volume). Pens can be durable (and reusable) or disposable. A durable pen typically uses a replaceable cartridge, which is disposed of when empty, and a new one is inserted in the pen. A disposable pen typically comes pre-filled with a medication in a cartridge or reservoir. When the cartridge or reservoir is empty, the pen is discarded. The cartridge or reservoir may contain a single dose or multiple doses. To use a pen, a needle is attached to the pen and inserted into the skin. Typically, a button is pushed to administer a dose though in some embodiments other activation methods may be used. In some embodiments, an autoinjector may comprise a spring-loaded syringe, though one of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that a variety of technologies are available to afford automatic administration. In some embodiments, b pressing a button or otherwise activating the device, the needle is automatically inserted, and the medication is delivered. in some embodiments, an autoinjector may be designed to insert the needle automatically and/or accurately to a desired depth in the subcutaneous tissue. A pen or autoinjector may comprise means such as a dial that allows a user to select or adjust a dose or injection depth.
In some embodiments a composition as described herein, and particularly a composition comprising a LACA, is administered using a device comprising a dual chamber syringe. Dry drug (e.g., lyophilized) is contained in one chamber. The second chamber contains a suitable pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In order to use the device, the drug is first reconstituted by mixing the contents of the chambers. This can be accomplished in various ways. In some embodiments, pushing the plunger causes the contents of the chambers to mix, e.g., by transferring the carrier into the chamber containing the lyophilized drug.
Thus a variety of drug delivery devices comprising a composition as described herein (e.g., comprising an LACA) may be provided e.g., prefilled syringes, dual chamber syringes, durable and/or disposable pens, and cartridges suitable for use with a pen. Such devices may contain one or more doses (e.g., one or more of any of the dose amounts described herein).
In some embodiments, the present disclosure contemplates providing to a subject (e.g., by mail or arranged pickup or other regular mode of delivery) a set of devices as described herein that together provide a supply of active agent (e.g., LACA) sufficient to last for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one week, two weeks, three weeks, four weeks, etc.). In some embodiments, such a set is sent to the patient's residence on a regular basis (e.g., every week, two weeks, three weeks, four weeks, etc.) with a timing selected such that the patient does not run out. In some embodiments, a composition (e.g., a LACA) may be contained in a container (e.g., a vial) or in any of the afore-mentioned drug delivery devices or packs.
In some embodiments the composition is either lyophilized or kept refrigerated or frozen until shortly before administration, at which time it is reconstituted (if lyophilized) or thawed (if frozen). The composition may be brought to room temperature prior to administration.
In certain embodiments a composition may be administered using a patch system (e.g., for subcutaneous or transdermal administration). In some embodiments the patch may comprise or be attached to a reservoir that may contain, e.g., up to about 10 ml of solution, allowing the administration of 10 ml of solution to a patient in a single administration.
In some embodiments a composition comprising a compstatin analog described herein, e.g., a cell-reactive compstatin analog, LACA, or targeted compstatin analog, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier has a pH of between 6.5 and 7.5, e.g., between 6.8 and 7.2, e.g., 7.0. In the course of performing stability tests, it was observed that a lower pH results in increased stability of certain LACAs relative to neutral pH. Accordingly, in some embodiments a composition comprising a LACA and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier has a pH of between 6.0 and 6.5, between 5.5 and 6.0, or between 5.0 and 5.5. In certain embodiments a yet lower pH, e.g., between 4.5 and 5.0 may be used. In some embodiments the composition further comprises one or more pharmaceutically acceptable buffer substances appropriate to maintain the pH within a selected range (e.g., any of the afore-mentioned ranges). Suitable buffer substances are described herein (e.g., acetates, citrates, lactates or phosphates). In some embodiments the composition additionally or alternately comprises a salt, e.g., any of the pharmaceutically acceptable salts described herein. In certain particular embodiments, the composition comprises a phosphate.
It is noted that, for purposes of conciseness, certain aspects and embodiments described in the present disclosure, e.g., relating to dosing regimens, doses, methods of administration, devices of use for administration, and/or methods of treatment, are described with reference to long-acting compstatin analogs. However, it should be understood that analogous embodiments in which the compstatin analog is not a LACA are provided. The compstatin analog may, for example, be a cell-reactive or targeted compstatin analog that does not comprise a clearance reducing moiety.
Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and appropriate other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, methods of preparation can include vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient, e.g., from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
Oral administration may be used in certain embodiments. Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules, e.g., gelatin capsules. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring. A liquid composition can also be administered orally. Formulations for oral delivery may incorporate agents to improve stability within the gastrointestinal tract and/or to enhance absorption.
For administration by inhalation, a compstatin analog may be delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from a pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide. A metered dose inhaler or nebulizer may be used. The aerosol may comprise liquid particles or dry aerosol (e.g., dry powders, large porous particles, etc.). Suitable aqueous vehicles useful in various embodiments include water or saline, in some embodiments, optionally including an alcohol. In certain embodiments the composition comprises glycerol in water, e.g., about 2% glycerol in water. In some embodiments the composition comprises a surfactant suitable for introduction into the lung. Other excipients suitable for pulmonary administration can additionally or alternately be used.
A variety of different devices are available for administration by inhalation (which is referred to interchangeably as “inhaled administration”, “respiratory administration” or “pulmonary administration”). Nebulizers are devices that transform solutions or suspensions of medications into aerosols that are suitable for deposition in the lower airway. Nebulizer types include jet nebulizers, ultrasonic wave nebulizers, and vibrating mesh nebulizers. A partial list of available vibrating mesh nebulizers includes eFlow (Pari), i-Neb (Respironics), MicroAir (Omron), IHSO Nebulizer (Beurer), and Aeroneb® (Aerogen). A Respimat.®Soft Mist.™ Inhaler (Boeringer Ingelheim) may be used. A metered dose inhaler (MDI) is a handheld aerosol device that uses a propellant to deliver the therapeutic agent. MDIs include a pressurized metal canister that contains pharmacological agent in suspension or solution, propellant, surfactant (typically), and metering valve. Chloroflourocarbons (CFCs) had been widely used as propellants but have been largely replaced by hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs, also known as hydrofluoroalkanes (HFA)) such as HFC-134a and HFC-227ea. Carbon dioxide and nitrogen are other alternatives. A dry powder inhaler (DPI) is a breath-actuated device that delivers the drug in the form of particles contained in a capsule or blister that is punctured prior to use and typically does not employ a propellant. Examples of DPIs currently used to deliver medications for treating asthma and/or COPD include, e.g., Diskus, Aerolizer, HandiHaler, Twisthaler, Flexhaler. Such devices may be used to deliver a compstatin analog in various embodiments. Other exemplary DPI devices that may be used in various embodiments include 3M Conix™, TAIFUN® (AKELA Pharma), Acu-Breathe™ (Respirics), and devices that incorporate Taper Dry Powder Inhalation technology such as the API-5000 in which the active pharmaceutical ingredient (API) is stored on a microstructured carrier tape.
Inhalation accessory devices (IADs) generally fall into 2 categories: spacers and holding chambers. Spacers and holding chambers extend the mouthpiece of the inhaler and direct the mist of medication toward the mouth, reducing medication lost into the air. Using a spacer with an MDI can help reduce the amount of drug that sticks to the back of the throat, improving direction and deposition of medication delivered by MDIs. Valved holding chambers (VHCs) allow for a fine cloud of medication to stay in the spacer until the patient breathes it in through a one-way valve, drawing the dose of medicine into the lungs. Examples include Aerochamber and Optichamber.
Particulate compositions may be characterized on the basis of various parameters such as the fine particle fraction (FPF), the emitted dose, the average particle density, and the mass median aerodynamic diameter (MMAD). Suitable methods are known in the art, some of which are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,942,868 and 7,048,908 and U.S. Publication Nos. 20020146373, 20030012742, and 20040092470. In certain embodiments aerosol particles are between approximately 0.5 μm-10 μm (MMAD), e.g., about 5 μm for respiratory delivery, though smaller or larger particles could also be used. In certain embodiments particles having a mass mean aerodynamic diameter of between 1 μm and 25 μm, e.g., between 1 μm and 10 μm, are used.
A dry particle composition containing particles smaller than about 1 mm in diameter is also referred to herein as a dry powder. A “dry” composition has a relatively low liquid content, so that the particles are readily dispersible, e.g., in a dry powder inhalation device to form an aerosol or spray. A “powder” consists largely or essentially entirely of finely dispersed solid particles that are relatively free flowing and capable of being readily dispersed in an inhalation device and subsequently inhaled by a subject, preferably so that a significant fraction of the particles can reach a desired portion of the respiratory tract. In certain embodiments large porous particles having mean geometric diameters ranging between 3 and 15 μm and tap density between 0.04 and 0.6 g/cm3 are used. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,048,908; Edwards, D. et al, Science 276:1868-1871, 1997; and Vanbever, R., et al., Pharmaceutical Res. 16:1735-1742, 1999).
In some aspects, described herein are various doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and methods useful for treating patients by inhaled administration of a compstatin analog. The compstatin analog may be any of the compstatin analogs described herein. The compstatin analog may comprise any of the peptides described in Section III hereof. For example, the compstatin analog may comprise or consist of any of SEQ ID Nos: 3-36, as described herein and/or may comprise any of the modifications relative to compstatin described herein. In particular embodiments the compstatin analog comprises or consists of a peptide whose sequence is listed in Table 1, e.g., SEQ ID NO: 14, 21, 28, 29, 32, 33, 34, or 36. In particular embodiments the compstatin analog does not comprise a clearance reducing moiety, cell-reactive moiety, or targeting moiety. In some embodiments the compstatin analog has a molecular weight of between 1.5 kD and 2.0 kD, or between 2.0 kD and 2.5 kD. In some embodiments the compstatin analog has between 11 and 25 amino acids, e.g., exactly 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, or 18 amino acids.
In some embodiments the total daily dose for administration of a compstatin analog by inhalation (referred to interchangeably herein with “pulmonary administration” or “respiratory administration”) is at least 5 mg/day, e.g., at least 10 mg/day, at least 15 mg/day, at least 20 mg/day, at least 25 mg/day, or at least 30 mg/day. In certain embodiments the daily dose is between 5 mg/day-20 mg/day, e.g., 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. In certain embodiments the daily dose is between 20 mg/day-60 mg/day. In certain particular embodiments the dose is 10 mg/day, 15 mg/day, 20 mg/day, 25 mg/day, 30 mg/day, 35 mg/day, 40 mg/day, 45 mg/day, 50 mg/day, 55 mg/day, or 60 mg/day. As described in the Examples, in a Phase 1 clinical trial of a compstatin analog administered by inhalation to healthy subjects, possible evidence of pharmacological activity was observed at doses of 30 mg/day or 60 mg/day.
In certain embodiments the daily dose is between 60 mg/day-150 mg/day, e.g., 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, or 150 mg/day. In certain embodiments the daily dose is between 150 mg/day-350 mg/day, e.g., 150, 160, 170, 180 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 310, 320, 330, 340, or 350 mg/day. In certain embodiments the daily dose may be administered during a single administration. In certain embodiments the daily dose may be administered as two or more doses during the course of a day (e.g., in the morning and evening).
For topical application, a compstatin analog may be formulated in a suitable ointment containing the active component suspended or dissolved in one or more carriers. Carriers for topical administration include, but are not limited to, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, propylene glycol, polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene compound, emulsifying wax and water. Alternatively, the pharmaceutically acceptable compositions can be formulated as a suitable lotion or cream containing a compstatin analog suspended or dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. Suitable carriers include, but are not limited to, mineral oil, sorbitan monostearate, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, 2-octyldodecanol, benzyl alcohol, and water.
Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated may be used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished, e.g., through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are typically formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.
The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.
In certain embodiments of the invention, a compstatin analog or other active compound is prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. For example, a compstatin analog may be incorporated into or encapsulated in a microparticle or nanoparticle formulation. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, polyethers, polylactic acid, PLGA, etc. Liposomes or other lipid-based particles can be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811 and/or other references listed herein. Depot formulations containing a compstatin analog may be used. The compstatin analog is released from the depot over time, e.g., so as to provide a therapeutic concentration for longer than if the compound was administered intravenously. In some aspects, a CRM confers depot properties on a compstatin analog. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the materials and methods selected for preparation of a controlled release formulation, implant, etc., should be such as to retain activity of the compound.
It will be appreciated that the compstatin analog and/or additional active agent(s) can be provided as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic and organic acids and bases. Examples of suitable acid salts include acetate, adipate, alginate, aspartate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, bisulfate, butyrate, citrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptanoate, glycerophosphate, glycolate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, lactate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oxalate, palmoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, salicylate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, tosylate and undecanoate. Also, pharmaceutically-acceptable salts can be prepared as alkaline metal or alkaline earth salts, such as sodium, potassium or calcium salts, if appropriate depending on the identity of the active agent.
It will be understood that the pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, compounds, and preparation methods mentioned herein are exemplary and non-limiting. See, e.g., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy. 21st Edition. Philadelphia, Pa. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005, for additional discussion of pharmaceutically acceptable compounds and methods of preparing pharmaceutical compositions of various types.
A pharmaceutical composition can be administered in an amount effective to achieve a desired beneficial effect. In some embodiments, an effective amount is sufficient to provide one or more of the following benefits: (i) reduction in at least one symptom or sign of a complement-mediated disorder; (ii) increased quality of life; (iii) reduced hospitalization; (iv) reduced mortality. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the particular beneficial effect will depend at least in part on various factors, such as the particular disorder being treated. One of ordinary skill in the art will be aware of the symptoms and signs that may occur in subjects with complement-mediated disorders. Examples of symptoms and signs of various complement-mediated disorders are provided herein. For example, in some embodiments, e.g., wherein a subject suffers from PNH or aHUS, a beneficial effect is a reduction in complement-mediated red blood cell lysis. In some aspects, a beneficial effect is statistically significant and/or therapeutically meaningful within the judgement of one or ordinary skill in the art.
In certain embodiments of the invention a pharmaceutical composition comprising a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered parenterally. In some embodiments, the composition is administered intravenously. In some embodiments, the composition is administered by intravenous injection. In some embodiments the composition is administered as an IV bolus or an IV infusion. In some embodiments the composition is administered as an IV drip. In some embodiments the composition is administered as an IV bolus followed by an IV infusion or IV drip. In some embodiments an IV infusion is administered over about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 15, 20, 30, 60, or 120 minutes. In some embodiments an IV drip is administered over more than about 60 minutes, e.g., over about 1, 2, 3, or more hours.
In some embodiments, a total amount of between about 0.1 mg/kg/day and about 2,000 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered, e.g., between about 1 mg/kg/day and about 1,000 mg/kg/day, e.g., between about 5 mg/kg/day and about 500 mg/kg/day. In some embodiments, a total amount of between about 10 mg/kg/day and about 100 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered, e.g., between about 10 mg/kg/day and about 50 mg/kg/day e.g., between about 10 mg/kg/day and about 20 mg/kg/day. In some embodiments, between about 0.5 mg/kg/day to about 10 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered. In some embodiments, between about 1 mg/kg/day to about 5 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered. In some embodiments, between about 1 mg/kg/day to about 3 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered. In some embodiments, between about 3 mg/kg/day to about 5 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered. In some embodiments, between about 5 mg/kg/day to about 7.5 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered. In some embodiments, between about 7.5 mg/kg/day to about 10 mg/kg/day of compstatin analog is administered. It will be appreciated that a variety of different dosing regimens could be used to administer a desired total daily amount. For example, a desired amount of compstatin analog could be administered in a single administration or in multiple administrations, e.g., during a 24 hour period. For example, a subject could receive two or more doses within a 24 hour period, which doses could be administered over the same length of time or over different lengths of time.
In some embodiments, a cell-reactive, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analog is administered at time intervals greater than 24 hours. For example, doses could be administered on average every other day, every 3-4 days, weekly, every other week, etc., in various embodiments. For example, in some embodiments, the compstatin analog is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 7 days. In some embodiments, covalently attached, long-acting, or targeted compstatin analogs protect cells, tissues, organs, for a period of weeks or months without need for retreatment. For example, subjects may be maintained with retreatment at intervals of between 1-2 weeks, 2-4 weeks, 4-6 weeks, 6-8 weeks, or even longer. In some embodiments subcutaneous administration is used to administer at least some doses. For example, administration of approximately 0.1-5 mg/kg/day, e.g., about 0.5-2 mg/kg/day is contemplated in some embodiments, e.g., in a volume of about 0.25 ml-2 mL, e.g., a volume of about 1 ml. In some embodiments the concentration is about 50 mg/ml to about 300 mg/ml, e.g., about 50 mg/ml-about 100 mg/ml or about 100 mg/ml-about 200 mg/ml.
In some embodiments administration is daily. In some embodiments administration is 1 or 2 times per day. As described further in the Examples, daily subcutaneous administration of an exemplary long-acting compstatin analog readily achieved blood levels well above 5 micromolar. In some embodiments, intramuscular administration is used to deliver similar amounts of compound.
In some embodiments a long-acting compstatin analog is administered using a therapeutically effective amount to a subject, wherein such administration results in blood concentrations of the compound that achieve a level above at least 1 μM, at least 2 μM, at least 2.5 μM, at least 3 μM, at least 4 μM, at least 5 μM, at least 6 μM, at least 7 μM, at least 8 μM, at least 9 μM, at least 10 μM, at least 11 μM, at least 12 μM, or at least 13 μM, at least 14 μM, at least 15 μM, at least 16 μM, at least 18 μM, or at least about 20 μM, or at least about 25 μM or within any range between 4 μM and about 15 μM or about 20 μM or about 25 μM. In some embodiments such level is maintained for at least about 24 hours, or at least about 48 hours, or at least about 72 hours, or at least about 96 hours, or at least about 120 hours, or at least about 144 hours following a single IV injection or following daily subcutaneous injections for about 5-7 days. Sustained levels may be achieved for longer, e.g., up to about 10 days, 12 days, 14 days, or more.
In some embodiments a subject is treated so as to maintain a steady state level of about 1.0 μM, about 2.0 μM, about 2.5 μM, about 3.0 μM, about 3.5 μM, about 4.0 μM, about 4.5 μM, about 5.0 μM, about 5.5 μM, about 6.0 μM, about 6.5 μM, about 7.0 μM, about 7.5 μM, about 8.0 μM, about 8.5 μM, about 9.0 μM, about 9.5 μM, or about 10 μM. In some embodiments a steady state level has a value between about 1.0 μM and about 10.0 μM, e.g., between about 2.0 μM and about 5.0 μM, between about 2.5 μM and about 5.0 μM, between about 5.0 μM and about 7.5 μM, or between about 7.5 μM, and about 10 μM, or any intervening value within any of the afore-mentioned ranges. In some embodiments a concentration is sufficient to substantially inhibit lysis of red blood cells of PNH patients exposed to human serum in vitro, e.g., using a modified Ham's assay using human serum (see, e.g., Example 8). In some embodiments a concentration is sufficient to reduce by at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or more, lysis of red blood cells of PNH patients exposed to human serum in vitro, e.g., using a modified Ham's assay using human serum (see, e.g., Example 8). In some embodiments a Ham's assay may be performed using human serum adjusted to a magnesium level at about 0.005 mol/L and a pH lowered to about 6.2 to activate complement. Examples 18 and 19 present data confirming the ability of compstatin analogs described herein to inhibit lysis of RBCs from PNH patients.
In some aspects compstatin analogs, e.g., long-acting compstatin analogs, may protect red blood cells of PNH patients from accumulating significant amounts of C3 and/or products of C3 activation on their surface. For example, PNH red blood cells that are protected from complement-mediated lysis by compstatin analogs, e.g., long-acting compstatin analogs, may also be protected from accumulating significant amounts of C3 and/or products of C3 activation on their surface. As known in the art, eculizumab (Soliris®, Alexion Pharmaceuticals. Inc.), is a humanized anti-C5 monoclonal antibody that is approved for treatment of PNH and aHUS in a number of countries (see, e.g., Dmytrijuk A, FDA report: eculizumab (Soliris) for the treatment of patients with paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria. Oncologist. 2008 September; 13(9):993-1000. doi: 10.1634/theoncologist.2008-0086. Epub 2008 Sep. 10; Westra D., A new era in the diagnosis and treatment of atypical haemolytic uraemic syndrome. Neth J Med. 2012 April; 70(3):121-9). It has been reported that when PNH RBCs are exposed to eculizumab they may exhibit accumulation of significant amounts of C3 and/or products of C3 activation on their surface, which may contribute to the clearance and/or extravascular hemolysis of these cells (e.g., in the spleen) and may thus at least in part account for persistent hematologic abnormalities, e.g., persistent anemia, observed in some PNH patients despite treatment with eculizumab. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, this may occur due to inhibition of formation of the MAC by eculizumab, which protects cells from MAC-mediated lysis but does not inhibit C3 activation or deposition of C3 and/or products of C3 activation and leaves PNH cells vulnerable to surface C3 activation and deposition of C3 and/or products of C3 activation due to their lack of GPI-anchored complement inhibiting proteins. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, the ability of compstatin analogs described herein to inhibit C3 activation and thereby inhibit the production of C3 activation products may afford a significant advantage. In some embodiments a subject who has been or is being treated with eculizumab and continues to exhibit evidence of hemolysis, e.g., clinically significant hemolysis, such as causing anemia and/or requiring transfusion is treated with a compstatin analog described herein. In some embodiments a compstatin analog is used at a concentration sufficient such that the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to the compstatin analog (in vitro (e.g., in a Ham's assay) or in vivo) is within the range exhibited by normal RBCs from healthy subjects. In some embodiments the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to the compstatin analog (in vitro (e.g., in a Ham's assay) or in vivo) is within about 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, or 5.0 of the average level or upper limit of normal. In some embodiments the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to a compstatin analog (in vitro (e.g., in a Ham's assay) or in vivo) is less than the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to Soliris at a concentration that provides equivalent protection against complement-mediated lysis. In some embodiments the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to a compstatin analog (in vitro or in vivo) is no more than about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, or 50% of the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to eculizumab at a concentration that provides equivalent protection against complement-mediated lysis. In some embodiments the level of C3 and/or C3 activation products on PNH RBCs exposed to the compstatin analog (in vitro or in vivo) is within about 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, or 5.0 of the average level or upper limit of a normal range. In some embodiments the PNH cells comprise or consist of Type II PNH cells, Type III PNH cells, or a mixture thereof. In some embodiments the RBCs are at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or more Type III and/or Type II RBCs. In some embodiments the cells may comprise some Type I cells. In some embodiments RBCs may be classified as Type I, II, or III based on the level of a GPI-anchored protein such as CD59 on their surface, which may be measured using flow cytometry, immunofluorescence, or ELISA, e.g., using an antibody (e.g., a monoclonal antibody) or other binding agent that binds to said GPI-anchored protein. In some aspects inhibition of deposition of C3 and/or products of C3 activation on cells or surfaces may be used as an indicator of efficacy of a compstatin analog in other complement-mediated diseases such as aHUS, other complement-mediated hemolytic diseases, or other complement-mediated diseases. For example, in some embodiments a compstatin analog inhibits such deposition on endothelial cells in a subject with aHUS. In some embodiments the level of C3 and/or C3 activation product(s) may be measured using flow cytometry, immunofluorescence, or ELISA, e.g., using an antibody (e.g., a monoclonal antibody) or other binding agent that binds to C3 and/or to one or more C3 activation product(s). In some embodiments a C3 activation product is C3b, C3c, or C3d. In some embodiments a binding agent binds to C3d. In some embodiments a binding agent binds to C3d and at least one other C3 activation product. In some embodiments PNH patient RBCs contacted with a compstatin analog in vitro (e.g., in a Ham's assay) are protected from activated complement such that the relative proportion (percentages) of Type I, Type II, and Type III cells or the relative proportion or percentages of Type III and Type I, Type II and Type I, or Type III and Type II, are approximately the same as in a control assay in which inactivated complement (e.g., heat inactivated complement) is used. In some embodiments PNH patient RBCs contacted with a compstatin analog in vitro (e.g., in a Ham's assay) are protected from activated complement such that the relative proportion or percentages of Type I, Type II, and Type III cells or the relative proportion or percentages of Type III and Type I, Type II and Type I, or Type III and Type II, are within 5% of the proportions or percentages obtained in a control assay in which inactivated complement (e.g., heat inactivated complement) is used. In some embodiments complement may be inactivated by heat inactivation, which may be performed by heating complement components or serum or plasma containing complement components to 56 degrees C. or higher.
In some embodiments measurements of LDH (an enzyme that is abundant in red blood cells and can function as a marker for hemolysis), one or more hematologic parameters such as hematocrit, hemoglobin, and/or reticulocyte measurements may additionally or alternately be used in determining the amount of lysis. In some embodiments one or more such methods may be used to determine the amount of lysis of RBCs, e.g., RBCs that are susceptible to complement-mediated lysis, e.g., PNH patient cells, aHUS patient cells, cells from subjects with other complement-mediated hematologic disorders, cells exposed to abnormally high levels of complement activation. In some aspects, the disclosure provides a method comprising contacting one or more cells in vitro or in vivo with a compstatin analog described herein and measuring the effect of the compstatin analog on one or more indicators of complement-mediated cell damage and/or cell surface complement activation or deposition. In some embodiments contacting the one or more cells for a sufficient time at a sufficient concentration results in a reduction of an abnormally high value or an increase in an abnormally low value to within a normal range or to within 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, or 25% of the lower or upper limit of a normal range.
In some aspects, the disclosure provides a method of selecting or modifying a dosing regimen or one or more components of a dosing regimen for a patient with a complement-mediated hemolytic disease such as PNH. The one or more components of a dosing regimen may comprise a dose, dosing interval, route of administration (e.g., IV or subcutaneous), or combination thereof. A dose may be a loading dose, maintenance dose, or both. In some embodiments, one or more blood samples may be obtained from a patient and a dosing regimen or component thereof for a compstatin analog, e.g., a long-acting compstatin analog, may be selected or modified to achieve a desired level of protection of the patient's RBCs from lysis and/or from accumulation of C3 and/or C3 activation product(s) in vitro. In some embodiments one or more doses of a compstatin analog, e.g., a long-acting compstatin analog, may be administered to a patient, and one or more blood samples may be subsequently obtained from a patient and assessed for level of C3 and/or C3 activation product(s) on their surface. In some embodiments a dosing regimen or component thereof, e.g., a dose, dosing interval, or route of administration, may be selected or modified to achieve a desired level of protection of the patient's RBCs from lysis and/or from accumulation of C3 and/or C3 activation products in vitro or in vivo. In some embodiments a dosing regimen or component thereof, e.g., dose, dosing interval, or route of administration, may be selected or modified to achieve a desired level of protection of the patient's RBCs from extravascular clearance and/or extravascular lysis in vivo. A desired level may be, e.g., a level that is accepted in the art as providing a clinically meaningful benefit, a level that provides a clinically meaningful benefit to a particular patient, a level that is within the normal range, a level selected by a medical practitioner, or any other selected level. A normal range for a parameter may be known in the art and/or may be a reference range established by a laboratory, e.g., a clinical laboratory, wherein the value of the relevant parameter as measured in at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99% of the general population or at least 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99% of healthy individuals (which may optionally be matched for one or more demographic variables such as gender, age, etc.) or biological specimens obtained therefrom (such as blood samples) would fall within the reference range. A reference range may be established using a sample population representative of the general population or representative of healthy individuals.
In some embodiments a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a CRM is designed to confer a slower rate of systemic absorption after subcutaneous or intramuscular administration to a subject as compared with a compstatin analog not comprising a CRM. In some embodiments particular CRM properties, e.g., length, are selected to confer a desired rate of systemic absorption after subcutaneous or intramuscular administration as compared with at least some other CRMs. In some embodiments, the Cmax is reduced in comparison to a comparable dose of a compstatin analog not linked to a CRM, which may thereby contribute to keeping the plasma concentration within a desired window, e.g., the therapeutic window, for the compound. In some embodiments a long-acting compstatin analog composition is characterized in that a dose, when administered subcutaneously, appears fully absorbed within about 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, or 120 hours following administration based on visual observation at the injection site.
It will be understood that there may be an initial treatment phase during which treatment is more frequent and/or in which higher doses are administered. For example, in a subject with PNH or aHUS, it may require several doses to achieve protection of a substantial fraction of the subject's RBCs. After that, lower doses and/or less frequent dosing could be used, e.g., to protect newly formed RBCs and/or to replenish protection of existing RBCs. Of course similar approaches may be followed for treatment of any disease where appropriate. In some embodiments treatment is started using IV administration and then switched to an alternate route, e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular, transdermal, or intradermal, for maintenance therapy. Depending on the disease, treatment may continue at intervals for, e.g., months, years, or indefinitely. Appropriate doses and dosing regimen depend at least in part upon the potency and half-life of the compstatin analog (or other active agent), and may optionally be tailored to the particular recipient, for example, through administration of increasing doses until a preselected desired response is achieved, such as a desired degree of complement inhibition and/or cell protection. If desired, the specific dose level for any particular subject may be selected based at least in part upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the particular condition being treated, the age, body weight, general health, route of administration, the rate of excretion, any drug combination, and/or the degree of complement protein expression or activity measured in one or more samples obtained from the subject.
In some aspects, described herein are methods in which a patient is switched from treatment with a complement inhibitor that does not comprise a compstatin analog to treatment with a compstatin analog, e.g., a long-acting compstatin analog (LACA), cell-reactive, or targeted compstatin analog. For purposes of conciseness, such methods are described with reference to a LACA but may alternately be employed for switching a patient to treatment with a cell-reactive or targeted compstatin analog. In some embodiments a patient to whom a compstatin analog, e.g., a LACA, is administered is under treatment with a different complement inhibitor that does not comprise a compstatin analog at the time therapy with a compstatin analog, e.g., a LACA, is started. In embodiments in which a patient to whom a compstatin analog is administered is under treatment with a different complement inhibitor that does not comprise a compstatin analog at the time therapy with a compstatin analog is started, the patient's complement system (e.g., as measured with a suitable assay such as an ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis assay using the patient's serum) may already be inhibited at the time therapy with a LACA is started. In some embodiments the different complement inhibitor is a C5 inhibitor (i.e., an agent that inhibits activation and/or activity of C5, typically by binding to C5). In some embodiments the C5 inhibitor is an anti-05 antibody such as eculizumab, an anti-05 siRNA such as ALN-CC5 (Alnylam Pharmaceuticals), an anti-05 polypeptide such as Coversin (Volution Immuno Pharmaceuticals, Ltd.), or an anti-05 small molecule. In some embodiments the different complement inhibitor may be a C3 inhibitor. In some embodiments, treatment with the different complement inhibitor, e.g., C5 inhibitor, is stopped and the patient is switched to treatment with the LACA. It would be understood that the switch to treatment with a LACA is desirably performed in such a way that the patient does not experience a clinically significant decrease in complement system inhibition during the transition to treatment with a LACA as sole complement inhibitor therapy.
For example, in the case of a patient with a complement-mediated hemolytic anemia such as PNH, the patient does not experience a clinically significant increase in hemolysis, e.g., as measured by LDH level and/or ex vivo serum hemolytic activity when treatment with the different complement inhibitor is stopped. In some embodiments the patient is monitored and the transition is managed such that the patient does not experience a measured increase of more than 10% in LDH level or a measured increase of more than 10% in hemolytic activity. In some embodiments the transition to treatment with a LACA as sole complement inhibitor therapy is performed in such a way as to maintain at least an 80% inhibition of ex vivo serum hemolytic activity during the transition period. “Transition period” refers to the time period starting on the day of the first dose of a LACA and ending 4 times X days after the last dose of the different complement inhibitor, where “X” represents the dosing interval at which the different complement inhibitor was being administered to the patient prior to the first dose of the LACA, e.g., the recommended dosing interval of the different complement inhibitor when used at the recommended dose. “Recommended dose” for a medication refers to the dose specified in the prescribing information for that medication on the label approved by the US FDA or, if the medication is not approved by the FDA, the dose specified in the prescribing information for a medication on the label approved by the government agency responsible for approval of medications in the particular jurisdiction in which the medication is used. “Recommended dosing interval” for a medication refers to the dosing interval specified for that medication in the prescribing information and/or on the label approved by the US FDA or, if the medication is not approved by the FDA, the dosing interval specified in the prescribing information and/or on the label approved by the government agency responsible for approval of medications in the particular jurisdiction in which the medication is used. It will be understood that a medication may have two or more distinct recommended dosing regimens. Such dosing regimens may be appropriate for different indications, appropriate for patients having different characteristics, or simply alternate therapeutically effective combinations of dose, dosing interval, and administration route. Where a medication has two or more recommended dosing regimens, it will be understood that the term “recommended dosing interval” refers to the recommended dosing interval for the particular dose being administered by the particular administration route being used.
In some embodiments a LACA is first administered to a patient who has received at least one dose of a different complement inhibitor within a time period no greater than 1.5 times the recommended dosing interval of the different complement inhibitor, e.g., within a time period no greater than the recommended dosing interval of the different complement inhibitor, e.g., within a time period no greater than half the recommended dosing interval of the different complement inhibitor. In some embodiments the patient has received at least one dose of the different complement inhibitor within the 2 weeks preceding the patient's first dose of a LACA. In some embodiments the patient has received at least one dose of the different complement inhibitor within 1 week preceding the patient's first dose of a LACA. In some embodiments the patient has received a dose of the different complement inhibitor less than a week before the patient's first dose of a LACA. In some embodiments the patient received a dose of the different complement inhibitor on day of the patient's first dose of a LACA. In some embodiments the patient is treated with an effective amount of different complement inhibitor and an effective amount of a LACA so as to maintain therapeutically effective blood levels of both the different complement inhibitor and the LACA for a time period. Such a period of co-treatment may last for, e.g., between 1 week and 2 weeks, between 2 weeks and 4 weeks, between 4 weeks and 6 weeks, between 6 weeks and 8 weeks, between 8 weeks and 12 weeks, between 12 weeks and 26 weeks. In some embodiments the period of co-treatment may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 months. In some embodiments the co-treatment period is the period of time from the first dose of the LACA to the last dose of the different complement inhibitor. The different complement inhibitor may be administered at the usual maintenance dose that the patient had been receiving prior to initiation of treatment with the LACA. In some embodiments, the different complement inhibitor is administered at a dose that is reduced over time (tapered) until eventually treatment with the different complement inhibitor is stopped. For example, in some embodiments the dose of the different complement inhibitor may be reduced to about 67% of the maintenance dose, then about 33% of the maintenance dose for the last dose. In some embodiments the dose of the different complement inhibitor may be reduced to about 75% of the maintenance dose, then about 50% of the maintenance dose, then about 25% of the maintenance dose for the last dose. In some embodiments the total period during which the patient is treated with both a LACA and a different complement inhibitor (i.e., the time from the first dose of the LACA to the last dose of the first complement inhibitor) is between 2 weeks and 26 weeks. In some embodiments the different complement inhibitor is not tapered. Instead, in some embodiments, e.g., after the LACA has reached a therapeutically effective blood level, the blood level of the different complement inhibitor is allowed to decline as it is metabolized or otherwise removed from the body. In some embodiments a patient ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis by the patient's serum is monitored during the transition and/or thereafter. In some embodiments, if ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis by the patient's serum is not reduced by at least 80%, e.g., at least 90%, when measured during the transition from treatment with the different complement inhibitor to treatment with the LACA as the sole complement inhibitor, the dose of the LACA may be increased. In some embodiments reduction in opsonization of a PNH patient's red blood cells by C3 fragments such as C3d serves as an indicator that the patient is receiving a therapeutically effective amount of a LACA. In some embodiments treatment with both the different complement inhibitor, e.g., C5 inhibitor, and LACA is continued for at least 6 months e.g., between 6 and 12 months, between 12 and 24 months, or more (e.g., indefinitely). In some embodiments the different complement inhibitor and/or the LACA is administered at a lower dose than would be used if it were being used as the sole complement inhibitor therapy for the patient. It should be noted that analogous methods can be used to switch a patient from treatment with a LACA to treatment with a different complement inhibitor, if desired, or to switch a patient from treatment with a first LACA to treatment with a different LACA.
In some aspects, described herein are certain doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and methods useful for administering a long-acting compstatin analog (LACA) to a subject. In some aspects, certain doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and methods described herein have been used in clinical trials involving subcutaneous or intravitreal administration of a LACA comprising a linear PEG having a molecular weight of 40 kD and two compstatin analog moieties (one linked to each end of the linear PEG) to healthy human subjects or to patients with PNH or involving intravitreal administration of this same LACA to patients with AMD (see Examples). Accordingly, in some aspects, doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods described herein may be used to administer a LACA comprising a linear PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD and two compstatin analog moieties to a subject (e.g., a patient having a complement-mediated disorder). In some embodiments, the two compstatin analog moieties are linked to the ends of a linear PEG (i.e., one compstatin analog moiety is linked to each end of the PEG). In some embodiments, each compstatin analog moiety is linked via its C-terminal end to the linear PEG. In some embodiments, the LACA may be CA28-2GS-BF or CA28-2TS-BF.
As described herein, a compstatin analog moiety may comprise a spacer separating an amino acid having a side chain comprising a reactive functional group, e.g., a primary or secondary amine, sulfhydryl, or sulfhydryl-reactive group (or an amino acid sequence comprising such an amino acid) from the portion of a compstatin analog moiety comprising a cyclic portion or such a linking portion may be absent. Where present, such a spacer moiety may comprise a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated alkyl chain, oligo(ethylene glycol) chain, and/or any of the other moieties denoted by L (or LP1, LP2, or LP3) herein. Where two or more compstatin analog moieties comprising spacer moieties are present in a compound, the spacer moieties may be the same or different in various embodiments. Doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods may be used to administer long-acting compstatin analogs comprising compstatin analog moieties comprising any such spacer moieties.
As also described herein, compstatin analog moieties may be linked to a PEG (or other polymer) via any of a wide variety of different linkages in various embodiments. In certain embodiments a (one or more) compstatin analog moiet(ies) may be linked to a CRM via a moiety comprising an unsaturated alkyl moiety, a moiety comprising a non-aromatic cyclic ring system, an aromatic moiety, an ether moiety, an amide moiety, an ester moiety, a carbonyl moiety, an imine moiety, a thioether moiety, an amino acid residue, and/or any of the moieties denoted as L (or LP1, LP2, or LP3) above. For example as described herein, in particular embodiments a (one or more) compstatin analog moiet(ies) may be linked to a CRM via a carbamate linkage, an ester linkage, an amide linkage, or a combination of two or more such linkages. Where two or more compstatin analog moieties are present in a compound, the linkages to the polymer may be the same or different in various embodiments. Doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods may be used to administer long-acting compstatin analogs comprising compstatin analog moieties linked to a CRM via any such moieties.
In some embodiments doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods described herein may be used to administer a LACA that differs in one or more ways from the LACA used in the clinical trials described herein. For example, such a LACA may comprise: (i) a different polymer as a CRM (e.g., a POZ, a polypeptide, a branched PEG), (ii) a polymer having a molecular weight that is lower or higher than 40 kD as a CRM; (iii) a different number of compstatin analog moiet(ies) (e.g., 1, 3, 4, or more compstatin analog moiet(ies), instead of 2 compstatin analog moieties), (iv) one or more compstatin analog moiet(ies) comprising a sequence that differs from SEQ ID NO: 28 in place of SEQ ID NO: 28 (e.g., any of the other compstatin analog moieties described herein); (v) a (one or more) compstatin analog moiet(ies) extended with a different amino acid residue (or amino acid sequence comprising such amino acid residue) having a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine instead of lysine or comprising a different reactive functional group such as a sulfhydryl or sulfhydryl-reactive group; (vi) a (one or more) compstatin analog moiet(ies) linked to a CRM via the N-terminal end of the compstatin analog moiety rather than via the C-terminal end; (vii) different blocking moiet(ies) at the free end of one or more compstatin analog moiet(ies); (viii) any combination of two or more of (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v), (vi), (vii), and (vii).
As mentioned above, in some aspects, doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods described herein may be used to administer a LACA comprising a polymer (e.g., a PEG) having a molecular weight of about 40 kD as a CRM, e.g., a polymer having a molecular weight of 36 kD-44 kD, 37 kD-43 kD, 38 kD-42 kD, or 39 kD-41 kD. However, in some embodiments doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods may be used to administer a LACA comprising a polymer whose molecular weight is within a broader range. In some embodiments of particular interest the molecular weight of the polymer is no greater than 45 kD. In some embodiments the polymer has a molecular weight of 10 kD-45 kD. In some embodiments the polymer has a molecular weight of 20 kD-45 kD. In some embodiments the polymer has a molecular weight of 30 kD-40 kD. In some embodiments the polymer has a molecular weight of 30 kD-45 kD. In some embodiments the polymer has a molecular weight of 35 kD-45 kD. In some embodiments the polymer has a molecular weight that is greater than 45 kD, e.g., up to 50 kD. It will be understood that molecular weights of a polymer can refer to the average molecular weight of polymer molecules in a composition as discussed herein.
In some embodiments the compositions comprise 5% dextrose as a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. However, any pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may be used.
Doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and/or methods described herein can be used to treat any of the complement-mediated mentioned herein, in various embodiments. Without limitation, such disorders include, e.g., PNH, NMO, myasthenia gravis, aHUS, COPD, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, organ rejection after transplantation (e.g., acute or chronic rejection), pemphigoid, and AMD. In some embodiments the complement-mediated disorder is a chronic complement-mediated disorder, e.g., any of the chronic complement-mediated disorders mentioned herein. In some embodiments the complement-mediated disorder is a Th17-associated disorder, e.g., any of the Th17-associated disorders mentioned herein.
In some aspects, described herein are various doses, dosing regimens, compositions, and methods useful for treating patients by subcutaneous administration of a LACA. In experiments with a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG moiety it was found that viscosity rather than solubility is the main factor that limits the concentration of a composition comprising the LACA that can be administered by subcutaneous or IVT injection in a manner that is acceptable to physicians and patients in terms of the time and pressure required to deliver a given volume of the composition through a needle of a given inner diameter or gauge number. Gauge number describes the outer diameter of a hollow needle, with a higher gauge number indicating a smaller outer diameter. Generally, needles having a higher gauge number may be preferred by patients and physicians as they may be associated with (or may be perceived to be associated with) less pain and/or tissue damage as compared with needles having a lower gauge number. Inner diameter depends on both outer diameter and wall thickness. For standard needles, the higher the gauge number, the smaller the inner diameter (e.g., a 27 gauge needle has a larger inner diameter than a 29 gauge needle, which in turn has a larger inner diameter than a 30 gauge needle).
In some embodiments a composition, e.g., a pharmaceutical composition, comprising a LACA has a concentration of 150 mg/ml. It was found that a 150 mg/ml solution of a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG can readily be delivered using a 27 gauge needle. Accordingly, in some embodiments a 27 gauge needle is used to administer a dose of a LACA comprising a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD at a concentration of up to 150 mg/ml, e.g., 75 mg/ml-90 mg/ml, 85 mg/ml-95 mg/ml, 90 mg/ml-100 mg/ml, 95 mg/ml-105 mg/ml 100 mg/ml-110 mg/ml, 105 mg/ml-115 mg/ml, 110 mg/ml-120 mg/ml, 115 mg/ml-125 mg/ml, 120 mg/ml-130 mg/ml, 125 mg/ml-135 mg/ml, 130 mg/ml-140 mg/ml, 135 mg/ml-145 mg/ml, 140 mg/ml-150 mg/ml, e.g., 100 mg/ml, 125 mg/ml, or 150 mg/ml. In some embodiments a composition comprising a LACA comprising a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD has a concentration of up to 150 mg/ml, e.g., 75 mg/ml-90 mg/ml, 85 mg/ml-95 mg/ml, 90 mg/ml-100 mg/ml, 95 mg/ml-105 mg/ml 100 mg/ml-110 mg/ml, 105 mg/ml-115 mg/ml, 110 mg/ml-120 mg/ml, 115 mg/ml-125 mg/ml, 120 mg/ml-130 mg/ml, 125 mg/ml-135 mg/ml, 130 mg/ml-140 mg/ml, 135 mg/ml-145 mg/ml, 140 mg/ml-150 mg/ml, e.g., 100 mg/ml, 125 mg/ml, or 150 mg/ml. In some embodiments a composition comprising a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG has a concentration of 150 mg/ml-180 mg/ml. In some embodiments a composition comprising a LACA comprising a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD has a concentration of 180 mg/ml-200 mg/ml. In some embodiments a 27 gauge needle is used to administer a composition comprising a LACA comprising a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD at a concentration of 150 mg/ml-160 mg/ml, 160 mg/ml-170 mg/ml, 170 mg/ml-180 mg/ml, 180 mg/ml-190 mg/ml, or 190 mg/ml-200 mg/ml. Of course a needle with a lower gauge number (e.g., 25, 26 gauge) may alternately be used instead of a needle with a gauge number of 27 gauge (or higher).
The present disclosure encompasses the finding that a 200 mg/ml solution of a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG can readily be delivered using a 25 gauge needle. In some embodiments a 25 gauge needle or a 26 gauge needle is used to administer a composition comprising a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG at a concentration of 200 mg/ml, or more. In some embodiments a 25 gauge needle or a 26 gauge needle is used to administer a composition comprising a LACA at a concentration of 200 mg/ml-225 mg/ml or 225 mg/ml-250 mg/ml.
In some aspects, the present disclosure teaches particular utility of certain thin-walled needles for administration of a LACA in accordance with the present invention. For example, in some embodiments a thin wall needle is used for subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intraocular (e.g., intravitreal) injection of a LACA. Thin wall needles have identical outer diameters to standard needles but larger inner diameters for a given gauge. For example, a thin wall needle may have an internal diameter size that is the same as that of a standard needle of a gauge one to two numbers lower (e.g., a 29 gauge thin wall needle may have an internal diameter that is the same as that of a 27 gauge or 28 gauge standard needle but an outer diameter that is the same as that of a standard 29 gauge needle). An increase in internal diameter can result in a considerable increase in fluid flow for a given pressure and/or a considerable reduction in pressure needed to maintain a given flow. Lower pressure means that less injection force is needed to administer a composition of a given viscosity. In general, low injection force facilitates administration and is therefore typically a desirable feature. In some embodiments a thin wall needle has a given internal diameter that is uniform along the length of the needle. In some embodiments a thin wall needle has an internal diameter that varies along the length of the needle. For example, the diameter may be the same as that of a standard 29 gauge needle at one end of the needle and progress to the diameter of a standard 27 gauge needle at the other end. In some embodiments a microtapered needle may be used. In some embodiments a needle with a scalpel-like tip may be used. The length of the needle may vary. In some embodiments a short needle such as a 5 mm or 6 mm needle may be used. In some embodiments a needle having a length between 6 mm and 8 mm, or between 8 mm and 12 mm may be used. Suitable needles and syringes are available commercially, e.g., from Becton Dickinson and Company (BD), Terumo Corp., etc.
In some embodiments a composition having a given viscosity and/or concentration may be administered using a thin wall needle having a gauge that is one or two numbers higher than the gauge size that is preferably used when a standard needle is used to administer a composition of the same viscosity and/or concentration at a selected flow rate and/or with a selected injection force. For example, in some embodiments a composition that is preferably administered using a 25 gauge standard needle in order to attain a desired flow rate and/or injection force can be administered with such a flow rate and/or injection force using a 26 or 27 gauge thin wall needle. In some embodiments a composition that is preferably administered using a 27 gauge standard needle in order to attain a desired flow rate and/or injection force can be administered with such a flow rate and/or injection force using a 28 or 29 gauge thin wall needle. In some embodiments a composition that is preferably administered using a 29 gauge standard needle in order to attain a desired flow rate and/or injection force can be administered with such a flow rate and/or injection force using a 30 or 31 gauge thin wall needle. In some embodiments a 29 gauge thin wall needle is used to administer a composition comprising a LACA comprising a polymer (e.g., a PEG) having a molecular weight of about 40 kD at a concentration of 150 mg/ml-160 mg/ml, 160 mg/ml-170 mg/ml, 170 mg/ml-180 mg/ml, 180 mg/ml-190 mg/ml, or 190 mg/ml-200 mg/ml. Of course a thin wall needle with a lower gauge number (e.g., 27, 28 gauge) may alternately be used instead of a thin wall needle with a gauge number of 29 gauge (or higher).
In some aspects, a suitable volume for an individual SC injection may be up to 2 milliliters (ml)-3 ml. Thus, for example, in some embodiments, a volume greater than 1.0 ml may be administered by SC injection, e.g., 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, or 2.0 ml. In some embodiments, a volume greater than 2.0 ml may be administered by SC injection, e.g., 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, or 2.5 ml. In some embodiments, a volume greater than 2.5 ml may be administered by SC injection, e.g., 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, or 3.0 ml. In some embodiments a volume of 1 ml or less per injection is used, e.g., 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, or 1.0 ml. In some embodiments the total daily volume administered to a patient is between 1.0 and 2.5 ml, e.g., 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, or 2.5 ml. In some embodiments the total daily volume administered to a patient is between 2.5 and 3.0 ml, e.g., 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, or 3.0 ml. In some embodiments in which two SC injections are administered, a volume of up to 5 ml may be administered. In some embodiments a volume of 1.0-2.5 ml is administered as a single daily injection. In some embodiments a volume of 1.0-2.5 ml is administered as two separate injections. In some embodiments a volume of 2.5-3.0 ml is administered as two separate injections. The volumes administered in the two separate injections may the same or different, so long as together they provide a total volume sufficient to administer a desired amount of LACA. In some embodiments the two separate injections may be administered up to 12 hours apart. However, in some embodiments the two separate injections are administered within up to 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, or 60 minutes of each other.
In some aspects, one or more fixed doses may be used for different patients whose weight and/or body surface area may vary over relatively wide ranges. In some embodiments, 2, 3, or more different fixed doses may be provided, wherein different doses may, for example be more suitable for individuals whose weight and/or body surface area lie within different ranges.
In some embodiments, a fixed dose may be used to administer an amount of compstatin analog (e.g., LACA) that would achieve a desired level of complement inhibition (e.g., as measured in a sample of plasma) in at least 25%, at least 50%, at least 75%, at least 90%, or at least 95%, or more, of healthy subjects and/or in at least 25%, at least 50%, at least 75%, at least 90%, or at least 95%, or more, of patients in need of treatment for a particular disorder mentioned herein. In some embodiments, a fixed dose may be used to administer an amount that would achieve a desired level of efficacy (e.g., as measured using an appropriate endpoint) in at least 25%, at least 50%, at least 75%, or at least 90% of patients in need of treatment for a particular disorder mentioned herein. In some aspects, a dose described herein may be particularly useful for subcutaneous (SC) administration. However, in certain embodiments doses described herein may be administered to a subject using other parenteral routes of administration instead of or in addition to the subcutaneous route, such as intravenous, transdermal, or intramuscular. Thus, where the description refers to subcutaneous administration of a particular dose, the disclosure provides embodiments in which such dose is administered by a different route of administration (e.g., intravenous, transdermal, or intramuscular).
In some embodiments the total daily dose for parenteral administration, e.g., subcutaneous administration, of a LACA comprising two compstatin analog moieties and a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD is at least 30 mg/day, e.g., at least 45 mg/day, e.g., at least 90 mg/day, e.g., at least 150 mg/day, e.g., at least 180 mg/day. In certain embodiments the daily dose is between 90 mg/day-180 mg/day. In certain embodiments the daily dose is between 180 mg/day-270 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is, e.g., 180 mg/day-230 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is at least 190 mg/day, e.g., 190 mg/day-240 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is at least 200 mg/day, e.g., 200 mg/day-250 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is at least 210 mg/day, e.g., 210 mg/day-260 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is at least 220 mg/day, e.g., 220 mg/day-270 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is at least 230 mg/day, e.g., 230 mg/day-280 mg/day. In certain particular embodiments the dose is 180 mg/day, 190 mg/day, 200 mg/day, 205 mg/day, 210 mg/day, 215 mg/day, 220 mg/day, 225 mg/day, 230 mg/day, 235 mg/day, 240 mg/day, 245 mg/day, 250 mg/day, 255 mg/day, 260 mg/day, 265 mg/day, or 270 mg/day. In some embodiments a dose of 180 mg/day-270 mg/day is administered in a single daily injection in a volume of 1.5 ml-2.0 ml. In some embodiments a dose of 180 mg/day-270 mg/day is administered in a single daily injection in a volume of up to 2.0-2.5 ml. In some embodiments a dose of 180 mg/day-270 mg/day is administered in two daily injections, each having a volume of less than 2.0 ml, e.g., between 1.0 ml and 1.9 ml. For example, in a particular embodiment a daily dose of 270 mg/day is administered in a single injection in a volume of 1.5 ml. In another particular embodiment a daily dose of 270 mg/day is administered in a single injection in a volume of 1.8 ml. In another particular embodiment a daily dose of 270 mg/day is administered in two daily injections in a volume of 0.9 ml each. In some particular embodiments a daily dose of 270 mg/day is administered in two daily injections in a volume of 0.9 ml-1.2 ml each, e.g., 1.0 ml, 1.05 ml, 1.1 ml, 1.15 ml, or 1.2 ml. In some particular embodiments a daily dose of 270 mg/day is administered in two daily injections in a volume of 1.2 ml-1.5 ml each, e.g., 1.2 ml, 1.25 ml, 1.35 ml, 1.40 ml, 1.45 ml, or 1.5 ml. In some particular embodiments a daily dose of 270 mg/day is administered in two daily injections in a volume of 1.5 ml-1.9 ml each, e.g., 1.55 ml, 1.6 ml, 1.65 ml, 1.7 ml, 1.75 ml, 1.8 ml, 1.85 ml, or 1.90 ml.
In some embodiments the total daily dose for parenteral administration, e.g., subcutaneous administration, of a LACA comprising two compstatin analog moieties and a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD is between 270 mg/day-360 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is 270 mg/day-300 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is 300 mg/day-330 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is 330 mg/day-360 mg/day. In certain particular embodiments the dose is 295 mg/day, 300 mg/day, 305 mg/day, 310 mg/day, 315 mg/day, 320 mg/day, 325 mg/day, 330 mg/day, 335 mg/day, 340 mg/day, 345 mg/day, 350 mg/day, 355 mg/day, or 360 mg/day. In some embodiments a dose of 270 mg/day-360 mg/day is administered in a single daily injection in a volume of 1.5 ml-2.0 ml or in a single daily injection in a volume of up to 2.0-2.5 ml. In some embodiments a dose of 270 mg/day-360 mg/day (e.g., any of the afore-mentioned doses) is administered in two daily injections, each having a volume of less than 2.0 ml, e.g., between 1.0 ml and 1.9 ml, e.g., 1.0 ml, 1.05 ml, 1.10 ml, 1.15 ml, 1.20 ml, 1.25 ml, 1.30 ml, 1.35 ml, 1.40 ml, 1.45 ml, 1.50 ml, 1.55 ml, 1.60 ml, 1.65 ml, 1.70 ml, 1.75 ml, 1.80 ml, 1.85 ml, 1.90 ml.
In some embodiments the total daily dose for SC administration of a LACA comprising two compstatin analog moieties and a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD is at least 360 mg/day, e.g., 360 mg/day-540 mg/day. In some embodiment the total daily dose is more than 360 mg/day, e.g., up to about 540 mg/day. For example, the total daily dose may be 370 mg/day, 380 mg/day, 390 mg/day, 400 mg/day, 410 mg/day, 420 mg/day, 430 mg/day, 440 mg/day, 450 mg/day, 460 mg/day, 470 mg/day, 480 mg/day, 490 mg/day, 500 mg/day, 510 mg/day, 520 mg/day, 530 mg/day, or 540 mg/day. In some embodiments a dose of 360 mg/day-540 mg/day is administered in a single daily injection, e.g., in a volume of about 2.0-2.5 ml or 2.5 ml-3.0 ml. In some embodiments a dose of 360 mg/day up to about 540 mg/day is administered in two daily injections, each having a volume of less than 2.0 ml, e.g., between 1.0 ml and 1.9 ml.
It will be understood that the doses and volumes described herein for subcutaneous administration (or other parenteral administration route) may be administered using a free-standing needle and syringe, pen device, autoinjector, or other means known to those of skill in the art.
In some embodiments, treatment with compstatin analog, e.g., a LACA, by subcutaneous administration or other parenteral administration route, e.g., according to any of the dosing regimens and/or using any of the doses or administration devices described herein may be continued or any period of time, e.g., indefinitely. In some embodiments, a patient may be treated with a short course of treatment (e.g., for up to 1 week, 2 weeks, or up to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 months). In some embodiments, such a short course of treatment may be sufficient to modify the course of a disorder (e.g., PNH, NMO, myasthenia gravis, COPD), such that a prolonged remission (e.g., as evidenced by absence of flare-ups or exacerbations) is sustained with intermittent treatment, i.e., the LACA is allowed to wash out of the body between treatment courses. In some embodiments a subject may be treated with a short course once or twice a year, every two years, etc. In some embodiments, a short course of treatment may modify the course of a disorder (e.g., PNH, NMO, myasthenia gravis, COPD, asthma, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, vasculitis, pemphigoid), such that a prolonged remission or cure is achieved without further treatment. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, a short course of treatment with a compstatin analog, e.g., a LACA, may be sufficient to disrupt a cycle that perpetuates an immune response against cells or tissues (e.g., components thereof such as proteins or lipids) that are a target of immune system attack in a complement-mediated disorder. In some embodiments, for example, a short course of treatment with a LACA may be sufficient to disrupt a cycle that perpetuates an immune response against cells or tissues in the bone marrow (e.g., hematopoietic stem cells) (e.g., in a patient with PNH), nervous system (e.g., nerve cells, glial cells) (e.g., in a patient with NMO or myasthenia gravis), circulatory system (e.g., endothelial cells) (e.g., in a patient with a vasculitis), respiratory system (e.g., in a patient with COPD, asthma, or idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis), integumentary system (e.g., in a patient with pemphigoid).
In some aspects, described herein are various doses, dosing regimens, compositions and methods of use for treating a patient in need of treatment for a complement-mediated eye disorder that affects the posterior segment of the eye, e.g., the retina, by intravitreal (IVT) administration of a LACA. In some embodiments, the eye disorder is AMD, e.g., advanced AMD (geographic atrophy (GA) or neovascular AMD), diabetic retinopathy, glaucoma, or uveitis.
In some embodiments a dose for intravitreal injection of a LACA comprising two compstatin analog moieties and a PEG having a molecular weight of about 40 kD is 5 mg-20 mg. In some embodiments the dose is 10 mg. In some embodiments the dose is 10 mg, 11 mg, 12 mg, 13 mg, 14 mg, 15 mg, 16 mg, 17 mg, 18 mg, 19 mg, or 20 mg. In certain particular embodiments the dose is 15 mg. In some embodiments, any of the afore-mentioned doses is administered by intravitreal injection in a volume of between 90 and 110 microliters, e.g., in a volume of 100 microliters. In some embodiments, any of the afore-mentioned doses is administered by intravitreal injection) using a 27, 28, 29, or 30 gauge needle. In a Phase 1b clinical trial, it was found that doses of up to 20 mg (i.e., 5 mg, 10 mg, and 20 mg) in a volume of 100 microliters administered by intravitreal injection using a 29 gauge needle were well tolerated by patients with AMD. In certain embodiments a combination of dose and needle gauge that allows administration by IVT injection in 10 seconds or less is selected. In certain embodiments a combination of dose and needle that allows administration of the dose by IVT injection in 5-6 seconds, or less, is used. It was found that a dose of 15 mg in a volume of 100 microliters (150 mg/ml) results in a composition that has a favorable viscosity for administration by intravitreal injection in 5-6 seconds or less via a thin wall 27 gauge needle.
In certain embodiments a dose of a composition comprising a LACA is administered by IVT injection in a volume greater than 100 microliters. For example, a volume of 100-110 microliters, 110-125 microliters, or 125-150 microliters may be used. Such larger volumes may permit administration of a higher dose as compared with a 100 microliter injection volume, without an increase in time required to deliver the dose and/or without requiring use of a lower gauge (wider diameter) needle. Such increase in total dose may be proportional to the increased volume. For example, an increase in dose volume of 50% would allow an increase of 50% in amount of LACA administered without an increase in time required to deliver the dose and/or without requiring use of a lower gauge needle.
In some embodiments a dose of a composition comprising a LACA is administered by ocular administration (e.g., IVT injection) once a month, every 6 weeks, or every 2 months (i.e., every other month). In some embodiments a dose of a composition comprising a LACA is administered by IVT injection every 3 months, every 4 months, every 5 months, or every 6 months, or less frequently, e.g., every 9 months, every year). Thus in some embodiments a patient may receive between 1 and 6 injections per year, typically at approximately equal intervals. In some embodiments a patient is initially treated with monthly injections (e.g., for the first 3-6 months or the first 6-12 months), followed by less frequent administration (e.g., every 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 months, or less frequently, e.g., every 9 months, every year).
In some embodiments, treatment with a LACA by IVT injection according to any of the afore-mentioned dosing regimens may be continued indefinitely. In some embodiments, a patient may be treated with a short course of treatment (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 IVT injections). In some embodiments, a short course of treatment may be sufficient to halt or substantially halt progression of a disorder (e.g., AMD, e.g., GA or early or intermediate AMD), such that further treatment is not needed. For example, a short course of treatment with a LACA may be sufficient to disrupt a cycle that perpetuates an immune response against the retina or retinal pigment epithelium.
In some embodiments a LACA is administered using a syringe with one or more design features that reduce friction and/or required injection force, such as a relatively short barrel and/or relatively large plunger size.
In experiments performed using LACAs comprising PEGs of different molecular weights, it was determined that a solution of LACA comprising a lower molecular weight PEG (e.g., 10 kD-30 kD) has reduced viscosity as compared to a LACA comprising a 40 kD PEG at the same concentration in mg/ml. Lower viscosity can facilitate use of a higher gauge number needle (e.g., 29 gauge rather than 27 gauge). In some embodiments a LACA comprising a polymer, e.g., a PEG, having a molecular weight below 40 kD may be administered using a needle with a smaller inner diameter and/or higher gauge number than a LACA comprising a polymer, e.g., a PEG, having a molecular weight of 40 kD or more. In some embodiments a LACA comprising a polymer, e.g., a PEG, having a molecular weight below 40 kD may be administered at a concentration between 80 mg/ml and 150 mg/ml, e.g., about 100 mg/ml or about 125 mg/ml. In some embodiments a LACA comprising a polymer, e.g., a PEG, having a molecular weight below 40 kD may be administered at a concentration between 150 mg/ml and 250 mg/ml. In some embodiments a LACA comprising a polymer, e.g., a PEG, having a molecular weight below 40 kD (e.g., 10 kD-35 kD) may be administered at a higher concentration than 250 mg/ml, e.g., up to 300 mg/ml, 300 mg/ml-400 mg/ml, 400 mg/ml-500 mg/ml, or more.
In some embodiments, a LACA comprising a CRM (e.g., a PEG, POZ, polypeptide, or other polymer) having a molecular weight below about 40 kD (e.g., 10 kD-35 kD) and a specified number of compstatin analog moieties (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4) may be administered at about the same dose in terms of moles as any of the amounts described above in regard to a LACA comprising a CRM having a molecular weight of about 40 kD, resulting in a lower dose by weight yet containing about the same number of compstatin analog moieties. Administering a lower total amount of compound per dose (by weight) may permit a reduced dosing volume. A reduced dosing volume may allow a reduced number of injections (e.g., a single daily injection instead of two daily injections in some embodiments) and/or may afford a reduced injection time (length of time to administer an individual dose). A lower total dose (by weight) may permit use of a lower concentration (by weight) of compound in a given volume, resulting in reduced viscosity, allowing use of a needle with a smaller inner diameter and/or shorter injection time. In some embodiments, a LACA comprising a CRM (e.g., a PEG, POZ, polypeptide, or other polymer) having a molecular weight below about 40 kD (e.g., 10 kD-30 kD) and a specified number of compstatin analog moieties (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4) may be administered at a higher molar dose than a LACA comprising a CRM having a molecular weight of about 40 kD, resulting in administration of a greater number of compstatin analog moieties per dose. In some embodiments the molar dose may be up to 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, or 5-fold greater depending, e.g., on the molecular weight of the CRM.
In some embodiments, a LACA comprising a CRM (e.g., a PEG, POZ, polypeptide, or other polymer) having a molecular weight below about 40 kD (e.g., 10 kD-35 kD) and a specified number of compstatin analog moieties (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4) may be administered at a lower dose (by weight) per unit time (e.g., lower daily dose, lower weekly dose, lower monthly dose, etc.), about the same dose per unit time, or a higher dose per unit time than a dose described above in regard to a LACA comprising a CRM having a molecular weight of about 40 kD. In some embodiments, it is contemplated that a dose (by weight), of a LACA comprising a CRM having a molecular weight below about 40 kD (e.g., 10 kD-30 kD) may be lower or higher by a factor of up to about 3 (e.g., about 1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0) relative to a daily dose of a LACA comprising a 40 kD CRM.
The invention encompasses the combination therapy with a compstatin analog and an additional therapy. Such additional therapy may include administration of any agent(s) used in the art or potentially useful for treating a subject suffering from the disease. For example, in some embodiments a LACA, cell-reactive, or targeted compstatin analog is administered in combination with a C5 inhibitor (e.g., eculizumab or any of the other C5 inhibitors mentioned herein or known in the art) to a patient, e.g., a patient with PNH or any of the other complement-mediated disorders mentioned herein. In some embodiments a LACA, cell-reactive, or targeted compstatin analog is administered in combination with an anti-vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) agent to a subject with wet AMD. Anti-VEGF agents include antibodies that bind to VEGF such as ranibizumab (Lucentis) and bevacizumab (Avastin), polypeptides comprising a soluble portion of VEGF receptor such as aflibercept (Eylea, also known as VEGF-Trap).
When two or more therapies (e.g., compounds or compositions) are used or administered “in combination” with each other, they may be given at the same time, within overlapping time periods, or sequentially (e.g., separated by up to 2 weeks in time, or more, e.g., separated by up to about 4, 6, 8, or 12 weeks in time), in various embodiments of the invention. They may be administered via the same route or different routes. In some embodiments, the compounds or compositions are administered within 48 hours of each other. In some embodiments, a compstatin analog can be given prior to or after administration of the additional compound(s), e.g., sufficiently close in time that the compstatin analog and additional compound(s) are present at useful levels within the body at least once. In some embodiments, the compounds or compositions are administered sufficiently close together in time such that no more than 90% of the earlier administered composition has been metabolized to inactive metabolites or eliminated, e.g., excreted, from the body, at the time the second compound or composition is administered.
In some embodiments, a composition that includes both the cell-reactive compstatin analog, or long-acting or targeted compstatin analog and additional compound(s) is administered.
In some embodiments a subject who is treated or is to be treated with a compstatin analog using, e.g., inhaled administration or parenteral administration via, e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intravenous injection, is vaccinated against one or more pathogens. For example, the subject may receive a vaccine against Neisseria meningitidis, Haemophilus influenzae and/or Streptococcus pneumoniae. In some embodiments a subject is vaccinated against all three of these microorganisms. In some embodiments, a subject may receive the vaccine at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 weeks prior to the first dose of a compstatin analog. The subject may receive one or more additional vaccine doses if appropriate.
In some embodiments a subject who is treated or is to be treated with a compstatin analog using, e.g., inhaled administration or parenteral administration via, e.g., subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intravenous injection, may receive an antibiotic expected to be effective in preventing or limiting infection by one or more pathogens, e.g., Neisseria meningitidis, Haemophilus influenzae and/or Streptococcus pneumoniae. In some embodiments the subject may receive an antibiotic prophylactically. Prophylactic administration may begin before the subject receives the first dose of a compstatin analog, or at any time thereafter. Those of ordinary skill in the art are aware of suitable antibiotics.
IX. Inhibitory Nucleic Acid Agents that Inhibit C3 and Uses ThereofIn some aspects, the present disclosure relates to the recognition that administering a long-acting compstatin analog (LACA) in combination with an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits C3 expression can have a number of important advantages. In some aspects, administration of an INAA that inhibits C3 expression (such as a siRNA targeted to C3) alone may not be sufficient to reduce complement activity to a desired or therapeutically optimum level. For example, there may still be sufficient residual C3 to result in undesired hemolysis in individuals suffering from a disorder characterized by complement-mediated hemolysis, e.g., PNH. By administering INAA therapy together with LACA therapy, residual C3 can be inhibited such that a desired level of complement inhibition is achieved and/or a desired therapeutic benefit is obtained. In some embodiments, INAA therapy is administered to a subject receiving LACA therapy; in some embodiments, LACA therapy is administered to a subject receiving INAA therapy. In some embodiments, both INAA therapy and LACA therapy are administered to the subject.
In some embodiments administration of LACA therapy may allow for administering a reduced dosing regimen of (e.g., involving a smaller amount in an individual dose, reduced frequency of dosing, reduced number of doses, and/or reduced overall exposure to) an INAA, as compared to administration of an INAA as single complement inhibiting therapy. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, in some embodiments a reduced dosing regimen of an INAA may avoid one or more undesired adverse effects that could otherwise result, e.g., from off-target effects of the INAA.
In some aspects, administration of INAA therapy in combination with LACA therapy (e.g., administration of an INAA in combination with a LACA) can reduce the amount of C3 in the subject's blood sufficiently such that a reduced dosing regimen of LACA therapy is required to achieve a desired degree of complement inhibition.
In some embodiments such a reduced dose can be administered in a smaller volume, or using a lower concentration, or using a longer dosing interval, or any combination of the foregoing, as compared to administration of a LACA as single complement inhibiting therapy.
The present disclosure particularly appreciates that long-acting compstatin analogs and INAAs are both well suited to subcutaneous administration and that the opportunity for administering a reduced dosage of LACA (allowing dosing volume and/or increased dosing interval) afforded by combination therapy with the LACA and an INAA that inhibits C3 expression can offer a number of advantages such as increased convenience and/or comfort for patients. Combined administration methods described herein may be used to treat subjects in need of treatment for any complement-mediated disorder, e.g., any of the complement-mediated disorders mentioned herein.
In some aspects, the present disclosure teaches particular utility of administering INAA that inhibit C3 expression in combination with administering certain long-acting compstatin analogs (LACAs), In some aspects, the present disclosure teaches particular utility of administering such INAA and long-acting compstatin analogs in combination according to certain dosing regimens and/or using certain dosing formats. In some embodiments an INAA administered in an amount that inhibits plasma complement activity by an average of no more than 95%, optionally between 50% and 95%, as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both, may be administered in combination with a LACA. In some embodiments a compstatin analog is administered in an amount that inhibits plasma complement activity by an average of no more than 95%, optionally between 50% and 95%, as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both, may be administered in combination with an INAA. In some embodiments the assay is a hemolysis assay. In some embodiments, an INAA administered in an amount effective to reduce the steady state plasma level of C3 by between 30% and 95% on average, e.g., between 50% and 95%, e.g., between 50% and 60%, between 60% and 70%, between 70% and 80%, or between 80% and 90%, on average, may be administered in combination with a LACA. In some embodiments, an INAA administered in an amount effective to reduce the steady state plasma level of C3 by between 30% and 95% on average, e.g., between 50% and 95%, e.g., between 50% and 60%, between 60% and 70%, between 70% and 80%, between 80% and 90%, on average, may be administered in combination with a LACA. In some embodiments an INAA may be administered in amounts that are effective to reduce the steady state plasma level of C3 by more than 95% but still do not achieve a desired efficacy. Combined administration with the LACA allows such efficacy to be achieved. In some embodiments an INAA may be administered at between 80% and 100% of its maximum tolerated dose. In some embodiments, combined administration with a LACA allows the use of smaller doses of INAA than those required to achieve a desired level of efficacy. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, lower doses of the INAA may have reduced propensity for unwanted side effects, such as off-target inhibition, saturation of receptors and/or saturation of the RNAi machinery, or other specific or non-specific effects that might otherwise be caused by an INAA or INAA delivery agent. In some embodiments an INAA may be administered at less than 50%, 60%, 70%, or 80% of its maximum tolerated dose.
In some embodiments an INAA may be administered daily, weekly, every 2, 3, or 4 weeks, or even at longer intervals. In some embodiments it may be desirable to administer the INAA and the LACA according to the same dosing schedule (e.g., once per day, every other day, or once per week), while in other embodiments different dosing schedules may be used (e.g., daily or weekly for the LACA and about every 4 weeks, e.g., monthly, for the INAA). In many embodiments both the INAA and the LACA are administered subcutaneously. In some embodiments the INAA may be administered intravenously.
In some embodiments a pharmaceutical pack or kit may be provided that contains both an INAA and a LACA. The INAA and LACA may be in separate containers. The pack or kit may include instructions for administration. The instructions may include instructions for reconstituting a dry form of either or both agents in appropriate volumes for one or more individual doses.
In some embodiments the LACA comprises two compstatin analog moieties. In some embodiments the two compstatin analog moieties are located at the ends of a linear polymer, e.g., a PEG. In some embodiments the PEG has an average molecular weight of between 10 and 50 kD. In some embodiments the PEG has an average molecular weight of between 35 and 45 kD, e.g., about 40 kD. In some particular embodiments the compstatin analog moieties comprise a peptide comprising SEQ ID NO: 28, 32, or 34.
In some embodiments the LACA is one that achieves therapeutically useful levels of complement inhibition when administered as sole complement inhibiting therapy once or twice daily, e.g., subcutaneously. In some embodiments the LACA is one that achieves therapeutically useful levels of C3 inhibition when administered as sole C3 inhibiting therapy once or twice daily, e.g., subcutaneously. In some embodiments such a LACA may be administered in a lower total amount (as measured over a relevant time period such as a month) when administered in combination with an INAA that inhibits C3 expression. In some embodiments the total amount administered may be lower by a factor of at least 1.5, e.g., lower by a factor of between 1.5 and 5, between 5 and 10, or between 10 and 20, over a relevant time period such as a month. In some embodiments, the LACA may be administered in smaller daily doses as compared with the doses that would be used if the LACA was administered as sole complement inhibitor therapy or as sole C3 inhibiting therapy. In some embodiments, the LACA may be administered using a longer dosing interval as compared with the dosing interval that would be used if the LACA was administered as sole complement inhibitor therapy or as sole C3 inhibiting therapy. For example, in some embodiments a LACA that would typically be administered daily to achieve a desired effect may instead be administered every other day, every 3 days, or weekly, to achieve substantially the same effect. In some embodiments the LACA may be administered using both lower individual doses and a longer dosing interval when administered in combination with a LACA than when administered as sole complement inhibitor therapy or as sole C3 inhibiting therapy.
As described herein, certain LACAs comprising a 40 kD PEG demonstrate pharmacological activity when administered subcutaneously at daily doses of 180 mg and 270 mg, with 270 mg/day being particularly effective. In some embodiments, such a LACA, when administered in combination with a LACA may be administered at a reduced dose, e.g., a dose that is lower by a factor of at least 1.5, e.g., lower by a factor of between 1.5 and 5, between 5 and 10, or between 10 and 20. In some embodiments, for example, the dose may be between about 9 mg/day and about 150 mg/day, e.g., between about 9 mg/day and about 20 mg/day, between about 20 mg/day and about 50 mg/day, between about 50 mg/day and 100 mg/day, between about 100 mg/day and about 150 mg/day, and in at least some embodiments achieves at least equivalent efficacy to a 180 mg/day dose or in some embodiments a 270 mg/day dose. In some embodiments the dose may be between about 150 mg/day and about 200 mg/day, and in at least some embodiments achieves at least equivalent efficacy to a 270 mg/day dose. In some embodiments the dose is 10 mg/day-20 mg/day, 20 mg/day-30 mg/day, 30 mg/day-40 mg/day, 40 mg/day-50 mg/day, 50 mg/day-60 mg/day, 60 mg/day-70 mg/day, 70 mg/day-80 mg/day, 80 mg/day-90 mg/day, 90 mg/day-100 mg/day, 100 mg/day-110 mg/day, 110 mg/day-120 mg/day, 120 mg/day-130 mg/day, 130 mg/day-140 mg/day, 140 mg/day-150 mg/day, 150 mg/day-160 mg/day, 160 mg/day-170 mg/day, 170 mg/day-180 mg/day, 180 mg/day-190 mg/day, or 190 mg/day-200 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose is 200 mg/day-210 mg/day, 210 mg/day-220 mg/day, 220 mg/day-230 mg/day, 230 mg/day-240 mg/day, or 240 mg/day-250 mg/day. In some embodiments the dose of LACA is administered as a single daily dose, e.g., subcutaneously. In some embodiments a dose of LACA is administered as a single weekly dose, e.g., subcutaneously.
In some aspects, a reduced dose of LACA may be administered in a smaller volume and/or at a reduced concentration. For example, if the dose is reduced by a factor of 10, the volume could also be reduced by a factor of 10 while keeping the concentration the same. Alternately, the concentration could be reduced by a factor of 10 while keeping the volume the same. Alternately both the concentration and volume may be reduced. In certain embodiments the volume of an individual dose is about 0.8 ml or less, e.g., 0.5 ml or less, e.g., between 0.02 ml and 0.5 ml, e.g., 0.1 ml, 0.2 ml, 0.3 ml, 0.4 ml, or 0.5 ml. In certain embodiments the concentration is below about 100 mg/ml. For example, the concentration may be 10 mg/ml-20 mg/ml, 20 mg/ml-30 mg/ml, 30 mg/ml-40 mg/ml, 40 mg/ml-50 mg/ml, 50 mg/ml-60 mg/ml, 60 mg/ml-70 mg/ml, 70 mg/ml-80 mg/ml, 80 mg/ml-90 mg/ml, or 90 mg/ml-100 mg/ml. The volume and concentration can be selected to deliver a desired amount. For example, in an exemplary embodiment a dose of 40 mg is administered in a volume of 0.5 ml at a concentration of 80 mg/ml. In another exemplary embodiment a dose of 60 mg is administered in a volume of 0.6 ml at a concentration of 100 mg/ml. In some embodiments a 28, 29, 30, or 31 gauge needle may be used to administer the LACA, INAA, or both.
While doses of 250 mg/day or less are of particular interest for administration, e.g., SC administration, of a LACA in combination with an INAA that inhibits C3 expression, the present disclosure also contemplates administering doses of more than 250 mg/day in combination with an INAA that inhibits C3 expression, e.g., doses of 250 mg/day-300 mg/day, 300 mg/day-400 mg/day, or 400 mg/day-500 mg/day. In certain embodiments such a dose may be administered weekly.
While the present disclosure particularly contemplates embodiments in which a LACA having a terminal half-life of at least 2, 3, 4, or more days when administered IV or SC to a primate, e.g., LACAs comprising a clearance reducing moiety as described herein, is administered in combination with an INAA that inhibits C3 expression, it is contemplated in certain embodiments that combined administration with such an INAA may also be useful for compstatin analogs that have shorter half-lives and/or that lack a clearance reducing moiety. Such compstatin analogs may be administered in 1 or 2 doses per day.
In some embodiments efficacy of a particular agent or combination of agents may be measured by LDH level in a patient suffering from a complement-mediated hemolytic disorder such as PNH. In some embodiments efficacy may be measured by a classical or alternative pathway complement assay, which may be a hemolysis assay.
The present disclosure contemplates using any of a variety of INAA that inhibit C3 expression. An INAA that inhibits expression of C3 comprises a strand that is complementary to a target portion of a C3 transcript, e.g., C3 mRNA. The target portion may be 15-30 nucleotides long, e.g., 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotides long, although shorter and longer target portions are also contemplated. Human C3 is of particular interest herein. The amino acid and nucleotide sequences of human C3 are known in the art and can be found in publicly available databases, for example, the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI) Reference Sequence (RefSeq) database, where they are listed under RefSeq accession numbers NP_000055 (current accession.version number NP_000055.2) and NM_000064 (current accession.version number NM_000064.3), respectively (where “amino acid sequence” refers to the sequence of the C3 polypeptide and “nucleotide sequence” in this context refers to the C3 mRNA sequence as represented in genomic DNA, it being understood that the actual mRNA nucleotide sequence contains U rather than T). One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the afore-mentioned sequences are for the complement C3 preproprotein, which includes a signal sequence that is cleaved off and is therefore not present in the mature protein. The human C3 gene has been assigned NCBI Gene ID: 718, and the genomic C3 sequence has RefSeq accession number NG_009557 (current accession.version number NG_009557.1). The nucleotide sequence of human C3 mRNA is presented below (from RefSeq accession number NM_000064.3 with T replaced by U).
In some embodiments an INAA is capable of inhibiting expression of C3 of one or more non-human species, e.g., a non-human primate C3, e.g., Macaca fascicularis C3, in addition to human C3. The Macaca fascicularis C3 gene has been assigned NCBI Gene ID: 102131458 and the predicted amino acid and nucleotide sequence of Macaca fascicularis C3 are listed under NCBI RefSeq accession numbers XP 005587776.1 and XM_005587719.2, respectively. In some embodiments an INAA is complementary to a target portion that is identical in the human and Macaca fascicularis C3 transcripts. In some embodiments an INAA is complementary to a target portion of a human C3 transcript that differs by 1, 2, or 3 nucleotides from a sequence in a Macaca fascicularis C3 transcript. It will be appreciated that INAA that inhibit expression of human C3 may also inhibit expression of non-primate C3, e.g., rat or mouse C3, particularly if conserved regions of C3 transcript are targeted.
As used herein, the term “region of complementarity” refers to the region on the antisense strand of an INAA that is substantially complementary to a sequence, for example a target portion of a target RNA. In some embodiments, an INAA for inhibiting the expression of a target gene, e.g., the C3 gene, in a cell, such as a cell within a subject, e.g., a mammal, such as a human or non-human primate, comprises an antisense strand having a region that is complementary to at least a part of an RNA, e.g., mRNA, formed by transcription of the target gene, wherein the region of complementarity is between 7 and about 30 nucleotides in length (e.g., 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nucleotides long. In some embodiments, an antisense strand of an INAA as described herein can contain one or more mismatches to the target sequence. Where the region of complementarity is not perfectly complementary to the target portion, the mismatches may be in the internal or terminal regions of the strand. In some embodiments mismatches are in the terminal region(s), e.g., the 5′ and/or 3′ terminal nucleotide(s) or within 2, 3, 4, or 5 nucleotides of the 5′ and/or 3′ terminus of the INAA antisense strand. In some embodiments nucleotides at positions 10 and 11 of the antisense strand are complementary to the target sequence when the antisense strand is hybridized to the target RNA. In some embodiments, an antisense strand of an INAA as described herein contains no more than 3 mismatches with respect to a target portion of a C3 RNA. In some embodiments, if the antisense strand of an INAA contains mismatches to a target sequence, the mismatched area is not located in the center of the region of complementarity. In some embodiments, if the antisense strand contains mismatches to the target portion, the mismatched area is located within the last 5 nucleotides from either the 5′- or 3′-end of the region of complementarity. In some embodiments a duplex formed by the antisense strand and target portion does not contain a mismatch of the nucleotides at positions 10 or 11 with respect to the 5′end of the antisense strand. In some embodiments a duplex formed by the antisense strand and target portion does not contain any mismatch of the nucleotides between positions 8 and 13 with respect to the 5′end of the antisense strand. In some aspects, methods described herein or known in the art may be used to determine whether any particular INAA, e.g., an INAA comprising an antisense strand containing a mismatch to a target portion, is effective in inhibiting the expression of a target gene, e.g., the C3 gene.
The target portion for an INAA, e.g., an siRNA, may be located within the 5′UTR, coding sequence, 3′UTR, or partly in a UTR and partly in the coding sequence (i.e., it does not include intron sequence) of a target RNA, e.g., a C3 transcript. The coding region of C3 mRNA extends from position 94 to position 5085 in the nucleotide sequence presented above. C3 mRNA contains 41 exons. One of ordinary skill in the art will be able to obtain the locations of exon boundaries and the intron sequences from the RefSeq database entries provided above or from the human genome sequence available at the UCSC Genome Browser. In certain embodiments the antisense strand of an RNAi agent hybridizes exclusively with exonic sequences. In some embodiments the antisense strand of an RNAi agent hybridizes with a target region that includes only sequences within a single exon; in other embodiments the target portion is created by splicing or other modification of a primary transcript. In some embodiments a target portion for an ASO may be within the 5′UTR, coding sequence, or 3′UTR or may overlap the boundary between a UTR and the coding sequence. In some embodiments a target portion for an ASO may be within an intron, within an exon, or may overlap a boundary between and intron and an exon. In general, any site that is available for hybridization with a nucleic acid strand, resulting in cleavage and degradation of the transcript or resulting in translational repression may be utilized as a target portion. Nonetheless, those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that it may be desirable to select or avoid particular regions of a target RNA as a target portions. For example, in some embodiments, it may be desirable to avoid sections of a target RNA that share extensive identity with other transcripts whose degradation or translational repression is not desired. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that various naturally occurring DNA sequence variations in the C3 gene have been identified and may be found, e.g., in the NCBI dbSNP (ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/snp) and UniProt databases. The term “C3” is intended to encompass such variations. In some aspects, the reference nucleotide sequences for human C3 provided herein (e.g., NM_000064.3 or earlier version NM_000064.2) may be used to design INAA targeting C3, to determine whether a particular sequence is complementary to C3 RNA, to describe the location of a target portion, or for other purposes described herein. In some embodiments a target portion of the C3 RNA sequence does not contain a polymorphic site wherein the most common allele has a frequency of less than 99%. In some embodiments a target portion of the C3 RNA sequence does not contain a polymorphic site between positions 8 and 13 of the target portion wherein the major allele has a frequency of less than 99%. One of ordinary skill in the art will be able to obtain allele frequencies of polymorphisms from dbSNP.
An INAA may comprise one or more modified nucleotides. Modifications suitable for use in INAAs include all types of modifications disclosed herein or known in the art. Any such modifications may be present in any of the various types of INAAs described herein, such as RNAi agents, siRNAs, dsRNAs, or ASOs. Such modifications may, for example, increase stability (e.g., by reducing sensitivity to cleavage by nucleases), decrease clearance in vivo, increase cell uptake, or confer other properties that improve the potency, efficacy, specificity, or otherwise render the nucleic acid more suitable for an intended use as compared to a nucleic acid that lacks the particular modification but is otherwise identical. Modifications include, for example, end modifications, e.g., 5′-end modifications, 3′-end modifications, base modifications, e.g., replacement with stabilizing bases, destabilizing bases, or bases that base pair with an expanded repertoire of partners, removal of bases (abasic nucleotides), or conjugated bases; sugar modifications (e.g., at the 2′-position or 4′-position) or replacement of the sugar; and/or backbone modifications, including modification or replacement of the phosphodiester linkages. Different modifications may be used in the two strands of a double-stranded nucleic acid. A nucleic acid may be modified uniformly or on only a portion thereof and/or may contain multiple different modifications. One of ordinary skill in the art appreciates that certain modifications may be better suited for use in particular types of INAAs and/or the particular mechanism of inhibition desired and will be able to select the appropriate modifications based on teachings herein and the references cited herein. The present disclosure encompasses INAAs that target C3 that are designed based on, and embody, any of the particular configurations described in references cited herein, and incorporating appropriate modifications, to produce such INAAs.
In some embodiments, an INAA comprises modifications at one or more positions. For example, in some embodiments the sense and/or antisense strand comprises 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, or more modified nucleotides. The number of modified nucleotides may be expressed as a percentage of the total number of nucleotides present in the INAA. For example, an INAA may comprise modified nucleotides at about 5% to about 100% of the nucleotide positions (e.g., 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% of the nucleotide positions). In certain embodiments at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or more of the nucleotides of an INAA are modified. In certain embodiments substantially all of the nucleotides are modified. An INAA or strand thereof in which substantially all of the nucleotides are modified may include 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 unmodified nucleotides, provided that at least 80% of the nucleotides are modified.
In some embodiments, an INAA comprises two or more different modifications. In some embodiments, an INAA comprises two or more different 2′ sugar modifications. In some embodiments an INAA may contain one or more substituted sugar moieties. For example, an INAA may include a sugar moiety comprising one of the following at the 2′-position: OH; F; O-, S-, or N-alkyl; O-, S-, or N-alkenyl; O-, S- or N-alkynyl; or O-alkyl-O-alkyl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and alkynyl can be substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C10 alkyl or C2 to C10 alkenyl and alkynyl. Exemplary suitable modifications include O[(CH2)nO]mCH3, O(CH2)nOCH3, O(CH2)nNH2, O(CH2)nCH3, O(CH2)nONH2, and O(CH2)nON[(CH2)nCH3)]2, where each instance of n and m is independently from 1 to about 10. In some embodiments, an INAA comprises one of the following at the 2′ position: C1 to C10 alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkaryl, aralkyl, O-alkaryl or O-aralkyl, SH, SCH3, OCN, Cl, Br, CN, CF3, OCF3, SOCH3, SO2CH3, ONO2, NO2, N3, NH2, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkaryl, aminoalkylamino, polyalkylamino, substituted silyl. In some embodiments, the modification includes a 2′-methoxyethoxy (2′-O—CH2CH2OCH, also known as 2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl) or 2′-MOE), i.e., an alkoxy-alkoxy group. Another exemplary modification is 2′-dimethylaminooxyethoxy, i.e., a O(CH2)2ON(CH)2 group, also known as 2′-DMAOE, and 2′-dimethylaminoethoxyethoxy (also known in the art as 2′-O-dimethylaminoethoxyethyl or 2′-DMAEOE), i.e., 2′-O-CH2-O-CH2-N(CH2)2. Other modifications include 2′-methoxy (2′-OCH3), 2′-aminopropoxy (2′-OCH2CH2CH2NH2) and 2′-fluoro (2′-F). Similar modifications can also be made at other positions of an INAA, e.g., the 3′ position of the sugar on the 3′ terminal nucleotide or in 2′-5′ linked dsRNAs and the 5′ position of 5′ terminal nucleotide. INAAs may comprise sugar mimetics such as cyclobutyl moieties in place of the pentofuranosyl sugar. In some embodiments an INAA may alternately or additionally contain one or more modified bases such as those described herein.
In some embodiments an INAA may include one or more conformationally restricted nucleotides (CRNs). Conformationally restricted nucleotides are nucleotide analogs that are modified to reduce the number of potential conformations that the compound can assume. A conformationally restricted nucleotide typically comprises a bicyclic sugar moiety (e.g. bicyclic ribose) wherein the C2′ and C4′ of the sugar moiety are bridged or the C3′ and C5′ are bridged. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, the inclusion of conformationally restricted nucleotides in nucleic acids, e.g., RNAi agents, may increase stability of the agent in serum and/or reduce off-target effects. Examples of bicyclic nucleosides of use include, e.g., nucleosides comprising a bridge between the 4′ and the 2′ ribosyl ring atoms. In certain embodiments, an INAA includes one or more bicyclic nucleosides comprising a 4′ to 2′ bridge. Examples of such 4′ to 2′ bridged bicyclic nucleosides, include but are not limited to 4′-(CH2)-O-2′ (known in the art as “locked nucleic acid” or LNA); 4′-(CH2)-S-2; 4′-(CH2)2-O-2′ (ENA); 4′-CH(CH3)-O-2′ (also referred to as “constrained ethyl” or “cEt”) and 4′-CH(CH2OCH3)-O-2′ (and analogs thereof; see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,399,845); 4′-C(CH3)(CH3)-O-2′ (and analogs thereof; see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,278,283); 4′-CH2-N(OCH3)-2′ (and analogs thereof; see e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,278,425); 4′-CH2-O— N(CH3)-2′ (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 20040171570); 4′-CH2-N(R)—O-2′, wherein R is H, C1-C12 alkyl, or a protecting group (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,672); 4′-CH2-C(H)(CH3)-2′ and 4′-CH2-C(═CH2)-2′ (and analogs thereof; see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,278,426). One or more of the nucleotides of an INAA may comprise a hydroxymethyl substituted nucleotide. A “hydroxymethyl substituted nucleotide” is an acyclic 2′-3′-seco-nucleotide, also referred to as an “unlocked nucleic acid” (UNA) modification. Representative publications that teach the preparation of UNA include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. No. 8,314,227; and US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20130096289; 20130011922; and 20110313020. Potentially stabilizing modifications, which may be present at one or more ends of a nucleic acid molecule, can include N-(acetylaminocaproyl)-4-hydroxyprolinol (Hyp-C6-NHAc), N-(caproyl-4-hydroxyprolinol (Hyp-C6), N-(acetyl-4-hydroxyprolinol (Hyp-NHAc), thymidine-2′-O-deoxythymidine (ether), N-(aminocaproyl)-4-hydroxyprolinol (Hyp-C6-amino), 2-docosanoyl-uridine-3′-phosphate, inverted nucleotides (3′-3′, 5′-5′ or 2′-2′ linked nucleotide), dT(idT) and others. Disclosure of certain useful modifications that can be present at the end of a nucleic acid strand can be found in PCT Publication No. WO 2011/005861 and/or US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20050096290.
In some embodiments an INAA comprises one or more 2′ sugar modifications selected from 2′-deoxy, 2′-O-methyl, 2′-fluoro, 2′-deoxy-2′-fluoro, 2′-O-benzyl, and 2′-O-methyl-4-pyridine. In some embodiments an INAA comprises at most two different 2′ sugar modifications, e.g., 2′-O-methyl and 2′-fluoro. In some embodiments the 2′-F modified nucleotides, if present, are pyrimidines and the 2′-O-methyl modified nucleotides, if present, are purines. In some embodiments, an INAA comprises a backbone comprising at least one monomer in which the ribose moiety has been replaced by a moiety other than ribose e.g., a non-carbohydrate moiety, which may be cyclic. The non-ribose monomer may comprise an attachment point, which in some embodiments refers to a constituent ring atom of the cyclic moiety, e.g., a carbon atom or a heteroatom, that connects a selected moiety such as a ligand, e.g., a targeting or delivery moiety, or a moiety which alters a physical property. Exemplary non-ribose monomers as well as other types of modifications that may be used in an INAA are described in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20050107325.
One of ordinary skill in the art appreciates that effective RNAi agents can have a wide variety of configurations. “Configuration” of an RNAi agent refers to the format of the agent with respect to various structural features that are not specific to a particular sequence, such as the number of strands (single or double-stranded); location and length of overhang(s) (if present); pattern of modifications in each strand; length of duplex portion; length of region of complementarity to target; location of the region of complementarity with respect to the end of the antisense strand; presence or absence of loop; identity and location of any moietie(s) attached to the nucleic acid; the percent complementarity of the duplex portion; the location of any mismatches or unpaired nucleotides in the duplex portion; the percent complementarity of the region of complementarity and the target; and the location of any mismatches or unpaired nucleotides in the duplex formed by the region of complementarity and the target. “Pattern of modifications” or “modification pattern” refers to the identity and location of modifications in a nucleic acid. The present disclosure encompasses RNAi agents that are targeted to C3 and have any of the configurations and modification patterns described herein, in references cited herein, or otherwise known in the art.
In some embodiments, an INAA that inhibits C3 expression comprises a double-stranded siRNA. Double-stranded siRNAs comprise two separate nucleic acid strands that are hybridized to each other to form a structure that comprises a double stranded portion (“duplex portion”) at least 9 base pairs (bp) long and up to about 36 bp long. The duplex portion comprises two anti-parallel and substantially complementary nucleic acid strands, which may be referred to as having “sense” and “antisense” orientations with respect to a target RNA, where the sequence of the “sense” strand comprise a region that is identical or homologous to the sequence of a target portion of the target RNA and the sequence of the “antisense” strand comprises a region that is complementary to the target portion of the target RNA. In certain embodiments the duplex portion may be between 10-15 bp, 12-30 bp, 14-30 bp, 17-30 bp, 27-30 bp, 17-23 bp, 17-21 bp, 17-19 bp, 17-27 bp, 18-25 bp, 19-25 bp, 19-23 bp, 19-21 bp, 21-25 bp, or 21-23 bp long. In certain embodiments the duplex portion is 10-36, 11-36, 12-36, 13-36, 14-36, 15-36, 9-35, 10-35, 11-35, 12-35, 13-35, 14-35, 15-35, 9-34, 10-34, 11-34, 12-34, 13-34, 14-34, 15-34, 9-33, 10-33, 11-33, 12-33, 13-33, 14-33, 15-33, 9-32, 10-32, 11-32, 12-32, 13-32, 14-32, 15-32, 9-31, 10-31, 11-31, 12-31, 13-32, 14-31, 15-31, 15-30, 15-29, 15-28, 15-27, 15-26, 15-25, 15-24, 15-23, 15-22, 15-21, 15-20, 15-19, 15-18, 15-17, 18-30, 18-29, 18-28, 18-27, 18-26, 18-25, 18-24, 18-23, 18-22, 18-21, 18-20, 19-30, 19-29, 19-28, 19-27, 19-26, 19-25, 19-24, 19-23, 19-22, 19-21, 19-20, 20-30, 20-29, 20-28, 20-27, 20-26, 20-25, 20-24, 20-23, 20-22, 20-21, 21-30, 21-29, 21-28, 21-27, 21-26, 21-25, 21-24, 21-23, or 21-22 base pairs in length In certain embodiments the duplex portion is 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 bp long.
In some embodiments each strand of a ds siRNA may range from 12-36 nt in length. For example, each strand may be 14-30 nt in length, 17-30 nt in length, 25-30 nt in length, 27-30 nt in length, 17-23 nt in length, 17-21 nt in length, 17-19 nt in length, 19-25 nt in length, 19-23 nt in length, 19-21 nt in length, 21-25 nt in length, or 21-23 nt in length. In certain embodiments either or both strands is/are 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nt long. Strands may be equal in length or may have different lengths in various embodiments. In some embodiments strands may differ by between 1-10 nt in length. In some embodiments either or both strands may contain a 5′ phosphate group and/or a 3′ hydroxyl (—OH) group. In some embodiments either or both strands may contain a 5′ hydroxyl (OH). Sense and antisense strands of a siRNA may pair with each other across all or part of their lengths. For example, a 20 nt strand may base pair with a complementary strand to form a 20 nt duplex portion or may base pair with a 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 base region of complementarity on such strand to form a duplex portion consisting of 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 base pairs. In the latter case, the remaining unpaired bases may exist as 5′ and/or 3′ overhangs. In general, the strands of a ds siRNA are substantially complementary to each other within the duplex portion. In some embodiments the strands of a ds siRNA are perfectly complementary to each other within the duplex portion. However, it will be appreciated that 100% complementarity within the duplex portion is not required. Thus, in some embodiments the duplex portion may contain one or more unmatched nucleotides. An unmatched nucleotide may be in a mismatched (non-complementary) nucleotide pair or may form or be part of a bulge comprising one or more nucleotides that is not opposite a nucleotide in the other strand. In some embodiments either or both strands may contain up to about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 unmatched nucleotides within the duplex portion. The two strands may contain different numbers of unmatched nucleotides. A mismatched nucleotide pair that has at least one matched nucleotide pair on each side is considered a nucleotide pair for purposes of calculating the length of a duplex portion. In some embodiments a duplex portion contains 1 or 2 mismatched nucleotide pairs. In some embodiments a duplex portion contains 1 or 2 unmatched nucleotides forming single nucleotide bulges or a 2 nucleotide bulge.
The two strands that form a duplex structure of an RNAi agent may be different portions of one larger nucleic acid molecule or they may be separate nucleic acid molecules. Where the two strands are part of a larger molecule the 3′ end of one strand and the 5′ end of the other strand forming the duplex structure may be directly connected or may be connected by an uninterrupted chain of nucleotides between the 3′ end of one strand and the 5′ end of the other strand forming the duplex structure. The resulting structure may be referred to as a “hairpin” and the connecting RNA chain may be referred to as a “loop”. The molecule may be referred to as a “short hairpin RNA” (shRNA). A loop can comprise at least one unpaired nucleotide. In some embodiments, the loop comprises at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 20, or more unpaired nucleotides. A guide strand sequence may be positioned in either arm of the stem, i.e., 5′ with respect to the loop or 3′ with respect to the loop in various embodiments. As is known in the art, the stem structure does not require exact base-pairing (perfect complementarity). Thus, the stem may include one or more unmatched residues or the base-pairing may be exact, i.e., it may not include any mismatches or bulges. The stem may have any of the lengths described above for duplex portions. For example, in some embodiments the stem is between 15-30 bp, e.g., between 17-29 bp, e.g., 15-19 bp or 19-25 bp. The primary sequence and number of nucleotides within the loop may vary. Examples of loop sequences include, e.g., UGGU; ACUCGAGA; UUCAAGAGA. In some embodiments a loop sequence may be absent (in which case the termini of the duplex portion may be directly linked). In some embodiments a loop sequence may be at least partly self-complementary. In some embodiments the loop is between 1 and 20 nt in length, e.g., 1-15 nt, e.g., 4-9 nt. The shRNA may comprise a 5′ or 3′ overhang. As known in the art, an shRNA may undergo intracellular processing, e.g., by Dicer, to remove the loop and generate an siRNA. In some embodiments the two complementary strands of a ds RNAi agent may be covalently connected by means other than an uninterrupted chain of nucleotides between the 3′-end of one strand and the 5′-end of the other strand forming the duplex structure. Any of various linking moieties, such as those described herein in regard to compstatin analogs, may serve to connect the strands, e.g., via their termini. In some embodiments an INAA may be encoded by a vector, e.g., a recombinant plasmid or viral vector which, when introduced into a cell, causes the cell to express the INAA. For example, the INAA may be a shRNA or may comprise two separate RNA strands that hybridize intracellularly to generate a ds siRNA. The plasmid or viral vector is administered to the subject. In some embodiments the vector is capable of infecting or transducing hepatocytes. In some embodiments the viral vector is an adeno-associated virus (AAV)-based vector or retroviral vector (e.g., lentiviral vector). In some embodiments the INAA may be expressed from an RNA polymerase III promoter.
A double-stranded nucleic acid, e.g., a double-stranded INAA, e.g., a double-stranded RNAi agent, may comprise one or more nucleotide overhangs in addition to a duplex structure. The terms “nucleotide overhang” or “overhang” are used interchangeably to refer to at least one unpaired nucleotide that protrudes from a duplex structure of a double-stranded nucleic acid. For example, when a 3′-end of one strand of a ds nucleic acid extends beyond the 5′-end of the other strand, a 3′ nucleotide overhang exists. “Blunt” or “blunt end” with respect to a double-stranded nucleic acid means that there are no unpaired nucleotides at that end of the double stranded nucleic acid, i.e., no nucleotide overhang. A “blunt ended” RNAi agent is thus double-stranded over its entire length, i.e., there is no nucleotide overhang at either end (though there may be one or more unpaired nucleotides within the duplex). The RNAi agents described herein include RNAi agents with a nucleotide overhang at one end, i.e., agents with one overhang and one blunt end, agents with nucleotide overhangs at both ends, and blunt-ended agents.
In some embodiments an overhang comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 nt, or more. An overhang may comprise or consist of nucleotide or non-nucleotide moieties or a combination thereof. An RNAi agent may contain one or more overhang regions at the 3′-end, 5′-end, or both ends of one or both strands. The overhang(s) can be on the sense strand, the antisense strand or any combination thereof, it being understood that a double-stranded nucleic acid can have at most two overhangs. In some embodiments, the nucleotide(s) of an overhang can be present on the 5′-end, 3′-end or both ends of either an antisense or sense strand. In some embodiments the antisense strand of ads siRNA has a 1-5 nt or a 5-10 nt overhang e.g., a 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nt overhang at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end. In some embodiments the sense strand of ads siRNA has a 1-5 nt or a 5-10 nt overhang e.g., a 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nt overhang at the 3′ end and/or the 5′ end. In some embodiments an overhang can be 1-6 nt in length, for instance 2-6 nt in length, 1-5 nt in length, 2-5 nt in length, 1-4 nt in length, 2-4 nt in length, 1-3 nt in length, 2-3 nt in length, or 1-2 nt in length, e.g., 2 nt. Overhangs can be the result of one strand being longer than the other or the result of two strands of the same length being staggered. In various embodiments overhang may be perfectly complementary, partly complementary, or not complementary to a target RNA in a hybrid formed by the guide strand and a target RNA. For example, a 2 nt overhang may consist of nucleotides that are complementary to positions −1 and −2 relative to the target site in the mRNA. In certain embodiments, the nucleotides in the overhang region of an RNAi agent can each independently be a modified or unmodified nucleotide including, but not limited to nucleotides that are 2′-sugar modified, such as 2′-F, 2′-O-methyl, 2′-O-methoxyethyl-5-methyluridine (Teo), 2′-0-methoxyethyladenosine (Aeo), 2′-O-methoxyethyl-5-methylcytidine (m5Ceo), or nucleotides that are not 2′-sugar modified, such as uracil (U), thymidine (T) or deoxythymidine (dT), and any combinations thereof. For example, UU, TT, or dTdT can be an overhang sequence for either end on either strand. In some embodiments overhangs contain ribonucleotides or 2′-O-methyl modified nucleotides or a combination thereof. In some embodiments the 5′ or 3′ overhang(s) of the sense strand, antisense strand or both strands of an RNAi agent may be phosphorylated. In some embodiments, the overhang region(s) contains two nucleotides having a phosphorothioate or other non-phosphodiester linkage between the two nucleotides, where the two nucleotides can be the same or different. In some embodiments, an overhang is present at the 3′end of the sense strand, 3′ end of the antisense strand, or 3′ end of both strands. In some embodiments, a 3′ overhang is present in the antisense strand. In some embodiments, a 3′ overhang is present in the sense strand. In some embodiments an RNAi agent may contain a single overhang. For example, an overhang may be located at the 3′ end of the sense strand, with the 5′ end of the sense strand (together with the 3′ end of the antisense strand) forming a blunt end. Alternately, an overhang may be located at the 3′ end of the antisense strand, with the 5′ end of the antisense strand (together with the 3′ end of the sense strand) forming a blunt end. In some embodiments a 3′ overhang may alternately or additionally have a moiety, e.g., a targeting moiety or lipophilic moiety, attached thereto.
In certain embodiments at least one strand of an INAA comprises a non-nucleotide moiety covalently attached at a 3′ or a 2′ position of the sugar residue at the 3′ terminal nucleotide of the strand in which it is present. Such a 3′ terminal nucleotide may be part of an overhang or may be part of a blunt end. In some embodiments the non-nucleotide moiety is selected from the group consisting of: propanol, an alkyl moiety linked to a phosphodiester, an alkyl moiety linked to a phosphorothioate, an abasic moiety (e.g., deoxyriboabasic moiety or a riboabasic moiety), or a combination thereof. The alkyl moiety may be a 3-carbon alkyl chain. Such modifications and their use are described in U.S. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20130035368. The present disclosure encompasses use of any of the nucleic acid structures and/or modifications described in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 20130035368 in various embodiments.
In some embodiments, a ds RNAi agent is sufficiently long and has appropriate structural features to serve as a substrate for Dicer. In such instances, after uptake of the dsRNAi agent by a cell, endogenous Dicer may cleave the ds RNAi agent into shorter RNAi agents having strands and 3′ overhangs of the lengths characteristic of naturally occurring siRNA. These Dicer-generated siRNA then mediate RNAi to inhibit expression of the target gene. RNAi agents that are capable of serving as substrates for Dicer are sometimes referred to as “Dicer substrate short interfering RNA” or DsiRNA in the art. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, DsiRNA may have increased potency in RNAi compared to shorter siRNA (e.g., siRNA containing strands that are 21 bp long with a central 19 bp duplex and 2-base 3′ overhangs) due to linkage between Dicer processing and RISC loading. Dicer may facilitate the incorporation of a single-stranded cleavage product derived from the cleaved dsRNA into the RISC. Exemplary DsiRNA are described in e.g., U.S. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20070265220 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,084,599 and 8,796,444. In some embodiments, such an RNAi agent comprises a duplex portion at least 24 nt long, e.g., at least 25 nt long, e.g., 25-30 nt long, e.g., 27-30 nt long. According to this embodiment, the longest strand in the dsRNA comprises 24-30 nucleotides. In one embodiment, the dsRNA is asymmetric such that the sense strand comprises 22-28 nucleotides and the antisense strand comprises 24-30 nucleotides. Thus, the resulting dsRNA has an overhang on the 3′ end of the antisense strand. The overhang is 1-3 nucleotides, for example 2 nucleotides. In some embodiments a ds siRNA comprises a double-stranded RNA having a 25 to 30 nucleotide sense strand, a blunt end at the 3′ end of the sense strand and a one to four nucleotide overhang at the 3′ end of the antisense strand. In some embodiments both strands of the ds RNAi agent are at least 25 nucleotides long. In some embodiments a region of one of the strands at least 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 nucleotides long is sufficiently complementary to a nucleotide sequence of RNA produced from the target gene (e.g., the C3 gene) to trigger the destruction of the target RNA by the RNAi machinery. In some embodiments a ds RNAi agent has strands of the same length, e.g., 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 nt. In some embodiments the ds RNAi agent is blunt-ended at both ends. In some embodiments a ds RNAi agent has an asymmetric design, by which is meant that the two strands are not the same length. In some embodiments the ds RNAi agent comprises a first oligonucleotide strand comprising RNA and having a 5′ terminus and a 3′ terminus and a second oligonucleotide strand comprising RNA and having a 5′ terminus and a 3′ terminus, wherein said first strand has a length which is 25-30 nucleotides long and wherein said second strand is 1-4 nucleotides longer at its 3′ terminus than said first strand and forms a base-paired blunt end at its 5′ terminus with said 3′ terminus of said first strand, wherein said double-stranded nucleic acid comprises a duplex portion of at least 25 nucleotides in length, wherein said second oligonucleotide strand is sufficiently complementary to a target mRNA (e.g., C3 mRNA) along at least 19 nucleotides of said second oligonucleotide strand length to reduce target gene expression when said double stranded nucleic acid is introduced into a mammalian cell. Upon introduction into a mammalian cell, e.g., a human cell, the double stranded nucleic acid may be cleaved by human Dicer so as to facilitate incorporation of the cleaved second oligonucleotide strand into RISC. In some embodiments the dsRNAi agent contains 1-3 modified nucleotides on the 3′ end of the first oligonucleotide strand. In some embodiments the second strand is comprised of a combination of unmodified and modified nucleotides. For example, in some embodiments the second strand is comprised of alternating ribonucleotides and 2′-O-methyl modified nucleotides on a portion of the strand that is adjacent to the overhang. In some embodiments one or both of the first and second oligonucleotide strands contain a 5′ phosphate. In some embodiments one or both of the first and second oligonucleotide strands contain a 5′ hydroxyl (OH). In some embodiments the modified nucleotides are 2′-O-methyl, 2′-methoxyethoxy, 2′-fluoro, 2′-allyl, 2′-O-[2-(methylamino)-2-oxoethyl], 4′-thio, 4′-CH2-O-2′ bridge, 4′-(CH2)2-O-2′ bridge, 2′-LNA, or 2′-O—(N-methylcarbamate). In some embodiments the overhang is 1-4 bases in length, e.g., 1-2 bases long. In some embodiments the overhang is 1, 2, 3, or 4 bases in length and the modified nucleotides are 2′-O-methyl modified nucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments the first oligonucleotide strand is 25 nucleotides in length and the second oligonucleotide strand is 27 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments the first oligonucleotide strand is 26 nucleotides in length and the second oligonucleotide strand is 28 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments the first oligonucleotide strand is 26 nucleotides in length and the second oligonucleotide strand is 27 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments a ds siRNA comprises an asymmetric duplex having a 25-nt passenger strand and a 27-nt guide strand with a single 2-nt 3′-overhang on the guide strand and one or more modified nucleotides at the 3′-end of the passenger strand. In some embodiments the strands are perfectly complementary within the duplex portion. In some embodiments the 3′ portion of the sense strand contains one or more mismatches, e.g., two mismatches are present in the 3′ portion of the sense strand. If desired, the ability of any given ds RNAi agent to serve as a substrate for Dicer may be measured in vitro or in vivo using methods known in the art.
DsiRNAs may comprise two separate nucleic acid molecules hybridized together to form a duplex structure. Suitable dsRNA compositions that contain two separate oligonucleotides may be chemically linked outside their annealing region by chemical linking groups. Many suitable chemical linking groups are known in the art and can be used. Suitable groups will not block Dicer activity on the dsRNA and will not interfere with the directed destruction of the RNA transcribed from the target gene. Alternatively, the two separate oligonucleotides can be linked by a third oligonucleotide such that a hairpin structure is produced upon annealing of the two oligonucleotides making up the dsRNA composition, as described above (see discussion of shRNAs). The hairpin structure will not block Dicer activity on the dsRNA and will not interfere with the directed destruction of the RNA transcribed from the target gene. In some embodiments, any of various linking moieties, such as those described herein in regard to compstatin analogs, may serve to connect the strands, e.g., via their termini. For example, in some embodiments the two strands may be connected via a linking moiety comprising an alkyl chain.
In some embodiments, the sense strand of ads RNAi agent is modified, e.g., to facilitate Dicer processing, by suitable modifiers located at the 3′ end of the sense strand, i.e., the dsRNA is designed to direct orientation of Dicer binding and processing. Suitable modifiers include nucleotides such as deoxyribonucleotides, dideoxyribonucleotides, acyclonucleotides and the like and sterically hindered molecules, such as fluorescent molecules and the like. Acyclonucleotides substitute a 2-hydroxyethoxymethyl group for-the 2′-deoxyribofuranosyl sugar normally present in dNMPs. Other nucleotides modifiers could include 3′-deoxyadenosine (cordycepin), 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine (AZT), 2′,3′-dideoxyinosine (ddI), 2′,3′-dideoxy-3′-thiacytidine (3TC), 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine (d4T) and the monophosphate nucleotides of 3′-azido-3′-deoxythymidine (AZT), 2′,3′-dideoxy-3′-thiacytidine (3TC) and 2′,3′-didehydro-2′,3′-dideoxythymidine (d4T). In one embodiment, deoxynucleotides are used as the modifiers. When nucleotide modifiers are utilized, 1-3 nucleotide modifiers, or 2 nucleotide modifiers are substituted for the ribonucleotides on the 3′ end of the sense strand. When sterically hindered molecules are utilized, they are attached to the ribonucleotide at the 3′ end of the antisense strand. Thus, the length of the strand does not change with the incorporation of the modifiers. In another embodiment, substituting two DNA bases in the dsRNA may direct the orientation of Dicer processing of the antisense strand. In a further embodiment two terminal DNA bases are substituted for two ribonucleotides on the 3′-end of the sense strand forming a blunt end of the duplex on the 3′ end of the sense strand and the 5′ end of the antisense strand, and a two-nucleotide RNA overhang is located on the 3′-end of the antisense strand. This is an asymmetric composition with DNA on the blunt end and RNA bases on the overhanging end. It will be appreciated that the dsRNA structure of a DsiRNA can be optimized to ensure that the oligonucleotide segment generated by Dicer's cleavage will be the portion of the oligonucleotide that is most effective in inhibiting gene expression. For example, a 27-bp oligonucleotide may be synthesized wherein the anticipated 21 to 22-bp segment that will inhibit gene expression is located on the 3′-end of the antisense strand. The remaining bases located on the 5′-end of the antisense strand will be cleaved away by Dicer and discarded. This cleaved portion can be homologous (i.e., based on the sequence of the target sequence) or non-homologous and added to extend the nucleic acid strand. Other modifications can be included so long as the modification does not prevent the dsRNA from serving as a substrate for Dicer or otherwise In some embodiments, one or more modifications enhance Dicer processing of the dsRNA, result in more effective RNAi generation, support a greater RNAi effect, result in greater potency per each dsRNA molecule to be delivered to the cell. Modifications can be incorporated in the 3′-terminal region, the 5′-terminal region, in both the 3′-terminal and 5′-terminal region or in some instances in various positions within the sequence. Where multiple modifications are present, they may be the same or different. Modifications to bases, sugar moieties, the phosphate backbone, and their combinations are contemplated. Either 5′-terminus may be phosphorylated. In general, any of the modifications described herein may be used. For example, modifications contemplated for the phosphate backbone include phosphonates and phosphorothioate. Examples of modifications contemplated for the sugar moiety include 2′-alkyl such as 2′-O-methyl, 2′-fluoro, deoxy modifications. Conformationally restricted nucleotides, e.g., LNA's, may be incorporated. In certain embodiments a ligand (e.g., a targeting moiety or transduction domain) may be attached, e.g., at the 3′-end of the sense strand. In some embodiments at least the 5′ and/or 3′ terminal 1 or 2 inter-nucleoside linkages of one or both strands are phosphorothioate linkages. In some embodiments only the 5′ and/or 3′ terminal 1 or 2 inter-nucleoside linkages of one or both strands are phosphorothioate linkages. In some embodiments 1, 2, or all inter-nucleoside linkages of one or both 3′ overhangs are phosphorothioate linkages. In some embodiments a 3′ overhang may alternately or additionally have a moiety, e.g., a targeting moiety or lipophilic moiety, attached thereto.
In some embodiments an RNAi agent comprises a short double-stranded region. A “short double stranded region” refers to a double-stranded region that is 8-15 nucleotides long. In some embodiments the RNAi agent comprises a short double-stranded region, a single stranded region at the 3′ end of the guide strand that is 2-13 nucleotides in length, and multiple modifications. Exemplary RNAi agents comprising a short double-stranded region are described in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20110263680.
In some embodiments, an RNAi agent comprises a single-stranded RNA that can be incorporated into RISC and interact with a target RNA, e.g., a C3 target mRNA sequence, to direct cleavage of the target RNA by the RISC endonuclease. Such single-stranded RNAi agents may be referred to as single-stranded siRNA (ss siRNA). An ss siRNA is typically 15-30 nucleotides and is chemically modified relative to naturally occurring RNA. Exemplary modifications useful in the context of ss siRNA and methods for designing ss siRNAs are known in the art and are described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,101,348; Lima et al., Cell 150: 883-894 (2012); Yu et al., Cell 150: 895 (2012); Haringsma et al., Nucleic Acids Res 40: 4125, 2012; Chom et al., RNA 18: 1796 (2012); US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2009002365; WO 2011/046983; WO 2011/139699; WO 2011/139702; WO 2012/145729; WO 2012/027206). In certain embodiments, ss siRNA targeted to C3 are designed according to principles described in U.S. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20150291957 and/or make use of modified nucleotides and/or nucleic acid structures described therein. In some embodiments a ss siRNA comprises at least one of the following modifications: phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages between at least two nucleotides, a 2′ O-methylribonucleotide, a 2′-methoxyethoxribonucleotide, a 2′-fluoro-deoxyribonucleotide, a locked nucleic acid and a 3′ terminal adenosine nucleotide. In certain embodiments a ss siRNA comprises at the 3′-terminus a dinucleotide consisting of two consecutive 2′-O-methoxyethylribonucleotides, two consecutive 2′-O-methylribonucleotides, or a LNA dinucleotide. In certain embodiments a nucleic acid, e.g., a ss siRNA, comprises a phosphate or a phosphate analog (also referred to as phosphate isostere, phosphate bioisostere, or phosphate mimic) at its 5′ terminus. For example, the phosphate analog may be a phosphonate, e.g., a 5′-methylenephosphonate (5′-MP) or 5′-(E)-vinylphosphonate. In certain embodiments an ss siRNA has a liphophilic moiety attached thereto. In some embodiments the lipophilic moiety is attached at the eighth nucleotide from the 5′ terminus of the ss siRNA. An ss siRNA may comprise any one or more of the afore-mentioned modifications. In certain aspects, any of the nucleotide sequences described herein as antisense strands of a ds siRNA that inhibits C3 expression may be used as a single-stranded siRNA to inhibit C3 expression. In some embodiments any of the nucleotide sequences described herein as antisense strands of a ds siRNA may be modified according to the approaches described herein for ss siRNA in any one or more of the aforementioned references.
In some embodiments, an INAA of use in the methods and compositions described herein is a single-stranded nucleic acid molecule that inhibits a target RNA via an antisense inhibition mechanism rather than an RNAi mechanism. Such an agent may be referred to herein as an “antisense oligonucleotide” (ASO). As used herein, an “antisense inhibition mechanism” refers to any mechanism of inhibition of expression that is mediated by a single-stranded nucleic acid molecule that is complementary to a target portion of the target RNA and that is not dependent on RISC, e.g., does not take place in RISC and is not catalyzed or carried out by a protein that is part of or physically associated with RISC. In some embodiments, an ASO inhibits translation in a stoichiometric manner by base pairing to an mRNA and physically obstructing the translation machinery. In some embodiments, a single-stranded antisense oligonucleotide hybridizes to RNA (e.g., C3 mRNA or C3 pre-mRNA), resulting in degradation of the RNA by an RNase, e.g., RNase H. In some embodiments, an ASO may be about 15 to about 30 nucleotides in length and have a sequence that is complementary to a target sequence. For example, an ASO may comprise a sequence that is at least about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more contiguous nucleotides complementary to a target portion of C3 mRNA or pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the ASO may be shorter than 15 nucleotides in length, e.g., between 8 and 14 nucleotides in length. For purposes hereof, a nucleic acid that is between 7 and 14 nucleotides long may be referred to as a “shortmer”. In certain embodiments a single-stranded ASO contains a DNA central region (core) that activates RNase H to cleave the target RNA, which core generally is flanked by 5′ and 3′ sequences of nucleotides with modifications, e.g., ribose modifications such as 2′-methoxyethyl (MOE) or LNA or constrained ethyl (cET), that do not support RNase H-mediated cleavage, but which confer an increased affinity for hybridization. Such flanking regions may be referred to as “wings”. An ASO that contains a central region that activates RNase H (e.g., a DNA region) and flanking regions that do not activate RNase H may be referred to as a “gapmer” as known in the art. In some embodiments an ASO that supports RNase H-mediated cleavage contains a core of at least 5 consecutive DNA nucleotides, e.g., 5-7 or 7-10 consecutive DNA nucleotides. In some embodiments each wing is independently between 3 and 10 nucleotides long, e.g., 3 to 5 or 5 to 8 nt long. In some embodiments a gapmer is between 10 and 14 nucleotides long or between 15 and 22 nucleotides long. In some embodiments, a single-stranded ASO acts at least in part by steric blocking. Such ASOs may contain ribose modifications distributed in such a manner that the ASO does not activate RNase H. In some embodiments an ASO that works by steric blockage is 8-14 nucleotides long.
In certain embodiments, methods or nucleotide modification described in any one or more of US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20010044145, 20080207541, and 20100093836 may be employed in the design of ASOs that target C3 and induce RNase H-mediated degradation of C3 transcripts. In certain embodiments ASO monomers to one or more targets (e.g., C3 RNA) are co-synthesized as homo- or heterodimers or multimers via linking regions that are stable in plasma, but cleaved inside cells, releasing the active ASO monomers (see, e.g., Subramanian R R, et al., Nucleic Acids Res.; 43(19):9123-32 (2015)).
In some embodiments, antisense oligonucleotides targeting C3 may be designed as described in US. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20150247141. The ASO may comprise two, three, or more distinct portions, each complementary to a different target portion in C3 RNA, wherein the two or more distinct portions are linked together via a linking moiety, which may comprise a cleavable bond. In some embodiments, antisense oligonucleotides targeting C3 and comprising non-nucleotide based cleavable linking moieties are designed as described in US. Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20150315585, and/or 20150315586.
According to certain embodiments various nucleotide modifications or nucleotide modification patterns may be used selectively in either the sense or antisense strand of a ds INAA. For example, in some embodiments one may utilize unmodified ribonucleotides in the antisense strand (at least within the duplex portion thereof) while employing modified nucleotides and/or modified or unmodified deoxyribonucleotides at some or all positions in the sense strand. In some embodiments, particular patterns of modifications are employed throughout part or all of either or both strands of a ds RNAi agent or within the single strand of a ss-RNAi agent or ASO. One of ordinary skill in the art appreciates that certain modifications and/or design features may increase the likelihood that the desired strand in a ds RNAi agent (i.e., the strand complementary to a target portion of C3 mRNA) will be utilized as the guide strand. Nucleotide modifications may occur in any of a variety of patterns. For example, an alternating pattern may be used. Alternating patterns include, for example, those in which every other nucleotide bears a particular modification over at least a portion of a strand (e.g., the portion that participates in a duplex with a complementary strand of the INAA) and those in which blocks of two, three, or more nucleotides bear a particular modification over at least a portion of a strand, wherein said blocks are separated by blocks of the same size or a different size that do not bear such modification. For example, the antisense, sense strand, or both, may have 2′-O-methyl or 2′-fluoro modifications on every other nucleotide.
In some embodiments an INAA comprises a strand comprising one or more motifs of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides. For example, in some embodiments a double-stranded RNAi agent comprises one or more motifs of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides in a sense strand, antisense strand, or both. In some embodiments such a motif may occur at or near the cleavage site in either or both strands. Examples of such motifs and of RNAi agent configurations and RNAi agents comprising such motifs, are described in US Pat. App. Pubs. 20150197746, 20150247143, and 20160298124.
In some embodiments the RNAi agent is a double ended bluntmer of 19 nucleotides in length, wherein the sense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-F modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 7, 8, 9 from the 5′end. The antisense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-O-methyl modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 11, 12, 13 from the 5′end. In some embodiments the RNAi agent is a double ended bluntmer of 20 nucleotides in length, wherein the sense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-F modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 8, 9, 10 from the 5′end. The antisense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-O-methyl modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 11, 12, 13 from the 5′end. In some embodiments the RNAi agent is a double ended bluntmer of 21 nucleotides in length, wherein the sense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-F modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 9, 10, 11 from the 5′end. The antisense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-O-methyl modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 11, 12, 13 from the 5′end.
In some embodiments, the RNAi agent comprises a 21 nucleotide sense strand and a 23 nucleotide antisense strand, wherein the sense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-F modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 9, 10, 11 from the 5′end; the antisense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-O-methyl modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at positions 11, 12, 13 from the 5′end, wherein one end of the RNAi agent is blunt, while the other end comprises a 2 nucleotide overhang. Preferably, the 2 nucleotide overhang is at the 3′-end of the antisense strand. When the 2 nucleotide overhang is at the 3′-end of the antisense strand, there may be two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages between the terminal three nucleotides, wherein two of the three nucleotides are the overhang nucleotides, and the third nucleotide is a paired nucleotide next to the overhang nucleotide. In some embodiments, the RNAi agent additionally has two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages between the terminal three nucleotides at both the 5′-end of the sense strand and at the 5′-end of the antisense strand. In some embodiments, every nucleotide in the sense strand and the antisense strand of the RNAi agent, including the nucleotides that are part of the motifs are modified nucleotides. In some embodiments each residue is independently modified with a 2′-O-methyl or 3′-fluoro, e.g., in an alternating motif.
In some embodiments, the RNAi agent comprises a sense and an antisense strand, wherein the sense strand is 25-30 nucleotide residues in length, wherein starting from the 5′ terminal nucleotide (position 1) positions 1 to 23 of the first strand comprise at least 8 ribonucleotides; the antisense strand is 36-66 nucleotide residues in length and, starting from the 3′ terminal nucleotide, comprises at least 8 ribonucleotides in the positions paired with positions 1-23 of sense strand to form a duplex; wherein at least the 3′ terminal nucleotide of antisense strand is unpaired with sense strand, and up to 6 consecutive 3′ terminal nucleotides are unpaired with sense strand, thereby forming a 3′ single stranded overhang of 1-6 nucleotides; wherein the 5′ terminus of antisense strand comprises from 10-30 consecutive nucleotides which are unpaired with sense strand, thereby forming a 10-30 nucleotide single stranded 5′ overhang; wherein at least the sense strand 5′ terminal and 3′ terminal nucleotides are base paired with nucleotides of antisense strand when sense and antisense strands are aligned for maximum complementarity, thereby forming a substantially duplexed region between sense and antisense strands; and antisense strand is sufficiently complementary to a target RNA along at least 19 ribonucleotides of antisense strand length to reduce target gene expression when the double stranded nucleic acid is introduced into a mammalian cell; and wherein the sense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-F modifications on three consecutive nucleotides, where at least one of the motifs occurs at or near the cleavage site. The antisense strand contains at least one motif of three 2′-O-methyl modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at or near the cleavage site.
In some embodiments, the sense strand of the RNAi agent contains at least one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides, where one of the motifs occurs at the cleavage site in the sense strand. In some embodiments, the antisense strand of the RNAi agent can also contain at least one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides, where one of the motifs occurs at or near the cleavage site in the antisense strand.
For an RNAi agent having a duplex portion of 17-23 nucleotide in length, the cleavage site of the antisense strand is typically around the 10, 11 and 12 positions from the 5′-end. Thus the motifs of three identical modifications may occur at the 9, 10, 11 positions; 10, 11, 12 positions; 11, 12, 13 positions; 12, 13, 14 positions; or 13, 14, 15 positions of the antisense strand, the count starting from the 1st nucleotide from the 5′-end of the antisense strand, or, the count starting from the 1st paired nucleotide within the duplex portion from the 5′-end of the antisense strand. The cleavage site in the antisense strand may also change according to the length of the duplex portion of the RNAi from the 5′-end.
The sense strand of the RNAi agent may contain at least one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at the cleavage site of the strand; and the antisense strand may have at least one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides at or near the cleavage site of the strand. When the sense strand and the antisense strand form a dsRNA duplex, the sense strand and the antisense strand can be so aligned that one motif of the three nucleotides on the sense strand and one motif of the three nucleotides on the antisense strand have at least one nucleotide overlap, i.e., at least one of the three nucleotides of the motif in the sense strand forms a base pair with at least one of the three nucleotides of the motif in the antisense strand. Alternatively, at least two nucleotides may overlap, or all three nucleotides may overlap.
In some embodiments, the sense strand of the RNAi agent may contain more than one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides. The first motif may occur at or near the cleavage site of the strand and the other motifs may be a “wing modification”, which term in the context of an RNAi agent refers to a motif occurring at another portion of the strand that is separated from the motif at or near the cleavage site of the same strand. The wing modification is either adjacent to the first motif or is separated by at least one or more nucleotides. When the motifs are immediately adjacent to each other then the chemistry of the motifs are distinct from each other and when the motifs are separated by one or more nucleotide than the chemistries can be the same or different. Two or more wing modifications may be present. For instance, when two wing modifications are present, each wing modification may occur at one end relative to the first motif which is at or near cleavage site or on either side of the lead motif.
The antisense strand of the RNAi agent may contain more than one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides, with at least one of the motifs occurring at or near the cleavage site of the strand. This antisense strand may also contain one or more wing modifications in an alignment similar to the wing modifications that may be present on the sense strand. In some embodiments, the wing modification on the sense strand or antisense strand of the RNAi agent typically does not include the first one or two terminal nucleotides at the 3′-end, 5′-end or both ends of the strand. In another embodiment, the wing modification on the sense strand or antisense strand of the RNAi agent typically does not include the first one or two paired nucleotides within the duplex portion at the 3′-end, 5′-end or both ends of the strand. When the sense strand and the antisense strand of the RNAi agent each contain at least one wing modification, the wing modifications may fall on the same end of the duplex portion, and have an overlap of one, two or three nucleotides. When the sense strand and the antisense strand of the RNAi agent each contain at least two wing modifications, the sense strand and the antisense strand can be so aligned that two modifications each from one strand fall on one end of the duplex portion, having an overlap of one, two or three nucleotides; two modifications each from one strand fall on the other end of the duplex portion, having an overlap of one, two or three nucleotides; two modifications one strand fall on each side of the lead motif, having an overlap of one, two or three nucleotides in the duplex portion.
In some embodiments, every nucleotide in the sense strand and antisense strand of the RNAi agent, including the nucleotides that are part of the motifs, may be modified. Each nucleotide may be modified with the same or different modification which can include one or more alteration of one or both of the non-linking phosphate oxygens and/or of one or more of the linking phosphate oxygens; alteration of a constituent of the ribose sugar, e.g., of the 2′ hydroxyl on the ribose sugar; wholesale replacement of the phosphate moiety with “dephospho” linkers; modification or replacement of a naturally occurring base; and replacement or modification of the ribose-phosphate backbone.
In some embodiments at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or more, e.g., 100% of the residues of the sense strand and antisense strand is independently modified with LNA, CRN, cET, UNA, HNA (1,5-anhydrohexitol nucleic acid), CeNA (cyclohexenyl nucleic acid—a DNA mimic in which the deoxyribose is replaced by a six-membered cyclohexene ring), 2′-methoxyethyl, 2′-O-methyl, 2′-O-allyl, 2′-C-allyl, 2′-deoxy, 2′-hydroxyl, or 2′-fluoro. The strands can contain more than one modification. In some embodiments at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, or more, e.g., 100% of the residues of the sense strand and antisense strand is independently modified with 2′-O-methyl or 2′-fluoro. In some embodiments at least two different modifications are present on the sense strand and antisense strand. Those two modifications may be the 2′-O-methyl or 2′-fluoro modifications, or others.
In some embodiments, the Na and/or Nb comprise modifications of an alternating pattern. The term “alternating motif” as used herein refers to a motif having one or more modifications, each modification occurring on alternating groups of one or more nucleotides of one strand. For example, an alternating nucleotide may refer to one per every other nucleotide or one per every three nucleotides, or a similar pattern. For example, if A, B and C each represent one type of modification to the nucleotide, the alternating motif can be “ABABABABABAB . . . ,” “AABBAABBAABB . . . ,” “AABAABAABAAB . . . ,” “AAABAAABAAAB . . . ”. “AAABBBAAABBB . . . ,” or “ABCABCABCABC . . . ,” etc.
The type of modifications contained in the alternating motif may be the same or different. For example, if A, B, C, D each represent one type of modification on the nucleotide, the alternating pattern, i.e., modifications on every other nucleotide, may be the same, but each of the sense strand or antisense strand can be selected from several possibilities of modifications within the alternating motif such as “ABABAB . . . ”, “ACACAC . . . ” “BDBDBD . . . ” or “CDCDCD . . . ,” etc.
In some embodiments, the RNAi agent comprises the modification pattern for the alternating motif on the sense strand that is shifted relative to the modification pattern for the alternating motif on the antisense strand. The shift may be such that the modified group of nucleotides of the sense strand corresponds to a differently modified group of nucleotides of the antisense strand and vice versa. For example, the sense strand when paired with the antisense strand in the dsRNA duplex, the alternating motif in the sense strand may start with “ABABAB” from 5′-3′ of the strand and the alternating motif in the antisense strand may start with “BAB ABA” from 5′-3 Of the strand within the duplex portion. As another example, the alternating motif in the sense strand may start with “AABBAABB” from 5′-3′ of the strand and the alternating motif in the antisense strand may start with “BBAABBAA” from 5′-3′ of the strand within the duplex portion, so that there is a complete or partial shift of the modification patterns between the sense strand and the antisense strand.
In some embodiments, the RNAi agent comprises the pattern of the alternating motif of 2′-O-methyl modification and 2′-F modification on the sense strand initially has a shift relative to the pattern of the alternating motif of 2′-O-methyl modification and 2′-F modification on the antisense strand initially, i.e., the 2′-O-methyl modified nucleotide on the sense strand base pairs with a 2′-F modified nucleotide on the antisense strand and vice versa. The 1 position of the sense strand may start with the 2′-F modification, and the 1 position of the antisense strand may start with the 2′-O-methyl modification.
The introduction of one or more motifs of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides to the sense strand and/or antisense strand interrupts the initial modification pattern present in the sense strand and/or antisense strand. In some embodiments, when the motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides is introduced to any of the strands, the modification of the nucleotide next to the motif is a different modification than the modification of the motif. For example, the portion of the sequence containing the motif is “ . . . NaYYYNb . . . ,” where “Y” represents the modification of the motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotide, and “Na” and “Nb” represent a modification to the nucleotide next to the motif “YYY” that is different than the modification of Y, and where Na and Nb can be the same or different modifications. Alternatively, Na and/or Nb may be present or absent when there is a wing modification present.
The RNAi agent may further comprise at least one phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkage. The phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkage modification may occur on any nucleotide of the sense strand or antisense strand or both strands in any position of the strand. For instance, the internucleotide linkage modification may occur on every nucleotide on the sense strand and/or antisense strand; each internucleotide linkage modification may occur in an alternating pattern on the sense strand and/or antisense strand; or the sense strand or antisense strand may contain both internucleotide linkage modifications in an alternating pattern. The alternating pattern of the internucleotide linkage modification on the sense strand may be the same or different from the antisense strand, and the alternating pattern of the internucleotide linkage modification on the sense strand may have a shift relative to the alternating pattern of the internucleotide linkage modification on the antisense strand. In some embodiments, a double-stranded RNAi agent comprises 6-8 phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages. In some embodiments, the antisense strand comprises two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages at the 5′-terminus and two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages at the 3′-terminus, and the sense strand comprises at least two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages at either the 5′-terminus or the 3′-terminus.
In some embodiments, the RNAi agent comprises a phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkage modification in the overhang region. For example, the overhang region may contain two nucleotides having a phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkage between the two nucleotides. Internucleotide linkage modifications also may be made to link the overhang nucleotides with the terminal paired nucleotides within the duplex portion. For example, at least 2, 3, 4, or all the overhang nucleotides may be linked through phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkage, and optionally, there may be additional phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkages linking the overhang nucleotide with a paired nucleotide that is next to the overhang nucleotide. For instance, there may be at least two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages between the terminal three nucleotides, in which two of the three nucleotides are overhang nucleotides, and the third is a paired nucleotide next to the overhang nucleotide. These terminal three nucleotides may be at the 3′-end of the antisense strand, the 3′-end of the sense strand, the 5′-end of the antisense strand, and/or the 5′end of the antisense strand.
In some embodiments, the 2 nucleotide overhang is at the 3′-end of the antisense strand, and there are two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages between the terminal three nucleotides, wherein two of the three nucleotides are the overhang nucleotides, and the third nucleotide is a paired nucleotide next to the overhang nucleotide. Optionally, the RNAi agent may additionally have two phosphorothioate internucleotide linkages between the terminal three nucleotides at both the 5′-end of the sense strand and at the 5′-end of the antisense strand.
In some embodiments, the RNAi agent comprises mismatch(es) with the target, within the duplex, or combinations thereof. The mismatch may occur in the overhang region or the duplex portion. The base pair may be ranked on the basis of their propensity to promote dissociation or melting (e.g., on the free energy of association or dissociation of a particular pairing, the simplest approach is to examine the pairs on an individual pair basis, though next neighbor or similar analysis can also be used). In terms of promoting dissociation: A:U is preferred over G:C; G:U is preferred over G:C; and I:C is preferred over G:C (I=inosine). Mismatches, e.g., non-canonical or other than canonical pairings (as described elsewhere herein) are preferred over canonical (A:T, A:U, G:C) pairings; and pairings which include a universal base are preferred over canonical pairings.
In some embodiments, a ds RNAi agent comprises at least one of the first 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 base pairs within the duplex portions from the 5′-end of the antisense strand independently selected from the group of: A:U, G:U, I:C, and mismatched pairs, e.g., non-canonical or other than canonical pairings or pairings which include a universal base, to promote the dissociation of the antisense strand at the 5′-end of the duplex. In some embodiments, the nucleotide at the 1 position within the duplex portion from the 5′-end in the antisense strand is selected from the group consisting of A, dA, dU, U, and dT. Alternatively, at least one of the first 1, 2 or 3 base pairs within the duplex portion from the 5′-end of the antisense strand is an AU base pair. For example, the first base pair within the duplex portion from the 5′-end of the antisense strand is an AU base pair.
In certain embodiments the RNAi agent may have any of the configurations and/or modification patterns described from p. 59 (line 20) to p. 65 (line 15) of WO/2015/089368, or corresponding paragraphs [0469]-[0537] of US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20160298124 or in the claims of either or both of said publications. For example, in some embodiments an INAA comprises a double stranded RNAi agent that comprises a sense strand and an antisense strand, wherein said sense strand is complementary to said antisense strand, wherein said antisense strand comprises a region complementary to part of an mRNA encoding C3, wherein each strand is about 14 to about 30 nucleotides in length, wherein said agent is represented by formula (III):
wherein: i, j, k, and 1 are each independently 0 or 1; p, p′, q, and q′ are each independently 0-6; each Na and Na independently represents an oligonucleotide sequence comprising 0-25 nucleotides which are either modified or unmodified or combinations thereof, each sequence comprising at least two differently modified nucleotides; each Nb and Nb′ independently represents an oligonucleotide sequence comprising 0-10 nucleotides which are either modified or unmodified or combinations thereof; each np, np′, nq, and nq, each of which may or may not be present, independently represents an overhang nucleotide; XXX, YYY, ZZZ, X′X′X′, Y′Y′Y′, and Z′Z′Z′ each independently represent one motif of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides; modifications on Nb differ from the modification on Y and modifications on Nb′ differ from the modification on Y′; and wherein the sense strand is conjugated to at least one ligand. In some embodiments i is 0; j is 0; i is 1; j is 1; both i and j are 0; or both i and j are 1. In some embodiments XXX is complementary to XXX′, YYY is complementary to Y′Y′Y′, and ZZZ is complementary to Z′Z′Z′. It should be understood that each X may comprise a different base, so long as each X comprises the same modification. For example, XXX could represent AGC where each nucleotide comprises a 2-F modification. Similarly, each X′, each Y, each Y′, each Z, and each Z may be different.
In some embodiments formula (III) is represented by formula (IIIa):
or wherein formula (III) is represented by formula (IIIb):
wherein each Nb and Nb′ independently represents an oligonucleotide sequence comprising 1-5 modified nucleotides; or wherein formula (III) is represented by formula
wherein each Nb and Nb′ independently represents an oligonucleotide sequence comprising 1-5 modified nucleotides; or wherein formula (III) is represented by formula
wherein each Nb and Nb′ independently represents an oligonucleotide sequence comprising 1-5 modified nucleotides and each Na and Na′ independently represents an oligonucleotide sequence comprising 2-10 modified nucleotides.
In some embodiments the modifications on the nucleotides are selected from the group consisting of LNA, CRN, cET, UNA, HNA, CeNA, 2′-methoxyethyl, 2′-O-methyl, 2′-O-alkyl, 2′-O-allyl, 2′-C-allyl, 2′-fluoro, 2′-deoxy, 2′-hydroxyl, and combinations thereof.
In some embodiments the modifications on the nucleotides are 2′-O-methyl or 2′-fluoro modifications.
In some embodiments the ligand is one or more GalNAc derivatives attached through a bivalent or trivalent branched linker. In some embodiments the ligand is depicted in Formula XA, XB, or XC hereinbelow.
In some embodiments the ligand is attached to the 3′ end of the sense strand. In some embodiments the attachment is as depicted in Formula XD hereinbelow.
In some embodiments the agent further comprises at least one phosphorothioate or methylphosphonate internucleotide linkage.
In some embodiments p′>0; or p′=2.
In some embodiments q′=0, p=0, q=0, and p′ overhang nucleotides are complementary to C3 mRNA. In some embodiments q′=0, p=0, q=0, and p′ overhang nucleotides are non-complementary to C3 mRNA.
In some embodiments at least one np′ is linked to a neighboring nucleotide via a phosphorothioate linkage
In some embodiments the INAA is a double stranded nucleic acid molecule comprising a 5′ extension of the sense or antisense strand and further comprising a plurality of nucleotides that are conjugated to a ligand or antibody. In some embodiments the double stranded nucleic acid comprises: a sense strand comprising 21 to 83 nucleotides; an antisense strand comprising 15 to 39 nucleotides; a duplex formed by said sense and antisense strand, having a length of 15 to 35 base pairs; wherein the ds nucleic acid comprises a discontinuity between the 5′ terminus of the sense strand and the 3′ terminus of the antisense strand or between the 3′ terminus of the sense strand and the 5′ terminus of the antisense strand; wherein the sense strand comprises a tetraloop and the tetraloop comprises at least one ligand conjugated nucleotide; and wherein said antisense strand is sufficiently complementary to a C3 mRNA along at least 15 nucleotides of said second strand length to reduce target gene expression when said double stranded nucleic acid is introduced into a mammal or a mammalian cell. Examples of such INAAs and methods of making them are described in WO/2016/100401. In some embodiments the tetraloop comprises 1, 2, 3, 4 or more ligand conjugated nucleotides. In some embodiments at least one of the ligands, e.g., all of the ligands, is/are conjugated to a nucleotide of the tetraloop through the 2′ hydroxyl on the ribose of the nucleotide. In some embodiments the antisense strand has a length range of: 15-30 nucleotides, 18-25 nucleotides or 19-24 nucleotides. In some embodiments the sense strand has a length range of 19-30 nucleotides or 19-36 nucleotides. In some embodiments the duplex has a length range of: 15-22 nucleotides or 15-30 nucleotides.
In some embodiments the ligand targets the nucleic acid molecule to hepatocytes. For example, in some embodiments the ligand binds to hepatocyte-specific asialoglycoprotein receptor (ASGPR), e.g., the ligand comprises a galactose derivative, e.g., GalNac. Other exemplary ligands are described below.
One of ordinary skill in the art appreciates that INAAs can be synthesized by standard methods known in the art, e.g., by use of an automated nucleic acid synthesizer. In some embodiments, double-stranded INAAs may be prepared by first synthesizing individual strands and then annealing them. The individual strands of a double-stranded nucleic acid or the single strand or a single-stranded nucleic acid can be prepared using solution-phase or solid-phase organic synthesis or both.
Certain INAAs targeting C3 are known in the art and may be used in methods and compositions described herein. In some embodiments the region of complementarity of an antisense strand of an INAA, e.g., a ds RNAi agent, consists of the nucleotide sequence of one of the antisense sequences of any one of Tables 5 and 6 of PCT/US2014/069951 (WO/2015/089368) and corresponding US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20160298124, hereinafter “US Pub. '124”, where Table 5 represents unmodified sequences and Table 6 represents modified versions of said sequences. Said tables are reproduced herein as Tables 13 (C3 Unmodified Sequences) and Table 14 (C3 Modified Sequences), where abbreviations used in Table 14 are as listed in Table 15. Also listed in said tables are the positions in the human C3 transcript sequence of NM_000064.2. In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 includes a sense strand selected from the group of sequences provided in any one of Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124, and a corresponding antisense strand of the sense strand selected from the group of sequences of any one of Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. In this aspect, one of the two sequences is complementary to the other of the two sequences, with one of the sequences being substantially complementary to a sequence of an mRNA generated in the expression of a C3 gene. As such, in this aspect, a ds RNAi agent will include two oligonucleotides, where one oligonucleotide is described as the sense strand in any one of Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124, and the second oligonucleotide is described as the corresponding antisense strand of the sense strand in any one of Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. The substantially complementary sequences may be contained on separate oligonucleotides or contained in a single oligonucleotide (optionally connected by a loop structure as described herein) in various embodiments.
In some embodiments an INAA comprises an antisense strand comprising at least 15 consecutive nucleotides of an antisense strand of a duplex designated as AD-60149.1, AD-60152.1, AD-60156.1, AD-60165.1, AD-60169.1, AD-60171.1, AD-60174.1, AD-60175.1, AD-60176.1, AD-60179.1, AD-60183.1, or AD-60187.1 in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub '124. The INAA may further comprise a sense strand comprising at least 15 consecutive nucleotides of a sense strand of a duplex designated as AD-60149.1, AD-60152.1, AD-60156.1, AD-60165.1, AD-60169.1, AD-60171.1, AD-60174.1, AD-60175.1, AD-60176.1, AD-60179.1, AD-60183.1, or AD-60187.1 in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub '124. In some embodiments an INAA comprises a duplex designated as AD-60149.1, AD-60152.1, AD-60156.1, AD-60165.1, AD-60169.1, AD-60171.1, AD-60174.1, AD-60175.1, AD-60176.1, AD-60179.1, AD-60183.1, or AD-60187.1 in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub '124. In some embodiment an INAA comprises antisense and sense strands that differ by up to 3 nucleotides with respect to any of the afore-mentioned antisense and sense strands.
Although some of the sequences in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124 are described therein as modified and/or conjugated sequences, an INAA of use in methods and compositions of the present disclosure may comprise any one or more of the sequences set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124 that is un-modified, un-conjugated, and/or modified and/or conjugated differently than described therein. Furthermore, variant sequences that differ in sequence at up to 1, 2, or 3 nucleotide positions from the sequences set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124 may be used. Such variant sequences may differ in terms of their nucleobase sequence so as to create one or more mismatches within a duplex of a ds INAA and/or to create one or more mismatches when hybridized to a C3 RNA.
In some aspects, INAA comprise a duplex portion of between about 20 and 23 base pairs, e.g., 21, base pairs. In some aspects, INAAs comprising shorter or longer RNA duplex portions may be used. In some embodiments employing oligonucleotide sequences provided in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124, an INAA may include at least one strand of a length of minimally 21 nucleotides. In some embodiments shorter duplexes comprising portions of one or more sequences of Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124 but lacking up to several nucleotides on one or both ends may be used. For example, ds siRNAs having a sequence of at least 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more contiguous nucleotides derived from one of the sequences of Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124 may be used. In some embodiments longer duplexes comprising one or more sequences of Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124 but incorporating up to 15 additional nucleotides on one or both ends may be used. Such additional nucleotides, when present at an end of the antisense strand, may be selected to be complementary to the sequences in C3 mRNA contiguous to those that constitute the target portion targeted by the antisense strand. In some embodiments, one or more (e.g., up to 15) additional nucleotides may be added at the 3′ end of a strand set forth in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124.
In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 includes sense and antisense strands that do not comprise at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more contiguous nucleotides of a sense or antisense strand included in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124. In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 includes sense and antisense strands that do not comprise a sense or antisense strand that differs by 1, 2, or 3 nucleotides from a strand listed in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124. In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 targets a different portion of C3 than those targeted by the RNAi agents described in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. In some embodiments an INAA that targets C3 does not comprise or consist of a sequence set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. In certain embodiments of the present disclosure, an INAA targets a region of C3 RNA that is not substantially complementary to an antisense sequence set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. In certain embodiments of the present disclosure, an INAA cleaves a region of C3 RNA that is not located with a portion of C3 that would form a duplex with an antisense sequence set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 targets a target portion that does not overlap with the portions targeted by RNAi agents described in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124. In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 targets a target portion that overlaps with a portion targeted by an RNAi agent described in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124, but the length of such overlap is no more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleotides.
In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 includes antisense and sense strands that do not comprise at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more contiguous nucleotides of an antisense or sense strand of a duplex designated as AD-60149.1, AD-60152.1, AD-60156.1, AD-60165.1, AD-60169.1, AD-60171.1, AD-60174.1, AD-60175.1, AD-60176.1, AD-60179.1, AD-60183.1, or AD-60187.1 in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub '124. included in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub. '124. In some embodiments an INAA targeting C3 includes antisense and sense strands that differ by more than 3 nucleotides from the antisense and sense strands of a duplex designated as AD-60149.1, AD-60152.1, AD-60156.1, AD-60165.1, AD-60169.1, AD-60171.1, AD-60174.1, AD-60175.1, AD-60176.1, AD-60179.1, AD-60183.1, or AD-60187.1 in Table 5 or 6 of US Pub '124.
In some aspects it is contemplated to use an INAA that is disclosed in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20080090997 as appropriate for targeting C3 or comprising a sense strand disclosed in said publication as appropriate for a siRNA targeting C3.
In some embodiments, an INAA that inhibits C3 expression comprises an antisense strand that is perfectly or substantially complementary to at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 contiguous nucleotides of any of the following sequences:
The INAA may further comprise a sense strand that is perfectly or substantially complementary to the antissense strand. Said sense strand may comprise at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 contiguous nucleotides of any of the preceding sequences.
In some embodiments, an INAA that inhibits C3 expression comprises an antisense strand that differs by 1, 2, or 3 nucleotides from any of the afore-mentioned sequences The INAA may further comprise a sense strand that is complementary to the antissense strand. Said sense strand may comprise at least 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 contiguous nucleotides of any of the preceding sequences. The INAA comprising said antisense and sense strands may comprise any of the configurations, modifications, and/or modification patterns described herein. For example, the INAA may comprise one or more overhangs, may comprise one or more non-phosphodiester linkages, may comprise an alternating modification motif, may comprises a strand comprising one or more motifs of three identical modifications on three consecutive nucleotides, etc. In certain embodiments such antisense and sense strands are extended, e.g., at their 3′ end, to a length greater than 21 nucleotides, e.g., sufficiently long to serve as Dicer substrate short interfering RNA. The additional nucleotides in the antisense strand may be complementary to the target C3 mRNA. It is further contemplated in some embodiments to use said antisense sequences as ss siRNAs.
If desired one could utilize software packages and guidelines known in the art to identify additional portions of C3 RNA that may be suitable as target regions for any particular type of INAA and/or to design INAA that target such target portions. An example of a suitable software package for selecting siRNA target regions and siRNA antisense and sense strand sequences is siDirect 2.0 (available at http://siDirect2.RNAi.jp/), which identifies target portions and siRNA strands that satisfy siRNA design rules described in Ui-Tei et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 32, 936-948 (2004), Reynolds et al., Nat. Biotechnol. 22, 326-330 (2004), Amarzguioui et al., BBRC 316, 1050-1058 (2004), or combinations thereof. Other computer programs and algorithms that could be used are described in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20080090997. In some embodiments, one could select a particular desired size (e.g., 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, or 29 nucleotides) and scan across the target RNA sequence to identify sequences of that size that meet selected guidelines to serve as target portions. One could, in this way, identify the complete set of possible target portions for that particular size that comport with a particular set of guidelines. One could synthesize and test INAAs targeted to the identified sequences (using assays as described herein or as known in the art) to identify those target portions that, when targeted with an INAA, result in a desired degree of inhibition of target gene expression and/or that have a desired lack of off-target effect(s).
In some embodiments any of the antisense sequences described herein, e.g., any of the antisense sequences set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124 or sequence variants thereof, may be modified to comport with the design principles appropriate for ASOs operating by translational repression or RNase H-mediated degradation. In some embodiments any of the antisense sequences set forth in Tables 5 and 6 of US Pub. '124 may be modified to comport with the design principles appropriate for ss siRNAs.
In some embodiments an INAA is conjugated to or otherwise physically associated with one or more moieties that modulate, e.g., enhance, the activity, stability, cellular distribution, or cellular uptake of the INAA and/or alter one or more physical properties of the INAA such as charge or solubility. In certain embodiments a moiety alters the distribution, targeting, or lifetime of an INAA into which it is incorporated. In some embodiments a moiety provides an enhanced affinity for a selected target, e.g., a molecule, cell type, compartment, e.g., a cellular or organ compartment, tissue, organ or region of the body, as compared, for example, to a species absent such a moiety. The moiety typically will not participate in, nor disrupt, duplex pairing in a duplexed nucleic acid. A moiety may comprise an antibody or ligand. A ligand may be a carbohydrate, lectin, protein, glycoprotein, lipid, cholesterol, steroid, bile acid, nucleic acid hormone, growth factor, or receptor. In some embodiments a biologically inactive variant of a naturally occurring hormone, growth factor, or other ligand may be used. In some embodiments the moiety comprises a targeting moiety that targets the INAA to a specified cell type, e.g., a hepatocyte. In some embodiments a targeting moiety binds to hepatocyte-specific asialoglycoprotein receptor (ASGPR).
In some embodiments a moiety is attached to an INAA via a reversible linkage. A “reversible linkage” is a linkage that comprises a reversible bond. A “reversible bond” (also referred to as a labile bond or cleavable bond) is a covalent bond other than a covalent bond to a hydrogen atom that is capable of being selectively broken or cleaved more rapidly than other bonds in a molecule under selected conditions, the bond is capable of being selectively broken or cleaved under conditions that substantially will not break or cleave other covalent bonds in the same molecule. Cleavage or lability of a bond may be described in terms of the half-life (t½) of bond cleavage (the time required for half of the bonds to cleave). Unless otherwise indicated, a reversible bond of interest herein is a “physiologically reversible bond”, by which is meant that the bond is cleavable under conditions normally encountered or analogous to those encountered within a mammalian body. A physiologically reversible linkage is a linkage that comprises at least one physiologically reversible bond. In some embodiments a physiologically reversible bond is reversible under mammalian intracellular conditions, which include chemical conditions such as pH, temperature, oxidative or reductive conditions or agents, and salt concentration found in or analogous to those found in mammalian cells. Mammalian intracellular conditions also include the presence of enzymatic activity normally present in a mammalian cell, such as from proteolytic or hydrolytic enzymes. Enzymatically labile bonds are cleaved by enzymes in the body, e.g., intracellular enzymes. pH labile bonds are cleaved at a pH less than or equal to 7.0. In some embodiments a physiologically bond is cleaved at least 10, 50, 100, or more times faster in the target cell or under a first reference condition selected to mimic or represent intracellular conditions than in the blood, plasma, or serum of a mammalian subject or under a second reference condition selected to mimic or represent conditions found in the blood, plasma, or serum of a mammalian subject, i.e., the t½ of the bond in the target cell or under the first reference condition is lower by a factor of at least 10, 50, 100, or more than the t½ of the bond in blood, plasma or serum of a mammalian subject or under the second reference condition. In some embodiments a physiologically reversible bond has a t½ of ≤2 hours in a target cell or cellular compartment of interest. In some embodiments a physiologically reversible bond has a t1/2 of ≤1 hour, or in some embodiments ≤30 min, in a target cell or cellular compartment of interest. A physiologically reversible bond is generally sufficiently stable outside the cell to allow the agent containing the bond to remain intact, but upon entry into a target cell is cleaved to release the two portions of the agent that were held together by the bond. In some embodiments a reversible linkage is sufficiently stable outside the cell (e.g., in blood) such that it allows targeting of a therapeutically beneficial amount of an INAA coupled to a targeting moiety by way of the reversible linkage to target cells, but following entry into a target cell is cleaved to release the INAA from the targeting moiety. Examples of reversible bonds and linkages and their use to conjugate moieties to an INAA are described in US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20130281685 and 20150273081.
In some embodiments, a moiety comprises a protein transduction domain (PTD). Protein transduction domains are polypeptides or portions thereof that facilitate uptake of heterologous molecules attached to the domain (such heterologous molecules may be referred to as “cargo”). A protein transduction domain that is a peptide may be referred to as a cell penetrating peptide (CPP)). A number of protein transduction domains/peptides are known in the art. PTDs include a variety of naturally occurring or synthetic arginine-rich peptides. An arginine-rich peptide is a peptide that contains at least 30% arginine residues, e.g., at least 40%, 50%, 60%, or more. Examples of PTDs include TAT (at least amino acids 49-56), Antennopedia homeodomain, HSV VP22, and polyarginine. Such peptides may be a cationic, hydrophobic, or amphipathic peptide and may include non-standard amino acids and/or various modifications or variations such as use of circularly permuted, inverso, retro, retro-inverso, or peptidomimetic versions. The attachment of a PTD and a cargo may be covalent or noncovalent.
Exemplary PTDs that may be used are described in U.S. Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20090093026, 20090093425, 20120142763, 20150238516, and 20160215022. A PTD may comprise two or more PTDs (e.g., between 2 and 10 PTDs), which may be the same or different. PTDs may be directly linked to one another or may be separated by a linking portion that may comprise one or more amino acids and/or one or more non-amino acid moieties, such as an alkyl chain or oligoethylene glycol moiety.
In some embodiments an INAA comprises or is physically associated with an anionic charge neutralizing moiety. An anionic charge neutralizing moiety refers to a molecule or chemical group that can reduce the overall net anionic charge of a nucleic acid with which it is physically associated. One or more anionic charge neutralizing molecules or groups can be associated with a nucleic acid wherein each independently contributes to a reduction of the anionic charge and or increase in cationic charge. By charge neutralized is meant that the anionic charge of the nucleic acid is reduced, neutralized or more cationic than the same nucleic acid in the absence of an anionic charge neutralizing molecule or group. Phosphodiester and/or phosphothioate protecting groups are examples of anionic charge neutralizing groups. Thus in some embodiments an INAA comprises a protecting group at one or more positions that reduces the net anionic charge of a backbone that contains negatively charged groups (e.g., a phosphodiester or phosphorothioate backbone). The INAA may be an RNAi agent or ASO as described herein with the proviso that the anionic charge is reduced. In some embodiments the negatively charged phosphodiester backbone is neutralized by synthesis with bioreversible phosphotriester protecting groups that are converted into charged phosphodiester bonds inside cells by the action of cytoplasmic thioesterases, resulting in an agent that is biologically active for inhibiting expression, e.g., an siRNA that can mediate RNAi. Such agents, which are sometimes referred to as short interfering ribonucleic neutrals (siRNNs) can therefore serve as siRNA prodrugs. It should be understood that the backbone need not be completely neutralized (i.e., uncharged). In other words, not all of the phosphate groups need to be protected, though they may be. In some embodiments, between 5% and 100% of the phosphate groups are protected, e.g., 25%-50% or 50% to 75% or 75% to 100%. In certain embodiments at least 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 of the phosphate groups on one or both strands are protected. Examples of useful phosphodiester and/or phosphothioate protecting groups, methods of making them, and their use in nucleic acids (e.g., to generate RNAi agent prodrugs) are described in US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20110294869, 20090093425, 20120142763, and 20150238516. For example, useful bioreversible phosphotriester protecting groups are tBu-SATE (SATE=S-acyl-2-thioethyl), hydroxyl O-SATE, aldehyde A-SATE, and BMEG (S-isobutanoyl 2-(2-mercaptoethoxy)ethoxyl)). In certain embodiments the protecting group comprises a reactive functional group that can be used to attach a moiety such as a PTD or targeting moiety. In certain embodiments the chemically reactive aldehyde A-SATE phosphotriester protecting group allows for efficient conjugation to hydrazine-containing moieties. In some embodiments an siRNN or other inhibitory charge neutralized nucleic acid has a protein transduction domain, e.g., a cationic PTD, conjugated to it or otherwise physically associated with it. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, negative backbone charges may neutralize a cationic PTD, which could promote aggregation and/or reduce cellular delivery. Neutralizing the negative backbone charges may thus reduce the propensity for aggregation and improve cellular delivery. Thus, certain INAAs combine the use of PTDs such as TAT and poly-Arg, with a charge neutralized nucleic acid capable of serving as an RNAi agent prodrug. In some embodiments a targeting moiety or a moiety comprising a PTD may be synthesized to contain a hydrazine moiety, which can react with aldehyde A-SATE at defined locations on an siRNN or charge neutralized ASO. In certain embodiments the moiety comprising a PTD comprises HyNic-GG-(TAT)-PEG18-(TAT)-PEG18-(TAT), wherein TAT=RKKRRQRRR and HyNic=6-hydrazinonicotinamide (Hamil, A. S., et al. Conjugation of Duplexed siRNN Oligonucleotides with DD-HyNic Peptides for Cellular Delivery of RNAi Triggers. Bio-protocol 6(7): e1782 (2016)). In various embodiments a siRNN may comprise any of the modifications described herein. For example, in some embodiments it may contain 2′ sugar modifications (e.g., 2′-F, 2′-O-Me). Furthermore, a siRNN may have any of the configurations or modification patterns described herein.
In some embodiments a moiety attached to an INAA comprises a carbohydrate. Representative carbohydrates include mono-, di-, tri- and oligosaccharides containing from about 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 monosaccharide units. In certain embodiments the carbohydrate comprises galactose or a galactose derivative such as galactosamine, N-formyl-galactosamine, N-acetylgalactosamine, N-propionyl-galactosamine, N-n-butanoyl-galactosamine, and N-iso-butanoylgalactos-amine. In certain embodiments of particular interest the galactose derivative comprises N-acetylgalactosamine (GalNAc). In certain embodiments the moiety comprises multiple instances of the galactose or galactose derivative, e.g., multiple N-acetylgalactosamine moieties, e.g., 3 GalNAc moieties. As used herein, the term “galactose derivative” includes both galactose and derivatives of galactose having affinity for the asialoglycoprotein receptor equal to or greater than that of galactose. The term “galactose cluster” refers to a structure comprising at least 2 galactose derivatives that are physically associated with each other, typically by being covalently attached to another moiety. In some embodiments, a galactose cluster has 2-10, e.g. 6, 2-4, e.g., 3, terminal galactose derivatives. A terminal galactose derivative may be attached to another moiety through the C-1 carbon of the galactose derivative. In some embodiments two or more, e.g., three, galactose derivatives are attached to a moiety that serves as a branch point and that can be attached to the INAA. In some embodiments, a galactose derivative is linked to the moiety that serves as a branch point via a linker or spacer. In some embodiments, the moiety that serves as a branch point may be attached to the INAA via a linker or spacer. The linker(s) or spacer(s) may comprise any of the linkers or spacers described herein. For example, in some embodiments, a galactose derivative is attached to a branch point via a linker or spacer that comprises an amide, carbonyl, alkyl, oligoethylene glycol moiety, or combination thereof. In some embodiments the linkers or spacers attached to each galactose derivative are the same. In some embodiments, a galactose cluster has three terminal galactosamines or galactosamine derivatives (e.g., GalNAc) each having affinity for the asialoglycoprotein receptor. A molecule comprising two or more galactose derivatives may be referred to as multivalent. A molecule comprising three galactose derivatives may be referred to as trivalent. A structure in which 3 terminal GalNAc moieties are attached (e.g., through the C-1 carbons of the saccharides) to a moiety that serves as branch point may be referred to as tri-antennary N-acetylgalactosamine (GalNAc3). In some embodiments, one or more monomeric units comprising a galactose derivative may be incorporated site-specifically into an INAA. Such galactose derivative-containing monomeric units may comprise a galactose derivative, e.g., GalNac, attached to a nucleoside or to a non-nucleoside moiety. In some embodiments, at least 3 nucleoside-GalNAc monomers or at least 3 non-nucleoside-GalNAc monomers are incorporated site-specifically into an INAA. In some embodiments such incorporation may occur during solid-phase synthesis using phosphoramidite chemistry or via postsynthetic conjugation. In some embodiments the galactose derivative-containing monomeric units are joined via phosphodiester bonds to each other and/or to nucleosides of the INAA that do not have a galactose derivative attached. In some embodiments 2, 3, or more galactose derivative-containing monomeric units are arranged consecutively, i.e., without any intervening units that lack a galactose derivative. In some embodiments a carbohydrate, e.g., a galactose cluster, e.g., tri-antennary N-acetylgalactosamine or two or more GalNac-containing monomeric units, is present at the end of a strand, e.g., at the 3′ end of the sense strand of ads RNAi agent or at the 5′ end of an ASO. Exemplary carbohydrates (e.g., galactose clusters), galactose derivative-containing monomeric units, carbohydrate-modified INAAs, and methods of manufacture and use thereof are described in US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20090203135, 20090239814, 20110207799, 20120157509, 20150247143, US Pub. '124; Nair, J K, et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 136, 16958-16961 (2014); Matsuda, S., et al., ACS Chem. Biol. 10, 1181-1187 (2015); Rajeev, K., et al., ChemBioChem 16, 903-908 (2015); Migawa, M T., et al., Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 26(9):2194-7 (2016); Prakash, T P, et al., J Med Chem. 59(6):2718-33 (2016). Exemplary galactose clusters are depicted below.
One of ordinary skill in the art appreciates that the structure of the linking moieties that connect each GalNac to the branch point may vary.
In some embodiments an INAA is conjugated to a ligand as depicted below.
and, wherein X is O or S. In most embodiments, X is O. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the structure of the linking moiety that connects the galactose cluster to the phosphate group may vary.
In certain embodiments the moiety comprises a lipophilic moiety. In some embodiments the lipophilic moiety comprises a tocopherol, e.g., alpha-tocopherol. In some embodiments the lipophilic moiety comprises cholesterol. In some embodiments the lipophilic compound comprises an alkyl or heteroalkyl group. In some embodiments the lipophilic compound comprises palmitoyl, hexadec-8-enoyl, oleyl, (9E,12E)-octadeca-9,12-dienoyl, dioctanoyl, or C16-C20 acyl. In some embodiments the lipophilic moiety comprises at least 16 carbon atoms. In some embodiments the lipophilic moiety comprises —(CH)n—NH—(C═O)—(CH)m—CH3. In some embodiments n and m are each independently between 1 and 20. In some embodiments n+m is at least 10, 12, 14, or 16. In some embodiments the lipophilic moiety is as shown below and/or is attached to a sugar moiety as shown below.
In general, a moiety may be attached at a terminus or internal subunit of an INAA. In some embodiments a moiety is attached to a modified subunit of the INAA. Those of ordinary skill in the art are aware of suitable methods to manufacture nucleic acids having moieties conjugated thereto. A nucleic acid strand comprising a modified nucleotide comprising a reactive functional group may be reacted with a moiety comprising a second reactive functional group, wherein the first and second reactive functional groups are capable of reacting with one another under conditions compatible with maintaining the structure of the nucleic acid strand. In some embodiments a moiety may be attached to a sense strand or an antisense strand prior to hybridization of the strand with the complementary antisense or sense strand, respectively. In some embodiments strands may be hybridized to form a duplex prior to incorporation of the moiety. In general, various methods of conjugation described herein may be used. See, e.g., Hermanson, supra.
In some embodiments, an INAA is a chimeric INAA. “Chimeric” INAAs as used herein, are INAAs that contain two or more chemically distinct regions, each made up of at least one monomer unit, wherein the regions confer distinct properties on the compound. In some embodiments at least one region is modified so as to confer upon the INAA increased resistance to nuclease degradation, increased cellular uptake, and/or increased binding affinity for the target nucleic acid and at least one additional region of the INAA can serve as a substrate for enzymes (e.g., RNase H) capable of cleaving RNA:DNA or RNA:RNA hybrids. In some embodiments at least one region of the INAA can serve as a substrate for enzymes (e.g., RNase H) capable of cleaving RNA:DNA or RNA:RNA hybrids and at least one region can inhibit translation by steric blocking.
The delivery of an INAA to a cell can be achieved in a number of different ways. In vivo delivery may be performed by administering a composition comprising an INAA to a subject, e.g., by parenteral administration route, e.g., subcutaneous or intravenous or intramuscular administration.
In some embodiments an INAA is associated with a delivery agent. “Delivery agent” refers to a substance or entity that is non-covalently or covalently associated with a biologically active agent (e.g., an INAA) or is co-administered with an INAA and serves one or more functions that increase the stability and/or efficacy of the biologically active agent beyond that which would result if the biologically active agent was delivered (e.g., administered to a subject) in the absence of the delivery agent. For example, a delivery agent may protect an INAA from degradation (e.g., in blood), may facilitate entry of an INAA into cells or into a cellular compartment of interest (e.g., the cytoplasm), and/or may enhance associations with particular cells containing the molecular target to be modulated. Those of ordinary skill in the art are aware of numerous delivery agents that may be used to deliver INAAs, e.g., siRNAs. See Kanasty, R., et al. Nat Mater. 12(11):967-77 (2013) for review of some of these technologies. In some embodiments, e.g., for administering an INAA systemically, the INAA may be associated with a delivery agent such as a nanoparticle, a dendrimer, a polymer, liposomes, or a cationic delivery system. Without wishing to be bound by any theory, positively charged cationic delivery systems are believed to facilitate binding of a negatively charged INAA and also enhance interactions at the negatively charged cell membrane to permit efficient uptake of an INAA by the cell. Cationic lipids, dendrimers, or polymers may be bound to an INAA or may form a vesicle or micelle that encapsulates an INAA. Methods for making and administering complexes comprising a cationic agent and an INAA are known in the art. In some embodiments it is particularly contemplated to use any of the delivery agents described in US Pub. '124. In some embodiments, an INAA forms a complex with cyclodextrin for systemic administration. In some embodiments an INAA is administered in association with a lipid or lipid-containing particle. In some embodiments an INAA is administered in association with a cationic polymer (which may be a polypeptide or a non-polypeptide polymer), a lipid, a peptide, PEG, cyclodextrin, or combination thereof, which may be in the form of a nanoparticle or microparticle. The lipid or peptide may be cationic. “Nanoparticle” refers to particles with lengths in two or three dimensions greater than 1 nanometer (nm) and smaller than about 150 nm e.g., 20 nm-50 nm or 50 nm-100 nm. “Microparticle” refers to particles with lengths in two or three dimensions greater than 150 nm and smaller than about 1000 nm. A nanoparticle may have a targeting moiety and/or cell-penetrating moiety or membrane active moiety covalently or noncovalently attached thereto. Exemplary delivery agents, methods of manufacture and use in the delivery of INAAs are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,427,605; 8,158,601; 9,012,498; 9,415,109; 9,062,021; 9,402,816. In some embodiments it is contemplated to use delivery technology known in the art as “Smarticles”. In some embodiments it is contemplated to use delivery technology known in the art as “stable nucleic acid lipid particles” (SNALPs), wherein the nucleic acid to be delivered is encapsulated in a lipid bilayer containing a mixture of cationic and fusogenic lipids coated with also coated with a diffusible polyethylene glycol-lipid (PEG-lipid) conjugate that provides a neutral, hydrophilic exterior.
In some embodiments a delivery agent comprises one or more amino alcohol cationic lipids, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,044,512.
In some embodiments, a delivery agent comprises one or more amino acid lipids. Amino acid lipids are molecules containing an amino acid residue (e.g., arginine, homoarginine, norarginine, nor-norarginine, ornithine, lysine, homolysine, histidine, 1-methylhistidine, pyridylalanine, asparagine, N-ethylasparagine, glutamine, 4-aminophenylalanine, the N-methylated versions thereof, and side chain modified derivatives thereof) and one or more lipophilic tails. Exemplary amino acid lipids and their use to deliver nucleic acids are described in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20110117125 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,877,729, 9,139,554, and 9,339,461. In some embodiments, membrane lytic poly(amido amine) polymers and polyconjugates such as those described in U.S. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20130289207 may be used. In some embodiments, a delivery agent comprises a lipopeptide compound comprising a central peptide and having lipophilic groups attached at each terminus. In some embodiments lipophilic groups can be derived from a naturally occurring lipid. In some embodiments a lipophilic group may comprise a C(1-22)alkyl, C(6-12)cycloalkyl, C(6-12)cycloalkyl-alkyl, C(3-18)alkenyl, C(3-18)alkynyl, C(1-5)alkoxy-C(1-5)alkyl, or a sphinganine, or (2R,3R)-2-amino-1,3-octadecanediol, icosasphinganine, sphingosine, phytosphingosine, or cis-4-sphingenine. The central peptide may comprise a cationic or amphipathic amino acid sequence. Examples of such lipopeptides and their use to deliver nucleic acids are described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,220,785.
“Masking moiety” means a molecule or group that, when physically associated with another agent (e.g., a polymer), shields, inhibits or inactivates one or more properties (biophysical or biochemical characteristics) or activities of the agent. A masking moiety may be attached covalently or noncovalently to the agent. A masking moiety may be reversible, meaning that it is attached to the agent that it masks via a reversible linkage. As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art, a sufficient number of masking moieties are linked to the agent to be masked to achieve a desired level of inactivation.
In some embodiments an INAA is conjugated to a delivery agent that is a polymer. Useful delivery polymers include, e.g., poly(acrylate) polymers (see., e.g., US Pat. Pub. No. 20150104408), poly(vinyl ester) polymers (see., e.g., US Pat. Pub. No. 20150110732) and certain polypeptides. In some embodiments the delivery polymer is a reversibly masked membrane active polymer. In some embodiments the INAA or polymer, or both, has a targeting moiety conjugated thereto. In some embodiments an INAA or an INAA-targeting moiety conjugate is co-administered with a delivery polymer but is not conjugated to the polymer. “Co-administered” in this context means that the INAA and the delivery polymer are administered to the subject such that they are present in the subject during overlapping time periods. The INAA-targeting moiety conjugate and the delivery polymer may be administered simultaneously or they may be delivered sequentially. For simultaneous administration, they may be mixed prior to administration. For sequential administration, either the INAA or the delivery polymer may be administered first. The INAA and the delivery polymer may be administered in the same composition or may be administered separately sufficiently close together in time such that cytoplasmic delivery of the INAA to cells is enhanced relative to cytoplasmic delivery that would occur without administration of the polymer. In some embodiments the INAA and the delivery polymer are administered no more than 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, or 120 minutes apart. In some embodiments the delivery polymer is a targeted, reversibly masked membrane active polymer. The polymer has a targeting moiety attached thereto that targets the polymer to cells to which enhanced cytoplasmic delivery of the INAA is desired. The INAA may be targeted to the same cells, optionally using the same targeting moiety, i.e., the INAA may be administered as an INAA-targeting moiety conjugate. As used herein, membrane active polymers are surface active, amphipathic polymers that are able to induce one or more of the following effects upon a biological membrane: an alteration or disruption of the membrane that allows non-membrane permeable molecules to enter a cell or cross the membrane, pore formation in the membrane, fission of membranes, or disruption or dissolving of the membrane. As used herein, a membrane, or cell membrane, comprises a lipid bilayer. The alteration or disruption of the membrane can be functionally defined by the polymer's activity in at least one the following assays: red blood cell lysis (hemolysis), liposome leakage, liposome fusion, cell fusion, cell lysis, and endosomal release A membrane active polymer may enhance delivery of a polynucleotide to a cell by disrupting or destabilizing the plasma membrane or an internal vesicle membrane (such as an endosome or lysosome), e.g., by forming a pore in the membrane, or disrupting endosomal or lysosomal vesicles thereby permitting release of the contents of the vesicle into the cell cytoplasm. In some embodiments the targeted reversibly masked membrane active polymer is an endosomolytic polymer. Endosomolytic polymers are polymers that, in response to a change in pH, are able to cause disruption or lysis of an endosome or otherwise provide for release of a normally cell membrane impermeable compound, such as a polynucleotide or protein, from a cellular internal membrane-enclosed vesicle, such as an endosome or lysosome. In some embodiments the polymer is a reversibly modified amphipathic membrane active polyamine wherein reversible modification inhibits membrane activity, neutralizes the polyamine to reduce positive charge and form a near neutral charge polymer. The reversible modification may also provide cell-type specific targeting and/or inhibit non-specific interactions of the polymer. The polyamine may be reversibly modified through reversible modification of amines on the polyamine. The reversibly masked membrane active polymer is substantially not membrane active when masked but becomes membrane active upon unmasking. Masking moieties are generally covalently bound to the membrane active polymer through physiologically reversible linkages. By using physiologically reversible linkages, the masking moieties can be cleaved from the polymer in vivo, thereby unmasking the polymer and restoring activity of the unmasked polymer. By choosing an appropriate reversible linkage, the activity of the membrane active polymer is restored after the conjugate has been delivered or targeted to a desired cell type or cellular location. Reversibility of the linkages provides for selective activation of the membrane active polymer. The physiologically reversible bond is reversible under mammalian intracellular conditions, which include chemical conditions such as pH, temperature, oxidative or reductive conditions or agents, and salt concentration found in or analogous to those found in mammalian cells. In some embodiments a targeting moiety, e.g., an ASGPR targeting moiety may serve as a masking moiety. In some embodiments the ASGPR targeting moiety has a lipophilic moiety conjugated thereto. Exemplary targeting moieties (e.g., ASGPR targeting moieties), physiologically labile bonds (e.g., enzymatically labile bonds, pH labile bonds), masking moieties, membrane active polymers (e.g., endosmolytically active polymers), lipophilic moieties, RNAi agent-targeting moiety conjugates, delivery agent-targeting moiety conjugates, conjugates comprising an RNAi agent, targeting moiety, and delivery agent, and methods of delivering nucleic acids to cells (e.g., liver cells) are described in US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 20130245091, 20130317079, 20120157509, 20120165393, 20120172412, 20120230938, 20140135380, 20140135381, 20150104408, and 20150110732. In some embodiments an INAA is co-administered with a mellitin peptide, e.g., as described in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20120165393. The INAA, mellitin peptide, or both, may have a targeting moiety conjugated thereto, optionally via a reversible linkage. In some embodiments a masking moiety comprises a dipeptide-amidobenzyl-carbonate or disubstituted maleic anhydride masking moiety e.g., as described in US Pat. App. Pub. No. 20150110732.
In some embodiments an INAA may be administered in “naked” form, i.e., administered in the absence of a delivery agent. The naked INAA may be in a suitable buffer solution. The buffer solution may, for example, comprise acetate, citrate, prolamine, carbonate, or phosphate, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments the buffer solution is phosphate buffered saline (PBS). The pH and osmolarity of the buffer solution can be adjusted such that it is suitable for administering to a subject. In some embodiments an INAA is administered not in physical association with a lipid or lipid-containing particle. In some embodiments an INAA is administered not in physical association with a nanoparticle or microparticle. In some embodiments an INAA is administered not in physical association with a cationic polymer. In some embodiments an INAA is administered not in physical association with cyclodextrin. In some embodiments an INAA administered in “naked” form comprises a targeting moiety.
In some embodiments a selected amount of an INAA is administered to a subject. For example the amount may be between 0.01 mg/kg and 50 mg/kg. In some embodiments the INAA is administered at a dose of about 0.01 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg or about 0.5 mg/kg to about 15 mg/kg. In some embodiments, the INAA is administered at a dose of about 10 mg/kg to about 30 mg/kg. In some embodiments, the INAA is administered at a dose selected from the group consisting of 0.5 mg/kg 1 mg/kg, 1.5 mg/kg, 3 mg/kg, 5 mg/kg, 10 mg/kg, and 30 mg/kg. In some embodiments the amount is between 0.01 mg/kg and 0.1 mg/kg, between 0.01 mg/kg and 0.1 mg/kg, between 0.1 mg/kg and 1.0 mg/kg, between 1.0 mg/kg and 2.5 mg/kg, between 2.5 mg/kg and 5.0 mg/kg, between 5.0 mg/kg and 10 mg/kg, between 10 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg, between 20 mg/kg and 30 mg/kg, between 30 mg/kg and 40 mg/kg or between 40 mg/kg and 50 mg/kg. In some embodiments a fixed dose is administered. In some embodiments the dose is between 5 mg and 1.0 g, e.g., between 5 mg and 10 mg, between 10 mg and 20 mg, between 20 mg and 40 mg, between 40 mg and 80 mg, between 80 mg and 160 mg, between 160 mg and 320 mg, between 320 mg and 640 mg, between 640 mg and 1 g. In some embodiments the dose is about 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 300 mg, 350 mg, 400 mg, 450 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, 700 mg, 800 mg, 900 mg, or 1000 mg. In some embodiments the dose is a daily dose. In some embodiments the dose is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 days, e.g., at least 7 days, e.g., about 2, 3, 4, 6, or 8 weeks. For example, in some embodiments, the INAA is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 7 days.
In some embodiments the INAA is administered by subcutaneous injection. In some embodiments the INAA is administered by intravenous infusion over a period of time, such as over about a 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 minute period, or longer. Administration may be repeated on a regular basis, e.g., weekly, biweekly (i.e., every two weeks), every four weeks, monthly, every 6 weeks, every 2 months, every 3 months, every 6 months, etc. Administration may continue for, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24 months, or longer. In some embodiments, after an initial treatment period, the agent(s) may be administered on a less frequent basis. For example, in some embodiments, after administration weekly or biweekly for three months, administration can be repeated once per month, for six months or a year or longer. The dose may be changed over time if appropriate.
In certain embodiments, following contact with a cell expressing C3, e.g., a hepatocyte, an INAA inhibits the expression of C3 by at least about 10% as assayed by a suitable assay. A suitable assay may measure C3 RNA (e.g., C3 mRNA) level by, e.g., Northern blot, PCR (e.g., reverse transcription PCR, which may be real-time reverse transcription PCR, also known as quantitative PCR), branched DNA (bDNA)-based method, or RNA-Seq, or may measure C3 protein by immunological methods such as, e.g., Western Blotting, immunoprecipitation, fluorescence detection following staining with fluorescently labeled antibodies (e.g., flow cytometry, spectroscopy, fluorescence microscopy), ELISA assays, protein microarray analysis, bead array assays (such as the Luminex xMAP technology or Cytometric Bead Array (CBA) system from BD Biosciences), or similar methods using non-antibody ligands that specifically bind to C3. Alternately or additionally, the ability of an INAA to inhibit expression may be measured using a suitable reporter assay, such as those described in U.S. Pat. App. Pub. No. 20050042641, wherein a reporter-encoding sequence is fused to the target nucleic acid sequence and expression of the reporter is measured. One could alternately or additionally perform an assay that measures a biological activity of C3. Such assays include, e.g., hemolysis assays and assays of terminal complement complex (TCC) formation (e.g., immunoassays). A TCC assay may use a first antibody (e.g., monoclonal antibody) to a first component of the TCC (e.g., the C9 ring of TCC) to capture the complex. The trapped TCC is subsequently detected with a second antibody (e.g., monoclonal antibody), which antibody may comprise a detectable label, wherein the second antibody binds to different antigen(s) of the SC5b9 complex. In some embodiments, administration of the INAA reduces C3 levels, e.g., in a cell (e.g., a hepatocyte), tissue, blood, urine or other compartment of the subject by at least about 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or at least about 99% or more. In some embodiments administration of the INAA reduces C3 levels, e.g., in a cell (e.g., a hepatocyte), tissue, blood, urine or other compartment of the subject by between 10% and 95%, e.g., between 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% and 95%. In some embodiments administration of the INAA reduces C3 levels, e.g., in a cell (e.g., a hepatocyte), tissue, blood, urine or other compartment of the subject by between 10% and 95%, e.g., between 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% and 95%. In some embodiments administration of the INAA reduces C3 levels, e.g., in a cell (e.g., a hepatocyte), tissue, blood, urine or other compartment of the subject by between 10% and 50. In some embodiments administration of the INAA reduces C3 levels, e.g., in a cell (e.g., a hepatocyte), tissue, blood, urine or other compartment of the subject by between 50% and 95%. In some embodiments a reduction is an average reduction over a period of time, e.g., a period between successive doses of the agent. In some embodiments a dose is selected to achieve at least a desired level of reduction throughout the period between doses. In some embodiments a culture of human hepatocellular carcinoma cells, e.g., Hep3B cells (ATCC, Manassas, Va.) may be used to assess the amount of inhibition of C3 expression or inhibition complement activity conferred by an agent, e.g., an INAA. In some embodiments an INAA may be administered to a non-human animal one or more times. The amount of C3 mRNA in the animal's liver and/or the amount of C3 in the animal's blood may subsequently be measured and, if desired, the extent of inhibition may be determined.
EXEMPLIFICATION Example 1: Development of PEGylated Compstatin Analogs that Retain Substantial Complement Inhibiting ActivityA compstatin analog having the amino acid sequence of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 28, but incorporating an AEEAc-Lys moiety located C-terminal to the Thr residue of SEQ ID NO: 28 for purposes of subsequent conjugation of an NHS ester activated PEG to the amino group of the Lys side chain was synthesized. The compound was synthesized using standard methods. Briefly, amino acids (including AEEAc) were obtained as Fmoc-protected amino acids, in which the α-amino group of each amino acid was protected with Fmoc. Side chain functional groups were also blocked with various appropriate protective groups. Synthesis was accomplished following the solid phase methodology described by Merrifield (J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149 (1963)). Chain assembly was performed on solid phase, at the conclusion of which the N-terminus was acetylated; the peptide was then cleaved from the solid phase and simultaneously deprotected via acidolysis using TFA and amidated. The linear peptide was then oxidized and purified. The resulting compstatin analog is represented as follows Ac-Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-AEEAc-Lys-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 51), abbreviated as CA28-AEEAc-Lys. Note that for purposes of brevity, the N-terminal acetyl group and C-terminal amino groups are omitted in this abbreviation. Monofunctional, linear NHS-ester activated PEGs with molecular weights of 30 kD and 40 kD (NOF America Corp. White Plains, N.Y., Cat. No. SUN ME-300GS and Cat. No. SUN ME-400GS), respectively, were coupled to the lysine side chain of CA28-AEEAc-Lys, resulting in long-acting compstatin analogs represented as follows: CA28-AEEAc-Lys-(PEG30k) and CA28-AEEAc-Lys-(PEG40k), and purified. Note that the number after the term “PEG” and preceding the letter “k” represents the molecular weight of the PEG moiety in kilodaltons, and the “k” is an abbreviation for kD). CA28-AEEAc-Lys-(PEG30k) is also referred to as CA28-1. CA28-AEEAc-Lys-(PEG40k) is also referred to as CA28-2.
Inhibitory activity of the synthesized compounds was assessed by measuring the effect of the compounds on complement activation via the classical pathway using a standard complement inhibition assay. The protocol measures C3b deposition in an ELISA format. C3b deposition monitored using this method is generated through complement activated by the classical pathway. Briefly, 96-well plates are coated with BSA. Human plasma, chicken ovalbumin (OVA), polyclonal anti-OVA antibodies and compound being tested (referred to as “drug”) are added and incubated, followed by addition of Anti-human C3 HRP-conjugated antibody. After an additional incubation, substrate is added and signal detected. Details of the protocol are as follows:
Protocol for Classical Complement Inhibition Assay
Materials:
-
- Ninety-six well plate (polystyrene plate, Thermo Scientific, 9205)
- Chicken OVA (Sigma A5503-5G)
- Rabbit anti-chicken OVA (Abcam ab1221)
- Blocking buffer (Startingblock buffer, Thermo Scientific 37538)
- Veronal Buffer (5× concentration, Lonza 12-624E)
- Human plasma (collected with Lepirudin at 50 ug/ml final concentration)
- Goat anti-human C3 HRP-conjugated Ab (MP Biomedicals, 55237)
- Tween-20 Wash Buffer (0.05% Tween 20-PBS buffer)
- TMB (Peroxidase substrate, BD 555214)-1:1 mixture of BD 51-2607KC and 51-2606KC.
- 1M H2SO4
-
- 1. Add 100 ul/well of 1% chicken OVA (in PBS)
- 2. Incubate overnight @ 4° C. or room temperature for 1-2 hr.
- 3. Remove by shaking and tapping the plate.
- 4. Block by adding 200 ul of blocking buffer
- 5. Incubate for 1 h at room temp
- 6. Remove by shaking and tapping the plate
- 7. Add 100 ul of 1:1000 dilution of Polyclonal anti-chicken OVA in blocking buffer
- 8. Incubate for 1 h at room temp
- 9. Wash twice with wash buffer
- 10. Add 50 ul VB++ to wells #2 to 12
- 11. Add 100 ul of starting drug dilution (2× in VB++) to well 1.
- 12. Serially dilute (1:2) the drug from wells 1 to 10 as follow
- a. Take 50 ul of solution from the originating well
- b. Add this to the next well
- c. Mix by pipetting several times
- d. Repeat up to well #10
- Note: from well #10 remove 50 ul and discard.
- 13. Add 50 ul of 2× plasma (1:37.5 dilution of original plasma) dilution to wells 1 to 11
- 14. Incubate for 1 h
- 15. Wash with wash buffer
- 16. Add 100 ul of 1/1000 dilution of anti-C3-HRP Ab in blocking buffer
- 17. Incubate for 1 h
- 18. Wash with wash buffer
- 19. Add 100 ul of TMB to all wells
- 20. Incubate for 5-10 min in dark
- 21. Add 50 ul 1M H2SO4
- 22. Read the plate at 450 nm
-
- Weight 210 mg NaCl
- Add 10 ml of 5×VB
- Add 100 ul of CaCl2 (500×)
- Add 250 ul MgCl (200×)
- Adjust volume to 50 ml with H2O
- Adjust pH to 7.4
Data was analyzed using GraphPad Prism5 software. Data sets from each experiment were normalized to percent activation compared to the 100% activation control corresponding to the well to which no compound is added. Drug concentration values (X values) were transformed to their logarithms, and percent activation (Pa) (Y values) was transformed to percent inhibition (Pi) using the following formula Pi=100−Pa (Yi=100−Ya). The percent inhibition was plotted against the drug concentration and the resulting data set was fit to a sigmoidal-dose response function [Y=Bottom+(Top−Bottom)/(1+10 ((Log EC−X)))]. IC50 values were obtained from the fit parameters.
Results are presented in
Eight-arm NHS-ester activated PEG with molecular weight of 40 kD (NOF America Corp. White Plains, N.Y., Cat. No. SUNBRIGHT® HGEO-400GS; chemical formula: hexaglycerol octa(succinimidyloxyglutaryl) polyoxyethylene) was coupled to the lysine side chain of CA28-AEEAc-Lys, resulting in long-acting compstatin analogs represented as follows: (CA28-AEEAc)8-PEG40k, also referred to as CA28-3. Complement inhibiting activity of CA28-3 was tested using the assay described in Example 1. Results are plotted in
The solubility of CA28-1, CD28-2, and CA28-3 in water with or without a variety of buffer substances and/or excipients was observed to exceed that of the parent compound CA28.
Example 3: Long-Acting Compstatin Analogs that Demonstrate Dramatically Increased Plasma Half-Life and CmaxThis Example describes determination of pharmacokinetic parameters of long-acting compstatin analogs CA28-2 and CA28-3 following administration to Cynomolgus monkeys.
Dosing and Sample Collection
CA28-2 and CA28-3 were administered at time 0 via intravenous injection into female Cynomolgus monkeys (three per group, 2-5 yrs old, 2.9-3.5 kg). Compounds were administered at 50 mg/kg in 5% dextrose in water at a concentration of 25 mg/ml. Blood specimens (˜1 mL each) were collected from the femoral vein at the following timepoints: Pre-dose, 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour (h), 4 h, 8 h, 24 h, 48 h, 96 h (4 days), and 192 h (8 days) post dose. Specimens were collected via direct venipuncture and placed into a red top serum tube containing no anticoagulant, and kept at room temperature for at least 30 minutes. Blood samples were centrifuged at a temperature of 4° C. at 3000×g for 5 minutes. Samples were maintained chilled throughout processing. Serum samples were collected after centrifugation and placed into sample tubes. Samples were stored in a freezer set to maintain −60° C. to −80° C. All animals showed normal activity throughout the study. No compound-related abnormalities were noted in the animals throughout the study.
Sample Analysis. Plasma samples obtained as described above were analyzed by LC/MS/MS using the following methods to determine the concentration of compound: 50 μL of sample was mixed with internal standard (CA28-AEEAc-Arg) and then 100 μL of 1 M NH4OAc, pH 3.5 with HOAc was added and mixed. Then 250 μL of acetonitrile was added and mixed. The sample was centrifuged and supernatant poured into another tube and dried. The sample was reconstituted and injected onto the LC/MS/MS system. Mobile phase A was 5 mM NH4OAc with 0.1% FA and Mobile Phase B was 90:10 (ACN: 50 mM NH4OAc) with 0.1% FA. The LC column was the Intrada WP-RP 2×150 mm, 3μ. Quantitation was on an Applied Biosystems API-4000 triple quadrupole mass spectrometer operated in positive ion mode. In-source collision induced dissociation (CID) was used to fragment the compound in the mass spectrometer source and the m/z 144 ion was mass selected in Q1, fragmented, and the m/z 77 ion mass selected in Q3 and detected. Data was processed using Analyst 1.4.2 software.
Results. The serum concentrations in micrograms/ml of CA28-2 and CA28-3 at each time point are presented in Table 3 below. Data for each of 3 monkeys that received the indicated compound are shown. Average values and standard deviations are readily calculated. There was notable consistency between animals. CA28 are historical data obtained in a previous study in which CA28 was administered intravenously to Cynomolgus monkeys. In that study, CA28 was detected in samples using HPLC.
Results for each compound were averaged and are plotted in
Side chain lysines of human serum albumin (HSA) were converted to thiols using 2-iminothiolane and reacted with a compstatin analog comprising a maleimide as a reactive functional group: Ac-Ile-Cys*-Val-Trp(1-Me)-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-AEEAc-Lys-(C(═O)—(CH2)5-Mal)-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 68). The resulting long-acting compstatin analog (CA28-4) was tested in vitro for complement inhibiting activity (
A compstatin analog having the amino acid sequence of the compstatin analog of SEQ ID NO: 28, but incorporating an AEEAc-Lys moiety located C-terminal to the Thr residue of SEQ ID NO: 28 for purposes of subsequent conjugation of an NHS ester activated PEG to the amino group of the Lys side chain was synthesized as described in Example 1. The resulting compstatin analog is represented as follows Ac-Ile-Cys*-Val-(1Me)Trp-Gln-Asp-Trp-Gly-Ala-His-Arg-Cys*-Thr-AEEAc-Lys-NH2 (SEQ ID NO: 51), abbreviated as CA28-AEEAc-Lys. Monofunctional, linear monomethoxy-NHS-activated ester/carbonate PEGs with molecular weights of 40 kD and differing in terms of the NHS carboxylate attachment chemistry (NOF America Corp. White Plains, N.Y., Cat. Nos. SUNBRIGHT® ME-400CS, SUNBRIGHT® ME-400GS, SUNBRIGHT® ME-400HS, SUNBRIGHT® ME-400TS) were coupled to the lysine side chain of CA28-AEEAc-Lys via an amide bond. (The Lys reside is Lys15 since the AEEAc linker contains an amino acid residue.) All compounds were acetylated on the N-terminus, amidated on the C-terminus, and cyclized via a disulfide bond between Cys2 and Cys12. (The acetylation, amidation, and cyclization were performed prior to coupling to the PEG.) The compounds were prepared as trifluoroacetate salts and were purified. The compounds are represented as shown in the following table (Table 5). The letters CS, GS, HS, and TS represent the different linker moieties between the PEG moiety and the NHS moiety as indicated in further detail in Table 5. It will be understood that various names and abbreviations for each compound may be used interchangeably. Note that CA28-2 (see Example 1) is the same as CA28-2GS.
Compounds were analyzed by reverse phase HPLC.
Inhibitory activity of the compounds was assessed by measuring the effect of the compounds on complement activation via the classical pathway using a standard complement inhibition assay as described in Example 1. Results are plotted in
Bifunctional, linear monomethoxy-NHS-activated ester/carbonate PEGs with molecular weights of 40 kD and differing in terms of the NHS carboxylate attachment chemistry were obtained from NOF America Corp. (White Plains, N.Y.). The activated PEGs were coupled to the lysine side chain of CA28-AEEAc-Lys via an amide bond such that two CA28-AEEAc-Lys moieties were coupled to each PEG chain. All compounds were acetylated on the N-terminus and amidated on the C-terminus of the CA28-AEEAc-Lys moieties, and cyclized via a disulfide bond between Cys2 and Cys12. (The acetylation, amidation, and cyclization were performed prior to coupling to the PEG.) The compounds were prepared as acetate salts and were purified. The compounds are represented as shown in the following table (Table 6).
Inhibitory activity of CA28-2GS-BF was assessed by measuring the effect of the compound on complement activation via the classical pathway using a standard complement inhibition assay as described in Example 1 and analyzed as described in Example 1. Results are plotted in
This Example describes determination of pharmacokinetic parameters of long-acting compstatin analog CA28-2GS-BF following administration to Cynomolgus monkeys either via a single intravenous (IV) injection or with repeated (once daily) subcutaneous administration for seven days.
Dosing and Sample Collection CA28-2GS was administered at time 0 via intravenous injection or via repeat subcutaneous injection (daily, for seven days) into male Cynomolgus monkeys. Six non-naïve male Cynomolgus monkeys, age 1-5 years, ranging in weight from 4.6 to 5.3 kilograms, were used in this study (three per group). The animals were healthy at the start of the trial. seven days. The study was not blinded. Animals were supplied with water ad libitum and a commercial diet twice daily prior to initiation of the study. Food was supplied to the animals per facility SOP prior to the study. Animals were not fasted. Animals were dosed via intravenous and subcutaneous administration at time 0 on the appropriate day. A size 22 gauge needle was used for the subcutaneous administration. The compound was administered at 50 mg/kg in 5% dextrose in water at a concentration of 25 mg/ml. Blood specimens (˜1 mL each) were collected from the femoral vein at the following timepoints: Day 1: Pre-dose, 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour (h), 4 h, 8 h. Days 2-9: 0 min. Day 16: Final sample based on Day 1 dosing. Each blood sample (˜1.0 mL) was collected from the monkey's femoral or saphenous vein via direct venipuncture and placed into a red top serum tube containing no anticoagulant, and kept at room temperature for at least 30 minutes. Blood samples were centrifuged at a temperature of 4° C. at 3000×g for 5 minutes. Samples were maintained chilled throughout processing. Serum samples were collected after centrifugation and placed into sample tubes. Samples were stored in a freezer set to maintain −60° C. to −80° C. Serum samples and leftover dosing solutions were shipped frozen on dry ice for analysis.
The site of each subcutaneous administration was observed to see how fast the injection volume was absorbed and also to see if the formulation left behind a lump or fully went away. The dose sites were observed at each collection timepoint and in the afternoon of days 2-7. All doses were absorbed during the duration of the study. Based on the observations it is estimated that doses were absorbed within fifteen minutes after administration. All animals showed normal activity throughout the study. No compound-related abnormalities were noted in the animals throughout the study.
Sample Analysis. Plasma samples obtained as described above were analyzed by LC/MS/MS leveraging CID (collision induced degradation) similarly to the method described in Example 3.
Results. Serum concentration vs time for CA28-2GS-BF when administered IV or subcutaneously as described above are plotted in
A peak serum concentration of 500 μg/ml (11 μM) was achieved by subcutaneous administration of CA28-2GS-BF. The terminal half-life of CA28-2GS-BF was approximately 5 days when administered either IV or subcutaneously. Results are summarized in the tables below:
A modified Ham's test is performed to measure the ability of compstatin analogs to inhibit complement-mediated lysis of red blood cells from patients with PNH in vitro. Complement is activated by acidified serum with added magnesium to lyse the PNH red cells. The incubation is performed for 90 minutes. The read out is flow cytometry for PNH red cells using standard markers. Heat inactivated serum is used as a control (produces no hemolysis). Acidified serum in the absence of added complement inhibitor produces maximum lysis. The experiment is performed with serial two-fold dilutions of compstatin analogs CA28, CA28-2, CA28-2CS, CA28-2CS-BD, CA28-2GS, CA28-2GS-BF, CA28-2HS, CA28-2HS-BF, CA28-2TS, CA28-2GS-BF, and CA28-3. The concentration of each compound required to fully block hemolysis in vitro is determined. Red blood cells are also stained for C3 fragment deposition using anti-C3 polyclonal antibodies that do not contain any bridge leading to agglutination (e.g., either Ab4214 or Ab14396, both commercially available FITC-conjugated Abcam, Cambridge, United Kingdom) in order to measure the ability of the compounds to inhibit deposition of C3 fragments on PNH red blood cells. Results are compared with those obtained with eculizumab using the same assays.
Example 9: Long-Acting Compstatin Analogs in Patients with PNHA cohort of subjects diagnosed with PNH is divided into 4 groups. Subjects in Groups 1 and 2 are treated with intravenous administration of CA28-2 or CA28-3, respectively, at a dose of between 5 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg, at time intervals between 1 and 2 weeks. Optionally, treatment is started at more frequent time intervals and then reduced in frequency for maintenance therapy. Subjects in Group 3 are treated with eculizumab according to the recommended dosing regimen. Group 4 serves as a control (no complement inhibitor therapy). Intravascular hemolysis (based on LDH measurement and/or (51)Cr labeling of RBCs), reticulocytosis (an indicator of anemia), hematocrit, hemoglobin concentration in the blood, opsonization of red blood cells (deposition of products of C3 activation, such as C3b, on red blood cells, which may be detected using flow cytometry), PNH symptoms, transfusion requirements, thromboembolic events, haemolysis-associated nitric oxide depletion, measures of pulmonary hypertension, quality of life, and survival are monitored over time. Results are compared between groups and with historical data from control PNH patients obtained in clinical trials of eculizumab. An improvement in persistent anemia (e.g., as evidenced by reduced reticulocytosis, reduced evidence of hemolysis, increased hematocrit, increased hemoglobin), improved quality of life, reduced PNH symptoms, reduced transfusion requirements, reduced thromboembolic events, reduced haemolysis-associated nitric oxide depletion, reduced measures of pulmonary hypertension increased quality of life, and/or increased survival, in subjects receiving CA28-2 (Group 1) or CA28-3 (Group 2), as compared with subjects in Group 4 is indicative of efficacy.
Example 10: Long-Acting Compstatin Analogs in Patients with PNHExample 9 is repeated with the modification that subjects are individuals with PNH who remain transfusion-dependent and/or continue to have a hemoglobin below a cutoff (such as 9.0 g/dL) despite treatment with eculizumab. Results are compared among groups.
Example 11: Long-Acting Compstatin Analogs in Patients with aHUSA cohort of subjects diagnosed with aHUS is divided into 4 groups. Subjects in groups 1 and 2 are treated with intravenous administration of CA28-2 or CA28-3, respectively, at a dose of between 5 mg/kg and 20 mg/kg, at time intervals between 1 and 2 weeks. Optionally, treatment is started at more frequent time intervals and then reduced in frequency for maintenance therapy. Subjects in Group 3 are treated with eculizumab according to the recommended dosing regimen. Intravascular hemolysis (based on LDH measurement), opsonization of red blood cells (deposition of products of C3 activation, such as C3b, on red blood cells), aHUS symptoms, renal function, need for plasma exchange or dialysis, quality of life, and survival are monitored over time. Results are compared between groups and with historical data from control aHUS patients obtained in clinical trials of eculizumab. Reduced evidence of hemolysis, improved quality of life, reduced aHUS symptoms, reduced need for plasma exchange or dialysis, increased quality of life, and/or increased survival, in subjects receiving CA28-2 or CA28-3, as compared with subjects in group 4 are indicative of efficacy.
Example 12: Examples 8-11 are repeated using CA28-2GS-BF, CA28-2HS, CA28-2HS-BF, CA28-2TS, and CA28-2GS-TS-BF.
Example 14: Examples 9-12 are repeated using CA28-2GS-BF, CA28-2HS, CA28-2HS-BF, CA28-2TS, and CA28-2GS-TS-BF administered daily by subcutaneous injection.
Example 14: Examples 8-11 are repeated using additional long-acting compstatin analogs.
Example 15: Examples 8-11 are repeated using cell-reactive compstatin analogs.
Example 16: Complement Activation Inhibiting Activity of a Long-Acting Compstatin AnalogCA28 and CA28-AEEAc-Lys were synthesized as described above. CA28-2TS-BF was synthesized using a reactive bifunctional PEG of the TS type in terms of the NHS carboxylate attachment chemistry, which was linked to two molecules of CA28-AEEAc-Lys via the primary amine of the lysine side chain. The complement activation inhibitory activity of CA28 and CA28-2TS-BF was assessed by measuring the effect of the compounds on complement activation via the classical pathway and via the alternative pathways using standard complement inhibition assays. The protocol for the classical pathway activation assay is described in Example 1. The protocol for alternative pathway activation also measures C3b deposition in an ELISA format and is described below. C3b deposition monitored using this method is generated through complement activated by the alternative pathway by lipopolysaccharide (LPS). Briefly, 96-well plates are coated with LPS. Compound being tested (referred to as “drug”) is added, followed by addition of plasma or serum as a source of complement, and incubated. This is followed by addition of anti-human C3 HRP-conjugated antibody. After an additional incubation, substrate is added and signal detected. Details of the protocol are as follows:
ELISA-based Assay for Alternative Complement Pathway Activation
Materials:
-
- Ninety six-well ELISA plate (Corning 3590)
- LPS from Salmonella typhosa—Sigma L7136 (40 ug/ml in PBS)
- BSA 1% in PBS—Calbiochem #126626 1/30 dilution
- Veronal Buffer+10 mM MgCl2+10 mM EGTA (VB-Mg EGTA)
- Human plasma (collected with Lepirudin at 5 ug/ml final concentration)
- Anti-human C3 HRP-conjugated Ab (Poli to C3-HRP Ab, Cappel 55237)
- Tween-20 Wash Buffer (0.05% in PBS)
- TMB (Peroxidase substrate)—1:1 mixture of BD 51-2607KC and 51-2606KC.
- 3M H2SO4
- Micro-plate Reader
-
- 1. Add 50 ul/well of LPS at 40 ug/ml (in PBS)
- 2. Incubate for 2 hours at room temp
- 3. Remove by shaking and tapping the plate.
- 4. Block by adding 200 ul of 1% BSA/PBS
- 5. Incubate for 1 h at room temp
- 6. Remove by shaking and tapping the plate
- 7. Add 50 ul VB-Mg EGTA to wells #2 to 12
- 8. Add 100 ul of starting drug dilution (2× in VB-Mg EGTA) to well 1.
- 9. Serially dilute (1:2) the drug from wells 1 to 10 as follow
- a. Take 50 ul of solution from the originating well
- b. Add this to the next well
- c. Mix by pipetting several times
- d. Repeat up to well #10
- Note: from well #10 remove 50 ul and discard.
- 10. Add 50 ul of 2× plasma dilution to wells 1 to 11
- 11. Incubate for 1 h
- 12. Wash twice with wash buffer
- 13. Add 50 ul of 1/1000 dilution of C3-HRP Ab in 1% BSA/PBS
- 14. Incubate for 1 h
- 15. Add 100 ul of TMB to all wells
- 16. Incubate for 30 min
- 17. Add 50 ul 3M H2SO4
- 18. Read the plate at 450 nm
-
- Weight 84 mg NaCl
- Add 4 ml of 5×VB
- Add 2 ml of EDTA 10×
- Add 2 ml MgCl 10×
- Adjust volume to 20 ml with H2O
- Adjust pH to 7.4
Results
This Example describes determination of pharmacokinetic parameters of long-acting compstatin analog CA28-2TS-BF following administration to Cynomolgus monkeys with a single intravenous (IV) injection, single subcutaneous administration, or with once daily subcutaneous administration for seven days. CA28-2TS-BF was synthesized using a reactive bifunctional PEG of the TS type in terms of the NHS carboxylate attachment chemistry, which was linked to two molecules of CA28-AEEAc-Lys via the primary amine of the lysine side chain.
Dosing and Sample Collection
CA28-2TS-BF was administered to Cynomolgous monkeys at time 0 via intravenous injection into the saphenous vein or via single subcutaneous injection or repeat subcutaneous injection (once daily, for seven days). Six non-naïve female Cynomolgus monkeys, age 2-5 years, ranging in weight from 2.6 to 3.9 kilograms, were used in this study (three per group). The animals were healthy at the start of the trial. The study was not blinded. Animals were supplied with water ad libitum and a commercial diet twice daily prior to initiation of the study. Food was supplied to the animals per facility SOP prior to the study. Animals were not fasted. Animals were dosed at 7 mg/kg via intravenous or subcutaneous administration at time 0 on the appropriate day(s). Dosing solution concentration was 3.5 mg/mL for IV administration and 25 mg/mL for subcutaneous administration. Dosing volume was 2 mL/kg for IV administration and 0.28 mL/kg for subcutaneous administration. A size 23G¾ gauge needle was used for subcutaneous administration. The compound was administered in 5% dextrose in water.
Blood specimens (˜0.5-1 mL) were collected from the femoral vein at the following timepoints: Day 1: Pre-dose, 5 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hour (h), 4 h, 8 h. Days 2-9: 0 min. Day 15: Final sample based on Day 1 dosing. Each blood sample was collected from the monkey's femoral vein via direct venipuncture and placed into a red top serum tube containing no anticoagulant, and kept at room temperature for at least 30 minutes. Blood samples were centrifuged at a temperature of 4° C. at 3000×g for 5 minutes. Samples were maintained chilled throughout processing. Serum samples were collected after centrifugation and placed into sample tubes. Samples were stored in a freezer set to maintain −60° C. to −80° C. Serum samples and leftover dosing solutions were shipped frozen on dry ice for analysis.
The site of each subcutaneous administration was observed to see how fast the injection volume was absorbed and also to see if the formulation left behind a lump or fully went away. The dose sites for the animals receiving subcutaneous injections were observed in the evening of each dosing day. The dose site did not appear to have a lump and was fully absorbed by that time based on visual inspection. All animals were observed twice daily and showed normal activity throughout the study. No compound-related abnormalities were noted in the animals throughout the study.
Sample Analysis. Plasma samples obtained as described above were analyzed by LC/MS/MS leveraging CID (collision induced degradation) similarly to the method described in Example 3.
Results.
Serum concentrations vs time for CA28-2TS-BF when administered IV or subcutaneously as described above are plotted in
A peak serum concentration of about 500 micrograms/mL was achieved by subcutaneous administration of CA28-2TS-BF once daily for 7 days. The terminal half-life of CA28-2TS-BF was approximately 8 days when administered either IV or by single subcutaneous injection. Raw data are provided in Tables 10(A) (IV administration) and 10(B) (subcutaneous administration) below. (In
As noted above, CA28-2TS-BF was synthesized using a reactive bifunctional PEG of the TS type, resulting in formation of a carbamate after reaction with the primary amine of lysine. CA28-2GS-BF was synthesized using a reactive bifunctional PEG of the GS type in terms of the NHS carboxylate attachment chemistry, resulting in formation of an amide after reaction with the primary amine of lysine. The compound also contains an ester linkage, which is absent in CA28-2TS-BF. It is notable that the terminal half-life of about 8 days achieved with CA28-2TS-BF in this experiment was considerably greater than that of CA28-2GS-BF, which was found to have a half-life of about 5 days in a similar experiment (see Example 8).
Example 18: Compstatin Analogs Inhibit C3 Deposition on Red Blood Cells of PNH Patients and Protects Against Complement-Mediated LysisA modified Ham's test was performed to assess the ability of compstatin analogs to protect PNH RBCs from complement-mediated lysis. RBCs from a patient with PNH were exposed to acidified human serum (as a source of complement components) and magnesium (Mg2+, needed for alternative pathway activation) in the absence of complement inhibitors or in the presence of varying amounts of compstatin analogs CA28 or CA28-2GS-BF. Exposure to heat inactivated human serum was used as a control representing no significant complement-mediated lysis as complement is inactivated by heat. Exposure to acidified human serum and magnesium (Mg2+) in the absence of complement inhibitors (pane labeled Mg2+) was used as a control representing maximum lysis.
Following incubation, cells were stained with antibodies to CD59 and C3d. CD59 level permitted the classification of the PNH RBCs as Type I, Type II, or Type III. Staining for C3d, a product of C3 activation and cleavage was used as a marker of C3 and C3 activation product deposition (loading). Flow cytometric analysis was performed to assess CD59 and C3d on RBC surfaces and to quantify the percentages of Type I, Type II, and Type III cells present in various samples.
Results of a dilution experiment demonstrating the effect of different concentrations of CA28 on C3 deposition and cell percentages are shown in
A similar experiment to that described in Example 18 was performed to further demonstrate the protective effect of compstatin analog CA28-2GS-BF and compare it with that of anti-C5 antibody Soliris. A modified Ham's assay as in Example 18 was performed using PNH RBCs incubated in the presence of activated complement either in the absence of complement inhibitor (left panel) or in the presence of Soliris (middle panel) or CA28-2GS-BF (50 ug/ml) (right panel). Flow cytometry was performed after antibody staining using antibodies against CD59 and C3d. Results are shown in
As can be seen, in the absence of inhibitors the great majority of cells lie in Q4 (Type I or Type II with low levels of C3 activation product deposition). Type III cells would have mainly been lysed, so their percentages (Q1 and Q3) are low. Q2 cells that accumulate C3 deposition products eventually lyse, so their number stays relatively low. In the presence of eculizumab, Type III cells are protected from lysis at least initially, but accumulate C3 activation products (e.g., C3d) as shown by the high percentage of Q1 cells as compared with the no inhibitor panel (36.79% vs 0.09%). The relative proportion of Q2+Q4 cells (Type I and II) is lower as a result of the increased survival of Type III cells. However, it is evident that significant deposition of C3 activation products (e.g., C3d) occurs on Type III cells, which may lead eventually to lysis or to clearance (in vivo). PNH RBCS treated with CA28-2GS-BF (right panel) exhibit essentially no deposition of C3d regardless of whether they are Type I, II, or III, in contrast to the results with eculizumab. The percentage of cells in Q1 and Q2 is negligible. There is a dramatic increase in the percentage of Type III cells (61.55%) as compared with results with no inhibitor or with eculizumab, indicating (together with the lack of C3d deposition) enhanced protection from lysis by CA28-2GS-BF.
Example 20: Phase 1 Clinical Trials of a Long-Acting Compstatin Analog in Healthy SubjectsTwo Phase 1, randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled clinical trials of a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties (one linked to each end of the linear PEG), each comprising a peptide having the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 28 extended at its C-terminus by a moiety comprising AEEAc-Lys for attachment of the PEG moiety were initiated to assess safety, tolerability, pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics: a single ascending dose (SAD) trial and a multiple ascending dose (MAD) trial. This compound is referred to for convenience as LACA-40 in Examples 20-26. In the single ascending dose trial, healthy subjects are randomized into one of six cohorts at doses ranging from 45 mg to 1440 mg (45, 90, 180, 360, 720, or 1440 mg) in 5% dextrose. LACA-40 is administered by subcutaneous injection on the first day of the trial, followed by either 29 or 43 days of monitoring depending on dosing level. Each cohort includes 4 subjects who receive the drug and 1 or 2 subjects who receive placebo. In the multiple ascending dose trial, LACA-40 is administered by subcutaneous injection to healthy subjects daily for 28 consecutive days followed by 56 days of monitoring after last dosing. Subjects participate in one of four cohorts at doses ranging from 30 mg to 270 mg/day (30, 90, 180, or 270 mg/day). Each cohort includes 4 subjects who receive the drug and 1 subject who receives placebo. Safety is assessed by intensive clinical monitoring. Serial blood sampling is performed for the determination of LACA-40 concentrations in serum. Blood samples are also obtained to determine relevant markers of complement activity (C3, CH50 and AP50). Additional relevant PD markers (intact C3, iC3b, C3a, C4a and C5a) are measured in latter cohorts. Prior to multiple dosing, subjects receive Neisseria meningitides, Streptococcus pneumoniae, and Haemophilus influenzae Type B (Hib) vaccinations.
Results
When a total of 24 healthy subjects had received single doses of LACA-40 at doses up to 1440 mg in the Phase 1 single ascending dose trial, and a total of 16 healthy subjects had received multiple doses of LACA-40 for 28 consecutive days at doses up to 270 mg/day in the multiple ascending dose trial, 11 healthy subjects had received either single or multiple administrations of a placebo in the trials, and analysis revealed that LACA-40 was well tolerated in both trials with no serious adverse events or treatment emergent adverse events leading to study drug discontinuation or severe adverse events reported. In addition, no safety signals of clinical relevance were observed on review of laboratory data, vital signs, physical examinations or electrocardiogram results from either trial.
The pharmacokinetics of LACA-40 were in line with expectations derived from preclinical data, with little inter-subject variability observed.
In the multiple ascending dose trial, it was observed that the plasma concentration of LACA-40 increased linearly with dose, reaching maximum concentration between day 14 and 28. Serum concentrations were close to steady state after 28 days of daily dosing.
In both trials, a dose-dependent increase in C3 was observed that is indicative of LACA-40 binding to C3.
In the single ascending dose study, a reduction in alternative pathway-mediated hemolytic activity (AP50) was seen following a single dose of 1440 mg LACA-40.
In the third cohort of the multiple ascending dose trial of LACA-40, at a dose level of 180 mg/day, reduction of ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis was observed as early as seven days after initiation of treatment, continued for the duration of treatment, and reached a maximum of more than 80% in two of the four subjects and of more than 60% in the other two subjects (
Percent inhibition of ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis was determined based on a standard assay for hemolysis of rabbit erythrocytes when complement is activated by the alternative pathway (AP). Rabbit erythrocytes are spontaneous activators of the human AP. The assay makes use of the fact that when rabbit erythrocytes are incubated in serum with the addition of EGTA to chelate Ca2+ (to inhibit complement activation by the classical and lectin pathways), the AP convertase is formed, resulting in the activation of C3 and subsequent lysis of the erythrocytes, which can be detected by detecting free hemoglobin by spectrophotometry. It is noted that this assay likely underestimates the actual percent inhibition of hemolysis because the negative control sample lacks serum, whereas serum is present in the samples from the subjects and contributes baseline absorbance in these samples.
It is worth noting that, in clinical trials of eculizumab in PNH patients, a complement inhibitor that binds to C5, 80% inhibition of ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis (using serum from PNH patients) was shown to be of considerable benefit in the treatment of PNH (Hillmen, P., et al., N Engl J Med 2004; 350:552-9). The present Example therefore confirms that pharmacologically relevant levels of complement inhibition were achieved at least at the 180 mg/day dose of LACA-40. The present Example further confirms that pharmacological doses of LACA-40 were safe and well tolerated, that LACA-40's pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic (PK/PD) profile supports daily SC administration, and that daily LACA-40 doses of 180 mg and 270 mg significantly reduced hemolytic activity as early as seven days after the start of dosing, and this inhibition was maintained through the dosing period.
In one aspect, PK data from these studies has been used to develop a PK/PD model, which may be used to aid dose selection in PNH patients or other patients to whom LACA-40 is administered.
The present disclosure contemplates that lower doses of LACA-40 may also be effective in PNH. For example, the ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis assay only measures lysis by MAC, reflecting intravascular hemolysis. LACA-40 (and certain other compounds described herein) protect cells from MAC and also from opsonization by C3 fragments, e.g., C3b, which is a cause of extravascular hemolysis and potential dysfunction that is not ameliorated by eculizumab. Therefore, without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, the present disclosure teaches that efficacy in treatment of PNH may be achieved in some embodiments even with doses that are lower than would be required to inhibit 80% of ex vivo serum-induced hemolysis, at least in part due to inhibition of extravascular hemolysis.
Thus, among other things, the present Example demonstrates that efficacious effects can be achieved with subcutaneous dosing (e.g., daily subcutaneous dosing for a relevant period of time, for example for at least one day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks or more) of a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties. The present Example specifically demonstrates efficacious effects achieved with a 180 mg/day daily dose, and specifically contemplates both higher and lower doses may well be desirable in appropriate circumstances. The present Example also specifically demonstrates efficacious effects achieved with a 270 mg/day daily dose, and specifically contemplates both higher and lower doses may well be desirable in appropriate circumstances.
Furthermore, in light of the particular demonstration of efficacious results achieved with provided dosing regimens for an LACA-40, the present Example, confirms the particular utility of long-acting compstatin analogs, and particularly of analogs comprising at least two compstatin analog moieties and/or of analogs comprising a PEG moiety with a molecular weight of approximately 40 kD (e.g., within the range of about 10 kD to about 50 kD, including specifically with a molecular weight of about 20 kD, 30 kD, 40 kD, etc), in such regimens.
Alternatively or additionally, the present Example demonstrates the particular utility of long-acting compstatin analogs having a total molecular weight no greater than about 50 kD in dosing regimens as described herein (see above).
Example 21: Phase Ib Clinical Trial of LACA-40 in Subjects with PNHA Phase Ib single and multiple ascending dose clinical trial of LACA-40 was initiated to assess the safety, tolerability, PK and PD of LACA-40 in conjunction with eculizumab (Soliris) in adult patients with PNH. In this clinical trial, subcutaneous doses of LACA-40 in 5% dextrose are administered to patients with PNH, all of whom are on concurrent eculizumab therapy. To participate in the trial, patients must be at least 18 years of age, weigh greater than 55 kg, have been on treatment with eculizumab for at least 3 months, have a hemoglobin <10 g/dL at screening or have received at least one transfusion within 12 months prior to screening, have a platelet count of >30,000/mm3, and an absolute neutrophil count >500 cells/μL. Prior to dosing, all subjects commence prophylactic oral antibiotics and receive vaccination against Neisseria meningitides. Subjects in cohorts 3 and 4 are also vaccinated against Streptococcus pneumoniae and Haemophilus influenzae Type B (Hib).
Each of the first two cohorts is composed of two patients who receive a single dose of LACA-40 followed by at least 28 days of monitoring. If the single dose is concluded to be well tolerated following this period of monitoring, the patient then receives a regimen of daily subcutaneous doses of LACA-40 for an additional 28 consecutive days. The third and fourth cohorts are composed of two and six patients, respectively, who receive daily subcutaneous doses of LACA-40 for 28 consecutive days. The doses studied are as follows:
Cohort 1: Single SC dose of 25 mg LACA-40 and repeated SC doses of 5 mg/day
Cohort 2: Single SC dose of 50 mg LACA-40 and repeated SC doses of 30 mg/day
Cohort 3: Repeated SC doses of 180 mg/day LACA-40
Cohort 4: Repeated SC doses of 270 mg/day LACA-40
Safety was assessed through clinical monitoring and all medication administered by qualified nurses at the subjects' home or in the clinic. Serial serum blood samples were collected for the determination of LACA-40 concentrations. Pharmacodynamic (PD) activity and signals of efficacy were assessed including lactate dehydrogenase (LDH), hemoglobin levels, RBC PNH clone distribution, transfusion requirements, complement levels, C3 fragment deposition on RBCs and reticulocytes.
Results
When the first three cohorts had completed their dosing, analysis revealed that LACA-40 had been well tolerated with one severe adverse event reported, which was considered unlikely to be related to administration of LACA-40.
When two subjects had completed dosing with a pharmacologically active dose of 180 mg, both had shown clinical improvement and relevant changes in blood biomarkers. Hemoglobin levels increased in both subjects during the first two weeks of treatment and remained stable until the end of treatment on day 28. LDH was stable at ˜1.5×ULN in one subject and was reduced from 1.5×ULN to within the normal range in the other subject. The ratio of PNH Type III (CD59 Negative) RBCs approximately doubled in both subjects, increasing from 22.3% to 52% and 32.5% to 62.5% from day 1 to day 29, respectively. RBC transfusion requirements also reduced during the dosing period compared to recent historical data. No treatment-related serious adverse events had been reported and there had been no treatment related adverse events leading to discontinuation. Dosing proceeded to cohort 4 (270 mg daily).
When three subjects had completed 28 days of dosing with SC LACA-40 270 mg/day, all three subjects showed similar clinical improvement associated with relevant changes in blood biomarkers. Hb levels increased, LDH levels decreased, reticulocytes decreased, and the percentage of PNH Type III RBCs increased. Based on assessment of the risk/benefit profile, a protocol amendment to allow uninterrupted continued dosing in the 270 mg/day cohort for an additional 56 days for a total of 84 days treatment in addition to ongoing eculizumab therapy was approved. None of the three subjects had required a RBC transfusion since starting treatment with LACA-40.
These data confirm that pharmacological doses of LACA-40 are safe and well tolerated in subjects with PNH and daily SC dosing with LACA-40 will provide sustained inhibition of hemolytic activity in PNH patients. These data further confirm that inhibition of C3 provides clinical benefit to subjects with PNH who have a suboptimal response to anti-05 treatment (e.g., eculizumab treatment).
The present disclosure thus contemplates subcutaneous dosing (e.g., daily subcutaneous dosing for a relevant period of time, for example for at least one day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks or more, e.g., continuing for months or years) of a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties, whether as a sole treatment or in combination with other therapy (e.g., eculizumab therapy).
Example 22: Phase 1b Clinical Trial of LACA-40 in PNH PatientsA Phase 1b open-label clinical trial of LACA-40 in treatment-naïve patients with PNH is performed to assess the safety, PK, PD and preliminary efficacy of repeated doses of LACA-40. Male and female patients diagnosed with hemolytic PNH are eligible. Subjects are required to have had a blood transfusion in the prior 12 months and lactate dehydrogenase (LDH) levels >2 times the upper limit of normal (ULN). Prior to dosing, subjects are vaccinated against Neisseria meningitides, Streptococcus pneumoniae and Haemophilus influenzae Type B (Hib) and commence prophylactic oral antibiotics. Doses of LACA-40 in 5% dextrose are administered by subcutaneous injection for at least 28 days and up to 84 consecutive days. (Treatment-naïve in this context refers to patients who have not previously been treated with a complement inhibitor.) Two cohorts of 3 patients each are enrolled. Doses of 180 mg/day for the first cohort and 270 mg/day for the second cohort are tested. The doses are administered in a volume of 1.8 ml either as a single daily injection or as 2 daily injections of 0.9 ml. The primary efficacy endpoint for the trial is measurement of LDH level as an indicator of intravascular hemolysis. Other relevant markers of efficacy measured include hemoglobin, RBC PNH clone distribution, total hemolytic complement activity (CH50), alternative pathway-mediated hemolytic activity (AP50), transfusion requirements, reticulocyte count, and deposition of C3 fragments on blood cells (as an indicator of potential for extravascular hemolysis). C3 fragments deposition measurement is performed by flow cytometry, e.g., as described above. An antibody that cross reacts with C3b, C3c, and C3d is used.
Results
Cohort 1
After completion of cohort 1, two subjects had received doses of 180 mg of LACA-40 for 28 days and one subject withdrew consent due a reaction after the first dose. Marked reduction in LDH levels, from 2078 U/L to 1082 U/L and 1325 U/L to 709 U/L (normal 100-250 U/L) from day 1 to day 29, respectively, were observed in both subjects who received 28 days of treatment. Neither subject achieved the criteria for continuation into part 2.
Screening hemoglobin (Hb) levels were below 80 g/L and both subjects received transfusions in the 3 weeks prior to dosing with LACA-40. Hb levels were maintained above 80 g/L in both subjects and neither required a transfusion during the dosing period. Both subjects received transfusions within about 4 weeks of stopping treatment with LACA-40.
The fraction of PNH type III (CD59 Negative) RBCs approximately tripled in both subjects, increasing from 5.1% and 13.4% on day 1 to 17.4% and 37.6% on day 29, respectively.
In both subjects who completed 28 days of dosing, LACA-40 appeared to be safe and well tolerated. The third subject developed nausea, vomiting and a rash 5-6 hours after receiving the 1st dose of LACA-40. This event was reported as a serious adverse event possibly related to LACA-40. To support continuation in the study, this reaction was further investigated with in-vitro cell reactivity testing and a skin prick test with LACA-40 and PEG 40 kD. Testing concluded that there was no evidence of T-cell activation and the skin test was negative. Therefore it was considered medically safe for the subject to re-enter the study. The subject, however, withdrew consent for personal reasons.
Cohort 2
After two subjects treated with 270 mg/day LACA-40 administered by SC injection had completed the 28-day treatment period both subjects demonstrated notable reductions in LDH levels to within 2× the upper limit of normal and increases in the percent of PNH Type III RBCs. Subjects in this cohort were eligible to continue receiving daily LACA-40 following review of all data if a clinical benefit was observed and if requested by the investigator. Both subjects treated met the pre-determined criteria to continue dosing to 84 days. One subject left the study for personal reasons. The other subject continued dosing and continued to show a sustained reduction in LDH when tested on day 57. Dosing of the next subject in cohort 2 is pending.
In summary, LACA-40 administered daily was safe and well tolerated and led to a sustained suppression of hemolysis in patients with PNH who were not receiving eculizumab.
Additionally, the present disclosure specifically provides certain insights relating particularly to certain desirable characteristics of devices (e.g., needle gauge, needle bore diameter and/or wall thickness, etc) particularly useful for delivery of certain LACA compositions, including specifically certain LACA-40 compositions as described herein (see above).
Example 23: Preclinical Studies of Intravitreal LACA-40Preclinical studies in monkeys were performed to assess the safety and pharmacology of LACA-40 when injected intravitreally. Intravitreally administered LACA-40 in cynomolgus monkeys is distributed into the blood stream then further distributed and/or slowly eliminated from the body. The results of toxicokinetic analyses of vitreal and serum concentrations of LACA-40 after repeated intravitreal injections over the course of nine months at doses up to 24.8 mg/eye in 5% dextrose in volumes of either 50 or 100 μL/eye indicated that there was little intraocular or serum accumulation of the drug over multiple injections. In addition, a full toxicological review, including ophthalmological assessment by indirect and slit lamp, spectral domain optical coherence tomography, electroretinography, and tonometry and histopathological examinations of both eyes and of approximately 50 additional tissues from each monkey revealed no evidence of LACA-40-mediated changes at any of the doses tested.
Assessment of the pharmacokinetic profile of a single intravitreal dose of LACA-40 (10 mg/eye in both eyes) in monkeys revealed a vitreal half-life of approximately 3.2 days. After intravitreal injection, serum concentrations of LACA-40 increased until post-dose Day 7 then decreased with an apparent half-life of 10.4 days.
Among other things, the present disclosure contemplates dosing regimens for a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties in which timing of individual doses is specifically selected to ensure a desired PK pattern in light of the half life for the LACA-40, as described herein.
Example 24: Phase 1b Single Ascending Dose Clinical Trial of LACA-40 in Subjects with AMDA Phase 1 open label, single ascending dose clinical trial of LACA-40 in patients with wet AMD and receiving anti-VEGF therapy (specifically, Lucentis®, Eylea® or Avastin®), was initiated to assess safety, tolerability and PK of LACA-40. In this trial, patients receive a single dose of LACA-40 by intravitreal injection followed by 113 days of monitoring. It was originally planned to enroll nine patients in the trial, in three cohorts of three patients each, at doses of 5 mg, 10 mg and 20 mg of LACA-40 in 5% dextrose in a volume of 100 microliters. After enrollment of all three cohorts was completed, the third cohort was expanded from three patients to a total of 12 patients. LACA-40 was well tolerated in the initial nine patients, and no serious adverse events were reported.
The present disclosure provides dosing regimens in accordance with which a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties is administered by intravitreal injection. In some embodiments, a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties is administered as sole therapy; in some embodiments, it is administered in combination with another therapy (e.g., anti-VEGF therapy), so that the patient is simultaneously exposed to both.
The present Example specifically describes and supports dosing regimens under which a long-acting compstatin analog comprising a 40 kD linear PEG and two compstatin analog moieties is administered by intravitreal injection to subjects who are receiving VEGF therapy. In some embodiments, subjects treated with both anti-VEGF therapy and therapy with a LACA-40 receive doses of an anti-VEGF agent at intervals longer that those utilized for otherwise comparable subjects not receiving therapy with the LACA-40. A variety of anti-VEGF agents have been developed (reviewed, for example, in Lanzetta Br J Opthamol 97:1497, 2013). For example, reported dosing regimens for certain anti-VEGF agents include intravitreal injections of ranibizumab 0.5 mg or bevacizumab 1.25 mg administered every 4 weeks (q4) or PRN; in some embodiments, such regimens serve as appropriate reference regimens with respect to which anti-VEGF combination therapy regimens as described herein are assessed
In light of the disclosure provided herein, including in this Example, those skilled in the art would appreciate that provided are certain combination therapy regimens, for example, in accordance with which each of a LACA-40 and an anti-VEGF agent is administered intravitreally; in some embodiments, the LACA-40 and anti-VEGF may be administered together in a single injection for certain (though not necessarily all) doses. In some embodiments, fewer doses of the anti-VEGF doses are administered in a selected period of time than are administered absent administration of the LACA-40
Example 25: Phase 2 Single Ascending Dose Clinical Trial of LACA-40 in Subjects with Geographic AtrophyA randomized, single-masked, sham-controlled clinical trial of LACA-40 in patients with GA is conducted. Approximately 240 patients are enrolled in the trial. Patients in the trial have a diagnosis of GA of the macula secondary to age-related macular degeneration, confirmed within 14 days prior to randomization by the central reading center using Fundus Autofluorescence images, as well as the following criteria: Total GA area must be ≥2.5 mm2 and ≤17.5 mm2 (1 and 7 disk areas [DA] respectively), determined by screening images of FAF.
Patients are randomized in a 2:2:1:1 manner to receive LACA-40 monthly, LACA-40 every other month, sham injection monthly or sham injection every other month. Patients in the LACA-40 arms receive a dose of 15 mg of LACA-40, injected into the vitreous humor in a 0.1 cc volume, monthly or every other month for 12 months followed by six months of monitoring after the end of treatment. In the sham-injection cohorts, patients receive a simulated injection. The safety, tolerability, PK, and evidence of activity of multiple intravitreal injections of LACA-40 in patients with GA in at least one eye are assessed. The primary efficacy endpoint is change in GA lesion size from baseline to month 12. The trial is designed to detect a reduction of at least 30% in lesion size growth between the LACA-40 arms and the sham-controlled arms from baseline to month 12. The primary safety endpoint is the number and severity of local and systemic treatment emergent adverse events
Example 26: Phase 2 Single Ascending Dose Clinical Trial of LACA-40 in Subjects with Intermediate AMDA randomized, single-masked, sham-controlled clinical trial of LACA-40 in patients with intermediate AMD is conducted. Patients in the trial have a diagnosis of intermediate age-related macular degeneration. An aim of the trial is to assess whether LACA-40 can forestall the progression from intermediate AMD to GA or wet AMD
Patients are randomized in a 2:2:1:1 manner to receive LACA-40 monthly, LACA-40 every other month, sham injection monthly or sham injection every other month. Patients in the LACA-40 arms receive a dose of 15 mg of LACA-40, injected into the vitreous humor in a 0.1 cc volume, monthly or every other month for at least 12 months followed by six months of monitoring after the end of treatment. In the sham-injection cohorts, patients receive a simulated injection. The safety, tolerability and evidence of activity of multiple intravitreal injections of LACA-40 in patients with intermediate AMD in at least one eye are assessed. Efficacy endpoints include the incidence of progression from intermediate AMD to GA and/or wet AMD, with a decreased incidence in patients treated with LACA-40 relative to patients who receive sham injections representing evidence of efficacy, and the change in the number and/or volume of high risk drusen and total drusen number and/or volume. A greater reduction in number, volume, and/or growth rate of drusen in patients treated with LACA-40 relative to patients who receive sham injections represents evidence of efficacy, The primary safety endpoint is the number and severity of local and systemic treatment emergent adverse events.
Example 27: Preclinical Studies of Inhaled CA28Inhalation studies of single dose or repeated dosing were conducted in dog and cynomolgus monkey. There were no drug-related findings in any animals at the highest inhaled doses tested. These doses were 25 mg/kg/d in a 7 day repeated dose study in the dog, 80 mg/kg in a single dose study in the monkey, and 30 mg/kg/day in a 14 day repeated dose in the monkey.
An Ascaris suum challenge model was utilized to investigate the pharmacological effect of CA28 in vivo in cynomolgus monkeys as compared to corticosteroids. Doses of 20 mg/day or 15 mg/kg/d (for 14 consecutive days) of nebulized CA28 had a pharmacological effect in controlling the levels of inflammatory cytokines in the lungs (as measured in broncheoalveolar lavage fluid) after allergen challenge, both during the 14 day treatment period and 28 days after cessation of treatment, after washout of the drug.
Example 28: Phase 1 Single and Multiple Ascending Dose Clinical Trial of Inhaled CA28 in Healthy SubjectsA Phase 1 open-label, randomized, placebo-controlled, single and multiple ascending dose clinical trial of daily nebulized formulation of a compstatin analog (CA28) was conducted to assess safety, tolerability and PK of single and multiple inhaled doses of the drug in healthy volunteers. CA28 solution in (2% glycerol) or placebo (2% glycerol) was administered via a PARI LC Sprint® jet nebulizer with interrupter, driven by a PARI TurboBOY® S compressor. In the single ascending dose part of the trial, 16 subjects were enrolled in four cohorts of four subjects each. These subjects were administered a single dose of CA28 at doses ranging from 20 mg to 350 mg (20, 60, 150 or 350 mg) and monitored for 14 days after treatment. In this part of the trial, CA-28 was well tolerated and no serious adverse events were reported.
Four subjects were enrolled in the first cohort of the multiple ascending dose part of the trial. These subjects were to receive 14 consecutive days of treatment with a 60 mg/day dose of the drug. However, following nine days of treatment with the 60 mg/day dose, one subject developed signs and symptoms consistent with a potential bacterial infection that was considered to be possibly related to the pharmacology of the drug. The trial was paused and subsequently resumed, with subjects receiving 30 mg/day. Another subject developed signs and symptoms consistent with a potential bacterial infection that was considered to be possibly related to the pharmacology of the drug after 10 days of treatment at the 30 mg/day dose. The trial was then terminated.
Both subjects responded within hours to first-line antibiotic treatment, which is indicative of bacterial pathogenesis. In this trial, subjects were vaccinated against Neisseria meningitides and closely monitored for signs of infections. While the bacterial cultures were all negative, it is believed that Haemophilus influenzae or Streptococcus pneumoniae might have been implicated in the episodes of fever that were observed because C3 deficient individuals are known to be at increased risk of infection with Neisseria meningitidis, Haemophilus influenzae and Streptococcus pneumoniae. Vaccines against these three pathogens are available, and it is believed that the risk of infection can be addressed by vaccination, potentially with addition of prophylactic antibiotics (e.g., penicillin V).
Example 29: Combination Therapy with LACA and ds siRNAExamples 20, 21, and 22 are repeated with additional cohorts that are treated: (i) using a dose and dosing volume of LACA-40 that are reduced by a factor of 5 in each instance; (ii) using a dose and dosing volume of LACA-40 that are reduced by a factor of 10 in each instance; (iii) using weekly administration of LACA-40 instead of daily administration. The subjects are also treated with a double-stranded siRNA that inhibits C3 expression administered subcutaneously each week or each month.
Example 30: Combination Therapy with LACA and ss siRNA or ASOExample 29 is repeated except that the subjects are treated with a single-stranded siRNA that inhibits C3 expression or an ASO that inhibits C3 expression instead of a double-stranded siRNA.
Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. The scope of the present invention is not intended to be limited to the above Description, but rather is as set forth in the appended claims. It will be appreciated that the invention is in no way dependent upon particular results achieved in any specific example or with any specific embodiment. Articles such as “a”, “an” and “the” may mean one or more than one unless indicated to the contrary or otherwise evident from the context. Claims or descriptions that include “or” between one or more members of a group are considered satisfied if one, more than one, or all of the group members are present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process unless indicated to the contrary or otherwise evident from the context. The invention includes embodiments in which exactly one member of the group is present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process. For example, and without limitation, it is understood that where claims or description indicate that a residue at a particular position may be selected from a particular group of amino acids or amino acid analogs, the invention includes individual embodiments in which the residue at that position is any of the listed amino acids or amino acid analogs. The invention also includes embodiments in which more than one, or all of the group members are present in, employed in, or otherwise relevant to a given product or process. Furthermore, it is to be understood that the invention encompasses all variations, combinations, and permutations in which one or more limitations, elements, clauses, descriptive terms, etc., from one or more of the listed claims or from the description above is introduced into another claim. For example, any claim that is dependent on another claim can be modified to include one or more elements, limitations, clauses, or descriptive terms, found in any other claim that is dependent on the same base claim. Furthermore, where the claims recite a composition, it is to be understood that methods of administering the composition according to any of the methods disclosed herein, and methods of using the composition for any of the purposes disclosed herein are included within the scope of the invention, and methods of making the composition according to any of the methods of making disclosed herein are included within the scope of the invention, unless otherwise indicated or unless it would be evident to one of ordinary skill in the art that a contradiction or inconsistency would arise. Methods of treating a subject can include a step of providing a subject in need of such treatment (e.g., a subject who has had, or is at increased risk of having, a disease), a step of diagnosing a subject as having a disease and/or a step of selecting a subject for treatment with a cell-reactive compstatin analog. Where elements are presented as lists, it is to be understood that each subgroup of the elements is also disclosed, and any element(s) can be removed from the group. For purposes of conciseness only some of these embodiments have been specifically recited herein, but the invention includes all such embodiments. It should also be understood that, in general, where the invention, or aspects of the invention, is/are referred to as comprising particular elements, features, etc., certain embodiments of the invention or aspects of the invention consist, or consist essentially of, such elements, features, etc. Discussion of various diseases, disorders, and conditions under various headings herein is for convenience and is not intended to limit the invention.
Where ranges are given, endpoints are included. Furthermore, it is to be understood that unless otherwise indicated or otherwise evident from the context and understanding of one of ordinary skill in the art, values that are expressed as ranges can assume any specific value or subrange within the stated ranges in different embodiments of the invention, to the tenth of the unit of the lower limit of the range, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Any particular embodiment, aspect, element, feature, etc., of the present invention may be explicitly excluded from the claims even if such exclusion is not set forth explicitly herein. For example, any compstatin analog, functional group, linking portion, clearance-reducing moiety, disease, or indication can be explicitly excluded.
Claims
1. A method of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject one or both of:
- (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3, and
- (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety,
- so that the subject is exposed to both,
- wherein each of the INAA and the compstatin analog is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 days.
2. A method of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the INAA is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 95%, optionally between 50% and 95%, as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both.
3. A method of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the compstatin analog is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 95%, optionally between 50% and 95%, as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both.
4. A method of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, wherein the compstatin analog is administered in an amount of less than about 300 mg/day on average.
5. (canceled)
6. A method of inhibiting complement activation in a subject comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog that comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) having at least two compstatin analog moieties attached thereto, optionally wherein: (i) the compstatin analog is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 90% as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both; (ii) the INAA is administered in an amount effective to inhibit serum complement activity by an average of no more than 90% as measured using an alternative pathway assay, a classical pathway assay, or both; (iii) the INAA and the compstatin analog are both administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 days; or (iv) any combination of (i), (ii), and (iii).
7. A method of treating a subject in need of treatment of a complement-mediated disorder comprising administering to the subject (a) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3; and (b) a compstatin analog, as set forth in claim 1.
8. (canceled)
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA and the compstatin analog are both administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 7 days.
10.-14. (canceled)
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA is administered in an amount effective to reduce the steady state plasma level of C3 by between 50% and 95%.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA is administered in an amount effective to inhibit plasma or plasma complement activity by between 50% and 95% as measured using a classical pathway hemolysis assay, an alternative pathway hemolysis assay, or both.
17.-26. (canceled)
27. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA comprises a double-stranded short interfering RNA (siRNA).
28.-31. (canceled)
32. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA comprises a double-stranded nucleic acid having one or two 3′ overhangs, optionally wherein each overhang is independently between 1 and 4 bases long.
33. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA comprises a double-stranded nucleic acid comprising a double-stranded region between 15 and 30 base pairs long, optionally 17-25, 17-23, 17-21, 23-27, 19-21, 21-23, or 23-25 base pairs long.
34.-46. (canceled)
47. The method of claim 1, wherein the compstatin analog comprises a linear polymer having a compstatin analog moiety attached to each end.
48. The method of claim 1, wherein each compstatin analog moiety comprises a cyclic peptide that comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in any of SEQ ID NOs: 3-36, 37, 37A, 38A, 39A, 40A, or 41A.
49.-52. (canceled)
53. The method of claim 1, wherein the compstatin analog comprises one or more compstatin analog moiet(ies) that comprise a cyclic peptide having a 1-methylTrp at a position corresponding to position 4 of SEQ ID NO:8.
54. The method of claim 1, wherein the compstatin analog comprises one or more compstatin analog moiet(ies) that comprise a cyclic peptide having an N-methylGly at a position corresponding to position 8 of SEQ ID NO:8.
55. The method of claim 1, wherein the compstatin analog comprises one or more clearance-reducing moieties attached to one or more compstatin analog moieties, wherein: each compstatin analog moiety comprises a cyclic peptide having an amino acid sequence as set forth in any of SEQ ID NOs:3-36, extended by one or more terminal amino acids at the N-terminus, C-terminus, or both, wherein one or more of the amino acids has a side chain comprising a primary or secondary amine and is separated from the cyclic peptide by a rigid or flexible spacer optionally comprising an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety; and each clearance-reducing moiety optionally comprises a polyethylene glycol (PEG), wherein each clearance-reducing moiety is covalently attached via a linking moiety to one or more compstatin analog moieties, and wherein the linking moiety comprises an unsaturated alkyl moiety, a moiety comprising a nonaromatic cyclic ring system, an aromatic moiety, an ether moiety, an amide moiety, an ester moiety, a carbonyl moiety, an imine moiety, a thioether moiety, and/or an amino acid residue.
56. The method of claim 1, wherein the compstatin analog comprises a clearance-reducing moiety attached to two compstatin analog moieties and wherein: (a) each compstatin analog moiety comprises a cyclic peptide extended by one or more amino acids at the N-terminus, C-terminus, or both, wherein the one or more amino acids is separated from the cyclic portion of the peptide by a rigid or flexible spacer, optionally wherein the spacer comprises an oligo(ethylene glycol) moiety; and (b) the clearance reducing moiety comprises a linear polymer, wherein each end of the linear polymer is linked to one of the compstatin analog moieties by way of a linker moiety comprising a carbonyl group.
57.-63. (canceled)
64. The method of claim 1, wherein the compstatin analog and the INAA are administered subcutaneously.
65.-71. (canceled)
72. The method of claim 1, wherein the subject has a complement-mediated disorder.
73.-87. (canceled)
88. The method of claim 1, wherein the step of administering comprises administering the INAA to a subject who is receiving the compstatin analog.
89. The method of claim 1, wherein the step of administering comprises administering the compstatin analog to a subject who is receiving the INAA.
90. The method of claim 1, wherein the step of administering comprises administering both the compstatin analog and the INAA.
91. (canceled)
92. The method of claim 1, wherein each of the INAA and the compstatin analog is administered according to a dosing regimen with a dosing interval of at least 2 weeks.
93. The method of claim 1, wherein the INAA is conjugated to a ligand.
94. The method of claim 93, wherein the ligand is N-acetylgalactosamine (GalNAc).
95. A combination comprising: (i) a compstatin analog, wherein the compstatin analog comprises a clearance reducing moiety (CRM) and at least one compstatin analog moiety, and (ii) an inhibitory nucleic acid agent (INAA) that inhibits expression of C3.
Type: Application
Filed: Apr 12, 2022
Publication Date: Jan 12, 2023
Applicants: Apellis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. (Waltham, MA), Apellis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. (Waltham, MA)
Inventor: Cedric Francois (Prospect, KY)
Application Number: 17/719,074
